R-90-1544 - 1/10/1991SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
STATION . NUMBER.. THREE -
ROUND ROCK FIRE DEPARTMENT
CITY OF ROUND ROCK '
15 OCTOBER, 1990
Project No. 03 -8903
As Prepared By:
CID LSD I.T Q g Arcs �ec�s
108 East Fannin Round Rock.Texas 78664 (512) 256 -9690
ADDENDUM NUMBER ONE
5 November, 1990
To the Drawings and Specifications (Dated 15 October, 1990) for The Fire Station No. 3, Round
Rock, Texas for the City of Round Rock. The project title is as follows:
STATION NUMBER THREE
ROUND ROCK FIRE DEPARTMENT
CITY OF ROUND ROCK
As Drawn by OPUS 3, Architects, Round Rock, Texas.
Architects Project Number. 03 -8903
Addendum Date: 5 November, 1990
NOTICE TO BIDDERS
Addendum Nunber clue
This Addendum shall be considered part of the Contract Documents fa the above mentioned project as though k had been
Issued a1 the same ens and Incorporated Integrally therewith lame preAslane of the following supplementary data direr from
those of the original Cortr&U Dccurnert% this Adfderdun shall govern end take precedence.
a Elders ere hereby nc3ied that they shall male ery necessary adjustments h the eslirtmate do eiooun of the Addendum.
It will be construed that each bidder's proposal b submitted lath full knowledge d all modifications end supplemental data
speckled therein Please staple In the back d you specifications.
Reference is made to the specifications and plans as follows:
SPECIFICATIONS
item No. SP -1: Reference to the Specifications, Section 00020 - Advertisement for Bids.
Sections:
1. The bid date for the Round Rock Fire Station shall be changed to Z00pm on the
15th of November, 1990.
ARCHITECTURAL & STRUCTURAL
ITEM 1:
ADDENDUM NUMBER THREE
26 November, 1990
STATION NUMBER THREE
ROUND ROCK FIRE DEPARTMENT
CITY OF ROUND ROCK
As Drawn by OPUS 3, Architects, Round Rock, Texas.
Architects Project Number. 03 -8903
Addendum Date: 26 November, 1990
NOTICE TO BIDDERS
Reference is made to the specifications and plans as follows:
Sheet C3; Site utility plan 01 /C3; The new water supply tap
shall be a 4" line. The 3 x 3 x 2 1/2 tee at the meter and valve
boxes shall change to a 4 x 4 x 2 tee for a 2" service line to
meters.
ITEM 2: Sheet C4; Concrete paving detail 04 /SA; Add reinforcing to
the concrete paving section of #4 at 12' 0.C.E.W.
ITEM 3: Specifications Section 05120; Paragraph 2.03.A; Change the
paragraph to read: Clean and prepare surfaces of all Rust,
scale, grease and foreign matter in accordance with USPC -
SP2, hand tool deaning and SSPC -SPI, solvent leaning.
Addendum Number One
To the Drawings and Specifications (Dated 15 October, 1990) for The Fire Station No. 3, Round
Rock, Texas for the City of Round Rock. The project title is as follows:
A This Addendum shall be mredaad part of the Contras Documents fa the above rnamo ed project as thought had been
Issued et the same tone end Imo fporated integrally therewith. Where p,ovnic s of the following supplementary data differ from
apes d the orgnel Contact Documents, this Addendum shell govern end take precedence.
B Bidders are hereby retried that they shall make any necessary add in the estimate on account of this Addendum.
It will be construed that each bidder's proposal is sub ndted with full Iatoaledge or all rnodikations and supplemental data
spelled therein. Please stage in the beds d yaur spedicadors.
A
t
ADDENDUM NUMBER THREE
ROUND ROCK FIRE STATION NO. 3
NOVEMBER 26, 1990
ITEM 4: Specifications Section 05500; (Same as above).
ITEM 5: Specifications Section 02202; Paragraph 1.01.B; Delete
entirely.
ITEM 6: Specifications Section 02223; Paragraph 3.06.B.1; Add " of
Astm D-698 at + 2% Optimum moisture.
ITEM 7: Specifications Section 02223; Paragraph 3.06.B.2; Add " of
Astm D-698 at + 2% Optimum moisture.
ITEM 8: Add sheet L -1 to drawings (See attachment #1)
ITEM 9: Specifications Section 08362; Paragraph 2.01.A1; Change to
read series 424, 24 gauge, non insulated.
ITEM 10: Specifications Section 09311; Paragraph 2.02; Add " C.
shower floor tile: 2 x 2 unglazed " add " D. shower wall &
ceiling tile: 4 x 4 glazed "
ITEM 11: Sheet A -2 note revised sheet indicating masonry expansion
joints. (See attachment #2)
MECHANICAL & ELECTRICAL
ITEM 1:
Sheet E2 revise riser diagram (See attachment #3) so that
panel "A" has 400A MLO in lieu of 400A MCB and provide
400A/3P/3F (300A)/WP safety SW. an exterior of building for
main disconnecting means, per city of Round Rock
requirements.
ITEM 2: Provide concrete bases for lighting in parting lot.
Addendum Number One
SPECIFICATIONS
ADDENDUM NUMBER TWO
12 November, 1990
To the Drawings and Specifications (Dated 15 October, 1990) for The Fire Station No. 3, Round
Rock, Texas for the City of Round Rock. The project the is as follows:
STATION NUMBER THREE
ROUND ROCK FIRE DEPARTMENT
CITY OF ROUND ROCK
As Drawn by OPUS 3, Architects, Round Rock, Texas.
Architects Project Number. 03 -8903
Addendum Date: 12 November, 1990
NOTICE TO BIDDERS
A lids Addendum man be considered pad of the Conrad Documents for the above mentioned protect as though a had been
named at the same time and Incorporated Integrally drerewah. Where provisions d the following supplementary data differ from
these of the original Conrad Documents, this Addendum shall govern end tel% precedence.
B. Bidders are hereby ncMad that they shell make any rteceesary edummerAa In their estimate on account d this Addendum.
It w# be construed dud each bidder's proposal Is erb died wah full knowledge of ell nadaicatkns and supplemental dela
spocrisd therein. Please staple In the beds d your spedkatiors.
Reference is made to the specifications and plans as follows:
Item No. SP -1: Reference to the Specifications, Section 00020 - Advertisement for Bids, and
Addendum Number One.
Sections:
Addendum /Amber One
1. The bid date for the Round Rock Fire Station shall be changed to 2:00pm on the
29th of November, 1990.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
FOR
ROUND ROCK FIRE STATION
ANNEX
SECTION 00020 - ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS 1 page
SECTION 00100 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 3 pages
SECTION 00300 - BID FORM 5 pages
SECTION 00500 - OWNER - CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT FORM 3 pages
SECTION 00600 - BONDS AND CERTIFICATES 1 page
SECTION 00610 - BID BOND FORM 1 page
SECTION 00620 - PERFORMANCE AND LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND FORMS 1 page
SECTION 00630 - SAMPLE FORMS AND CERTIFICATES 1 page
SECTION 00700 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 21 pages
SECTION 00800 - SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS 5 pages
SECTION 00900 - INDEX TO DRAWINGS 1 page
SECTION 01010 - SUMMARY OF WORK 4 pages
SECTION 01020 - ALLOWANCES 1 page
SECTION 01070 - CUTTING AND PATCHING 1 page
SECTION 01100 - ALTERNATIVES 1 page
SECTION 01200 - MEETINGS 2 pages
SECTION 01311 - SCHEDULES AND REPORTS 1 page
SECTION 01312 - WARRANTY OF WORK AFTER FINAL PAYMENT 1 page
SECTION 01313 - CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE 1 page
SECTION 01340 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES 2 pages
SECTION 01370 - SCHEDULE OF VALUES 1 page
SECTION 01400 - TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 1 page
SECTION 01510 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES 1 page
SECTION 01640 - SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 1 page
SECTION 01710 - CLEANING 1 page
SECTION 01720 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 1 page
SECTION 02110 - SITE CLEARING 1 page
SECTION 02202/ ROCK REMOVAL 2 pages
SECTION 02211 /ROUGH GRADING 1 page
SECTION 022221 EXCAVATION 1 page
SECTION 0222 BACKFILLING 2 pages
SECTION 02225/ TRENCHING 2 pages
SECTION 02500 PAVING AND SURFACING 2 pages
SECTION 02513 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING 2 pages
SECTION 025141 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 2 pages
SECTION 02528✓ CONCRETE CURBS 1 page
SECTION 02666✓ POTABLE WATER SYSTEMS 2 pages
SECTION 02720/ / STORM SEWAGE SYSTEMS 1 page
SECTION 02730/ SANITARY SEWAGE SYSTEMS 2 pages
SECTION 02930 - TOPSOIL PREPARATION AND HYDRO - MULCHING 2 pages
SECTION 03100 - CONCRETE FORMWORK 2 pages
SECTION 03200 - CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 1 page
SECTION 03300 - CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 2 pages
SECTION 03346 - CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING 1 page
SECTION 03370 - CONCRETE CURING 1 page
SECTION 04100 - MORTAR 2 pages
SECTION 04210 - FACE BRICK 3 pages
SECTION 04340 - REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM 2 pages
SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL 1 page
SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS 1 page
SECTION 06110 - ROUGH CARPENTRY 2 pages
SECTION 06112 - FRAMING AND SHEATHING 2 pages
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION 06114 - WOOD BLOCKING AND CURBING 1 page
SECTION 06125 - WOOD DECKING 2 pages
SECTION 06130 - HEAVY TIMBER FRAMING 1 page
SECTION 06181 - GLUE LAMINATED STRUCTURAL UNITS 2 pages
SECTION 06193 - PLATE CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES 2 pages
SECTION 06200 - FINISH CARPENTRY 2 pages
SECTION 06400 - ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 1 page
SECTION 07130 - WATERPROOFING 1 page
SECTION 07160 - BITUMINOUS DAMPROOFING 1 page
SECTION 07200 - INSULATION 2 pages
SECTION 07410A - TENNESSEE V METAL ROOFING 2 pages
SECTION 074105 - STANDING SEAM METAL ROOFING 2 pages
SECTION 07600 - SHEET METAL 2 pages
SECTION 07920 - CAULKING 2 pages
SECTION 08110 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 2 pages
SECTION 08210 - WOOD DOORS 2 pages
SECTION 08362 - SECTIONAL METAL OVERHEAD DOORS 1 page
SECTION 08410 - ALUMINUM FRAMES AND DOORS 2 pages
SECTION 08520 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS 2 pages
SECTION 08700 - HARDWARE 1 page
SECTION 08730 - WEATHERSTRIPPING, LIGHTFROOFING, AND SOUNDPROOFING 1 page
SECTION 08800 - GLASS AND GLAZING 2 pages
SECTION 09260 - GYPSUM WALLBOARD SYSTEMS 1 page
SECTION 09311 - CERAMIC TILE FINISH 2 pages
SECTION 09650 - RESILIENT FLOORING 2 pages
SECTION 09697 - CARPETING GLUE DOWN 2 pages
SECTION 09900 - PAINTING AND FINISHING 4 pages
SECTION 09955 - VINYL COATED FABRIC WALLCOVERING 2 pages
SECTION 10100 - CHALKBOARDS, TACKBOARDS, AND PROJECTION 2 pages
SECTION 10160 - METAL TOILET PARTITION 1 page
SECTION 10400 - MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES 1 page
SECTION 10500 - METAL LOCKERS AND BENCHES 2 pages
SECTION 10810 - TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 2 pages
SECTION 15010 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 4 pages
SECTION 15050 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 5 pages
SECTION 15250 - THERMAL INSULATION 2 pages
SECTION 15400 - PLUMBING SYSTEM 6 pages
SECTION 15640 - GAS -FIRED INDIRECT UNIT HEATERS 2 pages
SECTION 15652 - UNITARY SPLIT AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM 2 pages
SECTION 15840 - AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 4 pages
SECTION 15990 - HVAC TEST- ADJUST - BALANCE 1 page
SECTION 16010 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRAL WORK 1 page
SECTION 16050 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 3 pages
SECTION 16400 - ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 2 pages
SECTION 16500 - LIGHTING 1 page
SECTION 16700 - COMMUNICATIONS 1 page
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
C
7
0
[D
SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
STATION NUMBER THREE
ROUND ROCK FIRE DEPARTMENT
7 0
CITY OF ROUND ROCK
15 OCTOBER, 1990
Project No. 03 -8903
As Prepared By:
Q
QV
Architects
106 East Fannin Round Rock,Texas 78664 (512) 255 -9890
0
c-
j
TITLE AND LOCATION OF THE WORK
STATION NUMBER THREE
ROUND ROCK FIRE DEPARTMENT
NAME AND ADDRESS OF OWNER
CITY OF ROUND ROCK
ROUND ROCK, TEXAS
CONTACT: MR. JIM NUSE
NAME AND ADDRESS OF THE CONSULTANT
OPUS 3, ARCHITECTS
106 EAST FANNIN
ROUND ROCK, TEXAS 78664
PHONE: (512) 255 -9690
PROJECT MANAGER: KEITH A. HICKMAN, A.I.A.
CONSULTANTS
STRUCTURAL & CIVIL:
MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL & PLUMBING
TITLE OF DOCUMENTS BOUND HEREWITH
TITLE PAGE
INDEX OF DRAWINGS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
BIDDING REQUIREMENTS
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
DATE:
PROJECT NUMBER: 03 -8903
TITLE PAGE
15 OCTOBER, 1990
FISHER, HAGOOD & HEJL
ROUND ROCK, TEXAS 78681
TALEX INC., ENGINEERS
AUSTIN, TEXAS 78752
SECTION 00020 - ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS
FIRE STATION NO. 3
FOR THE
CITY OF ROUND ROCK
Round Rock, Texas
Sealed Bids will be received at the Round Rock City Hall Council Chambers, Round Rock, Texas until 2:00
pm on the 8th of November, 1990, unless extended by addendum.
Bids shall be addressed to the City of Round Rock, Round Rock, Texas, Attention: Mrs. Joann Land.
Bids may be publicly opened and read aloud at the above indicated time and place, unless modified by
addendum. Any bids received after closing time will be returned unopened.
A Bid Bond in the amount of 5 percent of the total maximum bid amount is required. Performance and
Labor and Material Bonds for 100 percent of the Contract amount will be required for Bids that total
$25,000.00 or more.
The work will be performed under a single lump sum contract.
No bidder may withdraw his bid within 60 days after the actual date of the opening.
The Owner reserves the right to waive any informalities or to reject any and all bids.
Section 00020 - Advertisement For Bids - Page 1 of 1
One set of Bidding Documents (drawings and specifications) may be acquired from the Architect, OPUS
3 Architects, by bonafide prime bidders and subcontractors upon receipt of a refundable deposit of
$50.00. Additional sets may be obtained as described below.
Prime Bidders (General Contractors) may obtain a maximum of two (2) sets of Drawings and
Specifications from the office of the Architect, OPUS 3 Architects, 106 East Fannin, Round Rock, Texas
78664, (512) 255 - 9691 upon receipt of a refundable deposit of $50.00 per set.
All other interested subcontractors may obtain one set of drawings and specifications upon a refundable
deposit of $ 50.00.
Drawings and specifications remain the property of the Architect and must, therefore, be returned in good
condition to the Architect within ten (10) days after the bids have been opened. If Plans and
Specifications are not returned within the allotted time above, the Architect will cash deposits and forward
to the Owner. (Note: Subbidders and material suppliers receiving subcontract awards for this project may
retain Plan and Specifications for use on the job).
1. GENERAL INFORMATION
2. BIOS
A. Refer to the "Advertisement for Bids' for Information relating
to time, date, and place for receipt of proposals, and other
pertinent bidding information.
A. At the site on the corner of Old West and Rawhide Drive in
Found Rock. Texas, in general, the work corneases
furnishing and installing all material, plant and labor for a
new facility and as further described by the proposed
Contract Documents prepared by OPUS 3, Architects.
B. The bidder shall review all of the proposed Contract Docu-
ments to ascertain all requirements of the work.
3. EXAMINATION OF PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, SPECIAL
PROVISIONS AND SITE WORK
A. The bidder shall examine carefully the site of the proposed
work the proposal, drawings, specifications, and contract
forms before submitting a bid. The submission of a bid shall
be an admission that the bidder has made such an
examination and is satisfied as to the conditions to be
encountered in performing the work and as to the require-
ments and accuracy of the plans, specifications, special;
provisions, and terms of the contract
B. For the convenience of interested prospective bidders, a
complete set of Bidding Documents are on file at the follow-
ing locations.
1. Austin, Texas
F.W. Dodge
Associated Builders & Contractors, Inc.
Association of General Contractors
C. All documents furnished to any person, under any condition,
remain the property of the Architect, and shall be retumed
immediately upon request.
D. ONLY FULL SETS OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS WILL BE
ISSUED.
8. Documents may be obtained upon the conditions set forth In
the Advertisement for Blds.
4. METHOD OF CLARIFICATION
A. My bidder in doubt as to the true meaning of any pan of the
drawings, specifications, or other documents may submit to
the Architect a written request for an interpretation thereof.
The bidder submitting the request will be responsible for Its
prompt delivery not less than ten (10) working days prior to
the date set for opening of proposals.
B. Questions which, in the opinion of the Architect require a
reply will be answered by issuing an addendum to all plan
holders prior to the bid opening. The Owner will not be
responsible for any other explanation or interpretation of the
drawings, specifications or other documents made or given
prior to the bid opening.
5. PREPARATION OF BIDS
SECTION 00100 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
A Preparation and Submission
8. The bid form will provide for a quotation of a price, or
prices, for one or more Items, which may be lump sum
bids, alternate prices, scheduled items, resulting in a bid
on a unit of construction or a combination thereof. Where
required on the bid form. bidders must quote on all items
and they are wamed that failure 10 do so shall disqualify
the bld.
C. Alternate Bids and Qualified Bids
6. BID GUARANTEE
Section 00100 - Instructions to Bidders - Page 1 of 3
Bids must be submitted on the forms furnished or copies
thereof, and must be manually signed. In order to secure
consideration, the bid must be submitted and sealed In an
envelope on which the contract identification Is plainly
marked on the outside. The 81d Form is included in the
Bidding Documents. The envelope shell be addressed as
indicated In the Advertisement for Bids.
If erasures or other changes appear on the forms, each
such erasure or change must be initialed by the person
signing the bid.
Bids may be rejected if they show any omissions,
alteration of the forms. additions not called for, conditional
or alternate bids not called for, or irregularities of any
kind.
D. Each bid shall specify a lump sum price, typed or written
in ink in both words and figures for each bid item called
for. In case of discrepancies between the written words
and figures, the written words shall govem
A. Each bid shall be accompanied by a certified check cashier's
check or bid bond, with good and sufficient surety or sureties
acceptable to the Owner. All contracts with the Owner require
a five percent (5) of the total amount of the bid. Bid
guarantees for the three (3) low bidders will be held until the
contract Is executed. All other bid guarantees will be retumed
within seven (7) days of the bid opening. Power of Attorney for
the official signing the bond for the surety company must be
submitted With the bond.
7. ALTERNATIVES
A. The bidder shall include In the spaces provided on the
"Bid Form" a bid for each alternative.
The Owner may accept alternatives In any order or
number and include them in the contract award price.
5. UNIT PRICES
A. The bidder shall include in the spaces provided on the
'Bid Form' a bid for each unit price.
The Owner may accept any or all olthese unit pnces and
include them in the contract award price.
9. ALLOWANCES
A. The bidder shall Include in the spaces provided on the
10. NONDISCRIMINATION
A. No bidder on any contract may discriminate on the basis of
race, color, religion, national origin, ancestry, age, sex,
mental status, handicap, or change In marital status in
employment, provision of services or otherwise. All
successful bidders shall take affirmative action to Insure such
non-discrimination. All successful bidders must agree to post
in conspicuous places, available to employees and
applicants for employment, notice setting forth the provisions
of this non - discrimination section and this section shall be
deemed to be a part of every contract entered Into by the
Owner under these policies.
11. RECEIPT AND OPENING OF BIDS
A. Time of Opening
12 WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS
14. REJECTION OF BIDS
"Bid Farm" a bid for each allowance(s).
15. AWARD OF CONTRACT
Bid shall be submitted prior to the time specified in the
'Advertisement for Bids" and the exact date and time of
receipt of the bids will be recorded. Late bids veil not
be considered, but will be held unopened until the time
of the award and then returned to the bidder, unless
other disposition is requested or agreed to by the
bidder. Time of receipt will be determined by the
Owners clock
B. Telegraphic/Telephonic Bids
Telegraphic /telephonic bids will not be considered.
Modification by telegraph, of bids already submitted,
will be considered if received prior to the time toad in
the"Advertisement for Bids". Telegraphic modifications
shall not reveal the amount of the original or received
bid.
C. Officer's Responsibility
No responsibility will attach to any officer or agent of
the Owner for the premature opening of, or the failure
to open a bid not properly addressed and identified.
A. Bids may be withdrawn on written or telegraphic request
received from bidders, prior to the time specified for opening.
13. BIDDERS INTERESTED IN MORE THAN ONE BID
A. If more than one bid is offered by any parry, by or In the
name of his clerk partner, or other person, all such bids will
be rejected. A party who hes quoted prices to a bidder is
not thereby disqualified from quoting prices to other bidders,
or from submitting a bid directly for the work
A. The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids, and to
waive any informalities and irregularities in bidding or award
of the contract
A. Acceptance of the Bid
On all bids, action will be taken within sixty (fig)
calendar days from date and time of opening. The
Section 00100 - Instructions to Bidders - Page 2 of 3
acceptance of a bid will be a notice in writing signed by
a duly authorized representable of the Owner and no
other actof the Ownerorits representative will constitute
an acceptance of a bid. The acceptance of a bid shall
bind the successful bidderto execute the contractand be
responsible for liquidated damages as provided herein.
B. Amount of the Contract
The amount of the contract shall be understood to be the
lump sum as given in the bid form. Where prices are
given an alternative hems, only the amounts of the
alternates accepted by the Owner will be included in the
total.
C. Execution of Contract
1. By Contractor: The bidder whose bid is accepted
shall execute the contract and acknowledgment and
indemnification agreement and furnish the required
bonding and Insurance within ten (10) days after
presentation of the contract for signature. The
contract shall be deemed to be executed, by the
successful bidder, when five (5) comas of the
contract and the acknowledgment and
indemnification agreement signed by an authonzed
officer of the corporation or company, and the
required, proper band and insurance required
herein, are received by the Owner. Failure or
neglect to execute the contract within the time
specified may constitute a breach of the agreement
affecting the acceptance of the bid. The damages
M the Owner for such a breach shall include loss
from interference with the general Capital
Improvements Program of the Owner, and other
Items whose accurate amount would be difficult or
impossible to compute. The amount of the bid
guarantee of the successful bidder who fails or
neglects to execute the contract after proper
notification of the acceptance of the bid, shall be
retained by the Owner as liquidated damages for
such breach.
2. By Owner: Upon receipt of the above referenced
five (5) copies executed by the Contractor including
all required bonds and insurance certificates, the
properly authorized Owner representatives will
execute the documents within ten (10) days.
3. The Contract shall be deemed to be completely
executed when five (5) copies thereof, accompanied
by the required acknowledge and indemnification
agreement, bond, liability and other necessary
insurance, and signed by the Contractor, are
executed by the Owner.
16. CONTRACTORTO FURNISH PERFORMANCEANDLABORAND
MATERIAL PAYMENT BONDS
A. Each bond shall be in the full amount of the contract and
shall be maintained In force during the continuance of this
contract and shall be for the faithful performance of this
contract in all respects, including but not limited to
payments for all material, labor, etc., and no contract shall
be binding until the said bond Is Iumished and approved
by the Owner. No work may be commenced until the
bonds have been approved by the Owner. All alterations,
extensions of time, extra and additional work and other
charges authorized by the Contract Documents may be
made without securing the consent of surety or sureties of
the contract bond. Power of Attomey for the official
17. GUARANTEE
signing the bond for the surety company must be
submitted with the bond.
A. Whether or not there appears here or elsewhere herein
specific reference to guarantees of all items of material,
equipment, or workmanship, they nevertheless shall be so
guaranteed against defects for which the Contractor Is -
responsible that may develop or become evident within a
period of one (1) year from and after SUBSTANTIAL
COMPLETION of the work by the Owner. This guarantee
shall be understood to imply prompt attenbon to any remedy
of such detects as those mentioned above if, and as soon as
they occur, after the Contractor shall have written notice of
their existence. If the defect in the opinion of the Owner, is
of such nature as to demand Immediate repair, the Owner
shall have the right to make them and the cost thereof shall
be borne by the Contractor.
B. To support the above guarantee the Contractor's
performance and labor and material payment bond shall
remain in full force and effect for the one (1) year following
the SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION of the Work by the Owner.
The bond shall be executed by a surety company authorized
to do business within the Stale and It shall be subject to the
approval of the Owner.
18. SUBCONTRACTORS
A. All subcontractors proposed for the work must be acceptable
to the Owner.
B. The Owner reserves the right to request the proposed
subcontractors to complete qualification fonnsand /or current
financial statements prepared by a Certified Public
Accountant These fors wit be similar to those required of
a prima bidder (General Contractor).
19. BASIS OF AWARD
P. It Is the Owner's intention to award a contract to the lowest
responsive and responsible bidder, including alternates and
unit prices accepted by the Owner at time of award.
8. The unit prices listed in the Bid Proposal Sheet will be
evaluated In determining the lowest responsive and
responsible bidder,
C. Bids will be submitted on the entire contract, including all
work shown specified, descnbed In the contract documents.
20. INSPECTION AND LABORATORY TESTING
A. Not Applicable.
21. PROGRESS PAYMENTS
A. Monthly progress payments will generally be made to the
Contractor by the Owner within twenty (20) days after
approval of the Certificate for Payment and updated
Contractor's Construction Network by the Owner.
B. The Owner will retain true (5) percent of the amount of all
Progress Payments until all work is finally completed and
accepted, whether or not the Owner has accepted any or all
of the Project before such time.
22. SUBSTITUTIONS
A. The attention of potential bidders and other interested
parties is called to the conditions set forth in Section
01640, 'Approval for Substitution and Product Option ",
regarding approval and product options for substitution.
23. LIOUIDATED DAMAGES
Section 00100 - Instructions to Bidders - Page 3 of 3
A. Provisions for liquidated damages will be set forth In the
Agreement as follows:
% 250.00 per calendar day
for each calendar day after the data of Project Completion until
Substantial Completion of the Project
END OF SECTION
TO: City of Round Rock
Round Rock, Texas
SECTION 00300 - BID FORM
Date
FROM: BIDDER
Operating as (strike out conditions that do not apply) an individual, a Company, a Corporation, organized
and existing under the law of the State of Texas, or a Proprietorship, or Joint Venture consisting of
BASE BID:
ADDRESS
CITY /STATE
Time LOCAL TIME
1. Having become completely familiar with the local conditions affecting the cost of work at the
places where work is to be executed, and having carefully examined the conditions as they
currently exist, and having carefully examined the proposed Contract Documents prepared by
OPUS 3, Architects, Round Rock, Texas, together with any addenda to such Contract Documents
as listed hereinafter, the undersigned hereby proposes and agrees to provide all labor, materials,
plant, equipment, transportation and other facilities as necessary and /or required to execute all
of the work described by the aforesaid Contract Documents within the specified contract time,
with no time extensions, as follows:
BASE BID - ITEM NO. 1: for the construction of a New Fire Station for the City of Round Rock
located at the corner of West and Rawhide in Round Rock, Texas in compliance with, and as
shown on the plans and in the specifications, for the sum of:
ALTERNATE NUMBER ONE: provide and install Metal lockers in compliance with, and as shown
on the plans and in the specifications section 10500, DEDUCT the sum of:
ALTERNATE NUMBER TWO: provide and install Standing Seam Metal Roof in compliance with,
and as shown on the plans and in the specifications section 074106, ADD the sum of:
Secton 00300 - 8111 Form - Page 1 of 5
ALTERNATE NUMBER THREE: provide and install 1 X 6 V- Groove Ceiling in apparatus bays in
lieu of 5/8' gypsum board as drawn and detailed in compliance with, ADD the sum of:
ADDENDA ACKNOWLEDGMENT:
UNIT PRICES
Addendum No. Date Addendum No. Date
Section 00300 - Bid Form - Page 2 of 5
2. The undersigned acknowledges receipt of the following addenda: (List by number and date
appearing on addenda.)
3. The undersigned agrees that the following unit prices will apply on any additions to or deductions
from the work which prices shall include overhead, profit, taxes and all other related costs:
The unit prices shall be installed, in -place prices for materials as specified. The quoted unit
prices will be valid, and the quoted unit prices will be in force on any work. The materials and
work shall be in compliance with the specifications:
Excavation (Dirt or Caliche) per cubic yard $
Excavation (Rock) per cubic yard $
Backfilling per cubic yard $
Reinforcing Steel, straight or bent, per lb $
Structural Concrete, per cubic yard $
Limestone Veneer Units, per sq.ft. $
Carpet, per sq.ft. $
V.C.T., per sq ft $
Metal Roofing, per sq.ft. $
ALLOWANCES
4. Include in the Base Bid Items for inclusion in the Contract Sum the following Allowances. The
Contractor's Base Bid Items shall include overhead, profit, insurance and taxes (if applicable).
Any Allowances not authorized to be used will be credited to the Owner by Change Order.
Testing Allowance: $ 2,000.00 -
Hardware Allowance $ 8,000.00
TIME OF COMPLETION
4. The undersigned agrees to complete all work under this Contract in compliance with the following
stipulations:
A. Construction work shall be completed in consecutive calendar days after the
receipt of the notice to proceed.
CHANGES IN WORK:
5. The undersigned agrees that when changes in work are ordered which involve extra cost over
and above contract sum, and when such work due to an emergency is ordered to proceed on
basis of cost - plus -fee, such fee shall be as required by the 'General Conditions'.
BID GUARANTEE:
6. Bid Guarantee in the amount of five percent (5 %) of the total amount of the Bid is attached, in the
sum of which is to become the property of the Owner in the event the Contract and Performance
and Labor and Material Payment Bond are not executed within the time set forth, as liquidated
damages for the delay and additional work caused the Owner.
CONTRACT
SecUon 00300 - Bid Form - Page 3 of 5
7. The undersigned agrees that upon receipt of the notice of acceptance of his bid, he wit execute
the formal Contract and acknowledgment and indemnification agreement, and will deliver all
required, proper bonds and proof of insurance coverage as may be required by the Contract
Documents.
8. The undersigned further agrees to execute the formal Contract and acknowledgment and
indemnification agreement within ten (10) days from date of notice to acceptance of this bid, and
in case the undersigned fails or neglects to appear within the specified time to execute the
Contract, the undersigned will be considered as having abandoned the Contract, and the
Cashier's Check or Bid Bond accompanying this bid will be forfeited to the Owner by reason of
such failure on the part of the undersigned.
9. The undersigned further agrees that the bid security may be retained by the Owner and that said
bid guarantee shall remain with the Owner until the Contract and indemnification agreement has
been signed and Performance and Labor and Material Payment Bonds have been made and
delivered to the Owner
GENERAL STATEMENT
10. The undersigned has checked all of the above figures, and understands that the Owner will not
be responsible for any errors or omissions on the part of the undersigned in prepariNg this bid.
11. In submitting this bid, it Ys understood that the right is reserved by the Owner to reject any and
all bids and waive all informalities in connection therewith. It is agreed that this bid may not be
withdrawn for a period of sixty (60) days from the date and time of opening.
12. Wherever in this bid an amount is stated in both words and figures, in case of discrepancy
between words and figures, the written words shall govern.
13. The undersigned declares that the person or persons signing this Bid Form is /are fully authorized
to sign on behalf of the firm listed and to fully bind the firm listed to all the conditions and
provisions thereof.
14. It is agreed that no person or persons or company other than the firm listed below or as otherwise
indicated has any interest whatsoever in this bid or the Contract may be entered into as a result
of the bid and that in all respects the proposal is legal and firm, submitted in good faith without
collusion for fraud.
15. It is agreed that the undersigned has complied or will comply with all requirements of local, state,
and national laws, and that no legal requirement has been or will be violated in making or
accepting this bid in awarding the contract to him and /or in the prosecution of work required.
PRINCIPALS:
Section 00300 - Bid Form - Page 4 of 5
16. The names and addresses of all persons interested in this bid as Principals are as follows:
A. If the bidder is a corporation, give legal name of corporation, State where incorporated,
and names, titles, and addresses of three (3) corporate officers, including the President;
if a partnership, give name of the firm and names and addresses of all of the partners;
if an individual, give full name and address; if joint venture or joint association, give legal
name of joint venture or joint association, names of member firms, information regarding
member firms shall be provided as required above.
17. The undersigned is a business which is licensed in accordance with the requirements of the State
of , License number.
Respectfully Submitted, this
day of , 19
(Firm Name)
(Address)
(Signature)
(Name Typed)
(Title)
(SEAL IF BIDDER IS A CORPORATION)
ENCLOSURES:
18. Bid Guarantee (In the form and amount specified or required).
END OF SECTION
Section 00300 - Bld Form - Page 5 of 5
REFERENCE
1. The Form of Agreement between the Owner and the Contractor shall be as per the attached
sample contract.
2. The Agreement shall be executed in not less than quintuplet.
3. The effective date of the contract shall be the date executed by the Owner, and will be so noted
by the Owner as part of its extension.
END OF SECTION
Section 00500 - Owner - Contractor Agreement Form - Page 1 of 3
SECTION 00500 - OWNER -CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT FORM
THIS AGREEMENT is entered into on this the DATE, between the OWNER, and the CONTRACTOR, ,
phone for the following PROJECT:
PROJECT TITLE, LOCATION
THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
The Contract Documents consist of this Agreement and any Exhibits attached hereto, Conditions of the
Contract (General, Supplementary, and other Conditions), Bidding Documents, Drawings, Specifications,
all Addenda issued prior to execution of this Agreement and all Modifications issued subsequent thereto.
These form the Contract, and all are as fully a part of the Contract as if attached to this agreement or
repeated herein. Unless otherwise specified, definitions set forth in the General Conditions apply to all
other Contract Documents.
II.
THE WORK
The Contractor shall perform all the Work required by the Contract Documents, for: PROJECT
DESCRIPTION, LOCATION.
$ 250.00 per day
COMMENCEMENT AND COMPLETION
Section 00500 - Owner - Contractor Agreement Form - Page 2 of 3
The Work to be performed under this Contract shall be commenced upon issuance of notice to proceed,
and, subject to authorized adjustments, Substantial Completion for all bid items shall be achieved not later
than DATE.
Should the CONTRACTOR fail to substantially complete the Work on or before the date stipulated for
Substantial Completion (or such latter date as may result from extension of time granted by the OWNER),
he shall pay the OWNER, as liquidated damages, the sum of:
for each consecutive calendar day that terms of the Contract remain unfulfilled beyond the date allowed
by the Contract, which sums are agreed upon, not as a penalty, but as reasonable and proper measures
of damages which the OWNER will sustain per day by failure of the CONTRACTOR to complete all Work
within the time as stipulated; it being recognized by the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR that the injury
to the OWNER, including the lost use of the facilities, attendant disruption to the educational system, and
the extended administrative resources, which could result from a failure of the CONTRACTOR to complete
on schedule, is uncertain and cannot be computed exactly.
IV.
CONTRACT SUM
The OWNER shall pay the CONTRACTOR for the performance of the Work, subject to additions and
deductions by Change Order as provided in the Conditions of the Contract, in current funds, the Contract
Sum of: $.00 (AMOUNT OF CONTRACT).
Base Bid: $ .00
ADDENDA:
Addendum No 1 of DATE
V.
PAYMENTS
Based upon applications of payment submitted to the Consultant by the CONTRACTOR and Certificates
for Payment issued by the Consultant, the OWNER shall make progress payments on account of the
Contract Sum to the Contract as provided in the Conditions of the Contract as follows:
On or about the first of each month, ninety - five (95 %) percent of the portion of the Contract Sum properly
allocable to labor, materials, and equipment incorporated in the Work, and ninety -five (95 %) percent of
the portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to materials and equipment suitably stored at the site
or at some other location agreed upon in writing by the parties up to ten (10) days prior to the date on
which the application for payment is submitted, less the aggregate of previous payments in each case;
and upon Substantial Completion of the entire Work, a sum sufficient to increase the total payments to
ninety -five (95 %) percent of the Contract Sum, less such retainage as the Consultant shalL determine for
all incomplete Work and unsettled claims.
Final payment, constituting the entire unpaid balance of the Contract Sum, shall be paid by the OWNER
to the CONTRACTOR thirty (30) days after Substantial Completion of the Work unless otherwise stipulated
in the Certificate of Substantial Completion, provided the Work has been completed, the Contract fully
performed, and a final Certificate of Payment has been issued by the Consultant.
Any monies not paid when due to either party under the Contract shall bear interest at the legal rate in
force at the place of the PROJECT.
OWNER NAME CONTRACTORS NAME
OWNER CONTRACTOR
ADDRESS ADDRESS
CITY, STATE, ZIP CITY, STATE, ZIP
PHONE NO. PHONE NO.
By: President
Section 00500 - Owner - Contractor Agreement Form - Page 3 of 3
SECTION 00600 - BONDS AND CERTIFICATES
Section 00600 - Bonds and Cetbficates - Page 1 of 1
The Contractor shall furnish the following Bonds and Certificates to be delivered simultaneously with the
executed Contract:
A. Performance Bond
B. Labor and Materials Payment Bond
C. Certificates of Insurance - Provide on AIA Document G -705 (November 1978 Edition)
The Performance, Labor and Materials Bond shall be provided on Bonds which comply with Article 5160
of the Revised Civil Statutes of the State of Texas as amended by Acts of the 64th Legislature and Acts
of the 65th Legislature, 1977.
The Surety on such bonds shall be a surety company satisfactory to the Owner. See Article 7 of the
Supplementary Conditions.
Costs of the above stated bonds and insurance are to be included in the bid.
Attorneys - in - Fact who sign bonds must file with each bond a certified and effective dated copy of their
Power of Attorney.
The Performance Bond shall guarantee the repair and maintenance of all defects due to faulty materials
and workmanship that appear within one (1) year from date of substantial completion.
END OF SECTION
REFERENCE
SECTION 00610 - BID BOND FORM
Section 00610 - Bid Band Form - Page 1 of 1
1. If the Bid Guarantee is submitted in the Bid Bond Form, the Bid Bond shall be in the form as
follows: NA Document A310, BID BOND - February 1970 Edition or current edition.
END OF SECTION
Section 00620 - Performance & Labor & Material Payment Band Forms - Page 1 of 1
SECTION 00620 - PERFORMANCE AND LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND FORMS
REFERENCE
1. Before the Owner executes the contract agreement, they will require the Contractor to furnish a
Performance Bond and a Labor and Material Payment Bond covering the faithful performance of
the entire construction contract agreement. The Performance Bond and the Labor and Material
Payment Bond shall each be made out in one hundred percent (100 %) of the Contract amount.
The bonds shall be issued by a company approved by the Owner. The Contractor shall submit
evidence that the Surety Company is authorized to issue bonds in the State of Texas and it holds
a Certificate of Authority as an acceptable surety on Federal Bonds.
2. The Performance and Labor and Material Payment Bond form shall be signed by an official of the
bonding company and shall be accompanied by the bonding agent's written power of attorney.
Provide four (4) copies of each bond and the power of attorney in order that one copy may be
attached to each copy of the contract agreement.
END OF SECTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1 01 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Comply with contract conditions, requirements and specified
administrative procedures in closing out work.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Section 01740, "Contract Closeout"
B. General and Supplementary General Conditions
1.03 APPUCATION AND CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMENT
SECTION 00630 - SAMPLE FORMS AND CERTIFICATES
A. The Application and Certificate for Payment shall be "AIA
Document G702 and 0703. Application and Certificate for
Payment latest addition."
1.04 CERTIFICATES OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be "AIA
Document 6704, Certificate of Substantial Completion, latest
addition."
B. Supplements:
The following supplements modify, change, delete, or
add to the Certificate of Substantial Completion.
Where any article of the Certificate of Substantial
Completion is modified or any paragraph deleted,
subparagraph or clause thereof is modified or deleted
by these supplements. the unaltered provisions of such
article, paragraph, subparagraph or clause shall remain
in effect.
1. Under "Definition of Date of Substantial
Completion" delete all wording and insert the
following:
The date of substantial completion of the Work or
segmented portion thereof (or the Date of Beneficial
Occupancy) is the date certified by the Architect when
construction is sufficiently complete, in accordance
with the Contract Documents, so the Owner can fully
occupy and utilize the Work or designated portion
thereof for which it is intended, with all the Project's
parts and systems operable as required by the Contract
Documents where all work is complete, accessible,
operable and usable by the Owner and all parts,
systems and site work are 10014 complete and cleared
for Owner's use. Only incidental corrective work under
punchlists" and final cleaning (if required) beyond
cleaning needed for the Owner's full use may remain
for Final Completion.
The term "Beneficial Occupancy" Is Interchangeable
with the term "Substantial Completion ".
1.05 CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT OF PAYMENT OF DEBTS AND
CLAIMS
A. The Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims
shall be "AIA Document G706, Contractor's Affidavit of
Payment of Debts and Claims, latest addition."
Section 00630 - Sample Forms and Certificates - Page 1 of 1
1.06 CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT OF RELEASE OF DENS
A. The Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Uens shall be •AIA
Document G7060, Contractor's Affidavit of Release of
Liens, latest edition."
1.07 CONSENT OF SURETY COMPANY TO FINAL PAYMENT
A. The Surety's Consent for the Owner to make final
payment to the Contractor shall be "AIA Document G707,
Consent of Surety Company to Final Payment latest
edition."
1.08 CONSENT OF SURETY TO REDUCTION IN OR PARTIAL
RELEASE OF RETAINAGE
A. The Surety's Consent to a change in retainage shall be
"AIA Documents G7070. Consent of Surety to Reduction
in or Partial Release of Retainage, latest edition."
END OF SECTION
SECTION 00700 - GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
ARTICLE 1 - GENERAL PROVISIONS
Basic Definitions
1.1.1 The Contract Documents
1.1.3 The Work
The Contract Documents consist of the
Owner•Contractor Agreement, the conditions
of the Contract (General, Supplementary and
other Conditions), the Drawings, the
Specifications, and all Addenda issued prior to
all Change Orders and written amendments
issued after execution of the Contract The
Contract Documents include bidding docu-
ments.
1.1.2 The Contract
The Contract Documents form the Contract for
Construction.
The Contract represents the entire and
integrated agreement between the parties
hereto and supersedes prior negotiations,
representations or agreements. either wntton
or oral. The contract may be amended or
modified only by a Modification. The Contract
Documents shell not be construed to create
contractual relationship of any kind (1)
between the Architect and the Contractor, (2)
between the Owner and a Subcontractor or
Sub- subcontractor or (3) between any
persons or entities other than the Owner and
Contractor.
The term' Work- means the construction and
services required by the Contract Documents,
whether completed or partially completed,
and includes all materials, equipment and
services necessary to produce the completed
construction.
1.1.4 The Project
The Project is the total construction of which
the Work performed under the Contract
Documents may be the whole or a part and
which may include construction by the Owner
or by separate contractors.
1.1.5 The Drawings
The Drawings are the graphic and pictorial
portions of the Contract Documents, wherever
located and whenever issued, showing the
design, location and dimensions of the Work
generally including plans, elevations, sections,
details, schedules and diagrams.
1.1.6 The Specifications
The Specifications are that portion of the
Contract Documents consisting of the written
requirements for materials, equipment,
Section 00700 • General Conditions - Page 1 of 21
12 Exeaudon, Correladon and Intent
construction systems, standards and
workmanship for the Work and performance
of related systems.
1.2.1 The Contract Documents shall be signed by
the Owner and Contractor as provided in the
Agreement If either the Owner or Contractor
or both do not sign all the Contract
Documents, the Architect shall identify such
unsigned Documents upon request.
1 2 2 Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is
a representation that the Contractor has
visited the site, become familiar with local con-
ditions under which the Work Is to be
performed and correlated personal
observations with requirements of the Contract
Documents.
1 2.3 The Intent of the Contract Documents Is to in-
clude all items necessary for the proper
execution and completion of the Work by the
Contractor. The Contract documents are
complementary, and what is required by one
shall be as binding as 0 required by all;
performance by the Contractor shall be
required only to the extent consistent with the
Contract Documents and reasonably Inferable
from them as being necessary to produce the
intended results.
1.2.4 Organization of the Specifications into
divisions, section and articles, end ar-
rangement of Drawings shall not control the
Contractor in dividing the Work among Sub -
contracts or In establishing the extent of Work
to be performed by any trade.
1.2.5 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Docu-
ments, words which have well -known technical
or construction industry meanings are used in
the Contract Documents in accordance with
such recognized meanings.
1.2.6 Any material or operation specified by
reference to published specifications of a
manufacturer, a society, an association, a
code or other published standard, shall
comply with requirements of the listed docu-
ment and project specification, or as between
referenced documents, the m stringent
code or performance requirements shall
govern. The Contractor, if requested, shall
furnish an affidavit from the manufacturer,
certifying that the materials or products
delivered to the Project meet the requirement
specified.
1.3 Ownership and Use of Architect's Drawings,
Specifications, and Other Documents
1.3.1 All Drawings, Specifications and copies
thereof famished by the Owner are and shall
remain his property. They ere to be used only
with respect to this Project and are not to be
used on any other project With the exception
of one contract set for each party to the
Contract, such documents are to be returned
or suitably accounted for to the Owner on
request at the completion of the Work.
Submission or distnbution to meet official
regulatory requirements or for other purpose
In connection wen the Project Is not to be
construed as publication In derogation of the
Architect's common law copyright or other
reserved rights.
1.4 Capitalization
1.4.1 Terms capitalized In these General Conditions
include those which are: (1) specifically
defined. (2) the titles of numbered articles and
Identified references to Paragraphs.
Subparagraphs and Clauses in the document
or (3) the titles of other Contract documents.
1.5 Interpretation
2.1 Definition
1.5.1 In the interest of brevity the Contract
Documents frequently omit modifying words
such as " all" and "any" and articles such as
"the" and "an; but the tact that a modifier or
an article is absent from one statement and
appears in anotheor Is not intended to affect
the Interpretation of either statement
1.5.2 References to the Architect or•AJE," mean the
Architect or Engineer or his authorized
representative.
ARTICLE 2 - OWNER
2.1.1 The Owner is the person or entity identified as
such in the Agreement and is referred to
throughout the Contract Documents as If
singular in number The term "Owner means
the Owner or the Owner's authorized
representative.
2.2 Information and Services Required of the Owner
2.2.1 The Owner shall furnish surveys describing
the physical charactenstics, legal limitations
and utilities locations for the site of the Project
and a legal description of the site.
2.2.2 The Owner shall secure and pay for all neces-
sary approvals and easements required for
construction.
2.2.3 Information or services under the Owners
control shall be furnished by the Owner with
reasonable promptness to avoid delay in
orderly progress of the Work.
Section 00700 - General Conditions - Page 2 of 21
2.2.4 The Contractor will be furnished, Tree of
charge, ten (10) copies of Drawings and
Project Manuals. Additional copies will be
billed to Contractor at cost plus twenty (20 )
percent
2.3 Ovmer's Right to Stop the Work
23.1 If the Contractor fails to correct Work which is
not in accordance with the requirements of the
Contract Documents es required by Paragraph
12.2 or persistently fail. to carry out Work in
accordance with the Contract Documents, the
Owner may order the Contractor to stop the
Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause
for such order has been eliminated; however,
the right of the Owner to stop the Work shall
not give rise to a duty on the part of the
Owner to exercise this nght for the benefit of
the Contractor of any other person or entity.
ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACTOR
3.1 The Contractor Is the person or entity identified as such
in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Con-
tract Documents as it singular In number. The tens
"Contractor means the Contractor of the Contractor's
authorized representative.
3.2 Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions By
Contractor
3.2.1 The Owner makes no representations as to the
accuracy or completeness of the site
information furnished to the contractor by
Owner and does not expressly or implledly
warrant same and is not responsible for any
interpretations or conclusions reached by the
Contractor with respect thereto. k is
Contractor's sole responsibility to venfy to its
own satisfaction all site Information, Including
but not restricted to topographical data,
borings, subsurface Information, utilities, and
easements.
3.2.2 The Contractor is responsible for having
visited the site and ascertained pertinent local
conditions such as location, accessibility, and
character of the site or building, the character
and extent of existing work within and
adjacent to the site, and any other work being
performed thereon at the time of the sub-
mission of his proposal. Any failure to do so
will not relieve him from responsibility for
successfully performing the work without
additional expense to the Owner
3.23 The Contractor shall take field measurements
and verify field conditions and shall carefully
compare such field measurements and condi-
bons and other Information known to the
Contractor with the Contract Documents
before commencing activities. Errors,
inconsistencies or omissions discovered shall
be reported to the Architect at once.
3.24 If, in the performance of the contract subsur-
face, latent or concealed conditions at the site
are found to be materially different form the
information included in the bid doucmelns, or
if unknown conditions of an unusual nature
are disclosed differing materially form the
conditions usually Inherent in work of the
character shown and specified, the Architect
shall be noUfed In wnllng of such conditions
before they are disturbed. The Architect with
the approval of the Owner, will promptly make
such changes in the Drawing and
Specifications as he deems necessary to
conform to the different conditions, and any
increase or decrease in the Work, or in the
time within which the Work is to be completed,
resulting form such changes will be adjusted
by Change Order subject to the prior approval
of the Owner.
3.2.5 It is recognized by the parties hereto and
agreed by them that the Specifications and
Drawings may or may not be complete or free
from errors, omissions and imperfections or
require changes or additions in order for the
Work to be completed to the satisfaction of
Owner and that accordingly, it is the express
intention of the parties notwithstanding any
other provisions in this Contract that any
errors, omissions or imperfections In such
Specifications and Drawings. or any changes
or additions to same or to the work ordered by
the Owner and any resulting delays In the
work or increases in Contractor's costs and
expenses shall not constitute or give rise to
any claim, demand or cause of action of any
nature whatsoever In favor of Contractor,
whether for breach of Contract quantum
meruit or otherwise; provided. however, that
Owner shall be liable to Contractor for the
sum stated to be due Contractor in any
Change Order approved and signed by both
parties, it being agreed hereby that such sum,
together with any extension of time contained
in said Change order shall constitute lull
compensation to Contractor for all costs,
expenses and damages to Contractor whether
direct consequential or otherwise In any way
an Incident to, ansing out of or resulting
directly or Indirectly from the work performed
by Contractor under such Change Order.
3.2.6 Before placing his proposal to the Owner, and
continuously after execution of the Contract,
the Contractor shall carefully study and com-
pare the Contract Documents and shell at
once report to the Owner any error,
inconsistency or omission he may discover,
including any requirements which may be
contrary to any law, ordinance, mle, regulation
or order of any public authority bearing on the
performance of the Work By submitting his
proposal or bid for the Contract and the Work
under it the Contractor agrees that the
Contract Documents appear accurate,
consistent, and complete insofar as can
reasonably be determined. If the Contractor
has reported In writing an error, inconsistency
or omission, has promptly stopped the
abetted work until otherwise instructed, and
Section 00700 - General Conditions - Page 3 of 21
has otherwise followed the Instructions of the
Owner, the Contractor shall not be liable to
the owner or the Architect for any damage
resulting from any such errors, inconsistencies
or omissions in the Contract Documents. The
Contractor shall perform no portion of the
Work at any time without Contract Documents
and, where required, approved Shop
Drawings, Product Data or Samples for such
portion of the Work.
3.2.7 The Contractor shall perform the Work in
accordance with the Contract Documents and
submittals approved pursuant to Paragraph
3.12.
3.3 Supervision and Construction Procedures
3 3.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the
Work using the Contractor's best skill and
attention. The Contractor shall be solely
responsible for and have control over
construction means, methods, techniques,
sequences and procedures and for
coordinating all portions of the Work under the
Contract, unless Contract Documents give
other specific instructions concerning these
matters.
3.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the
Owner for acts and omissions of the
Contractor's employees, Subcontractors and
their agents and employees, and other per-
sons performing portions of the Work
3.3.3 The Contractor shall not be relieved of
obligations to perform the Work In accordance
with the Contract Documents either by
activities or duties of the Architect in the
Architect's administration of the Contract or
by tests, Inspections or approvals required or
performed by persons other than the
Contractor.
334 The Contractor shall be responsible for
inspection of portions of the Work already
performed under this Contract to determine
that such portions are in proper condition to
receive subsequent Work
3.3.5 The Contractor shall furnish all required
information to ensure continuity between
various secnona of the Work and to avoid
delay and obviate defects on any part of the
whole Work
3.3.6 The Contractor shall verify all dimensions
before ordering materials or equipment or
before performing Work If a discrepancy
exists, the Contractor shall take field
measurements required for the proper
fabncation or Installation of the work The
Contractorshall be responsible for dimensions
related to any item of work and shall make
any corrections necessary to make the work
properly fit at no additional cost to Owner.
3.3.7 The Contractor shall inform himself fully
3.4 Labor and Metenals
3 5 Warranty
regarding any peculiarities and limitations of
the space available for the installation of the
material. He shell see that all equipment,
such as valves, or other applicances
necessary to be reached from time to time for
operations and maintenance are made readily
accessible.
3.3.8 The construction of the Work may develop
conditions that render Impracticable the
location of equipment as shown or noted. In
such cases, before installing his Work, the
Contractor shall call the condition to the
attention of the Architect for resolution.
3.3.9 Dimensions shall be verified by the
Contractor's measurements of the buildings
and the property, and the Contractor shall be
responsible for all of his Work fitting in place
in a satisfactory and workmanlike manner.
3.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract
Documents, the Contractor shall provide and
pay for labor, materials, equipment tools,
construction equipment and machinery, water,
heat, utilities, transportation, and other
facilities and services necessary for proper
execution and completion of the Work,
whether temporary or permanent and whether
or not Incorporated or to be incorporated In
the Work
3.4.2 The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline
and good order among the Contractor's
employees and other persons carrying out the
Contract The Contractor shall not permit
employment of unfit persons or persons not
slulled in tasks assigned to them.
3.4.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for
ensuring that the Work is completed in a
skilled and workmanlike manner.
3.4.4 The Contractor, Including his subcontractors,
sub- subcontractors, suppliers, agents and
employees, shall not provide not install any
asbestos matedals. Such provision or
installation of any asbestos materials shall
constitute defective work not in compliance
with the contract documents, and the
Contractor shell, at his Bole and exclusive
costs, remove said asbestos matenals in
compliancewahcurrentguidellnes established
by the Environmental Protection Agency for
removal of asbestos-containing matenals.
3 5.1 The Contractor warrants to the Owner and the
Architect that all materials and equipment
furnished under this Contract will be new
unless otherwise specified, and that all Work
will be of good quality, free from faults, and
defects and In conformance with the Contract
Documents. All Work not conforming to these
requirements. Including substitutions not
3.6 Taxes
Section 00700 - General Conditions - Page 4 of 21
properly approved and authorized, may be
considered defective. If required by the
Architect the Contractor shall furnish satis-
factory evidence as to the kind and quality of
materials and equipment This warranty is not
limited by the provisions of Paragraph 12.22.
3.6.1 The Contractor shall pay all applicable sales,
consumer, use, and similar taxes for the work
which are legally enacted when bide are
received. The Owner qualifies for exemption
from state and local sales and use taxes
pursuant to the provisions of the Texas
Limited Sales, Excise and Use Tax Act
(Taxation - General, Article 20.04 Vemons
Texas Civil Statutes). The Contractor may
claim exemption from payment of applicable
state taxes by complying with such procedures
as may be prescribed by the state comptroller
of public accounts.
3.7 Permits, Fees and Notices
3.7.1 The Contractor shall secure and pay for the
building permit and other permits and
governmental fees, licenses, inspections, and
certificates of occupancy, necessaryfor proper
execution and completion of the Work which
are customarily secured after execution of the
Contract and which are legally required when
bids are received or negotiations concluded.
Any delays in obtaining the above permits
shall not be grounds for any change order for
any costs Increases or time extensions.
3.7.2 The Contractor shall make himself familiar
with and at all times shall observe and comply
with all federal, state and local laws,
ordinances and regulations which In any
manner affect the conduct of the Work and
shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner
against any claim arising from violation of any
such law, ordinance or regulation by himself
or by his subcontractors or his employees.
When requested, competent evidence of com-
pliance with applicable laws shall be
furnished.
3 7.3 If the Contractor observes that portions of the
Contract Documents are at variance with
applicable laws, ordinances, codes, and
regulations, the Contractor shall promptly
notify the Architect and Owner In writing, and
necessary changes shall be accomplished by
appropriate Modification.
3.7.4 Where the Underwriter's Laboratories have
established standards and Issued labels for a
particular group, class or type of equipment
the Underwriter's label shall be required on all
equipment in that category. The National
Etectnc Code and the National Plumbing Code
shall be minimum requirements. When re-
quested, competent evidence of compliance
with applicable codes shall be furnished.
3.75 Notification, coordination and completion of
the installation of all required utilities, whether
temporary or permanent is the sole respon-
sibility of the Contractor. The Owner shall not
be responsible for any damage or delay
caused by any parties' Inability to perform
installations in the time frame desired by the
Contractor.
3.8 Allowances
3.8.1 The Contractor shall include in the Contract
Sum all allowances stated in the Contract
Documents. Items covered by allowances
shall be supplied for such amounts and by
such persons or entities as the Owner may
direct but the Contractor shall not be required
to employ persons or entities against which
the Contractor makes reasonable objection.
3.8.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract
Documents:
.1
.2
3
.4
3.9 Superintendent
matenals and equipment under an
allowance shall be selected
promptly by the Owner to avoid
delay in the Work;
allowances shall cover the cost to
the Contractor of materials and
equipment delivered at the site
and all required taxes, less
applicable trade discounts;
Contractor's costs for unloading
and handling at the site, labor,
installation costs, overhead, profit
and other expenses contemplated
for stated allowance amounts shall
be included in the Contract Sum
and not In the allowances;
whenever costs are more than or
less than allowances, the Contract
Sum shall be adjusted accordingly
by Change Order. The amount of
the Change Order shall reflect (1)
the difference between actual
costs and the allowance. under
Clause 3 8 2 2 and (2) changes in
Contractor's costs under Clause
3.8 2.3.
3.9.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent
superintendent and necessary assistants who
shall be in attendance at the Project site
during performance of the Work. The super-
intendent shall represent the Contractor, and
communications given to the supenntendent
shall be as binding as if given to the
Contractor.
3.9.2 The superintendent shall be in attendance at
the Project site not less than eight (8) hours
per day, five (5) days per week unless the job
is closed down due to a general strike or
conditions beyond the control of the Con-
tractor or until termination of the Contract in
Section 00700 - General Conditions - Page 5 of 21
3.10 Contractor's Progress Schedules
accordance with the Contract Documents.
The superintendent shall not be employed on
any other project during the course of the
Work
3.10.1 The Contractor, promptly after being awarded
the Contract shall prepare and submit for the
Owner's and Architect's Information a
Progress schedule for the Work The
schedule shall not exceed time limits current
under the Contract Documents, shall be
revised at appropdate intervals as required by
the conditions of the Work and Project, shall
be related to the entire Project to the extent
required by the Contract Documents, and shall
provide for expeditious and pracucabie
execution of the Work
3.102 The Contractor shall prepare and keep
currant for the Architect's approval, a
schedule of submittals which is coordinated
with the Progress schedule and allows the Ar-
chitect reasonable time to review submittals.
3.10.3 The Contractor shall conform to the most
recent schedules.
3 11 Documents and Samples at the Site
3.11.1 The Contractor shall maintain at the site for
the Owner one record copy of the Drawings,
Specifications, Addneda, Change Orders and
other Modifications, in good order and marked
currently to record changes and selections
made dunng construction, and In addition
approved Shop Drawings, Product Data,
Samples and similar required submittals
These shall be accessible to the Architect and
Owner and shall be delivered to the Architect
for submittal to the Owner upon completlon of
the Work
3.12 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples
3.12.1 Shop Drawings am drawings, diagrams,
schedules and other data specialty prepared
for the Work by the Contractor or a
Subcontractor, Sub - subcontractor, manufac-
turer, supplier or distributor to Illustrate some
portion of the Work
3.12.2 Product Data are illustrations, standard
schedules, performance charts, instructions,
brochures, diagrams and other information
furnished by the Contractor to Illustrate
materials or equipment for some portion of the
Work.
3.123 Samples are physical examples which
illustrate matedats, equipmentor workmanship
and establish standards by which the Work will
be judged.
3.12.4 The Contractor shall review, approve and
submit with reasonable promptness and In
such sequence as to cause no delay in the
Work or in the work of the Owner or any
separate Contractor, ail Shop Drawings,
Product Data and Samples required by the
Contract Documents. At the time of
submission, the Contractor shall inform the
Architect in wnting of any deviation in the
Shop Drawings or Samples from the
requirements of the Contract Documents.
3.12.5 The Contractor shag perform no portion of the
Work requiring submittal and review of Shop
Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar
submittals until the respective submittal has
been approved by the Architect Such Work
shall be in accordance with approved sub-
mittals.
3.12.6 By approving and submitting Shop Drawings,
Product Data. Samples and similar submittals,
the Contractor represents that the Contractor
has determined and venfied materials, field
measurements and field construction criteria
related thereto, or wall do so, and has checked
and coordinated the information contained
within such submittals with the requirements
of the Work and of the Contract Documents.
3.12.7 The Contractor shall not be relieved of respon-
sibility for deviations from requirements of the
Contract Documents by the Architect's
approval of Shop Drawings, Product Data,
Samples or similar submittals unless the
Contractor has specifically Informed the
Architect in writing of such deviation of time of
submittal and the Architect has given written
approval to the specific deviation. The Con-
tractor shall not be relieved of responsibility
far errors or omissions in Shop Drawings,
Product Data, Samples or similar submittals by
the Architect's approval thereof.
3.12.8 The Contractor shall promptly make
corrections required by the Architect and shall
resubmit the required number of corrected
copies of Shop Drawings or new Product Data
and Samples. The Contractor shall direct
specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted
Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples, to
revisions other than those required by the
Architect on previoussubmitto)s. Resubmittals
necessitated by required corrections due to
Contractor's errors or omissions, or less than
complete submittals as required by the
specifications, shall not be cause for extension
of Contract Time.
3.12.9 Informational submittals upon which the
Architect is not expected to take responsive
action may be so identified In the Contract
Documents.
3.12.10 When professional certification of performance
cntena of materials, systems or equipment is
required by the Contract Documents, the Ar-
chitect shall be entitled to rely upon the
accuracy and completeness of such
calculations and certifications.
3.12.11 When Shop Drawings, Cuts, or Brochures are
forwarded to the Architect by the Contractor
for approval, a copy of the Contractor's letter
of transmittal with project name, Contractor's
name, number of drawings, title and other
pertinent data covering each transaction is to
be mailed to the Owner. The Architect and his
consulting Engineers shell follow the same
procedure when It Is necessary for them to
return or transfer Shop Drawings. Cuts or
Brochures either between themselves or to the
Contractor for changes, corrections or
resubmitl, so that the Owner can record and
follow procedure for each transaction to
finality, One complete set of the above shall
be furnished the Owner.
3.12.12 Within fifteen (15) days after Notice to Proceed
the Contractor, Architect and Owner shall
jointly prepare a schedule fixing the dates for
submission of Shop Drawings, Product Data
and Samples by the Contractor and review by
the Architect The Contractor shall submit In
accordance with the schedule, and the
Architect shall endeavor to review in ac-
cordance with the schedule. The schedule
shall be consistent with the currently approved
Progress Schedule. The Contractor shall
submit no Shop Drawings, Product Data or
Samples which do not comply with the
Contract Documents.
3.12.13 If no Shop Drawings/Product Data/Sample
Submittal Schedule is furnished by the
Contractor then no claim for delay shall be
allowed the Contractor on account of failure of
the Architect to furnish drawings or approval
of shop drawings and samples until fourteen
(14) days after demand thereof and not then
unless such claim be deemed reasonable by
the Owner.
3.12.14 It Is not the intent of the Specifications to limit
materials to the product of any particular
manufacturer. Where definite materials,
equipment or futures have been specified by
name, manufacturer or catalog number, it has
been done so as to establish a definite
standard and reference for comparison as to
quality, application, physical conformity, and
other characteristics.
3.13 Use of Site
Section 00700 - General Conditions - Page 6 of 21
Substitution of materials shall not be made
without prior wna_en approval of the Owner
and the Architect
3.12.14.1 The Contractor shall be
responsible for any additional
costs or delays resulting from
having furnished materials,
equipment or fixtures other than
specified, and shall reimburse the
Owner for any increased design
costs resulting from such
substitutions.
3.13.1 The Contractor shall confine operations at the
site to areas permitted by law, ordinances,
permits and the Contract Documents and shall
not unreasonably encumber the site with
materials or equipment
3.132 All Work or materiels of every description
subject to injury during the course of the Work
shall be fully protected from damage from any
source. Should any Work or materials under
this Contract become damaged in any way or
manner the Contractor shall repair and perfect
the same at his own expense.
3 14 Cutting and Patching
3.14.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for
cutting, fitting or patching required to
complete the Work or to make Its parts fit
together properly.
3.14.2 The Contractor shall not damage or endanger
a portion of the Work or fully or partially
completed construction of the Owner or
separate contractors by cutting, patching or
otherwise altering such construction, or by
excavation. The Contractor shall not cut or
othefwise alter such construction by the
Owner or a separate contractor except with
written consent of the Owner and of such
separate contractor, such consent shall not be
unreasonably withheld. The Contractor shall
not unreasonably withhold from the Owner or
separate contractor the Contractor's consent
to cutting or otherwise altenng the Work
3.15 Cleaning Up
3.15.1 The Contractor shall keep the premises and
surrounding area free from accumulation of
waste materials or rubbish caused by
operations under the Contract. At completion
of the Work the Contractor shall remove from
and about the Project waste materials, rub-
bish, the Contractor's tools, construction
equipment machinery and surplus matenals.
3.15 2 If the Contractor fads to clean up as provided
in the Contract Ooucments, the Owner may do
so and the cost thereof shall be charged to
the Contractor.
3.16 Access to Work
316.1 The Contractor shall provide the Owner and
Architect access to the Work in preparation
and progress wherever located.
3.17 Royalties end Patents
3.17.1 The Contractor shall pay all royalties and
license fees. The Contractor shall defend suits
or claims for Infringement of patent rights and
shall hold the Owner and Architect harmless
loan loss on account thereof.
3.18 Indemnification
Section 00700 - General Conditions - Page 7 of 21
3.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the
Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless
the Owner, Architect, Architect's consultants,
and agents and employees of any of them
from and against claims, damages, losses and
expenses, Including but not limited to
attorneys, fees, arising out of or resulting from
performance of the Work provided that such
claim, damage, loss or expense Is atmbutahle
to bodily Injury, sickness, disease or death, or
to injury to or destruction of tangible property
(other than the Work itself) including loss of
use resulting therefrom, but only to the extent
caused In whole or In part by negligent acts or
omissions of the Contractor, a Subcontractor,
anyone directly or Indirectly employed by
them or anyone for whose acts they may be
liable, regardless of whether or not such claim,
damage, loss of expense is caused in part by
a party indemnified hereunder. Such
obligation shall not be construed 10 negate,
abridge. or reduce other rights or obligations
of indemnity which would otherwise exist as to
a party or person descnbed In this Paragraph
3.18
3.18 2 In claims against any person or entity indent.
nified under this Paragraph 3.18 by an
employee of the Contractor, a Subcontractor,
anyone directly or indirectly employed by
them or anyone for whose acts they may be
liable, the indemnification obligation underthls
Paragraph 3.18 shall not be limited by a
limitation on amount or type of damages,
compensation or benefits payable by or for the
Contractor or a Subcontractor under worker's
or workmen's compensation acts, disability
benefit acts or other employee benefit acts.
3.18,3 The obligations of the Contractor under this
Paragraph 3.18 shall not extend to the liability
of the Architect the Architect's consultants,
and agents and employees of any of them
arising out of (1) the preparation or approval
of maps, drawings, opinions, reports. surveys.
Change Order, designs or specifications, or
(2) the giving of or the failure to give
directions or instructions by the Architect the
Architect's consultants, and agents and
employees of any of them provided such
giving or failure to give is the primary cause of
the injury or damage.
3.19 Conditions Affecting the Work
3.19.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for taldng
all steps necessary to ascertain the nature and
location of the work and the general and local
conditions which can affect the Work or the
costs thereof. Failure of the Contractor to
acquaint himself with conditions which may
affect the Work including, but not limited to
conditions relating to transportation, handling,
storage of matenals, availability of labor,
water, roads, weather, topographic and
subsurface conditions, multi-prime contract
4.1 Arohnect/Engineer
conditions, applicable provisions of law, and
the character and availability of equipment
and facilities needed prior to and during the
execution of work shall not relieve the
Contractor of his responsibilities under the
Contract Documents and shall not constitute
a basis for adjustment In the Contract Sum or
the Contract Time under any circumstances.
The Owner assumes no responsibility for any
understanding or representation about
conditions affecting the Work made by any of
his officers, employees, representatives or
agents pnor to the execution of the Contract
unless such understanding or representations
are expressly stated in the Contract Docu-
ments.
ARTICLE 4 - ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT
4.1 1 Unless otherwise provided for in the Contract
Documents, the Architect/Engineer ("NE) will
provide general administration of the Contract
and will be the Owner's representative during
construction and until final payment The
Owner assumes no responsibility for any
understanding given or representation made
orally by its agents prior to the execution of
this Contract unless such understanding or
representation is expressly stated in the Con-
tract
4.1.2 The A/E has the authority to not on behalf of
the Owner to the extent provided for In the
Contract Documents unless otherwise
modified by written instrument which will be
shown to the Contractor. The NE will advise
and consult with the Owner, and the Owner's
written instructions to the Contractor will
generally be Issued through the NE, except
that the Owner reserves the right on ap-
propnate occasions to Issue instructions
directly to the Contractor through otherdesig-
nated representatives. All written
communications concerning the Project shall
be furnished to the Owner, the NE and the
Contractor by the party originating the
communication.
4.1.3 All Instructions effecting Contract Sum,
Contract Time or Contract Interpretation shall
be confirmed expeditiously in wnting with
copies fumished to the NE, the Owner's
designated representative and the Contractor
by the parry issuing the Instruction.
4.1.4 The Owner's representative and the NE, with
the Owner's approval, shall interpret the
Contract requirements, and have the authority
to reject work performed by the Contractor
which in the opinion of the Owner or the NE
does not meet the requirements of the
Contract and to order such work removed and
replaced.
4.1.5 The A/E will make periodic visits to the sae to
Section 00700 - General Conditions - Page 8 of 21
familiarize himself with the progress and
quality of the Work and to determine if the
Work is proceeding In accordance with the
Contract Documents. The Contractor shall
provide sufficient safe and proper access at
all reasonable times for observation and /or
inspection of the Work by the Owner and the
A/E
4.1.6 The A/E will not have control over or in
charge of and will not be responsible for
construction means, methods, techniques,
sequences or procedures, or for safety
precautions and programs in connection with
the Work since these are solely the
responsibility of the Contractor.
4.1.7 The NE will have authority to require
additional inspection or testing of the Work,
whether or not such Work is fabricated.
Installed or completed. However, this
authority of the NE shall not give rise to the
duty or responsibility of the A/E to the
Contractor, subcontractors, material and
equipment suppliers, their agents or
employees, or other persons performing
portions of the Work.
4.1.8 The A/E will, with reasonable promptness,
review, and approve, or take other appropriate
action upon Contractor's submittals for the
purpose of checking for conformance with the
design concept of the Work and with the Infor-
mation given in the Contract Documents.
Such review is not conducted for the purpose
of determining the accuracy and completeness
of other details such as dimensions and quan-
tities. or for substantiating Instructions for
Installation of equipment or systems all of
which remain the responsibility of the
Contractor. The NE's review of the
Contractor's submittals shall not relive the
Contractor of the obligations under
paragraphs 3.3, 3,5 and 3.12. The A/E's
review shall not constitute approval of safety
precautions or, unless otherwise specifically
stated by the NE, of any constmction means.
methods, techniques, sequences or
procedures. The NE's approval of a specific
Item shall not indicate approval of an
assembly of which the item is a component
4.1.9 The NE will prepare Change Orders and may
authorize minor changes in the Work as
provided in paragraph 7.4.
4.1.10 The NE will conduct inspections to determine
the date or dates of completion, will receive
and forward to the Owner warranties and
related documents required by the Contract
and will Issue a final Certificate for Payment
upon compliance with the requirements of the
Contract Documents,
4.1.11 The NE will interpret and decide matters con-
cerning performance under and requirements
of the Contract Documents with reasonable
promptness and within any time limits agreed
upon.
5.1 Definitions
ARTICLE 5 - SUBCONTRACTORS
5.1.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has
a direct contract with the Contractor to
perform a portion of the Work at the site. The
term "subcontractor does not include a
separate contractor or subcontractors of a
separate contractor.
5.1.2 A Sub-subcontractor is a person or entity who
has a direct or Indirect contract with a
Subcontractor to perform a portion of the
Work at the site.
5 2 Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for Portions
of the Work
5.2.1 As soon as practicable after the receipt of the
bids and before the execution of the Contract,
the bidder awarded the contract shall submit
to the Owner and the A/E for approval, a list of
all subcontractors he, and /or his major
subcontractors propose to use n the
construction of the Project He shall not
employ any subcontractor to whom the NE or
Owner may have a reasonable objection The
Contractor will not be required to employ any
subcontractor against whom he has a
reasonable objection
522 11 the Owner or Architect has reasonable
objection to a person or entity proposed by
the Contractor, the Contractor shall propose
another to whom the Owner or Architect has
no reasonable objection. The Contract Sum
shall be increased or decreased by the
itemized difference in cost occasioned by such
change and an appropriate Change Order
shall be issued. However, no increase in the
Contract Sum shall be allowed for such
change unless the Contractor has acted
promptly and responsively in submitting
names as required,
5,2.3 After the execution of the Contract, a change
in any approved subcontract or the addition of
any new subcontractor can only be made with
the written consent of the Owner.
5.3 Subcontractural Relations
5.3 1 The Contractor agrees to bind every
subcontractor and every subcontractor agrees
to be bound by the terms of the Contract
Documents as for as applicable to his work
The Contractor shall further more fully Inform
his subcontractors prior to executing an
agreement with them that they will be required
to perform their work in conformance with
related documents and to submit cost es.
Urinates and Change Order proposals In
complete and lull analytical detail. The Con-
tractor shall defend, Indemnify and safe
Section 00700 - General Condition - Page 9 of 21
harmless the Owner for any subcontractor's
claim which may result from the failure of the
Contractor to incorporate the provisions in this
Contract or Agreement with any of his
subcontractors.
ARNCLE 6-CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE
CONTRACTORS
6.1 Owner's Right to Perform Construction and to Award
Separate Contracts
6.1.1 The Owner reserves the right to perform
construction or operations related to the
Project with the Owner's own forces, and to
award separate contracts In connection with
other portions of the Project or other
construction or operations on the site under
these or similar Conditions of the Contract
6.1.2 When separate contracts are awarded for dif-
ferent portions of the Project or other
construction or operations on the site, the
term •Contractor" in the Contract Documents
in each case shall mean the Contractor who
executes each separate Owner- Contractor
Agreement If any part of this Contractor's
work depends for proper execution or proper
results on the work of any other separate
contractor, this Contractor shall Inspect and
prompty report in wnting to the A/E any
discrepancies or defects he may find in such
other work that render it unsuitable for such
proper execution end results. Failure of this
Contractor to so inspect and report shall
constitute and acceptance of the other
contractor's work as fit and proper to receive
his work except as to defects which may
develop in the other separate contractor's
work after the execution of this Contractor's
work
6 1 3 Should this Contractor cause delay or cause
damage to the work or property of any
separate contractor on the Project this
Contractor shall, upon due notice, endeavor to
settle with such other contractor by
agreement If such separate contractor sues
the Owner on account of any damage alleged
to have been so sustained, the owner shall
notify this Contractor who shall defend such
proceedings and pay all costs in connection
therewith and, if any judgment against the
Owner arises therefrom, this Contractor shall
pay or satisfy R
6.1.4 The Contractor shall afford the Owner and
separate contractors reasonable opportunity
for Introduction and storage of their materials
and equipment and performance of their
activities and shall connect and coordinate the
Contractor's construction and operations with
theirs as required by the Contract Documents.
6.1.5 Costs caused by delays or by improperly
timed activities or defective construction shall
be bome by the party responsible therefor.
6.1.6 The Contractor shell promptly remedy damage
wrongfully caused by the Contractor to
completed or partially completed construction
or to property of the Owner or separate
contractors as provided in Subparagraph
10.2.5.
6.2 Owner's Right to Clean Up
6.2.1 If a dispute e0ses among the Contractor,
separate contractors and the Owner as to the
responsibility under their respective contracts
for maintaining the premises and surrounding
area free from waste materials and rubbish as
described in Paragraph 3.15. the Owner may
clean up and allocate the cost among those
responsible as the Architect determines to be
just
AHi1CLE 7 - CLAIMS AND CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT
7.1 The Owner, without invalidating the Contract and without
approval of the Surety, may order changes in the Work
within the general scope of the Contract consisting of
additions, deletions or other revisions, the Contract Sum
and the Contract Time being adjusted accordingly. All
such changes in the Work shall be authorized by Change
Order, and shall be performed under the applicable
condlUons of the Contract Documents.
7 2 Change Orders - Definition
A Change Order is a written order to the Contractor
signed by the Owner and the NE issued after execution
of the Contract, authorizing change in the Work or an
adjustment In the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.
The Contract sum and the Contract time may be changed
only by Change Order. A Change Order signed by the
Contractor indicates his agreement therewith, Including
the adjustment in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.
7.3 It is recognized by the parties hereto and agreed by them
that it is the express Intention of the parties not -
withstanding any other provisions in this Contract, that
any changes in of additions to the Work ordered by
Owner and any resulting delays in the Work or Increases
in Contractor's costs and expenses, including those
ansing from any errors, omissions or imperfections In the
Specifications and Drawings, shall not constitute or give
rise to any claim, demand or cause of action of any
nature whatsoever in favor of Contractor, whether for
breach of contract, quantum meruit or otherwise:
provided however, that Owner shall be liable to Contractor
for the sum of the items set forth in Paragraph 7.9.2
herein connection with any change in the Work as
determined in a Change Order, it being agreed hereby
that such sum, together with any extension of time
contained In said Change Order, shall constitute full
compensation to Contractor for all costs, expenses and
damages to Contractor, whether direct consequential or
otherwise In any wise Incident to, ansing out of, or
resulting directly or Indirectly from the work performed by
Contractor under such Change Order.
74 Unit Prices
Section 00700 - General Conditions - Page 10 of 21
If unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents or sub-
sequently agreed upon, and if the quantities originally
contemplated are so changed in a proposed Change
Order that application of the agreed unit prices to the
quantities of work proposed will cause substantial inequity
to the Owner or the Contractor, the applicable unit prices
shall be equitably adjusted.
7.4.1 Each unit price bid by the Contractor shall
include all costs applicable to the work
including but not limited to mobilization,
demobilization, labor, materials, equipment,
supervision, delays, overhead at any level,
and profit
7.4.2 Either parry may request an equitable
adjustment The equitable adjustment shall be
based upon any increase or decrease in costs
due solely to the variation above one hundred
and fifteen percent (115) or below eighty-five
percent (85) of the originally specified
amount If the quantity venation causes an
increase m the time necessary for completion,
the Owner, upon receipt of a written request
for an extension of time within thirty (30) days
from the recognition of the variation or within
such further period of time as may be granted
by wntten agreement signed by the Owner,
will ascertain the facts and make such
adjustment for changing the completion date
as In his judgment the findings justify.
7.5 Contractor's Claims for Additional Costs
7 5.1 If the Contractor wishes to make a claim for
increase In the Contract Sum, he shall give
the Owner and the A/E detailed written notice
thereof which complies with Subparagraph
7.5.4 below, within thirty (30) days after the
occurrence of the event giving rise to such
claim. This notice shall be given by the
Contractor before proceeding to execute the
work except in an emergency endangering
life or property.
7.52 The Owner, with the assistance of the NE,
shall determine the amount, if any, due the
Contractor and shall notify the Contractor of
its decision within a reasonable time. Any
change in the Contract Sum resulting from
such claim shall be authorized by Change
Order.
7.5.3 If the Contractor disagrees with such decision,
he shall provide Owner and NE wntten notice
of his objection within 30 calendar days of
receipt of Owner's decision and shall proceed
In accordance with the Contract The
Contractor's continued performance shall not
constitute a waiver of the Contractor's claim
provided that timely notice has been given.
7.5.4 Any claim should contain the following
elements: (1) an analysis of the relevant
Contract provisions, (2) a description of the
facts, (3) a statement of why the particular
Section 00700 - Canard Conditions - Page 11 of 21
facts warrant compensation under the teens of trades, of the materials
the Contract. (4) supporting cost or pricing and supplies used,
data which conforms with the requirements of which shall be itemized
Paragraph 7.9.2 herein, (5) legal analysis, If completely to Include
appropriate, (6) expert opinion, If appropdate, unit cost, quantity and
(7) certification, and (8) a formal request for total cost.
decision. All direct costs should be accurately b) Estimated wages and
documented in the claim, i.e., labor should applicable federal and
come from payrolls, equipment from state employment
equipment reporting forms and materials taxes paid for skilled,
should be based on invoices. semi-skilled or un-
skilled labor
performing the
7.6 Claims for Additional Time additional work, which
shall be Itemized
The Contractor shall make claim for additional time and completely to include
time - related damages in accordance with this Article and trade(s), hourly rate,
Article 8. hours and total cost.
Such wages shall
include labor required
7.7 Minor Changes for performance of the
changed work only.
The NE, with concurrence of the Owner, will have Working foremen may
authority to order minor changes In the Work not be included; all other
involving an adjustment in the Contract Sum or an supervisors shall be
extension of the Contract Time. Such changes shall be excluded and shall be
effected by written order which the Contractor shall carry considered as a part of
out promptly. field supervision
Labor for supporting
services, including but
7.8 Bar to Claims not limited to safety
provisions, layout, and
No claim shall be allowed for an adjustment under this or trash removal, shall be
any other provision of the Contract If first asserted after excluded and shall be
final payment under this contract considered as a part of
overhead.
c) Estimated cost to the
7.9 Procedures for Claims and Change Orders Contractor for
additional construction
7.9.1 The Contingency Allowance is in addition to equipment used solely
any cost allowance provided for under the on the Change Order
various sections. Expenditures from the work to include rental
Contingency Allowance must be made by rates or owned
Change Order issued by the NE and equipment rates for
approved by the Owner. Any unused portion such items of
of the Contingency Allowance will be equipment while in
deducted from the final payment. use, which shall be
itemized completely to
792 Lump Sum Proposal include type(s), the
number(s) of each,
In responding to a request for a proposed hourly rate, hours and
price for a change In the work or In total cost Equipment
submitting a claim for an Increase In the which is used regularly
Contract Sum, the Contractor shall fumish a 01 the job shall be
lump sum proposal supported by a complete used in Change Order
breakdown as described hereafter. Any work at no extra
request for a time extension must be Justified charge. Rental or
and presented In adequate detail. showing owned equipment rates
that the proposed change will delay the final shall be no greater
Contract Completion Date, to permit than those established
evaluation. by the AGC for the
local area. As used
7.9.2.1 The proposal for the adjustment of herein the terms
work which a Subcontractor " c o n s t r u c t i o n
directly performs shall contain the equipment' and
following items' "equipment' shall
Include wheeled
a) Estimated cost, using vehicles and small
any discounts to the tools.
Section 00700 - General Conditions - Page 12 of 21
d) Estimated trensporta- and 7.9.22 to the net charge
lion costs for delivery based upon the amount by which
and handling of the total charges exceed the total
materiels and supplies, credits; if there is a net credit no
bringing to the overhead or profit shall be
removing from the site charged.
additional construcuon
equipment and /or new 7.9.3 Submission Time
items of Installed
e q u i p m e n t , if Contractor's proposals for changes in the
applicable, which shall contract amount or time for Change Order
be itemized separately. work shall be submitted within seven (7)
calendar days of the Owner's or NE's written
e) Estimated off -site request for same, unless the Owner or NE
storage costs in excess extends such period of time in writing due to
of thirty (30) calendar the circumstances involved.
days for new items of
installed equipment, If 7.9.4 Processing
applicable.
q Percentage permitted The Owner will undertake to formally process
to be added to the Owner- Contractor agreed Change Orders
total sum of o, b, c, d, within thirty (30) calendar days of agreement,
and e above, to cover provided the Contingency Allowance Is not
all field supervision exceeded. In those cases where Change
( I n c l u d i n g Orderwork causes the Contingency Allowance
superintendents), use to be exceeded, approval of higher authority
of other tools and may be necessary and, if such approvals are
equipment already on necessary, the Owner will have thirty (30)
the lob b - as necessary additional calendar days to process such
for performance of the agreed Change Order.
Change order work
field and general home 7.9.5 Directive to Proceed
office services and
expenses, interference Contractor's proposals are not timely received,
with other work, or if such proposals are not acceptable to the
adjustments to NE and /or the Owner, or it there remains
progress schedules disagreement concerning any terms of a
and all other overhead proposed Change Order, or if the Contractor
(Including bonds and falls or refuses to execute timely a Change Or-
Insurance) and profit der, of 1 the changed work should be started
shall be 15. immediately to avoid damage or delay to the
7.9.2.2 To the amount of the adjustment Project, the Owner may, at his discretion,
of the Subcontractor(s) as listed direct the Contractor to proceed with the
under paragraph 7.9 2 1 above, changed work. Such direction, if given orally,
the Contractor will be allowed to shall be confirmed in wnbng within seven (7)
add a percentage of 5 to cover calendar days.
all overhead expenses and profit,
Including supervision, small tools, 7.9.5.1 The Issuance of a Directive to
insurance and bonds. It is to be Proceed vnll not prejudice any of
expressly understood that when the Contractor's right to make
the Contractor performs the work claims or to appeal disputed
with his own forces and there is no matters.
Subcontractor Involved, the
Contractor will be allowed the 15 7.9.6 If the Contractor intends to assert a claim for
markup descnbed hereinbefore an adjustment of cost or time over and above
and the 5 markup Is then not any adjustment already being granted in a
applicable. Change Order, he must within thirty (30)
calendar days alter receipt of awritten Change
7.9.2.3 In cases where changes In the Order, or oral or written Directive to Proceed
work result in a credit to the with a proposed change, submit to the Owner
Owner, the credit shall be limited a written statement setting forth in decal the
to direct costs; that is, no nature and monetary extent or such claim.
overhead or profit shall be applied The Contractor shell certify that the claim Is
to such costs. In cases where a made In good faith and that the supporting
change in the work results in both data Is current accurate and complete to the
credits and charges to the Owner, best of his knowledge and belief, and the the
the contractor will be allowed to amount requested accurately reflects the
add the overhead and profit contract adjustment for which the Contractor
percentages Indicated In 7.9.2.1 believes the Owner Is liable The 30-day
period of time for submission of such claim
may be extended only by wntten agreement
signed by the Owner.
7.9.7 Except for claims based on defects In
Specifications furnished by the Owner, no
claim for any change shall be allowed for any
costs incurred more than twenty (20) days
before the Contractor gives wdtten notice as
therein required.
7.9.8 The Contractor agrees that the Owner or its
representatives shall have access and the
tight to examine any directly pertinent books,
documents, papers, and records of the
Contractor. Further. the Contractor agrees to
include In all Its subcontracts a provision to
the effect that the Subcontractor agrees that
the Owner or any of Its duly authorized
representatives shall have access to and the
right to examine any directly pertinent books,
documents, papers and records of such Sub-
contractor relating to any claim from the
Contract whether or not the Subcontractor is
party to the claim.
ARTICLE 8 - CONTRACT COMPLETION TIME
8.1 Note to Proceed
The Contract Time will begin on the date designated in
the Notice to Proceed Issued by the Owner, and the
Contractor is required to complete the work in the time
that is stated In the Contract togetherwlth any extensions
thereof. Should be Owner delay the Work or any part
thereof for any reasons, the time for completion of the
Work will be extended by an equivalent amount of time.
8.1.1. The term 'day as used in the Contract
Documents shall mean calendar day unless
othenvlse specifically defined.
82 Progress and Completion
8.2.1 Time limits stated In the Contract Documents
are of the essence of the Contract By
executing the Agreement the Contractor
confirms that the Contract Time Is a
reasonable penod for performing the Work.
8.2.2 The Contractor shall not commence
operations on the site or elsewhere prior to
the effective date of insurance required by
Article 11 to be furnished by the Contractor.
The date of commencement of the Work shall
not be changed by delay in obtaining of such
insurance.
8.2.3 The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously
with adequate forces and shall achieve
Substantial Completion within the Contract
Time.
8.3 Delays and Extensions of Time
8.3.1 The Contractor may be granted an extension
Section 00700 - General Conditions - Page 13 of 21
of time because of changes ordered In the
Contract, or because of strikes, lockouts, fire,
unusual delay in transportation, unavoidable
casualties, inclement weather in excess of nor-
mal, or any cause beyond the Contractor's
control which constitutes a justifiable delay.
The Contract Time shall be extended by
Change Order subject to the following
provisions.
8.3.2 Claims for extensions of time must be made in
wnting within thirty (30) calendar days after
the occurrence of the delay. All time
extension claims shall be supported by
sufficient written evidence to Justify the claim.
In the case of a continuing cause of delay,
only one claim is necessary. Claims for
extensions of time shall be stated In numbers
of whole or half calendar days
8.3 2.1 In case of claims for extension of
time because of Inclement weather
in excess of normal, such
extension of time shall be granted
only because such inclement
weather prevented the execution
of major critical items of work
which delays the final completion
of the Contract.
8.3.3 The Owner, with the assistance of the NE,
shall ascertain the facts and the extent of the
delay and extend the time for completing the
Work when, In its judgment the findings justify
such an extension of Contract lime. The
Contractor's objection to such decision or
claim for an extension in excess of that
granted by Owner shall be preserved in
accordance with the provisions of Article 7.
8.3.4 The Contractor shall have no claim for
compensation or damages for delays or
hindrances to the Work occasioned by any act
or omission of the Owner, other provisions of
the Contract notwithstanding, and further
agrees that he shall be fully compensated for
all delays solely by an extension of time.
8.3.5 No extension of time shall release the
Contractor of the Surety furnishing a perfor-
mance or payment bond from all obligations
thereunder, which obligations shall remain In
full force until the discharge of the Contract
8.4 Acceleration of the Work
The Contractor is responsible for the timely completion of
the Work within the Contract Time. I, In the Judgment of
the Owner, the Work Is behind schedule and the rate of
progress is inadequate to regain scheduled progress so
as to insure timely completion of the entire Work or a
separable portion thereof, the Contractor, when so
directed by the Owner, shall immediately take action to
accelerate the rate of progress by any one or a
combination of the following or other suitable measures:
.1 An increase In working forces.
2 An increase in equipment or tools.
.3 An increase in hours of work or number or
shifts.
.4 Expedited delivery of materials.
8.4.1 The Contractor shall, within twenty -four (24)
hours after being so directed, notify the Owner
of the specific measures taken and/or plan to
accelerate the rate of progress, together with
an estimate as to when scheduled progress
will be regained. Should the plan be deemed
inadequate by the Owner, the Contractor will
take additional steps as necessary until it
meets with the Owner's approval. The
accelerated rate of work will continue until
scheduled progress is regained. Scheduled
progress will be established from the latest
revised progress schedule for the Project. The
Contractor shall not be entitled to additional
compensation for the accelerated effort he
applies to the Work under the terms of this
subparagraph.
8.5 Failure to Complete Work on Time
8.5.1 The time set forth in the Contract for the
completion of the Work Is of the essence to
the Contract The Contractor's failure to com-
plete the Work within such time will cause
damage to the Owner. Where appropriate, the
value of such damages may be stated In the
Agreement and /or the Supplementary
conditions.
8.5.2 For each consecutive calendar day after the
expiration of the Contract Time that the Work
is not substantially completed and accepted,
the amount per day as stipulated in the
Contract will be deducted form the money due
or to become due the Contractor, not as a
penalty but as liquidated damages for
additional contract supervision expenses and
Owner's administrative costs In obtaining the
use of the Work
ANTICLE 9 - PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
9.1 Contract Sum
9.1.1 The Contract sum Is stated in the Agreement
and, including authorized adjustments, Is the
total amount payable by the Owner to the
Contractor for performance of the Work under
the Contract Documents.
9.2 Schedule or Values
9.2.1 Upon execution of the Contract, the
Contractor shall submit to the Owner and NE
a schedule of values allocated to various
portions of the Work prepared in such form
and supported by such data to substantiate its
accuracy as the Architect may require. This
schedule shall be used as a basis for
reviewing the Contractor's Applications for
Payment. The provision of an adequate
schedule of values is a condition precedent to
Section 00700 - General Conditions - Page 14 of 21
9.3 Applications for Payment
9.4 Certificates for Payment
the processing of the first Payment
Application.
9.3.1 At least ten days before the date established
for each progress payment the Contractor
shall submit to the Architect an itemized
Application for Payment for operations com-
pleted in accordance with the schedule of
values. Such application shall be supported
by such data substantiating the work
performed during the preceding calendar
month as the Owner or Architect may require,
and shall include an affidavit that all payrolls,
bills for labor, materials, equipment or other
indebtedness connected with such work have
been paid or will be paid with thirty days after
receipt of the Progress Payment
9.3.1.1. Any request for release of
retainage shall be accompanied by
written consent of the Contractor's
Surety.
9.32 Unless otherwise provided In the Contract
Documents, payments shall be made on
account of materials an equipment delivered
and suitably stored at the site for subsequent
Incorporation in the Work If approved In
advance by the Owner, payment may be
made for materials and equipment suitably
stored off the site. Payment for materials and
equipment stored on or off the site shall be
conditioned upon compliance by the Contrac-
tor with procedures satisfactory to the Owner
to establish the Owner's tale to such matenals
and equipment or otherwise protect the
Owner's interest and shall include copies or
bills of lading, invoices, delivery receipts or
other evidence of the location and value of
such materials.
9.3.3 All material and work covered by partial pay-
ments made shall thereupon become the sole
titled property of the Owner, but his provision
shall not be construed as relieving the
Contractor from the sold responsibility for the
care and protection of materials and work
upon which payments have been made, or the
restoration of any damaged work or as a
waiver of the right of the Owner to require
fulfillment of all of the terms of the Contract.
9.3.4 Payments to the Contractor shall not be
construed to release the Contractor or his
Surety from any obligations under this
Contract
9.4.1 The Architect will, within seven days after
receipt of the Contractor's Application for
Payment, either issue to the Owner a
Certificate for Payment, with a copy to the
Contractor, for such amount as the Architect
determines Is properly due, or notify the
Contractor and Owner in writing of the
Architect's reasons for withholding certification
in whole or in part as provided in
Subparagraph 9.5.1.
9 5 Decisions to Withhold Certification
9.5.1 The Owner or the NE may withhold, or on
account of subsequently discovered evidence,
may nullify that part of any certificate to such
extent as may be necessary to protect the
Owner from loss on account of:
9.6 Progress Payments
.1 detective Work not remedied;
.2 damage to the work of another
contractor,
.3 failure to malntam scheduled
progress;
.4 receipt of written notice by the
Owner of unpaid bills as stipulated
In Section 53 232, Property Code,
V.T.C.S., If the Contractor has not
provided a payment bond and it
the Contract Sum does not exceed
%25,000.00.Any funds no withheld
shall be released to the Contractor
if he fumishes a bond for release
of Tien as provided In Section
53.236, Property Code, V.T.C.S.
When the above grounds are
removed, payment will be made
for amounts withheld;
.5 persistent failure to carry out the
Work in accordance with the
Contract Documents;
.6 reasonable evidence that the Work
will not be completed within the
Contract Time;
.7 reasonable evidence that the Work
cannot be completed for the
remainder of the Contract Sum
9.6.1 After the Architect has Issued and the Owner
has approved a Certificate for Payment the
Owner shall make payment In the manner and
within the time provided In the Contract
Documents, and shall so notify the Architect
96.2 The Contractor shalt promptly pay each
Subcontractor, upon receipt of payment from
the Owner, out of the amount paid to the
Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's
portion of the Work the amount to which said
Subcontractor Is entitled, reflecting
percentages actually retained from payments
to the Contractor on account of such
Subcontractor's portion of the Work The
Contractor shall, by appropriate agreement
with each Subcontractor, require each
Subcontractor to make payments to Sub -
subcontractors In similar manner.
9.6.3 Neither the Owner nor Architect shall have an
obligation to pay or to see the payment of
money to a Subcontractor except as may
Section 00700 - General Conditions - Page 15 of 21
otherwise be required by law.
9.6.4 A Certificate for Payment a progress payment
or partial or entire use or occupancy of the
Project by the Owner shall not constitute ac-
ceptance of Work not in accordance with the
Contract Documents.
9.7 Claims for Unpaid Labor and Materials
9.7.1 When the value of the Contract between the
Owner and the Contractor is not in excess of
%25,000.00, Claimants are referred to Texas
Property Code Subsection 53.231, V.T.C.S., for
requirements that ale prerequisite to the filing
of a valid lien on funds unpaid to the
Contractor at the time of filing of the claim.
9.7.2 When the Contract between the Owner and
the Contractor Is in excess of %25,000,claims
must be sent directly to the Contractor and his
Surety in accordance with Article 5160,
V.T.C.S. The Owner will furnish, in accor-
dance with such Article, a copy of the
Payment Bond as provided therein to
Claimants upon request All claimants are
cautioned that no lien exists on the funds
unpaid to the Contractor on such Contract,
and that reliance on notices sent to the Owner
may result in a loss of their rights against the
Contractor and/or his Surety. The Owner is
not responsible in any manner to a Claimant
for collection of unpaid bills, and accepts no
such responsibility because of any
representation by any agent or employee.
9 8 Substantial Completion
9.8.1 The date of Substantial Completion of the
Work or designated portion thereof Is the date
jointly certified by the NE. Owner and
Contractor when construction fa sufficiently
complete in accordance with the Contract
Documents, that the Owner may utilize the
Work, or a designated portion thereof, for the
use for which it is intended.
9.8,2 When the Contractor considers that the Work
or a portion thereof which the Owner agrees
to accept separately, Is substantially complete,
the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the
Architect a comprehensive list of items to be
completed or corrected. The Contractor shall
proceed promptly to complete and correct
items on the list. Failure to include an item on
such list does not alter the responsibility of the
Contractor to complete all Work in accordance
with the Contract Documents. Upon receipt of
the Contractor's list the Architect will make an
inspection to determine whether the Work or
designated portion thereof is substantially
complete. If the Architect's inspection dis-
closes any item, whether or not included on
the Contractor's list which is not in accor-
dance with the requirements of the Contract
Documents, the Contractor shall, before is-
suance of the Certificate of Substantial
9.9 Partial Occupancy or Use
Completion, complete or correct such Item
upon notification by the Architect The
Contractor shall then submit a request for
another inspection by the Architect to
determine Substantial Completion. When the
Work or designated portion thereof is sub-
stantially complete, the Architect will prepare
a Certificate of Substantial Completion which,
upon approval by Owner, shat establish the
date of substantial Completion, shall establish
responsibilities of the Owner and Contractor
for security, maintenance, heat utilities,
damage to the Work and Insurance, and shall
fix the time within which the Contractor shall
finish all items on the list accompanying the
Certificate. Warranties required by the
Contract Documents shall commence on the
date of Substantial Completion of the Work or
designated portion thereof unless otherwise
provided In the Certificate of Substantial
Completion.
9 9.1 The Owner shall have the nght to occupy or
use any completed or partially completed
portion of the project In such an event, the
Contractor shall not be entitled to any extra
compensation on account of said occupancy
by the Owner or by the Owner's normal full
use of the Project, nor shall the Contractor
interfere in any way with said normal full use
of the Project, nor shall the Contractor be
relieved of any responsibilities of the Contract
including the required times of completion.
Such occupancy by the Owner would not, in
itself, constitute substantial completion.
9.9.2 Immediately prior to such partial occupancy or
use, the Owner, Contractor and Architect shall
Jointly Inspect the area to be occupied or por-
bon of the Work to be used in order to
determine and record the condition of the
Work
9.9.3 Partial occupancy or use of a portion or
portions of the Work shall not constitute
acceptance of Work not complying with the
requirements or the Contract Documents.
9.10 Final Completion and Final Payment
9.10.1 Upon receipt of written notice that the Work is
ready for final inspection and acceptance and
upon receipt of a final Application for Pay-
ment, the Owner and the A!E will promptly
make such inspection and, when the Owner
and the NE find the Work acceptable under
the Contract Documents and the Contract fully
performed, the Owner and the NE will issue a
final Certificate for Payment.
9.10.2 Neither final payment nor any remaining
retained percentage shall become due until
the Contractor submits to the Architect for
transmittal to the Owner (1) an affidavit that
payrolls, bills for materials and equipment,
Section 00700 - General Conditions - Page 16 of 21
9.10.3 The making of final payment shall constitute a
warver of all claims by the Owner except those
arising from: (1) faulty or defective Work
appearing after Substantial Completion; (2)
failure of the Work to comply with the re-
quirements of the Contract Documents; or (3)
terms of any special warranties required by
the Contract Documents. Acceptance of final
payment by the Contractor shall constitute a
waiver of all clams by the Contractor except
those previously made timely in writing and
specifically enumerated as unsettled at the
brae of Final Application for Payment
ARTICLE 10 - PflOTECT1ON OF
PERSONS AND PROPERTY
10.1 Safety Precautions and Programs
and other indebtedness connected with the
Work for which the Owner or the Owner's
property might be responsible have been paid
or will be pad or otherwise satisfied within
thirty (30) days alter receipt of final payment
from the Owner, (2) a certificate evidencing
that insurance required by the Contract
Documents to remain in force after final
payment is currently in effect and will not be
cancelled or allowed to expire until at least
thirty (30) days prior written notice has been
given to the Owner, (3) consent by surety, If
any. to final payment and, (4) if required by
the Owner, other data establishing payment or
satisfaction of obligations, such as receipts,
releases and waivers of liens and claims
arising out of the Contract to the extent and In
such form as may be designated by the
owner. 11 a Subcontractor refuses to furnish a
release or waver required by the Owner, the
Contractor may furnish a bond satisfactory to
the Owner to indemnify the Owner against
such lien.
10.1.1 It is the Contractor's responsibility to ensure
that all his employees, subcontractors and
suppliers are trained in proper safety
procedures for the type of work to be
performed on the Project Contractor will
direct his employees, subcontractors and
suppliers to noby the Owner immediately if
they observe any unsafe work practices or
conditions. Contractor shall provide his
employees with state-of-the-art salary equip-
ment necessary to the work in a safe manner.
Contractor shall strictly adhere to all ap-
plicable statutes, laws, regulations, ordinances
and guidelines. including. without limitation,
those promulgated by OSHA, EPA State. and
City authorities.
10.1.2 in the event the Contractor encounters on the
sae maledal reasonably believed to be
asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB)
which has not been rendered harmless, the
Contractor shall immediately stop the Work In
the area affected and report the condition to
the Owner and Architect in writing. The Work
10.2 Safety of Persons and Property
in the affected area shall not thereafter be
resumed except by written agreement of the
Owner and Contractor if in fact the material is
asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB)
and has not been rendered harmless. The
Work in the affected area shall be resumed in
the absence of asbestos or polychlorinated
biphenyl (PCB), or when it has been rendered
harmless, or by written agreement of the
Owner and Contractor. This provision shall
not apply to contracts for the abatement of
asbestos containing materials or other hazard-
ous substances undertaken by a licensed
abatement contractor.
10.2.1 The Contractor shall take reasonable
precautions for safety of, and shall provide
reasonable protection to prevent damage.
injury or loss to:
.1
2
3
employees on the Work and other
persons who may be affected
thereby;
the Work and matenats and
equipment to be Incorporated
therein, whether in storage on or
oft the site, under care, custody or
control of the Contractor or the
Contractor's Subcontractors or
Sub- subcontractors; and
other property at the site or
adjacent thereto, such as trees,
shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements,
roadways, structures and utilities
not designated for removal,
relocation or replacement in the
course of construction.
10.2.2 The Contractor shall give notices and comply
with applicable laws, ordinances, rules,
regulations and lawful orders of public
authorities bearing on safety of persons or
property or their protecbon from damage,
injury or loss.
10.2.3 The Contractor shall erect and maintain, as
required by existing conditions and per-
formance of the Contract, reasonable
safeguards for safety and protection. Including
posting danger signs and other wamings
against hazards, promulgating safety
regulations and noblying owners and users of
adjacent sites and utilities.
10.2.4 When use or storage of explosives or other
hazardous materials or equipment or unusual
methods are necessary for execution of the
Work, the Contractor shall exercise utmost
care and carry on such activities under
supervision of property qualified personnel.
10.2.5 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage
and loss (other than damage or loss insured
under property Insurance required by the
Contract Documents) to property caused in
whole or In part by the Contractor, a
10.3 Emergencies
11.1 Insurance
11.1.1
Section 00700 - General Conditions - Page 17 of 21
Subcontractor, a Sub-subcontractor, or
anyone directly or Indirectly employed by any
of them. or by anyone for whose ads they
may be liable and for which the Contractor is
responsible.
10.3.1 In an emergency affecting safety of persons or
property, the Contractor shall act. at the
Contractor's discretion, to prevent threatened
damage, Injury or loss. Additional
compensation or extension of time claimed by
the contractor resulting from the emergency
work shall be determined as provided in Ar-
ticle 7.
ARTICLE 11 - INSURANCE AND BONDS
The Contractor shall not commence work
under this Contract until he has obtained all
the insurance required hereunder and
certificates of such insurance have been filed
with the Owner.
11.1.2 Unless otherwise provided for in
Supplementary Conditions, the Contractor
shall provide and maintain, until the Work is
completed and accepted by the Owner, or for
such longer period as may be required herein,
the minimum Insurance coverages as follow:
.1
.2
.3
Worker's Compensation coverage
With limits of liability as required by
Statute.
Employers' Liability insurance with
limas of babilay in the amount of
%100,000 each occurrence and
%300,000aggregate.
Comprehensive General Liability
Insurance with limits of liability for
bodily injury of %500,000 each
occurrence; for property damage,
%100,000 each occurrence and
11300,000 aggregate.
Comprehensive General Liability
Insurance will cover liability for
personal injury. llabi0ty for acs of
independent contractors, liability In
respect of completed
operations /products, 'broad form'
liability for property damage
(including completed operabons),
liability for property damage
arising from 'XCU' hazards,
liability for contractual risks
assumed In this clause; unless
contractor provides Owner's
Protective Liability Insurance,
Owner and Is officers, agents and
employees will be added as
named insureds of this insurance;
all subcontractors will be added as
add,tlonal insureds. The insurance
Section 00700 - General Conditions - Page 18 of 21
against liability in respect to corn- am ount of %1,000,000 combined
plated operatonslproducts will single limits. The policy shall
remain In effect for two full years protect the Contractor and all of
following acceptance of the Work his employees and workers, and
.4 Comprehensive Automobile shall name the Owner as an ad-
Liability insurance with limits of atonal insured. A copy of the
liability for bodily Injury of policy shall be provided Owner as
%300,000 each person and soon as practicable after the award
96500,000 each occurrence; for of the Contract and prior to the
Property Damage, %300,000each execution of the Contract, so as to
allow Owner ample time for review
.5 Owner's Protective Liability by insurance counsel.
Insurance Polity. The Contractor
shall obtain at his expense an 11.1.3 Each required insurance policy shall be in a
Owner's Protective Liability company lawfully authorized to do business in
Insurance Policy naming the the State of Texas, and shall expressly provide
Owner, its officers, agents and that it may not be cancelled for any reason
employees, and the without thirty days' notice to the Owner.
Architect/Engineer as insureds,
with the following limits: 96500,000 11.1.4 Prior to starting Work, the Contractor shall fur -
each occurrence. nish to the Owner a complete copy of each
.6 'Umbrella" Liability coverage in the Insurance policy setting forth insuring agree -
following amounts: for Contract ments, conditions, exclusions, declarations
value up to %3,000,000 liability and endorsements, pertaining to the Work
limits of %1,000,000; for Contract Any subsequent revisions to such policies
value over %3,000,000 and up to shall be lumished promptly to the Owner.
%5,000,000, liability limits of
%5,000,000; for Contract value 11.1.5 Any loss insured Is to be adjusted and made
over 965,000,000, liability limas of payable to the Owner as trustee for the
%10,000,000. Insureds, as their 1010,0ss may appear. The
.7 Builder's All Risk Insurance: Contractor shall pay each Subcontractor a just
Builder's All Risk shall be on an share of any insurance moneys received by
all -risk policy form and shall insure the Contractor, and by appropriate agreement,
against the penis of fare and written where legally required for validity, shall
extended coverage, physical loss require each Subcontractor to make payments
or damage, and Including nsks of to his Sub - subcontractors In similar manner.
full collapse, with occupancy
allowed for the benefit of Owner, 11.1.6 The Owner and Contractor shall waive all
and also including, at a minimum, rights against each other for damages caused
theft, vandalism, malicious by fire or other perils to the extent covered by
mischief, falsework, temporary insurance obtained pursuant to this Paragraph
buildings and debris removal 11.1 or any other property insurance ap-
Including demohbon occasioned placable to the Work except such rights as
by enforcement of any applicable they may have to the proceeds of such
legal requirements, and shall cover insurance held by the Owner as trustee. The
reasonable compensation for Contractor shall require, by appropriate
Architect's services and expenses agreement, written where legally required for
required as a result of such validity, similar waivers in favor of the Owner
insured loss. The Builder's Risk and the Contractor by Subcontractors and
Insurance shall be provided In an Sub- subcontractors. The Contractor waives
amount equal at all times to the as against any separate Contractor descnbed
insurable value of the Work The in Article 6 all rights for damages caused by
Policy shalt have endorsements as fire or other perils in the same manner as is
follow- 'This Insurance shall be provided above as against the Owner.
specific as to coverage and not
considered as contributing in- 111 7 The Owner as trustee shall have power to
surance with any present or adjust and settle any loss with the insurers
permanent insurance maintained unless one of the parties in interest shall ob-
on the premises' feat In writing within five (5) days after the
.8 Rood insurance when specified in occurrence of loss to the Owner's exercise of
Supplementary Conditions. this power, and if such objection be made, the
.9 In any Contract for the abatement, matter shall be decided by a court of corn-
removal, or encapsulation of patent jurisdiction or as parties In Interest
asbestos containing materials, the otherwise agree. The Owner as trustee shall,
Contractorshall provide, according in that case, make settlement with the Insurers
to the terms of this Article 11.1 an accordingly.
"occurrence' Woe policy of
Asbestos Abatement Contractor's
General Liability Insurance in the 11 2 Performance Bond and Payment Bond
Payment or performance bonds are not required on
contracts of %25,000 or less. ff the total contract price
exceeds 1425,000.00, the Contractor shall execute in
accordance with the provisions of Article 5160. V.T.C.S.,
the following bond to the Owner. CO Performance Bond
in the amount of the total Contract Price conditioned upon
the faithful performance of the Contract Said bond shall
be solely for the protection of the Owner. (2) Payment
Bond In the amount of the total Contract Price, solely for
the protection of those supplying labor, materials, and/or
equipment in the prosecution of the Contract
11.2.1 Each bond shall be executed by a corporate
surety or corporate sureties duly authorized to
do business In the Slate of Texas. If any
surety upon any bond furnished in connection
with the Contract becomes insolvent or
otherwise not authorized to do business in this
State, the Contractor shall promptly furnish
equivalent security to protect the interests of
the Owner and of persons supplying labor,
materials and equipment in the prosecution of
the contract.
11.2.2 Each bond shall be accompanied by a valid
Power of Attorney (issued by the surety
company and attached, signed and sealed,
with the corporate embossed seal, to the
bond) authorizing the agent who signs the
bond to commit the company to the terms of
the bond, and stating on the face of the Power
of Attorney the limit If any, in the total amount
for which he Is empowered to issue a single
bond.
ARTICLE 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK
12.1 Uncovering of Work
12.1.1
12 2 Correction of Work
If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to
the Architect's request or to requirements In
the Contract Documents, it must, if required by
the Architect be uncovered for the Architect's
observation and be replaced at the
Contractor's expense without change in the
Contract Time.
12.1.2 If a portion of the Work has been covered
which the Architect has not specifically
requested to observe prior to its being
covered, the Architect may request to see
such Work and it shall be uncovered by the
Contractor. If such Work is in accordance
with the Contract Documents, costs of
uncovering and replacement shall. by
appropriate Change Order, be charged to the
Owner. If such Work is not in accordance with
the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall
pay such costs unless the condition was
caused by the Owner or a separate contractor
in which event the Owner shall be responsible
for payment of such costs.
12.2.1 The Contractor shall promptly correct Work
Section 00700 - General Conditions - Page 19 of 21
rejected by the Architect or failing to conform
to the requirements of the Contract
Documents, whether observed before or after
Substantial Completion and whether or not
fabricated, installed or completed. The
Contractor shall bear all costs of correcting
such rejected Work Including additional
testing and inspection, additional Owner legal
expenses, and compensation for the
Architect's additional services made necessary
thereby.
12 2 2 11, within one year after the date of Substantial
Completion of the Work or designated portion
thereof, or after the date for commencement of
warranties established hereunder, or by terms
of an applicable special warranty required by
the Contract Documents, any of the Work Is
found to be not in accordance with the
requirements of the Contract Documents, the
Contractor shall correct d promptly after
receipt of written notice form the Owner. This
period of one year shall be extended with
respect to portions of Work first performed
after Substantial Completion by the period of
time between Substantial Completion and the
actual performance of the Work. This
obligation under this Subparagraph 12.22
shall survive acceptance of the Work under
the Contract and termination of the Contract
12.2.3 The Contractor shag remove from the site
portions of the Work which are not ac-
cordance with the requirements of the
Contract Documents and are neither corrected
by the Contractor nor accepted by the Owner.
12.2.4 If the Contractor falls to correct
nonconforming Work within a reasonable time,
the Owner may correct If the Contractor does
not proceed with correction of such noncon-
forming Work within a reasonable time, the
Owner may remove It and store the salvable
materials or equipment at the Contractor's
expense. If, atterwritten notice, the Contractor
does not pay costs of such removal and
storage, the Owner may sell such materials
and equipment at auction or at private sale
and shall account for the proceeds thereof,
after deducting costs and damages that
should have been bone by the Contractor,
Including compensation for the Architect's
services and expenses made necessary
thereby. If such proceeds of sale do not cover
costs which the Contractor shall have bome,
the Contract Sum shall be reduced by the
deficiency. If payments then or thereafter due
the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such
amount the Contractor shall pay the
difference to the Owner.
12.2.5 The Contractor shall bear the cost of
correcting destroyed or damaged construction,
whether completed or partially completed, of
the Owner or separate contractors caused by
the Contractor's correction or removal of Work
which is not in accordance with the require-
ments of the Contract Documents.
12.2.6 Nothing contained In this Paragraph 12.2 shall
be construed to establish a penod of
limitations with respect to other obligations
which the Contractor might have under the
contract Documents. Establishment of the
time period of one year as described in Sub-
paragraph 12.2.2 relates only to the specific
obligation of the Contractor to correct the
Work, and has no relationship to the time
within which the obligation to comply with the
Contract Documents may be sought to be
enforced, nor to the time within which
proceedings may be commenced to establish
the Contractor's liability with respect to the
Contractor's obligations other than specifically
to correct the Work
12.3 Acceptance of Nonconforming Work
12.3.1 If the Owner prefers to accept Work which is
not In accordance with the requirements of the
Contract Documents, the Owner may do so in-
stead of requiring its removal and correction,
in which case the Contract Sum will be
reduced as appropriate and equitable. Such
adjustment shall be effected whether or not
final payment has been made.
ARTICLE 13 - MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
13.1 Governing law
13.1.1 The Contract shall be governed by the law of
the place where the Project is located.
13.2 Successors and Assigns
13.2.1 The Owner and Contractor respectively bind
themselves, their partners, successors, assigns
and legal representatives to the other party
hereto and to partners, successors, assigns
and legal representatives of such other party
in respect to covenants, agreements and
obligations contained In the Contract
Documents. Neither party to the Contract
shall assign the Contract as a whole without
written consent of the other. If either party
attempts to make such an assignment without
such consent, that party shall nevertheless
remain legally responsible for all obligations
under the Contract
13.3 Written Notice
13.3.1 Written notice shall be deemed to have been
duly served if delivered in person to the
Individual or a member of the firm or enoly or
to an officer of the corporation for which it was
intended, or if delivered at or sent by regis-
tered or certified mail to the last business
address known to the perry giving notice.
13.4 Rights and Remedies
Section 00700 - General Conditions - Page 20 of 21
13.4.1 Dudes and obligations imposed by the
Contract documents and rights and remedies
available thereunder shall be in addition to
and not a limitation of duties, obligations,
rights and remedies otherwise Imposed or
available by law.
134.2 No action or failure to act by the Owner,
Architect or Contractor shall constitute a
waiver of a right or duty afforded them under
the Contact, nor shall such action or failure to
act constitute approval of or acquiescence in
a breach thereunder, except as may be
specifically agreed In writing.
13.5 Tests and Inspections
13.5.1 Tests, inspections and approvals of portions of
the Work required by the Contract Documents
or by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or
orders of public authorities having jurisdiction
shall be made at an appropriate time. Unless
otherwise provided, the Contractor shall make
arrangements for such tests, inspections and
approvals with an Independent testing
laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner,
or with the appropriate public authority, and
shall bear all related costs of tests, inspections
and approvals. The Contractor shall give the
Architect timely notice of when and where
tests and Inspections are to be made so the
Architect may observe such procedures.
13 5.2 If the Architeoh Owner or public authorities
having jurisdiction determine that portions of
the Work require additional testing, Inspection
or approval not included under Subparagraph
13.5.1, the Architect will, upon written
authorization from the Owner, instruct the
Contractor to make arrangements for such
additional testing. inspection or approval by
an enbly acceptable to the Owner, and the
Contractor shall give timely notice to the
Architect of when and where tests and in-
spections are to be made so the Architect may
observe such procedures. The Owner shall
bear such costs except as provided in
Subparagraph 13 5.3.
1353 if such procedures for testing, inspection or
approval under Subparagraph 13.5.1 and
13.5.2 reveal failure of the portions of the
Work to comply with requirements established
by the Contract Documents, the Contractor
shall bear all costs made necessary by such
failure including those of repeated procedures
and compensation for the Architect's services
and expenses.
13.5.4 Required certificates of testing, inspection or
approval shall, unless otherwise required by
the Contract Documents, be secured by the
Contractor and promptly delivered to the
Architect
ARTICLE 14 - TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONIAACT
14 1 Termination by the Contractor
14.1.1 If the Work is stopped for a pedod of forty-five
(45) days under an order of any court or other
public authonty having jurisdiction (EXCEPT
FOR ANY DELAYS OR STOPPING OF WORK
BECAUSE OF THE LACK OF ANY PERMR OR
ANY INSPECTION FINDING
NONCONFORMING WORN. or as a result of
an act of government, such as a deelaredon of
a national emergency making materials
unavailable, through no act or fault of the
Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub -
subcontractor, Material Supplier or Vendor, or
their agents or employees or any other
persons performing any of the Work under a
contract with the Contractor, then the Con-
tractor may, upon ten (l0) additional days'
written notice to the Owner and the Architect.
terminate the Contract and recover from the
Owner payment for all Work executed
including reasonable profit and overhead
associated with such Work and for any loss
sustained upon any materials, equipment.
tools. construction equipment and machinery.
If the cause of the work stoppage is removed
pdor to the ton (10) day notice period, the
Contractor may not ternmate the Contract
14.1.2 If, through no act or fault of the Contractor or
a subcontractor or their agents or employees
or any persons perfemring portions of the
Work the Owner, for a period of forty-five (45)
days, defaults in its payment obligations under
the Contract Documents, the Contractor may
upon ten (10) additional days, written notice to
the Owner and the Architect, terminate the
Contract and recover from Owner as provided
In subparagraph 14.1.1.
14.2 Temrinahon by Owner
If the Owner determines that the Contractor is adjudged
as bankrupt, or if he makes a general assignment for the
benefit of his creditors, or if a receiver is appointed on ac-
count of his insolvency, or d he persistently or repeatedly
refuses or fails to supply enough monody skilled workmen
or proper materials, or if he persistently performs substan-
dard work, or persistently disregards laws, ordinances,
rules regulations or orders of any public authority having
jurisdiction, or otherwise is guilty of a substantial vmlabon
of a provision of the Contract Documents, or fails to so
prosecute the Work as to insure its completion within the
Contract Time, then the Owner may, without prejudice to
any right or remedy and after giving the Contractor and
his surety, if any, ten days written notice, terminate the
employment of the Contractor and take possession of the
site and all materials, equipment, tools, construction
equipment and machinery thereon owned by the
Contractor. Should the Surety fall to respond within
fifteen days following such notice and pursue completion
of the Work with diligence acceptable to the Owner, the
Owner may arrange for completion of the Work and
deduct the cost thereof from the unpaid Contract Sum
remaining. including the cost of additional
Architect/Engineer servic. and Owner contract
administration costs made necessary by such default or
neglect, in which event no further payment shall then be
Section 00700 - General Conditions - Page 21 of 21
made by the Owner until all costs of completing the Work
shall have been paid. If the unpaid balance of the Con-
tract Sum exceeds the cost of finishing the Work
Including Owner's administrative costs and compensation
for the Architect/Engineer's Additional Services made
necessary thereby, such excess shall be paid to the
Contractor. IF such costs exceed the unpaid balance, the
Contractor or his surety shall pay the difference to Owner.
If the Owner sues the Contractor or Surety on account of
failure to pay such difference rrr cost upon demand, the
Contractor and Surety will pay all costs in connection
therewith, Including reasonable attorney's fees. This
obligation for payment shall survive the termination of the
Contract
14 3 Termination for Convenience of Owner
Prior to or during the performance of the Work, the Owner
reserves the nght to terminate the Contract for unforeseen
causes that may occur. Upon the occurrence, the
following procedures will be adhered to:
14.3.1 The Owner will immediately notify the
Architect/Engineer and the Contractor In
writing, speafying the effective termination
date of the Contract
14.3.2 After receipt of the Notice of Termination, the
Contractor shall immediately proceed with the
following obligations, regardless of any delay
In determining or adjusting any amounts due
at that point in the Contract
a)
b)
c)
e)
Stop all work;
Place no further subcontracts or
orders for materials or services;
Terminate ell subcontracts;
Cancel all material and equipment
orders as applicable;
Take action that is necessary to
protect and preserve all property
related to this Contract which Is In
the possession of the Contractor.
14.3.3 Within 180 days of the date of the Notice of
Termination, the Contractor shall submit a
final Termination Settlement Proposal to the
Owner based upon costs up to the date of
termination, reasonable profit on work per-
formed, and reasonable demobilization costs.
If the Contractor falls to submit the proposal
within the time allowed, the Owner may
determine the amount due to the Contractor
because of the termination and shall pay the
determined amount to the Contractor.
1. GENERAL CONDmONS
A The General Conditions of this Contract are bound herein.
The following are Supplementary General Conditions to
the General Conditions ere a part herein.
ARTICLE 1 is hereby amended and supplemented as follows:
1. In addition to the General Conditions of the
Contract printed and bound herein the following
Supplementary General Conditions shell apply to all
work performed under the Contract.
2. Where any article of the • General Conditions" is
supplemented hereby, onginal provisions of such
article shall remain in effect and all supplementary
provisions shall be considered ad added thereto,
except as such original provisions are specifically
amended, superseded, or voided by the
"Supplementary General Conditions."
3. Any article or clause in the `Supplementary General
Conditions` in this speafication confiicbog Web the
General Conditions of the Contract shall take
precedence over the General Conditions.
a. The term "Owner" shall mean the name of the
Owner, as appearing in the Instructions to
Bidders bound in these Specifications.
b. The tens "Consultant shall mean the office of
Environmental Construction Consultants, Inc..
106 East Fannin, Round Rock Texas (512)
255-9691, or their duly authorized
representatives.
c. The term "Engineer' shall mean. the firms
appearing on the title sheet of these
specifications or on the drawings and/or thew
duly authorized representatives.
d. The term "General Contractor shall mean the
person, firm, or corporation which has
executed the Agreement with the Owner and
is thus solely responsible to the Owner for the
execution and completion of all the work.
e. The term 'Consultant's Representative" shall
be changed to - Owner's Representative" and
shall mean an authorized representative of the
Owner, assigned to make any and all
necessary observations of the work performed
and materials furnished under the Contractor.
f. The tern 'Contractor" shall mean:
(1)
(
Section 00600 - Supplementary General Conditions - Page 1 of 5
SECTION 00800 - SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL C0N0 ONS
As used In the Agreement, the General
Conditions, and Supplementary General
Conditions, The form 'Contractor shall
refer to the General Contractor unless
othenvlse noted.
As used to the Specification Sections,
the term 'Contractor' shall be construed
to mean the General Contractor as well
as the subcontractor to whom the
9.
h.
t. The term •Proposal" shall mean the approved
prepared form on which the bidder is to, or
has, submitted his or her proposal for the
work contemplated.
division of work has been sublet.
The term "Subcontractor includes any person,
firm. or corporation having a contract with the
General Contractor to furnish labor, material,
equipment, or any combination
thereof for the work of the project
The term 'Bidder shall mean any person, firm,
or corporation submitting an approved
proposal for the work contemplated under the
Contract Documents.
The term "Plans" or "Drawings' shall mean any
and all drawings or reproductions of drawings
pertaining to the construction of work
contemplated.
k The tern •Spemficadons" shall mean the
descriptions, provisions, and requirements
contained herein, together with all written
agreements made or to be made, pertaining to
the method and manner of performing the
work, or to the quantities and qualities of
materials to be furnished under the contract
I. The term 'Work' means labor, materials, tools.
equipment, appliances, transportation, and
services necessary for , or incidental to, the
carrying out and completion of the terms of
the contract
m The term "Notice" means and includes wntten
notice. Written notice shall be deemed to
have been duly served If delivered in person
to the individual or to a member of the firm or
officer of the corporation for whom It Is
intended or to its or their authorized agent,
and if the notice is enclosed in a postage -
prepaid wrapper or envelope addressed to
such individual or firm or corporation at the
last business address known to him who gives
notice and deposited in a United States mad
box.
n. The terms as approved, as directed.
acceptable, satisfactory, permitted, and words
of like import used In reference to the work or
its performance and without further
qualification shall mean approval, direction,
acceptance, satisfaction, permission, etc., of
the Consultant
o. The Contractor shall check all Contmct
Documents furnished him, immediately upon
receipt of the documents, and shall promptly
notify the Consultant of any discrepancies or
conflicts therein. During the course of
bidding, the Consultant will give no verbal
instructions to bidders but will clarify, by
ARTICLE 11.
ARTICLE 114
ARTICLE N.
p•
q.
written addenda, items which are not clear,
discrepancies, or conflicts In the Contract
Documents. Addenda issued during the
course of the bidding shall be covered in the
Proposal and In closing the contract shall
become a part thereof.
During the course of the work should any
conflict be found In or between the contract
documents, the Contractor shall be deemed to
have estimated the work on the basis of the
greater quantity or better quality, unless he
shall have obtained a decision in wnting from
the Consultant as to what shall govem before
the submission of his bid. The Consultant, in
case of such conflict, may interpret or
construe the documents so as to obtain the
most substantial and complete performance of
the work consistent with the Contract
Documents and reasonably Inferable
therefrom, and of thatquesuon the Consultant
shall be the judge.
For convenience of reference and to facilitate
the awarding of Contracts and Subcontracts,
the specifioatlons are separated Into tided
Sections. Such separation shall not however,
operate to make the Consultant an arbiter to
establish limits to the Contracts between the
General Contractor and Subcontractor. It is
not the intention of the Individual Sections of
the Specifications to mention or otherwise
enumerate each and every Item of work or
appurtenances that are required for the
particular section. Certain Items of work that
involve special requirements are frequently
mentioned.
r. In keeping with "q" above, it is the intent of the
Specifications that the proper execution of
work shall be the responsibility of the General
Contractor and even though he may elect to
sublet certain parts of the work, the Owner
and Consultant will hold him responsible for
the proper execution thereof. If the General
Contractor elects to enter into a subcontract
for any section of the work he shall assume
all responsibility for ascertaining that the
Subcontractor has included all matenal and
appurtenances in connection therewith. It
shall also be the responsibility of the General
Contractor to notify his sub - bidders, at time of
request for bids, all of conditions, items and
requirements of the Contract Documents by
which they will be bound to the General
Contractor as Subcontractors.
NO CHANGES
NO CHANGES
Is hereby amended and supplemented as foams:
a. Dimensions of work shall not be determined by scale or
rule, but figured dimensions shall be followed at all Imes
b. The Contractor shall compare all Drawings and verify all
dimensions, and shall take any and all measurements
necessary to venfy the drawings dimensions in relation to
Section 00800 - Supplementary General Conditions - Page 2 of 5
conditions already established at the job site before laying
out the work The Contractor will be held responsible for
subsequent errors which could have been avoided by
such checking.
c. Any discrepancy which will affect the proper layout of the
work shall be immediately called to the Consultant's
attention by the contractor. No work shall proceed until
such discrepancy has been rectified as directed by the
Consultant
d. Mechanical drawings show the general arrangement and
extent of the work. Exact location and arrangement of the
various parts shall be determined, with the approval of the
Consultant, after equipment has been selected and as the
work progresses. All work shall, insofar as possible, be
installed in such manner as will not Interfere with
architectural or structural portions of the building. Should
the particular equipment which any bidder proposes to
install require space conditions other than those shown on
the Drawings, he shall arrange for such space with the
Consultant before submitting a bid. Should changes
become necessary because of failure to comply with this
requirement, the Contractor shall be fully responsible for
making such changes. The Contractor will be required to
submit working drawings of all equipment which varies
from the Drawings and Specifications, and any
Interferences must be eliminated before work proceeds.
e The mechanical and electrical work shall have precedence
in the following order:
(
(
(3)
(4)
(
Duct Work
Sail and Waste Piping
Water Piping
Gas Piping
Electrical Wiring
ARTICLE V. SUBCONTRACTOR. Is hereby amended and
supplemented as follows:
A complete list in writing of the names of all Subcontractors
proposed for various parts of the work shall be submitted not
later than thirty (30) days after notification of acceptance of
General Contractor's proposal by the Owner. This includes
contacts to be let by Subcontractors as well as those let by the
General Contractor.
ARTICLE Vt. NO CHANGES
ARTICLE VII. NO CHANGES
ARTICLE NIL NO CHANGES
ARTICLE DC PAYMENT AND FINAL COMPLETION. Is hereby
amended and supplemented as follows:
a No provisions of the Contract Documents shall be held to
limit the Contractor's liability for defects to periods shorter
than those provided by guarantees or to less than the
legal limit of liability in accordance with the law of the
place of budding. Where guarantees or warranties are
written in any section of the Specifications for tans
longer than one year, the longer tan shall apply.
b. The Owner shall make payments on account of the
Contract sum as follows: On or before the tenth (10) day
of each month, 95 of the value of the labor and
materials for the work delivered and suitable stored and
protected at the site through the last day of the previous
month, less the aggregate of previous payments; and
when all work included in the Contract shall have been
fully performed, the remaining balance of the contract
m, as adjusted by reason of additions and deductions
as provided in the Contract Documents, shall be due and
payable by the Owner to the Contractor subject to the
conditions contained In this Article and Article 5.
a. The Contractor shall submit to the Consultant an
application for each progress payment by the 5th day of
the month, these applications for payment to be in the
form of statements listing the values of labor and materials
incorporated In the work and of materials for the work
delivered and suitably stored and protected at the site
through the last day of the previous month; these
applications for progress payment to show 90 of the
total of the above values, less the aggregate of the
previous payments on account, as the amount payable on
account of the contract sum at the next tenth (10th) day
of the month. These applications for progress payments
shall be accompanied by such invoices and payroll
statements substantiating the amounts listed as values for
the various divisions of work in the Contractor's
application for payment as the Consultant may require.
Each such application after the first progress paymont has
been made shall be accompanied by receipts or other
evidence showing the Contractor's payments for matenas
and labor, including payment to Subcontractors. Until
final payment, the Owner will pay 95 percent of the
amount due the Contractor on account of progress
payments. Five percent retainage will not be due until
final payment has been approved. 0 the manner of
completion of the work and its progress are and remain
satisfactory to the Consultant and in the absence of other
good and sufficient reasons, for each work category
shown to be 50 percent or more complete in the
application for payment, the Consultant will, without
reduction of previous retainage on presentation by the
Contractor of Consent of Surety (or each application
certify any remaining progress payments for each work
category to be paid In full. The full Contract retamage
may be reinstated If the manner of completion of the work
and its progress do not remain satisfactory to the
Consultant or if the Surety withholds its consent or for
other good and sufficient reasons.
d. Not later than fifteen (15) days after execution of he
Contract Agreement the Contractor shall submit to the
Consultant a schedule of values of the various pats of the
work, including quantities. aggregating the total sum of
the contract divided as to facilitate checking applications
for payment. In making applications for payment the
Contractor shall use the ALA Document G703, 1983 edition
and the AIA 0702, 1983, forms showing the above
schedule of values of which the current application for
payment is based and the remaining uncemfied under
each subdivision part of the work
e. If the Contractor has submitted the aforementioned
schedule of values, and has made application for a
progress payment as above, the Consultant shall, not later
than the 10th day of the month, issue a certificate for such
amount as he decides to be property due under the terms
of the Contract or state in writing his reasons for
withholding a certificate as above, the amount of such
certificate shall be paid by the Owner to the Contractor
on or before the 10th day of the month during the
progress of the work as provided above.
Section 00800 - Supplementary General Conditions - Page 3 of 5
ARTICLE X. PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY - Is
hereby amended and supplemented as follows
e. All materials delivered at the job site shall be carefully
stored and protected from damage. Damaged material
shall not be used upon the work.
b No salamanders or open fires will be allowed on the work
unless specifically approved in writing. Tarpaulins and
canvasses such as used for protection of he work shall be
fireproofed in accordance with National Board of Fire
Underwriters' requirements
a The Contractor shall protect all public and private property
adjacent to the site including buildings, trees, streets,
sidewalks, curbs, gutters, paving, light standards, traffic
signals, fire alarms, hydrants, utilities, etc., and make at
his own expense all repairs made necessary by reason of
his operations under the Contract and restore damaged
items to a condition at last equal to their conditions prior
to damage.
d. When the whole or any portion of the work Is suspended
for any reason, the Contractor and Subcontractors shall
cooperate and property cover aver. secure, and protect
such work as may he liable to sustain injury from any
cause.
s. The Contractor agrees, in order that the work be
completed with maximum safety:
(1) To conform to all provisions of the "Manual of
Accident Prevention in Construction; published by
Associated General Contractors of America. Inc.,
latest edition.
(2) To comply with all Special Safety Rules of the
Owner In force for the premises where the work Is
performed.
ARTICLE XL NO CHANGES
ARTICLE XIL CHANGES IN THE WORK -Is hereby emended and
supplemented as follows:
a. As affecting the adjustment of work by Subcontractors, or
work handled directly by the General Contractor, the
cost of any extra work as referred to in case (12.3) of the
General Conditions, Article 12.1.3 shall consist of the
following slot items.
(1) Actual cost to the Contractor of the materials used
Including delivery, but less all cash trade and other
discounts.
(2) Actual cost to the Contractor for bringing and
removing additional equipment solely for use on
the extra work and approved rental for such
equipment while in use.
(3) Wages paid for skilled, semi - stalled, or unsldlled
labor performing the additional work Including those
operating equipment
(4) The percentage to be added to the total sum of (1),
(2), and (3) to cover all supervision, toots, use of
other equipment of the jab as necessary for
economical performance of the extra work general
field services and expense, Interference with other
work and all other overhead and profit shall be
15 unless otherwise provided in a subcontract
approved by the Owner and Consultant
(5) To the total of (1), (2), (3), and (4) shall be added
the net cost of the following. if applicable: All
required insurance with minimum limits as required
under truuranee, the net cost of all Social Secunty,
Old Age Pension, or other taxes of like nature or
both, which are incident solely to extra work and
which the Contractor would be required to pay if he
were performing the work
(6) In the case of Change Order affecting the cost of
the building, the Contractor shall submit a lump sum
proposal supported by a breakdown, indicating the
actual cost to the Contractor of all work with profit
and overhead calculated as indicated above. If this
proposal is not acceptable to the Consultant and
Owner, then the Contractor may be ordered to
proceed with the work involved in the Change Order
on an actual cost plus percentage basis
administered by the Consultant
b. To the amount of adjustment of Subcontracts as listed In
Item "a" above, the General Contractor will be allowed to
add a percentage of 10 to cover all expense and profit
c. Where unit prices are named in the contract for certain
items the unit prices for similar work shall be
proportionate.
d. In cases where changes in the work veil reflect a credit to
the Owner, amount of such credit shall be:
(1) The actual cost to the Contractor of the metenals
which were to be used in the contracted work
(2) Actual cost to the Contractor of the equipment rental
which would have been required to install the above
materials.
Wages for labor which would have been required to
perform the work
Amounts of profit and overhead originally figured by
the Contractor on this portion of the work will not
have to be returned to the Owner in the credit
(3)
(4)
e. As effecting the adjustment of Subcontractors, the amount
of any lump sum proposal as referred to in ease (12.) of
General Conditions, Article 12.1.3, shall be supported by
a detailed breakdown of costs of materials, equipment,
wages, overhead and profit insurance, Social Security,
Old Age Pension, or other taxes as outlined above under
item "a" and the same percentages named in Rem 'a'
above shall be used.
f. Claims for extension of brae and actual extension of time,
Petiole 12.2 of General Conditions, If granted, shall be
stated in the number of half or whole normal working
days during which the Contractor has been prevented
form executing major items of the work in progress al that
time. "Normal Working Days" shall not Include Saturday,
Sunday or holidays that are regularly observed by the
construction Industry, unless work is required to be
performed on such "Overtime Days' by specific direction
in the Contract Documents.
ANTTCLE XIIL NO CHANGES
ARNCt.E XIV. NO CHANGES
ADDITIONAL ARTICLES OF GENERAL CONODW NS
The following articles shall govern in addition to Articles 1 through 14
Section 00800. Supplementary General Conditions . Page 4 of 5
of the General Conditions as amended and supplemented above.
ART1CLE XV. AUTHORINES AND DUNES OF Consul ant'S OR
OWNERS REPRESS NATIVES
a Representatives employed by the Consultant or
Owner shall be authorized to observe all work
executed and materials furnished. Such
observations may extend to all or any part of the
work and to the preparation and manufacture of the
materials to be used. In case of any dispute arising
between the Contractor and the Representatives as
to the materials fumished, or the manner of
performing the work the Representatives shall have
the authority to reject material or suspend the work
until the question at issue can be referred to, and
decided by, the Consultant or Owner.
b. The Representative shall not be authonzed to revoke,
alter, enlarge. relax, or release any requirements of the
Specifications, not to approved or accept any portion of
the work not to issue instructions contrary to the Plans
and Specifications. The Representative shall In no case
act as foreman or perform other duties for the Contractor.
Any advice which the Representative may give the
Contractor shall in no way be construed as binding the
Consultant In any way, nor releasing the Contractor from
the fulfillment of the terms of the Contract
AITTICLE XVI. (REPRESENTATIONS OF CONTRACTOR
a. The Contractor represents and warrants by submission of
a proposal that he Is financially solvent and that he Is
experienced In and competent to perform the type of work
and to tumish the plant matedels, supplies, and
equipment to be so performed or fumished by him.
b. The Contractor represents and warrants by submission of
a proposal that he is familiar with all Federal, state,
Municipal, and Department taws, ordinances, and
regulations which may in any way effect the work or those
employed therein including, but not limited to, any special
acts relating to the work or to the protect of which it is a
part; and he will indemnify and save harmless the Owner
and all its officers, agents, and employees against any
claims or liability arising from or based on any violation of
any law, ordinance, regulation, or order, whether by
himself or his employees.
c. The Contractor represents and warrants by submission of
a proposal that such temporary and permanent work
required by the Contract Documents as is to be done by
hum can be satisfactorily constructed and used for the
purpose it is intended, end that such construction will not
injure any person or damage any property.
d. The Contractor represents and warrants by submission of
a proposal that he has carefully examined the plans,
speciflcadons, and site of the work, and that from his own
Investigations he has satisfied himself as to the nature and
location of the work the character, quality, and quantity
of surface and subsurface materials likely to be
encountered, the character of equipment and other
facilities needed for the performance of the work the
general and local conditions, and all other materials which
may In any way affect the work or Its performance. No
allowance In behalf of the Contractor will be made
subsequently by the Owner for any error or negligence on
the pan of the Contractor not having visited the site or not
having thoroughly familiarized himself with all of the
documents before submitting a proposal.
ARNCLE XVIL PROMPT PERFORMANCE, TIME OF COMPLETION,
EXTENSION OF TIME
a. The Contractor shall begin work under this contract
promptly after Its execution and shall cant' on his
work diligently and expeditiously. The Contractor
shall submit to the Consultant an approximate
schedule showing the dates al which performance
of the various divisions of the work under this
contract MI be completed, and the Contractor shall
make every reasonable effort to procure an
adequate supply of materials and appliances and an
adequate force of labor, and he shall use his best
skill and diligence to complete the contract in the
shortest possible hme.
b. Upon execution of the contract by the (Tuner, it shall
become an obligation of the Contractor to complete
allwork Included in the contract within the time stated in
his proposal and as stipulated In the Contract Agreement
c. Time of Completion: Penalty for failure to complete the
work included in the contract within the time allotted will
be suspension of all further partial payments until
acceptance of the project by the Owner.
d. If the Contractor be delayed at any time in the progress of
the work by an act or neglect of the Owner or the
Consultant, or of any of the employees of either, or by
any separate Contractor employed by the Owner, or by
changes ordered in the work or by strikes, lockouts. fire,
unusual delay in transportation, unavoidable casualties. or
any causes beyond the Contractor's control which the
Consultant shall decide to constitute justifiable delay, then
the dime of completion shall be extended for such
reasonable time as the Owner and the Consultant may
decide, subject to the conditions under Article 8 and 12 -
liime and Changes in the Work
e. At expiration of the number of calendar days within which
the Contractor proposes and agrees to complete
performance of this Contract, if the work be then not
completed. a reckoning shall be made as 10 the number
of days of extension time previously requested and
approved. If the Contractor does not complete the work
then within the time limit as extended by reason of
approved extension of time, partial payments will be
suspended as outlines in Item 'C above.
ARRCLE XVIIL USE AND OCCUPANCY OF PROJECT PRIOR TO
ACCEPTANCE BY OWNER
a. The Contractor agrees to the use and occupancy of a
portion or unit of the Project before formal acceptance by
the Owner under the following conditions:
(1)
A Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be
prepared and executed as provided in
Subparagraph 9.7.1 of the accompanying General
Conditions of the Contract for Construction, except
that when, in the opinion of the Consultant, the
Contractor Is chargeable with unwarranted delay in
completing work or other Contract requirements, the
signature of the Contractor will not be required. The
Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be
accompanied by a written endorsement of the
Section 00800 - Supplementary General Conditions - Page 5 of 5
Contractors Insurance carder and surety permitting
occupancy by the Owner during the remaining
period or project work
Occupancy by the Owner shall not be construed by
the Contractor as being an acceptance of that part
of the P1 be occupied.
The Contractor shall not be held responsible for any
damage to the occupied pan of the Project resulting
from the Owner's occupancy.
(4) Occupancy by the Owner shall not be deemed to
constitute a waiver of existing claims in behalf of the
Owner or Contractor against each other.
If the Project consists of more then one building,
and one of the buildings Is to be occupied, the
Owner, prior to the occupancy of the building, shall
secure permanent property Insurance on the
building to be occupied and necessary permits
which may be required for use and occupancy.
(
(
(
b. With the exception of Clause 'a(1)' and 'a(5
occupancy by the Owner prior to Project acceptance
does not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility
to maintain all insurance and bonds required of the
Contractor under the Contract until the Project is
completed and accepted by the Owner.
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION 00900 - INDEX TO DRAWINGS
Section 00900 - Index of Drawings - Page 1 of 1
DESCRIPTION DRAWING NO.
ARCHITECTURAL
COVER SHEET 0
DIMENSIONED SITE PLAN C1
SITE DRAINAGE PLAN C2
SITE UTILITY PLAN C3
SITE DETAILS C4
SITE LANDSCAPING Li
DIMENSIONED FLOOR PLAN Al
BUILDING ELEVATIONS A2
BUILDING SECTIONS A3
WALL SECTIONS A4
ROOF PLAN AND DETAILS A5
DOORS AND WINDOWS A6
MILLWORK A7
STRUCTURAL
FOUNDATION PLAN Si
ROOF FRAMING PLAN S2
STRUCTURAL DETAILS S3
STRUCTURAL DETAILS S4
MECHANICAL, PLUMBING, & ELECTRICAL
MECHANICAL FLOOR PLAN Mi
PLUMBING WATER AND GAS PLAN P1
PLUMBING WASTE AND VENT PLAN P2
ELECTRICAL LIGHTING PLAN Ei
ELECTRICAL POWER PLAN E2
END OF SECTION
PART 1
1.01
A
GENERAL
Work Covered by Contract Documents
Work covers construction and installation for work as
indicated on the plans located at the corner of Old West and
Rawhide drive for a new Fire Station.
B. Contractors Duties:
1. Except as specifically noted, provide and pay for:
a. Labor, materials and equipment
b. Tools, construction equipment and machinery
e. Other facilities and services necessary for proper
execution and compiehon of the Work
2. Since the Owner is a governmental entity or an
organization which may be exempted from the sales
and use taxes on certain tangible personal property.
the Contractor shall be responsible for:
a Determining whether such governmental entity or
organization is exempt from such taxes under the
Contract Documents.
b. Determining whether your purchase of any
tangible personal property for use in the
performance of this contract Is except.
e. Obtaining any sales tax exempt certificate from
the owner.
d. Properly Issuing any sales tax exemption
certificate to a seller or supplier that the sale of
any item of tangible personal property qualifies
for en exemption.
e. Maintaining any records required by the laws of
the State of Texas or by any valid rules and /or
regulations of the Comptroller of Public Accounts
of the State of Texas.
Properly submitting any monthly pay requests
Payment of any legally assessed penalties or
fines for Improper use of any exemption
Certificate.
3. Securing and paying for, as necessary for execution
and completion of the Work any:
Penmts
b. Licenses
c. Taxes
4. Complying with all applicable laws, codes, ordinances,
rules, regulations, orders and /or other requirements of
public authorities in connection with performance of
the work
5 Promptly submitting written notice to the Architect of
any observed variances in the Contract Documents
from known requirements of any public authority.
a his noted the Contractor's responsibility to make
certain that Contract Documents comply with
codes and regulations.
b. Appropriate modifications to the Contract
Documents will be made to reflect any changes
necessary because of such variances.
e. Assuming responsibility for the Work known to be
contrary to such requirements, without notice.
7. Enforcing strict discipline and good order among
employees and not employing on the Work:
a Unfit persons
b. Persons not skilled in the task to be performed.
8. Checking Dimensions at Site.
a Venly ell measurements before ordenng any
materials or doing any work
9.
SECTION 01010 - SUMMARY OF WORK
1.02
A.
1.03
8
Section 01010 - Summary of Work - Page 1 of 4
b. Report any discrepancies to Architectfor instructions
before proceeding.
0. No extras will be allowed for variations from
drawings in existing conditions.
9. Approval of Working Surface:
a. Notify the Architect of any unsatisfactory condition
before performing work over work of other
contractors.
b Beginning of work by any Contractarshall constitute
his acceptance of previous work
Contracts
Construct work under lump sum contract
Contractor use of Premise
Confine operations at site to areas permitted by:
1. Law
2. Ordinance
3. Permits
4. Contract Documents
B. Do not unreasonably encumber site with matenais or
equipment
C. Do not load structure with weight that will endanger structure.
Concrete trucks, cranes, heavy construction equipment, or
excessive concentrations of loads will not be allowed on slabs
except with prior wntten approval of the Architect/Engineer.
D Assume full responsibility for protection and safekeeping or
products stored on premises
9. Obtain and pay for use of additional storage or work areas
needed for operations.
1.04 Examination of Site:
A. Bidders are expected to visit the site of the building and
compare the drawings and specifications with existing
conditions, and inform themselves of all conditions which will
affect this work Failure of the successful bidder to do so will in
no way relieve the bidder from necessity of furnishing any
materials, labor, or equipment, or performing any work that bay
be required to complete work In accordance with drawings and
specifications, without additional cost to the Owner.
B. Examine the Foundation Investigation Report pnor to bidding.
1.05 Notifications
A. The Contractor shall give the Architect verbal notification at
least 48 hours prior to commencing any of the following:
Excavation
Application of soils poisoning
Concrete pour
Metal building erection
Steel erection
Masonry
Installing Insulation in concealed spaces
Roofing
Plastering
Ceramic the work
Panting
Testing Water, Gas. Sewer & Refrigerant Unes
Setting Heating/ Air Conditioning Units
1.06 Protection and Access:
A. The Contractor shall adequately protect the adjacent property
at all times, and shall make good at his own expense any
damage to such property arising out at any operation
connected with his contract
B. The Contractor shall at all times protect the excavation,
trenches, and/or the building from damage from rain water,
spring water, ground water, backing up of drains or sewers,
and all other water. He shall provide pumps and equipment
and enclosures to provide this protection.
C. The Contractor shall at all times provide protection against
weather -rain. wild, storms, frost or heat so as to maintain all
work matenals, apparatus and fixtures from Injury or
damage. At the end of the day's work all new or old work
likely to be damaged shell be covered
1.07 Site Work:
0. The Contractor shall not commence work on concrete
sidewalks, entrance slabs, courts, wearing surface at drives,
service roads, and parking areas until work requiring heavy
trucks or equipment is completed.
1.06 Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for Portions of the
Work:
0. Before the award of the Contract, the Contractor shall furnish
to the Architect In writing for acceptance by the Owner and
the Architect a list of the names of Subcontractors proposed
for the various portions of the work including the federal
Identification number of the Contractor and each
Subcontractor. Pay estimates will not be considered until
Subcontractors are approved
1.09 Special Project Procedures:
0. ALTERATIONS AND ADDmONS TO IXISTING FACILITIES:
1. The contractor shall cooperate with the Owner in
scheduling his work Due to the nature of the work
required by this contract all operations must be
coordinated with the Owner to Insure a minimum of
interference with the continuing use of the existing
facibhes.
2. This contract shall Include alterations and additions to
existing building as Indicated on the drawings. Each
bidder will be expected to familiarize himself with
conditions affecting the execution of this work.
3. The drawings and notes do not indicate complete
existing building, or water. sewer, waste, electrical or
other construction conditions and each bidder shall
visit the site pnor to submitting his proposal and shall
Inspect the accomplished In removing and modifying
the existing work and Installing any new work in the
existing building. Failure to comply with this shall not
constitute grounds for any additional payments in
connection with removing or modifying any pan of the
existing installations and /or Installing any new work to
meet the requirements of this contract
4. Certain information is shown on the drawings
concerning the existing installation for general
Information purposes, but shall not be interpreted as
representing •as built • conditions. Where the existing
Section 01010 - Summary of Work - Page 2 of 4
conditions are found to be different from necessary and
make all connections required for proper operation at no
additional expense to the Owner.
5. The Owner shall retain possession of all movable
equipment and other equipment not attached to the
building. In addition the Owner may elect to retain
possession of other matenals. Materials not retained by
the Owner shall be removed from the sire
6. Where alterations to existing building is required. the
Contractor shall. after his work Is otherwise complete,
repair adjacent finishes and do patching work as
necessary to leave the adjacent work in good shape. He
shall paint plaster, trim out and finish new work and as
much adjacent existing work as is necessary to leave the
job clean, neat and attractive.
7. All existing piping and /or circuits which am disconnected
during the course of this work shall be reconnected and
left in satisfactory operating order unless they are
specifically noted to be removed or disconnected
B. WORKING AND STORING AREAS:
1. The areas indicated on the Site Plan by limiting lines
compnse the working and storing areas. Storing or
working outside of the indicated space Is prohibited.
Keep areas outside the indicated working and storing
spaces free from debris incident to this contract
2. Storing or working outside of the indicated remodeled
spaces is prohibited. Keep areas outside the remodeled
spaces free from debris incident to this contract
C. PROTECTION OF IXISTING FACILITIES:
1. The Contractor shall take preoautlons to protect existing
facilities and features within the designated construction
limits and along the access to the construction site Any
damage caused by the Contractor or his Subcontractor
shall be repaired immediately at his expense. facilities
D REPAIR OF DAMAGE:
1. The Contractor shall be responsible for any loss of
damage caused by him, his workmen, or his
subcontractors to the work or materials, to tools and
equipment of one another, to adjacent property and
person, and shall make good any loss, damage or injury
without cost to the Owner.
0.
F.
EXISTING UNDERGROUND UTILITIES:
1. Existing underground lines occur in the site where the
work is to be done. Such lines will be staked by the
Owner If necessary for the benefit of the Owner and the
Contractor prior to start of the work
NEW UTILITY CONNECTIONS:
1. Utility Service: Coordinate with Owner for shut-off,
capping and continuation of utility services as required.
2. Outages: Two days prior notice of all utility outages must
be given to the Owner, and all work of this nature must be
approved and coordinated with the Owner.
G. CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE:
1. The sequence of all construction operations shall permit
the continuous operation of the school by the Owner
during portions of the construction period.
e Exterior work can begin Immediately.
b. All work shall be scheduled and completed so that
accepted and /or Owner occupied spaces shall
remain in the dry with plumbing, mechanical, and
electrical systems operational.
2. The actual phases of the construction program shall be
developed by the successful bidder in cooperation with
H. CONSTRUCTION DUST /SOUND BARRIERS:
1. This Contractor shall construct and maintain polyfilm
dust/sound barriers to prevent the spread of
construction dust and sounds into the adjacent
occupied spaces of the existing building
2. Construct barriers of 2 x 4 wood studs, with 4 mil
polyfilm on each side. Fill cavities of studs with 4
unfaced fiberglass insulation.
3. Locate barriers as required and as directed by Owner.
1.10 Coordination:
A. All contractors, and subcontractors on the project shall
coordinate their work with each other, advising on work
schedules, equipment locations, ale.
1.11 Field Engineenrg:
the Owner and Architect to provide the needed
occupancy of the facilities.
A. LAYING OUT WORK:
1. Immediately upon entering project sae for purpose of
beginning work the Contractor shall locate all general
reference points and take such action as is necessary
to prevent their destruction; lay out his work, and be
responsible for all lines, elevations, and measurements
of buildings, grading utilities, and other work executed
by him under the contract He must exercise proper
precaution to verily figures shown on the drawings
before laying out work and will be held responsible for
any error resulting from his failure to exercise such
precaution.
2. A competent foreman or supennlendent initially
approved by the Architect shall be kept by the
Contractor at the budding at all times and In
continuous superintendenbe during the progress of the
work to receive instructions and to act for the
Contractor in the accurate laying out and direction of
all work
3. The Contractor shall provide a competent land
surveyor who is registered tO practice surveying in the
state in which the project is located. In addition to that
work required in the General Conditions, the surveyor
will:
e. Locate and stake all drives, walks, courts, fences
and establish grades in accordance with plans for
these items.
b. Locale all budding lines and establish finish floors
and grades for each as shown on the drawings.
c. Locate and stake all water, sewer, storm drains,
and gas lines and establish grades for these
utilities in accordance with the plans and
specifications.
d. Verify existing and finish grades.
4. During construction, the surveyor shall be available to
verify to the Architect elevations and layouts of the
project
1.12 Regulatory Requirements:
A. PERMITS AND LAWS:
1. The Contractor shall arrange for the Issuance of
permits by the City of Austin. The Contractor shall
comply with all Federal, State and Municipal Laws,
Codes and Ordinances applicable to the work of this
contract, and he shall comply with all regulations of the
National Board of Fire Underwriters having jurisdiction.
and he shall obtain and pay for all permits required In
J.
K
Section 01010 - Summary of Work - Page 3 of 4
connectionwith the execution of his work TheArchitect
shall befumishedwith cerABed copies of these permdsit
requested.
2. If the above laws, Codes or Ordinances conflict with the
Contract Documents, then the laws, codes or ordinances
shall govem Instead of the documents, except in such
cases where the documents exceed them in quality of
materials, or labor, then the documents shall be followed.
1.13 Temporary Utilities:
A. The Contractor shall make all arrangements necessary for
utilities required during construction. Fees, where required by
the utility company, will be paid by the Contractor.
B When necessary to connectto existing utility systems furnishing
power, water, or gas to existing buildings, meters shall be
installed on services required for construction, and
arrangements shall be made by the Contractor to have
statements of cost for such service directed to his office for
payment The Contractor shall Include in his proposal all costs
necessary for connecting and extending all necessary utilities.
Where connections are made to existing utility services, shut -off
or turn-on shall be by Building Maintenance only.
C. The Mechanical, Electrical and Utility Contractors shall make
arrangements with the General Contractor to use these services
for testing and other normal use during construction.
D. The Contractor shall provide adequate temporary lighting in the
building for all trades.
E. Owner's Computer Equipment: Contractor shall take every
precaution to avoid any power interruptions that could be
detrimental to the Owner's computer equipment operations.
F. Telephone: Contractor shall be responsible for his own
telephone. The Contractor shall provide and pay for a
telephone at the building site in order to expedite his work.
Local telephone service shall be made available to all persons
connected with the work
O. Toilets: The Contractor shall provide and maintain in good
order temporary chemical toilet facilities for all workmen and
shall remove same at completion of the work Toilets shall be
completely enclosed and of neat appearance. Toilet locations
shall be approved by the Architect
H. Temporary Heat and Ventilation: Provide temporary heat and
ventilation as required to maintain adequate environmental
conditions for the installation of matenats, and to protect
materials and finishes from damage due to temperature or
humidity.
Cover trenches and holes when not in use. Erect barriers at
changes in plane steeper than 45 degrees and more than 3 feet
in height
Provide facilities to exclude unauthorized visitors from the
construction site. Provide personal safety equipment for
authorized visitors. Provide temporary doors with locks where
required.
L Provide and maintain warning lights and signs as necessary to
prevent damage or injury. Keep warning lights burning from
dusk to dawn.
1.14 Fire Protection During Construction:
6.
C.
1.15 Barriers:
A. CONSTRUCTION FENCES:
1. This Contractor shall construct and maintain protective
temporary fences around the construction projector
projects adjacent to existing building. Due to the
nature of the work required by this contract, all fencing
must be coordinated with the Owner so as to interfere
with the program as little as possible
2. Temporary fences shall be constructed from 6 x 6 -
10/10 welded wire reinforcing mesh. Fences shall be
6'0' high, and posts shall be 4 x 4 timber spaced as
necessary to maintain fences in good repair.
3. Rental type chain link fence will be approved.
B TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION
1. The Contractor shall protect existing trees and other
vegetation, not shown to be removed, against
unnecessary cutting, breaking or skinning of roots,
skinning and bruising of bark, smothering of trees by
stockpiling construction materials or excavated
materials within drip line, excess loot or vehicular
traffic, or parking of vehicles with in drip line. The
Contractor shall provide temporary fences, barricades
or guards as required to protect trees and vegetation
to be left standing. All tree and plant protection shall
be according to the most current City of Austin
requirements.
2. The Contractor shall water trees and other vegetation
which are to remain within the limits of the construction
area as required to maintain their health during the
course of the construction operation.
1.16 Barricades:
The constmcbon Contractor, subcontractors, and their
personnel are required to be in compliance with the fire
protection and prevention requirements of the Occupational
Safety and Health Act for Construction.
Fire extinguishers shall be available at all times while work is
being performed. The number and type are to be as
specified in Subpart F of OSHA. The Contractor Is required
to famish his own extinguishers.
Waste combustible materials shall not be allowed to accumu•
late at the work site and shall be removed from the site and
disposed on a regular basis.
A. Construct and maintain barricades sufficient to prevent injury
to persons and damage to properly. Provide covered
walkways for use by Owner while construction is In progress.
Barricades shall comply with local codes and ordinances.
1.17 Temporary Controls:
A. WEED CONTROL: The Contractor shall keep the streets and
construction area free of weeds. Weeds shall be kept to a
height of no more than 12 inches to comply with the City
Ordinances, Institution Regulations and with environmental
safety regulations.
B. DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIALS:
1. The Contractor shall remove ell combustible and
noncombustible waste materials completely from the
Owner's property and legally dispose of same.
2. Buming of any materials will not be permitted within
the boundaries of the Owner's property.
1.16 Traffic Regulation:
1.19 Feld Offices and Sheds:
1.20 Material and Equipment
Section 01010 - Summary of Work - Page 4 of 4
A. PARKING: Parking of private cars permitted any In areas
designated by the Owner. Notify employees and subcontractors
of this requirement at beginning of work
A. SHEDS: The Contractor shall provide weatherproof storage
sheds as required to properly store his materials. Sheds for
storing cement shall have wood floors. Location of these shall
be as approved by Architect
A. STORAGE AND PROTECTION:
1. The Contractor shall carefully consider material storage,
so as to avoid interference with other phases of
construction.
2. He shall so store, pile and arrange his materials that they
will not be injured by the elements, by the progress of
erection, by contact with the ground or from any other
cause. He shall provide and do all covering necessary for
this purpose and shall remove from the premises ant
damaged materials when so directed by the Architect
3 The Owner wdl designate an area immediately adjacent to
the Building site for storage of materials. Storage area
shall be fenced to keep children /unauthorized persons
from having access to area.
END OF SECTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.10 Related requirements specified elsewhere:
A. Each specification listed in paragraph 1.4 of this section
1 20 Testing Allowance:
A. Use monies In Testing Allowance as required In Sections
02200 Earthwork 03311 Normal Weight Concrete and other
sections where Indicated in the specifications.
B. Include in Bid for inclusion in contract sum, Testing Allow-
ance of 962,000 00ffwo Thousand Dollars)
C Amount of the Allowance includes:
1. On site and laboratory testing.
2. Contractors handling.
3. Other expenses required for complete laboratory
reports.
D. In addition to amount allowance, include In base bid, for
Inclusion in contract sum, contractor overhead. profit,
insurance and other direct cost
E. Monies remaining in allowance at close of project credited
to Owner by change order.
1.30 Betterment Allowance:
A. Use monies in Betterment Allowance only on issuance of
wntten directive.
B. Include In bid for inclusion in contract sum, Betterment
Allowance of %00 00 (Zero Dollars.)
C. The contractors base bid shall include overhead, profit,
insurance. and taxes for the Betterment Allowance. Better-
ment Allowance requests shall include only the following
costs:
1. Products
2. Labor
3. Transportation
4. Equipment rental
5. Other direct expenses
D. Monies remaining in allowance at close of project; credited
to owner by Change Order, or transferred to other
allowances as directed by Arohtect.
1.40 Allowance for Products:
A. Purchase products under each Allowance as directed by
Architect
8. Include the following amounts In bid, for inclusion In contract
sum:
1. Section 08700 Hardware: Allow lump sum of %8.000.00
(Eight Thousand Dollars) for finish hardware not
already scheduled or specified.
C Amount of the Allowance Include:
1. Net cost of product
2. Delivery and unloading at site
3. Applicable taxes
SECTION 01020 - ALLOWANCES
• 1.70
1.80
A.
Section 01020 - Allowances - Page 1 of 1
D. In addition to amounts of allowances, include In bid, for
inclusion In contract sun, contractors cost for:
1. Handling at site, including uncrabng and storage.
2. Protection from damage from elements.
3. Labor, installation and finishing. -
4. Other expenses required to complete Installation.
5 Contractor's overhead, profit and insurance.
1.50 Selection of Products
A. Architect duties
1. Consult with contractor in considerations of products and
supplies.
2. Make selection, designate products to be used.
3. Notify Contractor, In wnting, designating:
a Product model and finish
b. Accessories and attachments
c. Approved Supplier
d. Cost, delivered and unloaded at site
B. Contractor's duties:
1. Assist Architect in determining qualified suppliers
2. Obtain proposals from suppliers when requested by
Architect
3. Make recommendations fro consideration by Architect
4 Notify Architect of any effect anticipated by selec Bon of
product or supplier under consideration:
a Construction schedule
b. Contract sun
Contract sun
5. On notice of approval, enter Purchase Agreement with
designated supplier.
1.60 Delivery
A Contractor's responsiblliy:
1. Arrange for delivery and unloading
2. Promptly Inspect products for damage or defects
3. Submit claims for transportation damage
Installation
Comply with requirements of referenced specification section.
Adjustment of Costs
Do not exceed allowance without Architect's approval.
B. Should actual approved purchase cost be more or less than
specified amount of allowance, contract sum will be adjusted by
change order equal to amount of difference.
C. For products specified under unit cost allowance the unit cost
applies to quantity actually used.
1. Submit Invoices or other data to substantiate quantity
actually used.
END OF SECTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.10 Description
A Execute cutting (Including excavating), fitting or patching of
work required to:
1. Make several pans fit property
2. Uncover work to provide for installation of
ill-timed work
3. Remove and replace defective work
4. Remove and replace work not conforming to
requirements of contract documents
B. Do not endanger any work by cutting or altering work or any
part of it
C. Do not cut or alter work of another contractor without written
consent of architect
D. Do not cut structural members without written consent of
architect
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.10 Materials:
A For replacement of work removed: Comply with
specifications for type of work to be done.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.10 Inspection:
A Inspect existing conditions of work, Including elements
subject to movement or damage during:
1. Cutting and patching
2. Excavating and backfilling
B. After uncovering of work, inspect conditions affecting
Installation of new product
3 20 Preparation Prior to Cutting:
A Provide shoring, bracing and support as required to maintain
structural integrity of project
B. Provide protection for other portions of project
C. Provide protection from elements
3.30 Performance:
A Execute fitting and adjustment of products to provide finished
installations to comply with specified tolerances finished.
B. Execute cutting and demolition by methods which will
prevent damage to other work and will provide proper
surfaces to receive Installation of repair and new work.
C. Restore work which has been cut or removed; install new
products to provide completed work.
SECTION 01070 - CUTTING AND PATCHING
Section 01070 - Cutting and Patching - Page 1 of 1
D. Refinish entire surfaces as necessary to provide an even finish
matching adjoining work.
1. Continuous surfaces: to nearest Intersections
2. Assembly. enure refinishing.
END OF SECTION
PART 1
GENERAL
1.10 Description
A. Work Included: Certain Alternates have been established as
described herein. These are to allow the Owner to:
1. Compare costs where Altemate materiaLo and methods
may be used.
2. Make a decision concerning Altemate materials and
methods prior to awarding the Contract
B. Related Work Descnbed Elsewhere:
1. Pertinent Sections of the Specilficakons described the
materials and methods required under the various
Alternates.
2. The method for stating the proposed Contract Sum is
described on the Bid Form
1.20 Submittals.
A. Indicate on the Bid Form a proposal for each Altemate listed.
B. If no figure Is Indicated for an Alternate that Alternate may be
accepted at no change in the Base Bid.
C. Do not submit Alternates other than those descnbed in this
Section.
1 30 Product Handling:
If the Owner elects to accept one or more Alternates make all
modifications required in furnishing and installation of the selected
Altemates 10 approval of Arhhtect and at no additional cost other
than proposed on the Bid Form.
PART 2 PRODUCTS:
2.10 ALTERNATE NO. 1:
Provide and Install metal lockers as specified In section
10500 and as drawn on the plans.
2.20 ALTERNATE NO. 2:
Provide and install standing seam metal roof as specified in
section 07410.
2.30 ALTERNATE NO. 3:
Provide and install 1 x 6 v- groove ceiling in apparatus bays
in lieu of 5/0' gypsum board as drawn and detailed.
PART 3 EXECUTION:
3.10 Advance Coordination.
A. Immediately after award of Contract advise necessary
subcontractors and suppliers as to:
1. Nature and extent of accepted Alternates
2. Involved changes caused by Alternate selection.
SECTION 01100 - ALTERNATIVES
3.20 Surface Conditions.
Section 01100 - Alternatives - Page 1 of 1
Prior to Installation of Altematve items verity that work has been
modified as necessary to accept the installation and that items may
be installed in complete accordance with their manufacturer's current
recommendations; In the event of discrepancy notify Architect and
proceed as directed.
END OF SECTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.10 DESCRIPTION
A. Work Included:
1. In general, project meetings will be held weekly at the
job site In accordance with a mutually acceptable
schedule. The Architect Will conduct project meetings
throughout the construction period.
2. The purpose of the project meetings is to enable
orderly review of progress during construction and to
provide for systematic discussion and analysis of
problems that might arise between the Owner, Project
Architect and /or Contractor relative to execution of the
work
B. Related work described elsewhere:
1. The Contractor's relations with his subcontractors and
material suppliers, and discussions relative thereto.
are the Contractor's responsibility as descnbed in the
General Conditions and are not pan of project
meetings content
1.20 AUTHORITY DESIGNATION
A. Persons designated by the Contractor to attend and partici-
pate in project meetings shall have all required authority to
commit the Contractor to solutions as agreed upon in the
project meetings.
1.30 SUBMITTALS
A. Agenda items:
1. To the maximum extent possible, advise at least
twenty-four (24) hours in advance of the project
meeting regarding all agenda items to be discussed,
including tours In advance of the meeting.
1.40 AGENDA
A. Preconstmction Meeting:
1. The Architect will conduct this meeting within fifteen
(15) days after the date of Notice to Proceed.
2. Location: Site Location.
3. Attendance:
a) Owner
b) Architect
c) Architect and his Consultants
d) Contractor's Project Manager and Supenntendent
e) Major Subcontractors
) Major Suppliers, as appropriate
g) Others as appropriate
4. Suggested Agenda:
a) Dlstnbution (by Contractor) and discussion of:
1) List of major Subcontractors and Suppliers
with addresses and telephone numbers
b) Critical work sequencing
c) Major equipment deliveries and priorities
d) Project Coordination
e) Designation of responsible personnel
f) Procedures and processing of:
1) Field decisions
2) Proposal requests
3) Submittals
4) Change Orders
SECTION 01200 - MEETINGS
0)
h)
k)
D
m)
n)
Section 01200 - Meetings - Page 1 of 2
5) Applications for payment
6) Schedules and Reports
Adequacy of Contract Documents distribution
Procedures for maintaining Record Documents
Use of premises:
1) Office, work and storage areas
2) Owner's requirements
Construction facilities, controls, and construction
aids
Temporary utilities
Safety and first-aid procedures
Security procedures
Housekeeping procedures
B Progress Meetings
1 The Architect will conduct weekly meetings at the Project
Site to review the work answer questions, and resolve
problems.
2. Suggested Meeting Agenda
a) Attendees:
List of attendees and company they represent
b) Minutes Review:
Corrections, additions and /or deletions to previous
meetings
c) Outstanding Action Items:
Review of items not resolved from previous
meeting
d) Technical Concerns:
Discussion of technical aspects of the project
Including problems to be resolved under the
following categories:
1) Structural: All discussions pertaining to the
structural items generated by any party.
2) Mechanical: All Rams pertaining to the
mechanical area
3) Electrical: All items pertaining to the electrical
area
4) Architectural: All items pertaining to the
architectural area
5) Civil: All Items pertaining to the civil area
e) Record Documents:
Confirm results of the record document.
) Shop Drawings:
Confine results of shop drawing review; list those
not submitted by Contractor that are due and shop
drawings not returned by Architects or Engineers.
g) RFP:
Confirm approved and outstanding RFP's.
h) Schedule Review:
Confirm status of work areas of concern and
general status of work as of meeting date.
i) Projection of Work
Discussion of areas of concern; i.e., areas of
concentration.
Procurement
Verify procurement activities.
Job Concerns:
Any other Items to be discussed.
Review of All Action Items:
Note: Each action item will have an asterisk as it
appears In the minutes and they will also be
consolidated at the and with item, person
responsible, and date to be resolved.
m) Summary:
Confirmation of next meeting date, location and time
k)
)
plus those requested to be In attendance.
3. All Items to be discussed shall be brought up at the
time the appropriate agenda item is discussed. All
attendees shall familiarize themselves with the agenda
and be prepared in advance with their items for din.
cusaion.
C. Special Meetings:
1. The Owner may call special meetings at the project
site or office to coordinate the work answer questions,
and resolve problems.
1.50 MINUTES
A. The Contractor will compile minutes of each project meeting
and will distribute copies to all Interested parties within seven
(7) days after the meeting. Items in the minutes shall be
numbered consecutively and grouped under divisions and
sections. Each item shall be carried forward until resolved.
B. The minutes compiled by the Contractor will be the official
record minutes and all clarifications and/or corrections shall
be transmitted (n writing to the Owner, Architect and
Architect within fourteen (14) days of the date of receipt of
the minutes or unless noted during the next scheduled
meeting under the appropriate agenda item. Transmitted
corrections shall be legibly submitted on company letterhead.
C. At least one (1) bound volume of all minutes shall be main-
tained by the Contractor in the job office until project
completion.
END OF SECTION
Section 01200 - Meetings - Page 2 of 2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
PART 1
1.10 SUMMARY
GENERAL (CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES)
- A. Related requirements specified elsewhere:
1. Summery of Work Section 01010
2. Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples Section
01340
B. Provide projected conswction schedules for entire work,
revise penodlcally.
C. Coordination
1. Coordinate schedules with reviewed schedules of other
prime contractors.
2. General Contractor will resolve conflicts among
schedules of various prime contractors.
1.20 FORM OF SCHEDULES
A. Prepare in form of Horizontal Bar Chart or Network Analysis
System.
1 30 CONTENTS OF SCHEDULE
A. Provide complete sequence of construction by activity.
1. Shop drawings, product data and samples:
a) Submittal dates
b) Oates reviewed copies will be required
2 Decision Dates for.
a) Products specified by allowances
b) Selection of finishes
3. Product procurement and delivery dates.
4. Dates for beginning and completion of each element of
construction
B. Show projected percentage of completion for each item of
work as of first day of each month.
C. Provide separate subschedule, showing submittals, review
times, procurement schedules, and delivery dates.
D. Provide subschedules to define cnbcai portions of entire
schedule.
1.40 UPDATING
A. Show all changes occurring since previous submission.
8. Indicate progress of each activity, show completion dates
C. Include:
1. Major changes in scope.
2. Activities modified since previous updating.
3. Revised projections due to changes.
4. Other identifiable changes.
D. Provide narrative report Including:
1. Discussion of problem areas and proposed corrective
action.
2. Effect of changes on schedule or on other contractors.
3. Description of revisions.
150 SUBMITTALS
SECTION 01311 - SCHEDULES AND REPORTS
Section 01311 - Schedules and Reports - Page 1 of 1
A. Submit initial schedules within fifteen (15) days after date of
notice to proceed.
B. Submit updated schedules depicting progress to first day of
each month.
C. Submit 2 copies for Owner's Representatives and Architects
Information.
PART 2 GENERAL (SCHEDULE OF VALUES)
2.10 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit to the Owner's Representative a Schedule of Values at
least ten (10) days prior to submitting first Application for
Payment.
B. Upon request by the Owner's Representative, support values
given with data that will substantiate their correctness.
C. Use Schedule of Values only as basis for Contractor's Appli-
cation for Payment.
2.20 FORM OR SUBMITTAL
A. Submit typewritten Schedule of Values on 8- 1/21n. x 11 in. white
paper.
B. Use Table of Contents of this specification as basis for format
for listing costs of work for sections under Divisions 2 - 16.
C. Identify each line Item with number and title as listed in Table
of Contents of this Specification.
2.30 PREPARING SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Itemize separate line Item cost for work required by each
section of this Specification except as specifically authorized
otherwise.
1. For example, the following Is suggested:
Set up charges (Include temporary facilities)
Insurance bonds
Masonry
2. Show overhead and profit as separate line item.
3. Show each allowance and the betterment fund as a
separate line Item.
2.40 REVIEW BY OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE
A. Architect and Owner's Representative well review schedule.
B. Any objection will be transmitted to Contractor for revision and
resubmittal.
C. Schedule will become the basis for Progress Payments.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 01312 - WARRANTY OF WORK AFTER FINAL PAYMENT
WARRANTY AFTER FINAL PAYMENT
Section 01312 •Warranty Page 1 o11
Prior to Final Payment, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner a Warranty of Work After Final Payment
in the following form:
The Contractor does hereby warrant all work and materials to be in full and complete accordance with
the Contract Documents and Agreement between Owner and Contractor, and requirements appertaining
thereto; that all work and materials are free from any and all defects and imperfections, and fully suitable
for the use and purposes for which each and every part is intended. The Contractor also agrees that,
should any defect develop or appear which the Architect finds was not caused by improper use, the
Contractor shall promptly, upon demand, fully correct, substitute and make good any such defective
material without any cost to the Owner and will save the Owner harmless against any claim, demand, loss
or damage by reason of any breach of this warranty.
The period of this warranty shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion.
The warranty shall continue to be in full force and effect for the period of one (1) year, except for those
items for which a longer period of warranty is specifically stated in the Warranties for work in Technical
Sections of the Specifications.
Warranties for work stated in Technical Sections shall continue in full force and effect for the respective
periods expressly stated.
In WITNESS WHEREOF, the undersigned has signed and sealed this instrument this
day of ,19 .
(Attest)
(Seal if Bidder is a Corporation)
(Firm Name)
(Signature) '
(Title)
END OF SECTION
SECTION 01313 - CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE
* * * * * * * * * * * **
Section 01313 - Certificate Page 1 of 1
CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE
No final payment shall be made until the Contractor shall file with the Owner, prior to acceptance of the
work, a notarized Certification of Compliance in the following form.
The Contractor does hereby certify that all work has been performed and materials supplied in
accordance with the drawings, specifications and Contract Documents for the above work, and that:
No less than the prevailing rates of wages as ascertained by the governing body of the
Contracting agency has been paid to laborers, workmen and mechanics employed on
this work;
There have been no unauthorized substitutions of Subcontractors; nor have any
subcontracts been entered into without the names of the Subcontractors having been
submitted to the Owner prior to the start of such subcontracted work;
No subcontract was assigned or transferred or performed by any Subcontractor other
than the original Subcontractor, without prior notice having been submitted to the Owner
together with the names of all Subcontractors;
All claims for material and labor and other paid service performed in connection with
these specifications have been paid;
All monies due have been paid.
In WITNESS WHEREOF, the undersigned has signed and sealed this instrument this _ day
19 .
(Firm Name)
(Signature)
(Title)
(Attest)
(SEAL IF BIDDER IA A CORPORATION)
As determined necessary, evidence of compliance may be required to be submitted with and made a part
of this Certificate of Compliance.
END OF SECTION
PART 1 GENERAL
SECTION 01340 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES
1.10 Summary
A. Submit to Architect/Engineer. Shop Drawings, Product Data
and samples required by Specification Sections.
B. Related Requirements Specified Elsewhere
1. Construction Schedule:
Section 01310
2. Project Record Documents:
Section 01720
C. Prepare and submit with Construction Schedule. aseparate
schedule listing dates for submission and review of Shop
Drawings. Product Data and Samples will be needed for
each project.
1.20 Shop Drawings:
A. Original drawings, prepared by Contractor. Subcontractor,
Supplier or Disbibutor, which illustrate some portion of the
work; showing fabncation, layout, setting or erection details
No portion of the Contract Documents shall be reproduced
for use as a part of the Shop Drawings.
B. Prepared by a qualified detailer.
C. Identify details by reference to sheet and dotal' numbers
shown on Contract Drawings
D. Reproduction for submittals: Reproducible Transparency
with one Opaque Diazo Print
1.30 Product Data
A Manufacturer's Standard Schematic Drawings:
1. Modify drawings to delete information not applicable
to project
B Manufacturer's Catalog Sheets, Brochures, Diagrams,Sched-
ules, Performance Charts, Illustrations and other descriptive
data.
1. Clearly mark each copy to Identify pertinent materials,
products or models.
2. Show dimensions and clearances required.
3. Show performance characteristics and capacities.
4. Show wiring diagrams and controls.
1.40 Samples
A. Physical examples to illustrate maenals, equipment or
workmanship, and to establish standards by which
completed work is judged.
B. Office Samples: Of sufficient size and quantity to clearly
illustrate:
1. Functional characteristics of product or matenal.
2. Full range of color samples.
C. Field Samples and Mock -Ups:
1. Erect at Project Site at location acceptable to Architect
2. Construct each complete, including work of all trades
required in finished work
Section 01340 - Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples - Page 1 of 2
1.50 Contractors Responsibilities:
A Review and Approve Shop Drawings. Product Data and
Samples prior to submission and so indicate over his signature.
B. Verify:
1. Field measurements.
a Field construction critena.
3. Catalog numbers and similar data.
C. Coordinate submittals with requirements of work and Contract
Documents.
D. Contractor's responsibility for errors and omissions in submittals
is not relieved by Architect/Engineer's review of submittal
E. Contractor's responsibility for deviations in submittals from
requirements of Contract Documents is not relieved by
Architect/Engineer's review of submittals, unless
Architect/Engineer gives wntten acceptance of specific
deviations.
F. Notify Architect/Engineers, In writing at time of submission, of
deviations in submittals from requirements of Contract
Documents.
O. Begin no work which requires submittals until return of
submittals with Architect/Engineer's stamp of initials orslgnature
indicating review.
H. After Architect/Engineer's review, distribute copies.
1.60 Submission Requirements:
A Schedule submissions at least ten days before dates reviewed
submittals will be needed.
B. Shop Drawings Submit one (1) REPRODUCIBLE
TRANSPARENCY and one (1) OPAQUE PRINT of Shop
Drawings.
C. Product Data: Submit number of copses of Product Data which
Contractor requires for distribution plus two (2) copies which will
be retained by Architect/Engineer.
D. Samples. Submit number of Samples specified In each Sped.
fication Section.
E. Accompany submittals with transmittal letter in duplicate,
containing:
1. Date
2. Project Tide and Number
3. Contractor's name and address
4. The number of each Shop Drawing, Product Data and
Sample Submitted.
5. Notification of Deviations from Contract Documents
6. Other pertinent data
F. For work designed by consultants, make submission directly,
and simultaneously submit a duplicate of transmittal letter to
Architect/Engineer.
G. Submittals shall include:
1. Date and Revision Oates
2. Project Title and Number
3. The names of:
a. Architect/Engineer
b. Contractor
c. Subcontractor
d. Supplier
e. Manufacturer
1. Separate detailer when pertinent
4. Identification of product or matenal
5. Relation to adjacent structure or materials
6. Feld dimensions, clearly Identified as such
7. Specification Section number
8. Applicable Standards, such as ASTM or Federal
Specification
9. A blank space 3' x 3• for the Architect/Engineer's
stamp
10. Identification of deviations from Contract Documents
11. Contractor's stamp, imdeled or signed. certifying to
review of submittal, verification of field measurements
and compliance with Contract Documents
H. If Shop drawings which have been previously submitted for
approval ere resubmitted, they shall clearly note any
changes or additions that have been made to the previous
submittal.
1 70 Resubmission Requirements:
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Revise initial drawings as required and resubmit as
specified for initial submittal.
2. Indicate on drawings any changes which have been
made other than those requested by
Architect/Engineer.
B. Product Data and Samples: Submit new data and samples
as required for initial submittal
1.80 Distribution of Submittals After Review:
A. Distribute copies of Shop Drawings and Product Data which
carry Architect /Engineer's/Consultant's stamp to:
1. Contractor's File
2. Job -Site He
3. Record Documents File
4. Other Pnme Contractors
5. Subcontractors
8. Supplier
7. Fabncator
8. Architect (f shop drawings are submitted directly to
Consultant).
B. Distribute Samples as Directed.
1.90 Architect/Engineer's Duties:
A. Review Submittals with reasonable promptness.
B. Review for
1. Design concept
2. Information given in Contract Documents
C. Review of separate item does not consbtute review of an
assembly in which Items functions.
D. Affix stamp and initials or signature certifying review of
submittal.
E. Return submittals to Contractor for distribution.
END OF SECTION
Section 01340 - Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples - Page 2 of 2
PART 1 GENERAL
1.10 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit to Architect a Schedule of Values at least ten (10)
days prior to submitting first Appllcadon for Payment
B. Upon request by Architect, support values given with data
that will substantiate their correctness.
C. Use Schedule of Values only as basis for Contractor's Appli-
cation for Payment
1.20 FORM OR SUBMITTAL
A Submit typewntten Schedule of Values on 8-1/2 in. x 11 in.
white paper.
B. Use Table of Contents of this Specification as basis for
format for listing costs of work for sections under Divisions
2 thru 16.
C. Identify each line Item with number and tide as listed in Table
of Contents of this Specification.
1.30 PREPARING SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Itemize separate fine item cost for work required by each
section of this Specification except as specifically authorized
otherwise.
1. For example, the following Is suggested:
Set up charges (Include temporary facilities)
Insurance bonds
Excavation
Filling and Grading
Storm Drainage
Paving
Masonry
etc.
2. Include pro-rata share of profit and overhead in each
line item.
3. Show each allowance as a separate fine item.
B. Make sum of cost items listed in schedule equal to contract
sum..pa
1.40 REVIEW BY ARCH)TECT
A. Architect will review schedule.
B. Any objection will be transmitted to Contractor for revision
and resubmitml.
C. Schedule will become the basis for Progress Payments.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 01370 - SCHEDULE OF VALUES
Section 01370 • Schedule • Page 1 of 1
PART 1 GENERAL
1.10 DESCRIPTION
SECTION 01400 - TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
A Work included: During progress of work, the Owner may
require testing to be performed to determine that materials
provided meet specified requirements; such testing Includes,
but Is not necessarily limited to:
1. Soil Compaction
2. Normal Weight Concrete
B. Related Work Descnbed Elsewhere: Requirements for testing
may be described in various specification sections; where no
testing requirements are descnbed, but Owner decides it is
required, testing shall be performed under current pertinent
testing standards.
C. Testing Laboratory: The Testing Laboratory will be selected
by the Owner.
1.20 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A Qualifications for testing laboratory. The laboratory will be
qualified in accordance with ASTM E-329-70 "Recommended
Practice for Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete
and Steel Used in Construction:.
B. Codes and Standards.
Testing: In accordance with pertinent codes and
regulations and with selected standards of the
American Society for Testing and Materials
1.30 PRODUCT HANDLING
Promptly process and distribute test reports and related instruc-
tions to assure necessary retesting and/or replacement of materials
with least possible delay In work
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.10 PAYMENT FOR TESTING SERVICES
A. Initial Services: Borne from testing allowance indicated in
Section 01020 Allowances.
B. Retesting: When initial tests indicate non. compliance with
Contract Documents, subsequent retesting shall be
performed by the same laboratory and costs thereof
deducted by the Owner from the Contract Sum.
2.20 CODE COMPLIANCE TESTING
Inspections and tests required by codes or ordinances, or by plan
approval authonty, and made by a legally constituted authority,
shall be the responsibility of, and shall be paid for, by the
Contractor and not bome by the testing allowance.
2.30 CONTRACTOR'S CONVENIENCE TESTING
Inspection or testing performed exclusively for the Contractor's
convenience shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Section 01400 - Testing Laboratory Services - Page 1 of 1
3.10 COOPERATION WITH TESTING LABORATORY
Representatives of testing laboratory shall have access to Work
at all times; provide facilities for such access in order that
laboratory may properly perform its functions. specification
sections.
320 SCHEDULES FOR TESTING
A Establishing Schedule:
1. Determine with laboratory, time required to perform
tests and issue findings.
2. Provide required time in construction schedule.
B. Revised Schedule: Coordinate changes of schedule with
laboratory as required Testing Laboratory shell provide
a 24 hour phone number to enable the Contractor to
revise the schedule at times other than regular business
hours.
C. Adherence to Schedule: When laboratory is prevented
from testing or taking specimens according to the
determined schedule due to Incompleteness of work extra
costs atthbutable to delay may be backcharged to
Contractor and not bome by Owner.
3.30 TAKING SPECIMENS
A Testing Laboratory shall Perform the Following Services:
1. Take samples and specimens as directed.
2. Furnish sampling equipment and personnel.
3 Deliver specimens and samples to laboratory.
END OF SECTION
PART 1 GENERAL A. Arrange for temporary heat supply where required by various
specification sections.
1.10 STORAGE SHEDS
B. Provide necessary heat as and where required.
A. Provide where directed.
C. Pay for all installation and operating costs for heating during
B. Construction: suitable, substantial, waterproof. construction.
C. Maintain In good order and remove at completion of 1.80 SIGNS
construction.
A. Display no signs or advertisements without approval of
D. Store therein all materials needing protection from elements. Architect
1.20 OFFICES B. Erect on site one painted sign, 4'-0" x 8'-0" as per accom-
panying drawings
A. Provide where directed.
C. Architect will furnish location.
B. Construction: suitable, substantial, waterproof.
C. Maintain in good order and remove at completion of END OF SECTION
construction.
D. Provide space for Architect with table and chair.
1.30 TOILETS
A. Contractor shall provide his own rest room facilities on the
sae.
B. It will be the Contractor's responsibility to maintain the rest
room in a clean and sanitary condition. The rest room shall
be cleaned once a week and more often If required to
maintain sanitary conditions.
1.40 WATER SERVICE
A. Arrange for temporary connection.
B. Run necessary temporary piping and hydrants.
C. Owner will provide the use of existing water supply within a
reasonable amount and will pay for such usage.
1.50 ELECTRICAL SERVICE
A. Arrange for temporary connection.
B. Run necessary temporary lines and weather protected
outlets.
C. Owner will provide the use of existing electrical service within
a reasonable amount and will pay for such usage.
1.60 TELEPHONE SERVICE
A. Provide for use of alt employees or others involved in
construction of building.
B. Pay for installation, maintenance, removal and all local and
long distance charges.
C. Remove only when directed by Architect
1.70 TEMPORARY HEATING
SECTION 01510 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES
Secbon 01510 - Temporary Facilities - Page 1 of 1
PART 1 GENERAL
1.10 PRODUCTS LIST
A. Within 30 days after date of Contract submit to
Architect/Engineer five copies of complete list of all products
which are proposed for installation.
B. Tabulate list by each specification section.
C. For products specified under Reference Standards, Include
with listing of each product:
1. Name and Address of Manufacturer
2. Trade Name
3. Manufacturer's Data
4. Model or Catalog Designation
1.20 CONTRACTOR'S OPTIONS
SECTION 01640 - SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
A. For products specified only by Reference Standards, select
any product meeting standards, by any manufacturer.
B. For products specified by naming several products or manu-
facturers, select any product and manufacturer named.
C. For products specified by naming one or more products, but
indicating the option of selected equivalent products e g , by
stating '0r approved equeF after specified product,
Contractor must submit request as required for substitution,
for any product not specifically named.
D. For products specified by naming only one product and
manufacturer, there is no option, and substitution will be
allowed by approval prior to bidding only.
1.30 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. During bidding, Architect/Engineer will consider written
requests from prime bidders for substitutions, received at
least ten days pdor to bid date: requests received after that
time will not be considered
B Submit five copies of request for substitution, Include in
request
1. Complete data substantiating compliance of proposed
substitution with Contract Documents.
2. For Products:
a. Product identification, including manufacturer's
name and address.
b. Manufacturer's literature:
1.) Product Description
2.) Performance and Test Data
3.) Reference Standards
c. Samples
d. Name and address of similar projects on which
products were used, and date of installation.
3. For construction methods:
a. Detailed description of proposed method.
b. Drawings illustrating methods.
4. Itemized comparison of proposed substitution in com-
parison with product or method specified, including
presenting credits to the Owner where applicable.
C. In making request for substitution, Bidder /Contractor repre-
sents:
Section 01640 - Substitutions and Product Options - Page 1 of 1
1. He has personally investigated proposed product or
met hod, and determined that It Is equal or superior in all
respects to that specified.
2. He will provide the same guarantee for substitution as
for product or method specified.
3. He will coordinate installation of accepted substitution In
work making such changes as may be required for work
to be complete in all respects.
4. He waives all claims for additional costs related to
substitution which consequently becomes apparent
5. Cost data is complete and Includes all related costs
under his contract or other contracts which maybe
affected by the substitution.
6. He will reimburse the Owner for any redesign costs by
the Architect/Engineer for accommodation of the sub-
stitution.
D. Substitutions will not be considered If:
1. They are indicated or Implied on Shop Drawings or
Project Data Submittals without formal request submit fed
In accordance with Paragraph 1.03.
2. Acceptance will requue substantial revision of Con tract
Documents.
END OF SECTION
PART1 GENERAL
1.10 DESCRIPTION
A. Related Requirements Specified Elsewhere:
1. Cutting and Patching: Section 01070
2. Cleaning for Specific Products or Work: Specification
Section for that Work.
B. Maintain premises and public properties free from accumula-
tion of waste, debris, and rubbish, caused by operations.
C At completion of work, remove waste materials, rubbish,
tools. equipment, machinery and surplus materials, and
clean all sight exposed surfaces; leave project clean and
ready for occupancy.
1.20 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
A. Standards: Maintain project in accord with applicable safety
and insurance standards.
8. Hazard Control.
1. Store volatile wastes in covered metal containers, and
remove from premises daily.
2. Prevent accumulation of wastes which create
hazardous conditions.
3. Provide adequate ventilation during use of volatile or
noxious substances.
C Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with
local ordinances and anti- pollution laws.
1. Do not bum or bury rubbish and waste materials on
project site.
2. Do not dispose of volatile wastes such as mineral
spints, oil or paint thinner in storm or sanitary drains.
3. Do not dispose of wastes in streams and waterway.
PART PRODUCTS
2.10 MATERIALS
A. Use only cleaning materials recommended by manufacturer
of surface to be cleaned.
8. Use cleaning materials only on surfaces recommended by
cleaning material manufacturer. room in aclean and sanitary
condition.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.10 DURING CONSTRUCTION
A. Execute cleaning to ensure buildings, grounds, and public
properties are maintained free from accumulations of waste
materials and rubbish.
B. Wet down dry materials and rubbish to lay dust and prevent
blowing dust
C. At reasonable Intervals (maximum each week) during
progress of work clean site and public properties, and
dispose of waste materials, debris and rubbish.
SECTION 01710 - CLEANING
Section 01710 - Cleaning - Page 1 of 1
D. Provide on-site containers for collection of waste matenals,
debris and rubbish.
E. Remove waste materials, debris and rubbish from site and
legally dispose of at public or private dumping areas off
Owner's property.
F. Broom clean interior building areas and continue cleaning on
an as needed basis until building is ready for occupancy.
G. Handle materials in a controlled manner with as few handling's
as possible; do not drop or throw materials from heights.
H. Scheduling cleaning operations so that dust and other con-
taminant resulting from cleaning process will not fall on wet,
newly painted surfaces.
3.20 FINAL CLEANING
A. Employ experienced workmen, or professional cleaners, for final
cleaning.
8. In preparation for substantial completion or occupancy, conduct
final inspection of sight-exposed interior and exterior surfaces,
and of concealed spaces.
C. Remove grease, dust, dirt, stains, labels, fingerprints, and other
foreign materials, from sight- exposed interior and exterior
finished surfaces; polish surfaces so designated for shine finish.
D. Repair, patch and touch -up marred surfaces to specified finish,
to match adjacent surfaces.
E. Broom clean paved surfaces; rake clean other surfaces of
grounds.
F Replace air conditioning filters if units were operated during
construction.
G Clean ducts, blowers and cads, if air conditioning units were
operated without filters during construction.
H. Owner will assume full responsibility for cleaning as of time
designated on Certificate of Substantial Completion for Owner's
acceptance of project or portion thereof.
END OF SECTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.10 RELATED REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples Section 01340
1 20 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS
A Maintain at Job Site. one copy of:
1. Contract Documents
2. Specifications
3. Addenda
4. Reviewed Shop Drawings
5. Change Orders
6 Other Modifications to Contract
7. Field Test Records
SECTION 01720 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
B Store Documents in temporary Field Office, apart from Docu-
ments used for construction.
C. Provide files and racks for storage of Documents
D. Maintain Documents In clean. dry, legible condition
E. Do not use Record Documents for construction purposes.
F. Make Documents available at all times for inspection by
Architect/Engineer and Owner.
G. Maintain records even though no changes are made from
original documents.
1 30 MARKING DEVICES
A Provide colored pencil for marking, conforming to follow
color code:
1. And for Architectural Work
2. Blue for Structural Work
3. Green for Plumbing Work
4. Orange for FIVAC Work
5. Brown for Electrical Work
6. Black for other wntten notations
1.40 PROJECT RECORDS DOCUMENTS
A. label each document 'Project Record" In 21nch high printed
letters.
B. Keep Record Documents current
C. 00 not permanently conceal any work until required informa-
tion has been recorded.
D. Contract Drawings, legibly mark to record actual
construction.
1. Depths of various elements of toundatlon In relation to
First Floor Level.
2. Horizontal and vertical location of underground utili ties
and appurtenances referenced to permanent surface
improvements.
3. Location of internal utilities and appurtenances
concealed in construction referenced to visible and
accessible features of structure.
4. Field changes of dimension and detail.
5. Changes made by change order or written directive.
Section 01720 - Project Record Documents - Page 1 of 1
6. Details not on original Contract Documents.
E. Specifications and Addenda: legibly mark up each Section to
record:
1. Manufacturer, Trade Name, Catalog Number, and Supplier
of each product and Item of equipment actually in stalled.
2. Changes made by change order or wntten directive.
3. Other matters not originally specified.
F. Shop Drawings. Maintain as Record Documents; legibly anno-
tate following drawings to record changes made after review:
1. Structural Steel
2. Reinforcing Steel
3. Millwork
1.50 SUBMITTAL
A. At completion of project, deliver one complete set of mylar
sepias of all drawings and one set of specifications containing
all changes and moditicationsthat occurred dung construction.
B. Accompany submittal with transmittal letter, in duplicate,
containing; distance charges.
1. Date
2. Protect Title and Number
3. Contractor's Name and Address
4. Title and Number of Each Record Document
5. Certification that each Document, as submitted, is
complete and accurate.
6. Signature of Contractor, or his Authorized Representative.
ENO OF SECTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Clear site of plant life and grass.
B. Remove root system of trees and shrubs.
C. Remove surface debris.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 02211 - Rough Grading.
B. Section 02222 - Excavation.
1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to City of Round Rock Public Works Department
requirements for disposal of debris.
PART2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 CLEARING
A Clear areas required for access to site and execution of
Work.
B. Remove trees and shrubs within marked areas. Grub out
stumps, roots, surface rock.
C. Clear undergrowth and deadwood. without disturbing
subsoil.
3.02 PROTECTION
A. Protect plant growth and features remaining as final
landscaping. Contractor shall replace with same size and
type 0 damaged.
B. Protect bench marks and existing work from damage or
displacement
C. Maintain designated site access for vehicle and pedestrian
303 REMOVAL
A. Remove debris from site.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 02110 - SrrE CLEARING
Section 02110 - Site Clearing - Page 1 of 1
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Removal of identified discovered rock during excavation.
B. Use of explosives to assist rock removal.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Document 00220 • Geolechnical Data: Bore hole locations
and findings of soil and subsurface report.
•••• ARCHITECT PROVIDE
B. Section : Measurement and payment for
rock removal.
C. Section 01400• Testing Laboratory Services: Inspection of
beanng surfaces.
D. Section 02222 • Excavation: Building excavation.
E. Section 02225 - Trenching: Trenching for utilities.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. NFPA 495 • Code for the Manufacture, Transportation,
Storage, and Use of Explosive Materials.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Seismic Survey Firm. Company epeclaliong in seismic
surveys with five yeah documented experience
B. Explosives Firm Company specializing In explosives for
disintegration of subsurface rock with five years documented
experience.
1 05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable code for explosive disintegration of
rock
B. Obtain permits from authorities having jonsdiction before
explosives are brought to site or drilling is started.
1.06 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 01340.
8 Indicate proposed method of blasting, delay pattern,
explosive types, type of blasting mat or cover, and Intended
rock recovery method.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Rock (Definition): solid mineral matena1 with a volume in
excess of 1/3 cu yd or solid materiel that that cannot be
removed with a 3/4 cu yd capacity power shovel.
8. Explosives: Type recommended by explosives firm following
seismic survey, and required by authorities having
SECTION 02202 - ROCK REMOVAL
Section 02202 - Rock Removal - Page 1 of 2
junsdicbon
C. Delay Devices: Type recommended by explosives Firm
D. Blasting Mat Matenals: Type recommended by explosives Firm
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Verify site conditions and note irregularities affecting work of
this Section.
8. Beginning work of this Section means acceptance of existing
condition.
3.02 ROCK REMOVAL • MECHANICAL METHOD
A. Excavate for and remove rock by the mechanical method.
B. Cut away rock at excavation bottom to form level bearing.
C. Remove sheled layers to provide sound and unshattered base
for foundations
D. In ublity benches, excavate to 8 Inches below invert elevation
of pipe and 24 inches wider than pipe diameter.
8. Remove excavated material from site.
F. Correct unauthorized rock removal with. Lean concrete fill in
accordance with Section 03300, as directed by
Architect/Engineer.
3 03 ROCK REMOVAL - EXPLOSIVES METHODS
A. If rock is uncovered requiring the explosives method for rock
disintegration, notify the Architect/Engineer.
B. Advise owners of adjacent buildings or structures in writing prior
to setting up seismographs Describe blasting and seismic
operations.
C. Obtain a seismic survey prior to rock excavation to determine
maximum charges that can be used at different locations in area
of excavation without damaging adjacent properties.
D. Provide seismographic monitoring during progress of blasting
opertiona
0. Disintegrate rock and remove from excavation.
F. Cut away rock at excavation bottom to form level bearing.
G Remove shaled layers to provide sound and unshattered base
for foundations.
H.
Remove excavated material from site.
Correct unauthorized rock removal or overbreak with Lean
concrete fill in accordance with Section 03300, as directed by
Architect/Engineer.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Provide for visual inspection of bowing surfaces and cavities
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
formed by removed rock under provisions of Section 01400.
END OF SECTION
Section 02202 - Rock Removal - Page 2 of 2
PART 1 GENERAL
101 WORK INCLUDED
A. Remove topsoil and stockpile for later reuse.
B. Excavate subsoil and stockpile for later reuse.
C. Grade and rough contour site.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 01010 - Field Engineering. Establishing Ones ad
levels.
B. Section 02930 - Landscaping: Finish grading with
topsoil to contours.
C. Section 02222 - Excavation: Building and site
excavation.
0 Section 02223 - BackfilItng: Budding and site bedtLg
E. Section 02225 - Trenching: Trenching and backfilling for
ubhties
1.03 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Submit documents under provisions of Section 01720.
B. Accurately record location of utilities remaining, rerouted
utilities, new utilities by horizontal dimensions, elevations or
inverts, and slope gradients.
1.04 PROTECTION
A. Protect trees, shrubs, lawns, rock outcropping, and other
features remaining as portion of final landscaping.
B Protect bench marks, existing structures, fences, roads,
sidewalks and paving and curbs.
C. Protect above or below grade utilities which are to remain.
D. Repair damage.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Topsoil Excavated matenal, graded free of roots, rocks
larger than one inch , subsoil, debris, and large weeds.
B. Subsoil: Excavated material, graded free of lumps larger than
6 Inches, rocks larger than 3 inches, and debris.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum.
Coordinate with Section 01010.
B. Identify known below grade utilities. Stake and flag
SECTION 02211 - ROUGH GRADING
locations.
C. Identify and gag above grade utilities.
Section 02211 - Rough Grading - Page 1 of 1
D. Maintain and protect existing utilities remaining which pass
through work area.
E. Notify utility company to remove and relocate utilities as shown
on plans.
F. Upon discovery of unknown utility or concealed conditions,
discontinue affected work; notify Architect/Engineer.
3.02 TOPSOIL EXCAVATION
A. Excavate a min. of 6 Inches of topsoil from areas within limits of
construction as shown on plans. And stockpile in area
designated on site
B Do not excavate wet topsoil.
C. Stockpile topsoil to depth not exceeding 8 feet
3.03 SUBSOIL EXCAVATION
A Excavate subsoil from areas to be relandscaped or regraded
and stockpile in area designated on site.
B. Do not excavate wet subsoil.
C. Stockpile subsoil to depth not exceeding 8 feet
D. When excavation through roots is necessary, perform work by
hand and cut roots with a sharp axe.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A. Top Surface of Subgrade: Plus or minus one inch.
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Building excavation.
B. Site excavation
C. Shonng excavation
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 01010 - Basic Requirements: Inspection of beanng
surfaces.
B. Section 02211 - Rough Grading: Topsoil and subsoil
removal from site surface.
C. Section 02223 - Backfilling.
1.03 PROTECTION
A. Protect bees, shrubs, lawns, rock outcropping and other
features remaining as a portion of final landscaping.
B Protect bench marks, existing structures, fences, sidewalks,
paving, and curbs from equipment and v e h i c u l a r
traffic.
C Protect above and below grade utilities which are to remain.
D Protect excavations by shoring, bracing, sheet piling,
underpinning, or other methods required to prevent cave -in
or loose soil from falling into excavation.
E. Excavations greater than 5'0" deep shall be designed by an
Engineer registered In the State of Texas and meet all
requirement of state statutes for trench safety.
F. Underpin adjacent structures which may be damaged by
excavation work, including service utilities and pipe chases.
G. Notify Architect/Engineer of unexpected subsurface
conditions and discontinue affected work in area until notified
to resume work.
H. Protect bottom of excavations and sod adjacent to and
beneath foundations from frost
I. Grade excavation top perimeter to prevent surface water
runoff into excavation.
1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings for retention
systems under provisions of SEcbon 01001 and prepared
under the direction of an Engineer registered in the State of
Texas. No excavations deeper than 5' -0" will be permitted
prior to approval of the retention system drawings
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Subsoil: Excavated material, graded free of lumps larger than
6 inches, rocks larger than 3 Inches, and debris.
SECTION 02222 - EXCAVATION
PART 3 EXECUTION
Section 02222 - Excavation - Page 1 of 1
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Identify required lines, levels, contours and datum Coordinate
with Section 01010.
8. Identify known underground utilities. Stake and flag locations.
C. Identify and Rag surface and aerial u0hues.
D. Notify utility company to remove and relocate utilities.
E. Maintain and protect existing utilities remaining which pass
through work area.
3.02 EXCAVATION
A. Excavate subsoil required for building foundations, to e
minimum of 36" below existing grade.
B. Excavation shall not Interfere with normal 45 degree beanng
splay of any foundation.
C. Hand trim excavation and leave free of loose matter.
D.
E
F.
Remove lumped subsoil, boulders, and rock
Correct unauthorized excavation at no cost to Owner
Fill over -excavated areas under structure beanng surfaces by
filling with concrete in accordance with direction by
Architect/Engineer.
3.03 FIELD QUALM/ CONTROL
A. Provide for visual inspection of beanng surfaces under
provisions of
END OF SECTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Building perimeter backfilling to subgrade elevations.
B Fill under slabs -on- grade.
C. Compaction requirements.
D. Site filling to subgrade elevation for patldng and landscaping
104 TESTS
1 02 RELATED WORK
A Section 01400 - Testing Laboratory Services: Compaction
requirements of backlit!.
B. Section 02222 - Excavation.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ANSI /ASTM C136 - Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse
Aggregates.
B. TSDHPT TE C -113 -E Compaction Test
A. Tests and analysis of 011 materials will be performed in
accordance with ASTM 0-698 or TEX 113 -6 and under
provisions of Section 01400.
1.05 SAMPLES
A. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01340. Fill to
testing laboratory, in air -tight containers.
PART PRODUCTS
2.01 SELECT FILL MATERIALS
A. Type A - Structural Alt Crushed natural stone; with a
maximum particle size of 2 inches in nominal diameter.
Sieve Size
3 inch
1 3/4 Inch
No. 4
No. 40
Percent Passing
0 -10
45 -75
60 -85
Maximum Liquid Umit of 40 and Maximum Plasticity Index of 15.
2.02 COMMON FILL MATERIALS
A. Subsoil: Imported or reused from site: free of rocks larger
than 3 inch size, and debris. P.1. < 15.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Verify stockpiled 011 to be reused is approved.
SECTION 02223 - BACKFILLING
B.
C.
3.02
A
B.
3 03
A
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
J.
K
3.04
A
3.05
A
B.
3.06
A
Section 02223 - Backfilling - Page 1 of 2
Verify foundation or basement walla are braced to support
surcharge forces imposed by backfillirrg operations.
Verify areas to be backfilled are free of debris, snow, ice, or -
water, and ground surfaces are not frozen.
PREPARATION
When necessary, compact subgrade surfaces to density re-
quirements for backfill material.
Cut out soft evens of subgrade not readily capable of In - situ
compaction. Backfill with subsoil and compact to density equal
to requirements forsubsequent backfill material.
BACKFILLING
Beckfill areas to contours and elevations. Use unfrozen
materials.
BacIdill systematically, as early as possible, to allow maximum
time for natural settlement Do not backlit] over porous, wet, or
spongy subgrade surfaces.
Place and compact select fill materials in continuous layers not
exceeding 6 inches loose depth.
Place and compact common fill material in continuous layers
not exceeding 8 inches loose depth.
Employ a placement method so not to disturb or damage
foundation dampproofing.
Maintain optimum moisture content of backfill materials, within
2 to attain required compaction density.
BacMfll against supported foundation walls. Backfill
simultaneously on each side of unsupported foundation walls
until supports are m place.
Slope grade away from building minimum 2 inches in 10 feet
unless noted otherwise.
Make changes in grade gradual Blend slopes into level areas.
Remove surplus backfill materials from site.
Leave stockpile areas completely free of excess fill materials.
TOLERANCES
Top Surface of Bacldilling. Plus or minus one inch.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Compaction testing will be performed in accordance with ASTM
069B and under provisions of Section 01400.
If tests Indicate work does not meet specified requirements,
remove work replace and retest at no cost to Owner.
SCHEDULE OF LOCATIONS
The paragraphs below identify location, fill material to be used
(identified from lower to upper 811 type), compacted thickness
of each level, and compaction expressed as a percentage of
maximum density and optimum moisture in comparison with
ANSVASTM D696.
B. Interior Slab -On- Grade:
1) Common 811 up to 36 Inches below the bottom of the slab.
compacted 10 95 percent
2) Type A Structural 011,36 inches thick minimum compacted
to 95 percent
C. Exterior Side of Foundation Walls and Retaining Walls:
common fill, to subgrade elevation, each Id compacted to 90
percent
D. Base malenal under asphalt paving: See Section 02513.
E. Base material under concrete paving: Item 248 type A Grade
2 crushed stone in accordance with Texas State Department
of Highway and Public Tranprtation compacted to 100 of
TEX 113-E at 3 of optimum moisture.
F. Site backfill to subgrade of landscaped areas. Common fill
materials compacted to 90 of ASTM D698 at 3 of
optimum moisture.
END OF SECTION
Section 02223 - Backfilling - Page 2 of 2
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A Excavate trenches for site utilities to municipal mains.
B. Compacted bed and compacted fill over utilities to subgrede
elevations.
C. Compaction requirements.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 01400 - Testing laboratory Services. Compaction
requirements of backfill.
B. Section 02930 - Landscaping: Topsoil cover of bactdilled
trenches.
C. Section 02222 - Excavation: General building excavation.
D. Section 02223 - Baoldilling: General bacldilling.
E. Section 02730 - Sanitary Sewer Systems: Sewer piping from
budding to municipal sewer.
F. Section 02665 - Domestic Water Systems: Water piping from
building to municipal utilities.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ANSVASTM C136 - Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse
Aggregates.
B. ANSI /ASTM 0696 - Tests for Moisture-Density Relatmns of
Soils and Soil Aggregate Mixture Using 5.5 Ib Rammer and
12 Inch (305 mm) Drop.
1.04 TESTS
A. Tests and analysis of fill materials will be performed In
accordance with ANSI /ASTM 0696 and under provisions of
Section 01400.
1.05 SAMPLES
A. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01400.
B. Submit 10 Ib sample of each type of fill to testing laboratory,
in air -tight containers.
1.06 PROTECTION
A. Protect excavations by ahodng, bracing, sheet piling,
underpinning, or other methods required to prevent cave -in
or loose soil from falling into excavation.
8. Underpin adjacent structures which may be damaged by
excavation work including service utilities and pipe chase.
C. Notify Architect/Engineer of unexpected subsurface
condibons and discontinue work in affected area until
notification to resume work.
D. Protect bottom of excavations end soil adjacent to and
SECTION 02225 - TRENCHING
beneath foundations from frost
Section 02225 - Trenching - Page 1 of 2
E. Grade excavation top perimeter to prevent surface water run•og
Into excavation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SELECT BED AND FILL MATERIALS
A. Type A - Coarse Stone: Crushed, natural stone; free of shale,
clay, friable materials and debris; graded In accordance with
ANSI /ASTM C136 within the following limits:
Sieve Size
1 l nch
1/2 Inch
No. 4
B. Type 8 - Sand: Natural river or bank sand; washed, free of silt
clay, loam, friable or solublematerials, and organicmatter,
graded in accordance with ANSI /ASTM C136 within the
following limits.
Sieve Size
1/4 inch
No. 60
No. 100
2.02 COMMON FILL MATERIALS
A. Subsoil: Reused; or Imported; free of gravel larger than 3 inch
size, and debris.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Verify stockpiled fill to be reused Is approved.
8. Verify areas to be backfilled are free of debris, snow, Ice, or
water, and surfaces are not frozen.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum Coordinate
C.
D.
with Section 01010.
Percent Remind
0- 10
40 - 85
90 -100
Percent Retained
0
75 -100
95.100
B. When necessary, compact subgrade surfaces to density re-
quirements for backfill material.
3.03 EXCAVATION
A. Excavate subsoil required for sanitary sewer and water piping
to municipal ublities.
B. Cut benches sufficiently wide to enable Installation of utilities
and allow inspection.
Hand trim excavation and leave free of loose matter. Hand trim
for bell and spigot pipe Joints.
Remove lumped subsoil, boulders, and rock up to 1/3 cu yd,
measured by volume. Remove larger material under Section
02202.
1
1
F. Correct unauthorized excavation at no cost to Owner.
I Fill over - excavated areas under pipe bearing surfaces in
accordance with directionby Architect/Engineer.
H. Stockpile excavated material In area designated on site.
4 1CKFILLING
A. Support pipe during placement and compaction of bedding
fill.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
' Excavation shall not interfere with normal 45 degree beanng
splay of loundations.
Backlit! trenches to contours and elevations. Backfill
systematically, as early as possible. to allow maximum time
for natural settlement Do not backliu over porous, wet, or
spongy subgrade surfaces.
Pipe bedding shall be as shown on plans and consist of
sand. Type B. "Select Bed and Fill Materials."
Place and compact select fill materials in continuous layers
not exceeding 8 Inches loose depth.
Place and compact common fill matenal In continuous layers
not exceeding 8 inches loose depth.
Employ a placement method so not to disturb or damage
foundation dampproofing.
Maintain optimum moisture content of backliill materials to
attain required compaction density within ±2 of optimum.
Remove surplus backfill materials from site.
Leave stockpile areas completely free of excess fill materials.
5 I LEIANCES
Top Surface of Backfilling: Plus or minus one inch.
6 FIELD OUALRY CONTROL
Compaction testing will be performed in accordance with
ASTM D698 and under provisions of Section 01400
END OF SECTION
Section 02225 - Trenching - Page 2 of 2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
PART 1 GENERAL
1.10 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide all walks, and paving required for the project
complete and In place.
B. Provide base for all walks and paving.
1.20 RELATED WORK
A. Section 02222 - Excavation
B. Section 02223 - Back lilting
C. Section 02529 • - Concrete Curb.
D. Section 09900 - Panting. Pavement markings.
1.30 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Inspection and testing services:
1. Section 01410 - Testing Laboratory Services.
2. Field density tests on the subgrade and base courses
shall be made by the laboratory to check the
compaction. Should the results of these densities fall
below the specification requirement the material shall
be reworked until the required density is obtained.
Additional density tests shell be made to confirm the
satisfactory impaction and the cost of these tests shall
be paid for by the Contractor.
8. Provide 100 year guarantee on all asphaltic paving work
1.40 SUBMITTALS
A Test Reports: Submit two copies of the following test reports
to the Architect for review.
1. Physical properties and moisture - density curve for the
base course materiel.
2. Compaction test reports.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.10 MATERIALS
A Walks: 3000 psi 4 1/2 sack with air -entrainment ASTM
MC15O, Type 1 Portland Cement
8. Expansion Joints for Walks: 1/2 Inch thick redwood
extending the full depth of the concrete.
C. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615; Grade 60, new billet steel
deformed bars, uncoated finish.
D. Dowels: ASTM A615; Grade 40, plain steel, uncoated
finishes.
E Base Course for Paving: Item 249, Flexible Base Crushed
Stone. Type A, Grade 1 or better, 1982 Standard
SECTION 02500 - PAVING AND SURFACING
F.
G
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.10 FORMWORK
3 30
A
Section 02500 - Paving and Surfacing - Page 1 of 2
speciticatlonsef theTexas Highway Department flinches thick
after compaction for asphalt, 6 inches for concrete paving. No
substitution will be permitted.
Asphaltic Concrete: Item 340, Not Mix Asphaltic Concrete
Pavement (Class A), Type D. 1982 Standard Specifications of
the Texas Highway Department 1 1/2 inches thick after
compaction.
Liquid membrane- forming curing compound: Kure•N•Seal 800;
Sonnebom•Contech.
A. General Requirements. Extend forms for walks the full depth of
the concrete. Stake forms sufficiently to resist the pressure of
the concrete spnnging, settling or losing their shape.
8. Setting and Removing Forms: Join forams neatly and tightly,
stake securely to line and grade and race firmly throughout
Clean and oil farms thoroughly before concrete is placed
against them Remove forms in a manner to prevent damage
to the concrete and exposed surfaces.
3.20 WALKS
A. Base Course: Provide 2 inches of sand wetted and tamped
over the compacted subgrade.
B. Concrete. Depose concrete in lhmkness and width as indicated
on the drawings.
C. Joints
1. General: Join sidewalks neatly with expansion joints
to landing, curbs and structures.
2 Walks: Provide expansion joints at 25 feet intervals,
or as shown on drawings. Provide tooled control
joints at 5 feet intervals.
D, Finish: Provide a broom finish for all walks except where
noted.
E. Curing and Protection: Keep walk slabs wet until set sufficiently
to prevent injury to the surface. Spray with Uquld Membrane
Curing Compound or wet thoroughly twice daily for five days.
On completion of the job, clean the walk surfaces and wash off.
REPAIR OF STREETS
Repair and restore any street paving, walls, or curbs damaged
as a result of the construction operations. Use materials and
finishes as directed by the City Engineering Department or
approved by the Owner.
3.40 TOLERANCES
A. Flatness: Maximum variation of 1/4 Inch measured with 10 foot
straight edge.
B. Compacted scheduled Thickness: Within 1/4 inch of
designed thickness
C. Variation from true elevation : Within 1/2 Inch.
END OF SECTION
Section 02500 - Paving and Surfacing - Page 2 of 2
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide all paving required for the project complete and In
place.
1 02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 02222 - Excavation.
B. Section 02223 - Bacldilling.
C. Section 02528 - Curb and Gutter.
D Section 01400 - Testing Laboratory Services.
1.03 DUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Field density tests on the subgrade and base courses shall
be made by the laboratory to check the compaction. Should
the results of these densities fall below the specification
requirement the material shall be reworked until the required
density is obtained at no cost to Owner.
B. Perform work in accordance with State of Texas Highway
Department Standards.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Test Reports: Submd copies of the compaction test reports
to the Architect the Owner and the Contractor.
1. Physical properties and moisture - density curve for the base
course matenal.
2. Compaction test reports.
1.05 GUARANTEE
A. The Sub - Contractor shall furnish at no cost to the Owner, a
two year guarantee on all paving, which shall cover defects
in materials and workmanship and shall cover repair and
maintenance during the building construction period. The
guarantee shall be two years from the final acceptance of the
pavement by the Owner.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Base Course for Paving: Item 248, Flexible Base (Crushed
Stone), Type A, Grade 2 or better, 1982 Standard
Specifications of the Texas Highway Department No
substitution will be permitted. Thickness as shown on
drawings.
B. Ashpaltic Concrete: Item 340, Hot Mix Ashpal0c Concrete
Pavement Type D., 1982 Standard Specifications of the
Texas Highway Department Thickness as shown on
drawings.
PART 3 IXECUTION
3.01 ASPHALTIC PAVING
SECTION 02513 - ASPHALTIC CONTRETE PAVING
Section 02513 - Asphaltic Concrete Paving - Page 1 of 2
A. Preparation of Sub - Grade:
1. Excavate or fill as required to shape subgrade in
conformity with the typical section, fines and grades as
shown on the drawings. Scarify to a depth of 6 inches,
wet blade, roll and compact the subgrade to a minimum
of 95 of optimum density (ASTM D698). After
Installation provide final proofroll.
2. Construct the subgmde so that it will be as nearly as
possible of uniform specified density across Its •entire
width. Excavate materiel from soft or wet spots that may
develop during rolling and replace with suitable material
and compact to the required density.
B Installation of Base Course.
C. Install the base course as soon as possible after acceptance of
the subgrade. Spread and shape the base course In conformity
with the sections, lines and grades shown on the drawings.
Wet, blade, roll and compact the base course to a minimum of
95 of optimum density (ASTM D1557 Method 0).
1 Install the base course and compact in equal courses.
The completed base shall have thickness (after
compaction) as shown on the drawings.
2. Correct any deviation In the finished surface in excess of
one quarter Inch In cross section or in a length of sixteen
feet measured longitudinally by loosening, adding or
removing matenat, reshaping and recompacting.
D Installation of Asppaltic Concrete Paving:
Asphaltic Concrete Paving 02513.3
1. Asphalt paving mixture shall be placed only when
ihespeciged density of base course has been obtained.
Precautions shall be taken at all times to impact the
mixture before it cools too much to obtain the required
density. The mixture shall not be placed on any wet
surface or when weather conditions will otherwise prevent
as proper handling or finishing. Asphalt surface tours
mixture shall not be placed when the surface temperature
of the base course is below 60 degrees F.
2. Before the asphaltic concrete is placed, clean the surface
of the base course and wet lightly. As soon as the water
disappears beneath the surface, apply a prime coat of
MC- 1 at the rate of 0.20 gal./sq. yd. Allow at least 24
hours for curing and apply no surface treatment before
obtaining approval of the Architect /Engineer. Apply a tack
coat of RC-2 at the rate of 0.05 gal. /sq. yd. if the base
course requires d for bonding of the asphaltic concrete.
3 Haul the asphaltic concrete to the project in tight vehicles
previously cleaned of all foreign material. This mixture
shall be at a temperature of 200 degrees F. to 305
degrees F. when laid. Spread into place with an
approved mechanical finishing machine. The finishing
machine shall be of the vibration, screeding and tamping
lype-
4. While still hot and as soon as it will bear the roller without
undue displacement or hair cracking, compress the
surface thoroughly and uniformly with acceptable power-
driven three wheel or tandem rollers weighing 8 to 10
tons.
5. Rolling shall be continued In a undone manner until no
further compression can be obtained and all roller
marks are eliminated. To prevent adhesion of the
surfacing mixture to the roller, keep the wheels
properly moistened. Do the final rolling with atandem
roller.
6. Along curbs. headers and other areas not accessible to
the roller, compact the mixture thoroughly with a lightly
oiled hand tamp.
7. After receiving the final rolling, the pavement is to have
a 1 1/2 inch minimum thickness after compaction and
the surface is to be smooth and true to the established
lines and grades.
8. Do not open any portion of the finished w anng
surface to traffic until twelve hours after completion of
rolling.
3.02 REPAIR OF STREETS
A Repair and restore any street paving, walks, or curbs
damaged as a result of the construction operations. Use
matenals and finishes as directed by the City Engineering
Department or approved by the Owner.
END OF SECTION
Section 02513 - Asphaltic Concrete Paving - Page 2 of 2
SECTION 02514 - PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Concrete sidewalks, curbs, gutters, and streets.
8. Surface finish.
C. Curing.
1.02 WORK INSTALLED BUT FURNISHED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS
A. Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcing.
103 RELATED WORK
A. Section 02200 - Earthwork: Preparation of site for paving.
B. Section 07920 - Joint Sealer: Sealant for joints.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ACI 301- Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings.
B. ANSUASTM A497 - Welded Deformed Steel Wire Fabric for
Concrete Reinforcement
C ANSI /ASTM D1751 - Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for
Concrete Paving and Structural Construction.
D. ASTM A615 - Deformed and Plain Billet -Steel for Concrete
Reinforcement
E. ASTM C33 - Concrete Aggregates.
F. ASTM C94 - Ready Mixed Concrete.
G ASTM C150 - Portland Cement
H. ASTM C260 - Air - Entraining Admixtures for Concrete
I ASTM C309 - Uquid Membrane- Forming Compounds for
Curing Concrete.
J. ASTM C494 - Chemical Adm for Concrete.
K FS TT -C- 800 - Curing Compound, Concrete, for New and Ex-
isting Surfaces.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with ACI 301,
B. Obtain mmenals from same source throughout
1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to Uniform Building Code for paving work on
private property.
Section 01400
1.07 TESTS 2.05 ADMIXTURES
A. Testing and analysis will be performed under provisions of
Section 02514 - Portland Cement Concrete Paving - Page 1 of 2
B. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to
appointed firm for review prior to commencement of work
C. Three concrete test cylinders will be taken for every 75 or less
cu yds of each class of concrete placed each day.
D. One additional test cylinder will be taken during cold weather
and be cured on site under same conditions as concrete it
represents
E. One slump test will bet for each set of test cylinders taken.
1.08 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01340.
B. Include data on joint filler, admbdures. curing compounds
C Submit manufacturer's instructions under provisions of Section
01340.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cement ASTM C150 AIr Entraining -Type IA Portland type, gray
color.
B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C33.
C. Water. Clean and not demmental to concrete.
202 FORM MATERIALS
A. Wood form material, profiled to suit conditions.
2.03 REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615: 60 ksi yield grade; deformed
billet steel bar, uncoated finish.
B. Welded Steel Wire Fabric: Plain type. ANSI /ASTM A185; in
coiled rolls; uncoated finish.
C. Tie Wire: Annealed steel, minimum 16 gage size.
0. Dowels: ASTM A615; 40 ksi yield grade, plain steel, uncoated
finish.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Curing Compound: Ashford Formula - by Curecrete Chemical
Co, Oregon, Utah.
B. Joint Sealer. Conform to requirements of ASTM C920 -79,
Specification for Concrete Joint Sealer, self - leveling, To
Compound Urethane.'
C. Preformed Joint Provide and Instal •Shepload' load transfer
units by Shenker Equipment Co.
A Air Entrainment: ASTM 0260; Specification for Air Entraining
1
1
1
■ENERAL
IN1OED
: oncrete sidewalks, curbs, gutters, and streets.
ud1 finish.
,unng.
I0�LLED BUT FURNISHED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS
e
03200 - Concrete Reinforcing.
ED WORK
eel' 02200 - Earthwork: Preparation of site for paving.
fiction 07920 - Joint Sealers: Sealant for joints.
EN1
CI 301 - Specifiications for Structural Concrete for Buildings.
NS TM A497 - Welded Deformed Steel Wire Fabric for
on a Reinforcement
NS TM D1751 - Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for
on 0 Paving and Structural Construction.
STM A615 - Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel for Concrete
einforcement
STI133 - Concrete Aggregates.
STM C94 - Ready Mixed Concrete.
STI150 - Portland Cement
STM 0260 - Air - Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.
3T Liquid Membrane - Forming Compounds for
uri crate.
STM C494 - Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.
> -800 - Curing Compound, Concrete, for New and Ex-
in daces.
Y URANCE
Trio work In accordance with ACI 301.
gar atedals from same source throughout.
Wag REQUIREMENTS
mform to Uniform Building Code for paving work on
Iva roperty.
stiriand analysis w:8 be performed under provisions of
1
e
C.
0.
Section 02514 - Portland Cement Concrete Paving - Page 1 of 2
SECTION 02514 - PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING
Section 01400.
Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to
appointed firm for review prior to commencement of work
Three concrete test cylinders will be taken for every 75 or less
cu yds of each class of concrete placed each day.
One additional test cylinder will be taken during cold weather
and be cured on site under same conditions as concrete R
represents.
6. One slump test will be taken for each set of test cylinders taken.
1 08 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01340.
B. Include data on joint filler, admixtures. curing compounds.
C. Submit manufacturer's instructions under provisions of Secdan
01340
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CONCRETE MATERIALS
5. Cement: ASTM C150 Air Entraining -Type A Portland type, gray
color.
B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C33.
C. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete.
202 FORM MATERIALS
A. Wood form material, profiled to suit conditions.
2.03 REINFORCEMENT
5. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615; 60 ksi yield grade; deformed
billet steel bars, uncoated finish.
B Welded Steel Wire Fabric: Plain type, ANSI/ASTM A185; in
coiled rolls; uncoated finish
C. Tie Wire: Annealed steel, minimum 16 gage size.
0. Dowels: ASTM A615; 40 ksi yield grade, plain steel, uncoated
finish.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Curing Compound: Ashford Formula - by Curecrete Chemical
Co., Oregon, Utah.
B. Joint Sealer: Conform to requirements of ASTM C920 -79,
Specification for Concrete Joint Sealer, self - leveling, To
Compound Urethane."
C Preformed Joint: Provide and Install "Shepioad" load transfer
units by Sheeler Equipment Co.
2.05 ADMIXTURES
A. Air Entrainment ASTM C260; Specigcauon for Air Entraining
Admixtures for Concrete' no chlorides.
206 CONCRETE MIX
A. Mix concrete in accordance with ASTM 064.
B. Provide concrete for paving of the following characteristics:
- Compressive Strength at 7 days: 2000 psi
- Compressive Strength at 28 days: 3000 psi
C. Use accelerating admixtures in cold weather only when ap-
proved by Architect/Engineer. Use of admixtures will not
relax cold weather placement requirements.
D. Use set- retarding admixtures during hot weather only when
approved by Arohnect/Engineor.
E. Add air entraining agent to concrete mix for concrete work
exposed to exterior.
F. Add air entraining agent to concrete mister concrete work
exposed to extedor.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Verify compacted granular base is ready to support paving
and imposed loads.
B. Verity gradients and elevations of base are eorraet.
C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of oxisting
conditions.
3.02 PREPARATION
A Moisten base to minimize absorption of water from fresh
concrete.
B. Notify Architect/Engineer minimum 24 hours prior to com-
mencement of concreting operations.
3.03 FORMING
A Place and secure forms to correct Location, dimension, and
profile.
8. Assemble formwork to permit easy smppmg and
dismantling Without damaging concrete
C. Place joint fillers vertical in position, in straight lines. Secure
to formwork dunng concrete placement.
3.04 REINFORCEMENT
A. Place reinforcement at 1/3 of concrete thickness from top of
slabs -on- grade.
B. Interrupt reinforcement at expansion joints.
C. Place reinforcement to achieve slab and curb alignment as
detailed.
D. Provide dowelled joints at Inlemrptlons of concrete with one
end of dowel net in capped sleeve to allow longitudinal
movement.
Section 02514 - Portland Cement Concrete Paving - Page 2 of 2
305 FORMED JOINTS
A. Place control loinb az maximum 20 foot intervals 10 coned
elevation and profile. Align curb, gutter, and sidewalk joints.
8. Place joint filler between paving components and building or
other appurtenances. Recess top of filler 3/4 inches for joint
sealant placement by Section 07900.
C. Provide expansion joints at mazimum 100 foot intervals of
paving.
3.06 PLACING CONCRETE
A. Place concrete In accordance with ACI 301.
B. Hot Weather Placement: ACI 301.
C. Cold Weather Placement ACI 301.
D. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded pans, formed loins
are not disturbed during concrete placement
E. Place concrete continuously between predetermined
construction joints. Do not break or intenupt successive pours
such that cold joints occur.
3,07 FINISHING
A. Paving: Light broom
8. Sidewalk Paving: Light broom, radiused and trowel joint edges.
C Place curing compound on exposed concrete surfaces
immediately after finishing. Apply in accordance with
manufacturer's Instructions.
3 08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions
of Section 01400.
B. Maintain records of placed concrete Items. Record date.
location of pour, quantity, air temperature, and test samples
taken.
3.09 PROTECTION
A Immediately after placement protect concrete under provisions
of Section 01500 from premature drying, excessive hot or cold
temperatures, and mechanical Injury.
END OF SECTION
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A Provide all concrete curb and gutter required for the protect D. FINISHING
complete and In place.
A Light Broom.
1,02 RELATED WORK
A Section 02200 - Excavation and Grading.
B. Section 03300 - Cast- In-Place Concrete.
1.03 STANDARDS
A PJI concrete work shall be performed in accordance with
'Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete'
published by American Concrete Institute unless otherwise
shown, noted or specified.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
201 MATERIALS
A Concrete: See Section 03300.
B. Reinforcement ASTM A615 Grade 60 as shown on
drawings.
C. Expansion Joints: 1/2 Inch thick premolded bituminous
material.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 CONCRETE
A No concrete work shall be stared until subgrade has been
compacted and tested.
3.02 FORMWORK
A General Requirements: Extend forms for curbs and gutter
the full depth of the concrete. Stake forms sufficiently to
resist the pressure of the concrete without spnnging, settling
or losing their shape.
B. Setung and Removing Forms: Joint fors neatly and tightly,
stake securely to line and grade and brace firmly throughout
Clean and oil Tons thoroughly before concrete Is placed
against them. Remove fors in a manner to prevent
damage W the concrete and exposed surfaces.
3 03 INSTALLATION
A Far curb and gutter according W detail. Curb surfaces
shall be thoroughy worked with a wood goat and exposed
edges rounded with an edging tool. The inside fors shall
be removed after the concrete has sufficiently set and
surface irregularities rubbed out or patched.
B Place bituminous expansion joints every 40 feet Joints shall
extend fully through the curb and gutter sections. Tool the
joints on each side to for a smooth, finished appearance.
C. Curb and gutter after tort removal must be true to line and
SECTION 02528 - CONCRETE CURBS
Section 02528 - Concrete Curbs - Page 1 of 1
grade. Curves must be hue radius arcs without bows or broken
segments. Any deformations which cannot be corrected by
tooling will be replaced as directed by the Architect
END OF SECTION
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Potable water pi ping, fittings, and accessories from 5' outside
building to municipal main.
B. Connection of potabel water system to municipal water
system.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 02225 - Trenching: Excavating subsoil for sewer
system piping.
B. Section 02223 - Backfilling• Bacldllling over piping up to
subgmde elevation.
C. Section 03300 • Cast -in -Place Concrete: Concrete type for
blocking, etc.
1.03 REGULATORY REOUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable code for materials and installation of
the Work of this Section.
1.04 SUBMITALLS
A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 01340
B. Submit shop drawings Indicating dimensions, layout of
piping, gradient of slope between comers and intersecuono.
locations and elevatlons of cleanouts.
C. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01340.
D. Submit product data for pipe, pipe accessories and jointing.
E. Submit manufacturer's Installation instructions under
provisions of Section 01340.
1.05 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Submit documents under provisions of Section 01010.
B. Accurately record location of pipe runs, connections, and
elevations.
C. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil
conditions or discovery of uncharted utilities.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Johns - Manville
B. Substitutions: Under Provisions of Section 01640.
2.02 PIPE AND PIPE FITTING MATERIALS
A. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe: AWWA C900 for sizes 4'
through 17; Class 200.
B. Fittings: Ductile -Iron complying with AWWA C110, cement
SECTION 02666 - POTABLE WATER SYSTEMS
C.
D.
E
F.
Section 02666 - Potable Water Systems - Page 1 of 2
lined, with rubber gaskets conforming to AWWA C111.
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40 for
sizes 1/2 through 3 ".
Fittings: PVC, Schedule 40 socket -type, solvent cement joints:
or etestromeric gasketed joints.
Gate Valves: Provide as indicated, gate valves, AWWA 0500,
175 psi working pressure. Provide threaded, ganged, hub or
other end configurations to suit size of value and piping
connection.
Provide inside screw type for use with curb valve box, iron
body, bronze-mounted, double disc, parallel seat non -nsing
stem.
PART 2 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which potable water
system's materials and products are to be installed. Do not
proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been cor.
rooted In manner acceptable to installer.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Hand trim excavatlons to required elevations. Correct over
excavation with fill material of lean concrete.
B. Remove large stones or other hard matter which could damage
drainage tile or impede consistent backfilling or compaction.
3 03 INSTALLATION - PIPE AND VALVES
A. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe: Install in accordance with
manufacturer's installation instructions.
B. Depth of Cover. Provide minimum cover over piping of 17
below average local frost depth or 18" below finished grade,
whichever is greater.
C. Install valves as indicated with stems pointing up.
D. Provide valve box over underground valves.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Piping Tests: Conduct piping tests before joints are covered,
and after thrust blocks have sufficiently hardened Fill pipeline
24 -hrs. prior to testing, and apply test pressure to stabilize
systems. Use only potable water.
B. Hydrostatic Tests: Test at not less than 1 - 1/2 times waridng
pressure for 24hrs.
C. Test fails d leakage exceeds 2-gts per hour per 100 gaskets or
joints, irrespective of pipe diameter.
D. Increase pressure in 50 psi increments and inspect each joint
between Increments. Hold at test pressure for one hour,
decrease to 0 psi. Slowly Increase again to test pressure end
hold for one more hour.
3.05 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
1
1
)isi faction of Potable Water System: Flush pipe system
vith an potable water until no dirty water appears at point
if o 1. Fill system with water - chlorine solution containing
it le 50 ppm of chlorine. Valve off system and let stand
or 24 -hrs. miniumu. Flush with clean potable water until no
oht�e remains in water coming from system.
EC N
'rotect finished installation under provisions of Section
)15,
' rotect pipe and filter aggregate cover from damage or
fisplacement until backfilling operation is in progress.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
END OF SECTION
Section 02666 - Potable Water Systems - Page 2 of 2
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Storm drainage piping, fittings, and accessories.
8. Catch basins, paved area drainage, manhole access, site
surface drainage.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 02222- Earthwork: Excavating subsoil and backfilling
for sewerage system piping.
B. Section 03300 - Cast -in-Place Concrete: Concrete type for
catch basin, manhole base pad construction.
1.07 REFERENCES
A. ASTM F 405 - Standard Specification for Corrugated
Polyethylene Pipe and Fittings.
1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to Uniform Plumbing Code for materials and
installation of the Work of this Section.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300.
8. Submit product data indicating pipe, and pipe accessories.
C Submit manufacturer's installation Instructions under
provisions of Section 01300.
1.05 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Submit documents under provisions of Section 01700.
B. Accurately record location of pipe runs, connections, catch
basins, manholes, and invert elevations.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS - SEWER PIPE MATERIALS
A. Advanced Drainage Systems.
2.02 SEWER PIPE MATERIALS
A Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe suitable for HS20 loading.
B Corrugated Polyethylene Couplers for joints.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that trench cut and /or excavation base is ready to
receive work, and excavations, dimensions, and elevations
are as Indicated on Drawings.
B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing
conditions.
SEC11ON 02720 - STORM SEWAGE SYSTEMS
3.02 PREPARATION
3.03
A
Section 02720 - Siam. Sewage Systems - Page 1 of 1
A Hand trim excavations to required elevations. Correct over
excavation with 011 material of lean concrete.
B. Remove large stones or other hard matter which could damage
drainage tile or Impede consistent backfilling or compaction.
INSTALLATION - PIPE
Install pipe, fittings, and accessories in accordance with and
manufacturer's instructions and City of Austin Standard
Specification No. 510 Seal joints watertight
B. Place pipe an minimum 6 mch deep bed of sand
C. Lay pipe to slope gradients noted on drawings, with maximum
variation from true slope of 1/S inch In 10 feet
D. Install coarse filter aggregate at sides and over top of pipe.
Provide top cover of bedding material to minimum compacted
thickness of 12 Inches.
E. Increase compaction of each successive lift Refer to Section
02200 for compaction requirements. Do not displace or
damage pipe when compacting
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field inspection will be performed under provisions of Section
01400
B Request inspection by Architect/Engineer prior to and
Immediately after placing bedding cover over pipe.
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Protect finished installation under provisions of Section 01500.
B. Protect pipe and filter aggregate cover from damage or
displacement until backfilling operation 1s in progress.
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
GENERAL
TIIINCLUDES
SECTION 02730 - SANITARY SEWAGE SYSTEMS
Sendary drainage piping, fittings, and accessories from 5'
outside building to municipal main.
action of sanitary sewage system to municipal sewers
Cleanout access.
ATI SECTIONS
Section 07125 - Trenching: Excavating subsoil for sewer
system piping.
1
Son 02223 - Baclddlling: Bacidilling over piping up to
s rade elevation.
Son 03300 - Cast -In -Place Concrete: Concrete type for
c out base pad construction
ERENCES
Al /ASTM 03034 - Typo PSM Palyinyl Chloride) (PVC)
S r Pipe and Fittings.
ASTM 83213: Elastomedc gasket pints for PVC pipe.
.UL,ORY REQUIREMENTS
Conform to applicable code for materials and installation of
the Work of this Section.
MILLS
Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 01010.
Silt shop drawings indicating dimensions, layout of
p g, gradient of slope between corners and intersections,
locations and elevations of cleanouts.
S d product data under provisions of Section 01010
S d product data for pipe, pipe accessories and jointing.
S It manufacturer's Installation instructions under
ip sions of Section 01010.
JECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
S d documents under provisions of Section 01010.
A rata
y record location of pipe runs
connections,
cleanouts, and Invert elevations.
I y and describe unexpected variations to subsoil
!dons or discovery of uncharted utilities.
PRODUCTS
IUITURERS
Johns - Manville.
1
1
8.
2.02
A.
Section 02730 - Sanitary Sewage Systems - Page 1 of 2
Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01010.
SEWER PIPE MATERIALS
Plastic Pipe: ANSI /ASTM 3034, Type PSM, Polyvinyl Chlodde
(PVC) matadal Inside nominal diameter as shown on plans. Sell
and spigot style gaskoted end joints.
2.03 PIPE ACCESSORIES
A. Fittings: Elastomedc gaskets molded or formed to suit pipe size
and end design, in required e l", bends, elbows, cleanouts,
reducers, traps, and other configurations required.
2.04 CLEANOUTS
A. Cap. Brass construction, removeable lid, closed lid design
B. Base Pad: Cast -in -place concrete of type specified in Section
03300.
2.05 FILL MATERIAL
A. Reference: Section 02225 Trenching.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that trench cut is ready to receive work and excavations,
dimensions, and elevations are as Indicated on Drawings
B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing
conditions.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Hand Vim excavations to required elevations. Correct over
excavation with fill material of lean concrete.
B Remove large stones or other hard matter which could damage
drainage the or impede consistent bacldilling or compaction.
3.03 INSTALLATION - PIPE
A. Install pipe, rimngs, and accessori. in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions. Seal joints watertight.
8. Lay pipe to slope gradient noted on drawings with maximum
variation from true slope of 1/8 inch in 10 feet
C. Bed and Backfill pipe and trench In accordance with Section
02225 - Trenching.
D. Connect to building sewer ou0et and municipal sewer system.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field inspection will be performed under provisions of Section
01010.
B. Request inspection by Architect/Engineer and municipality prior
to and Immediately after placing filter aggregate cover over
pipe.
1
1
IOT1TION
tact finished Installation under provisions of Section
01010.
:HEDULE
' mtory Sower Main: From 5 feet beyond east building wall,
municipal sewer.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
tact pipe and filter aggregate cover from damage or
placement until backfilling operation Is in progress.
END OF SECTION
Section 02730 - Sanitary Sewage Systems - Page 2 of 2
PART1 GENERAL
1.10 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope: Provide and prepare topsoil and hydromotchtng as
described herein.
1.20 DUALITY CONTROL
A. Delivery and Storage:
1. Notify the Owner at least 7 days before delivery.
2. Locate storage on site as directed.
3. Deliver gross seed, fertilizer, cellulose fiber mulch, and
peat moss in unopened containers with state certificate
attached (for grass seed).
4. Obtain approval for storage during inclement weather.
B. Acceptance and Approval:
1. There shall be no bare spots larger than one square
loot
2. The total area of bare spots shall not exceed 5 percent
of the entire grass area.
3. The average height as determined by the owner must
reach 2 -1/2 inches before full acceptance.
C. Measurement The unit of measure for additions to or
deletions from the area to by hydromulched
shall be calculated in square yards.
PART2 PRODUCT
210 MATERIALS
A. Topsoil, Sand and Organic Mulch:
1. Provide topsoil for all playing surfaces from and offsite
source which mats the following requirements:
a) Is friable, fertile, natural, typical of the locality,
and was obtained from a well-drained site free
from repeated or longstanding flooding.
b) Is without admixture of subsoil or slag, and Is
free of stones, lumps, plants or their roots, sticks,
and other extraneous matter.
c) H not frozen or muddy when delivered or used.
B. Hydromulching Material:
1. Grass Seed - provide common Bermuda ( Cynadon
dactylon). Seed shall be treated, lawn type, delivered
in original unopened containers showing weight
analysis, name of vendor and germination test
2. Cellulose fiber - provide wood cellulose fiber; shall
have no germination or growth inhibiting factor,
moisture content shall not exceed 9 percent; ash
content shall not exceed 0 8 percent; pH factor shall be
no less than 4.8 percent absorptive capacity of water:
fiber o110:1.
3. Fertilizer - provide a complete fertilizer with an organic
base, uniform in composition, dry and free flowing.
Exact analysis of fertilizer shall be submitted to the
Landscape Architect for approval based on the time of
year.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Section 02930 - Topsoil Preparation & Hydromulching - Page 1 of 2
SECTION 02930 - TOPSOIL PREPARATION & HYDRO- MULCHING
3.10 INSTALLATION
A. Subgrade: Scanty subsoil to a depth of 3 inches before placing
topsoil. Fill in all depressions and slope gradually
to sheet drain.
B. Topsoil Placement (Playing Surfaces Only)
1. Premix topsoil and organic mulch thoroughly before
placing onto subgrade.
2. Soil mixture shall be 80 percent topsoil and 20 percent
organic mulch, by volume.
3. Place 8 inches of topsoil so that there will be a good
sheet drainage after settlement
4. Maintain surfaces and place any additional topsoil
necessary to replace eroded soil.
5 Area to be hydroculched shall be clean prior to
hydromulching.
C. Hydromulching:
1. Hydromulching shall be applied after finish grade of
topsoil is established at the following rate:
a) 2 pounds common Bermuda (Cynadon dactylon)
per 1,000 square feet for all ball fields, playing
surfaces and lawns aras designated on the plans.
b) 70 pounds cellulose fiber mulch per 1,000 square
feet.
c) 20 pounds fertilizer per 1,000 square feet
2. Reseed any small, sparse grass areas by broadcast
method.
D. Cleanup: Protect the hydromulcHed area from the other
construction operations by use of staking and /or
roping or other means acceptable to the Landscape
Architect
3.20 If sufficient topsoil Is not available on the site. The Contractor
shall provide additional topsoil. All additional topsoil shall be a
fertile, friable, natural topsoil of loamy characteristic of locality,
and free from subsoil. Topsoil shall be capable of growing
healthy horticultural crops of grasses. It shall be free of stones,
frozen clods, plants and roots over one Inch in any dimension,k
other foreign matedais and toxic amounts of acid or alkaline
elements. Deliver no topsoil in a frozen or muddy condition.
Use topsoil where called for In planting operations.
3.30 Wood cellulose fiber mulch, for use with hydraulic application
of grass seed and fertilizer, shall consist of specially perpared
wood cellulose fiber, processed to contain no growth - or
germination - in - hibiting factors, and dyed green to facilitate
visual metering of application of the materials. The mulch
material shall be supplied in packages having a gross weight
not in excess of 100 pounds. The wood cellulose fiber shell
contain not in excess of 12 percent moisture, air dry weight
basis. The wood cellulose fiber shall be manufactured so that
after addition and agitation in slurry tanks with fertilizers, grass
seeds, water, and any other approved additives, the fibers in the
material will become uniformly suspended to form a
homogeneous slurry; and that when hydraulically sprayed on
the ground, the material will foram a blotter -like ground cover
impregnated uniformly with gras sseed; and which, after
application, will allow the absorption of moisture and allow
rainfall or mechanical watering to percolate to the underlying
soil. Suppliers shall be prepared to clarify that laboratory and
field testing of their product has been accomplished, and that
their products meets all the foregoing requirements based upon
such testing. Mulch shall be Silva -Fibre as manufactured by
Weyerhauser or Tacoma, Washington, or approved equal.
3.40 Fertilizer shall be uniform in composition, free - flowing, and suitable
for application with approved equipment The fertilizer shall be
delivered to the site ;in bags or other convenient containers, each
fully fabled, conforming to the applicable state fertilizer laws, and
bearing the name, trade name or trademark and warranty of the
producer.
3.50 Where bulk fertilizer is used, fertilizer shall be delivered to the
designated site in convenient containers or hoppersd acceptable
to the Engineer, each fully calibrated to measure the particular
material supplied In accordance with state law on standards and
measures. In theabsence of calibrated equipment in accordance
with state law, a certified weigh bill shall be fuinished to ascertain
quantity to the Engineer. Each shipment shall bear a cemficate of
origin identifying the material by name, trade name, or trademark
of the producer. An invoice shall be furnished In duplicate to the
Engineer stating the quantity and grade of each delivery.
3.60 Seed shall be sown using hydraulic seeding equipment except that
approved mechanical hand seeders and broadcast seeding may
be used only in areas where hydraulic seeding equipment cannot
be used, and when approved by the Engineer. When such
alternate equipment Is used, half of the seed shall be sown with
the sower moving In one direction and the remainder with sower
moving at right angles to first sowing. When delays in operations
extend the work beyond the most favorable planting season for
species designed or when conditions are such by reason of
drought high winds, excessive moisture, or other factors that
satisfactory results are not likely to be obtained, work shall be
halted as directed and resumed only when conditions are
favorable or when approved alternate or corrective measures and
procedures have been effected. If Inspection dung seeding
operations or after there is show of green indicates that stnps
wider than space between rows planted have been left
unplanted,or other areas skipped, additional seed shall be sown if
so directed.
3.70 The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for proper care of
seeded areas while grass is becoming established on the entire
project until there is a show of green vegetation over not less than
85 percent of the area Reseeding shall be performed in those
areas not meeting the above cnteria at no additional cost
3.60 The Contractor shall be responsible for maintenance of all seeded
areas, including provision of an adequate supply of water until
completion end acceptance of the fob.
3.90 The Contractor shall repair all damage to seeded areas. Damage
includes, but is not limited to, the results of his own operations,
erosion, wind, fire, traffic and vandalism.
END OF SECTION
Section 02930 - Topsoil Preparation & Hydromulching - Page 2 of 2
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Formwork for cast -In -place concrete, with shonng, bracing,
and anchorage.
B. Openings for other affected work.
C. Form accessories.
D. Stripping forms.
1.02 WORK INSTALLED BUT FURNISHED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS
A Section 05500 - Metal Fabrication. Metal fabncations
attached to formwork
1.03 RELATED WORK
A. Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement
B. Section 03300 - Cast-In -Place Concrete.
1.04 REFERENCES
A ACI301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings.
B. ACI 347 - Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork.
C. PS 1 - Consructon and Indusoal Plywood.
1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design, engineer, and construct formwork, shoring, and
bracing to meet design and code requirements, so that
resultant concrete conforms to required shapes, lines, and
dimensions.
1.06 UALITY ASSURANCE
A. Construct and erect concrete formwork in accordance with
ACI 301.
1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable codes for Round Rock, Texas.
1.08 FIELD SAMPLES
1.09 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 01340.
B. Indicate pertinent dimensions, materials, and arrangement of
joints and des.
C. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01340.
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle materials under provisions of
Section 01010.
SECTION 03100 - CONCRETE FORMWORK
8. Deliver form materials In manufacturer's packaging with
installation Instructions.
C. Store off ground in ventilated and protected area to prevent
deterioration from moisture or damage.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FORM MATERIALS
Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork - Page 1 of 2
A Plywood: Douglas Fir species; solid one exterior side grade;
sound, undamaged sheets with straight edges.
B Lumber. SYP species; #2 grade; with grade stamp clearly
visible.
C. Pan Type: Steel type: removable; of size and profile required.
2 02 FORMWORK ACCESSORIES
A. Form Ties: Snap-off metal of fixed length; cone type; 1 Inch
break back dimension; free of defects that will leave holes no
larger than one Inch diameter In concrete surface.
B. Form Release Agent: Colorless material which will not stain
concrete, absorb moisture, or impair natural bonding or color
characteristics of coating intended for use on concrete.
C Fillets for Chamfered Comers: Wood strips type; 3/4 x 3/4 Inch
size; maximum possible lengths
D. Nails, Spikes, Lag Bolts, Through Bolts, Anchorages. Sized as
required; of strength and character to maintain formwork in
place while placing concrete.
PART 3 EXECUTION
301 INSPECTION
A Venfy lines, levels, and measurements before proceeding with
formwork
3.02 PREPARATION
A Hand -trim sides and bottoms of earth forms; remove loose dirt
prior to placing concrete.
B. Arrange and assemble formwork to permit dismantling,
stripping, so that concrete is not damaged during Its removal.
C. Arrange forms to allow stripping without removal of pnncipat
shores, where required to remain In place.
3.03 ERECTION
A. Provide bracing to ensure stability of formwork Strengthen
formwork liable to be overstressed by construction bads.
B. Camber slabs and beams to achieve ACI 301 tolerances.
C. Provide temporary pons in fornwerk to facilitate cleaning and
Inspection. Locate openings at bottom of forms to allow
flushing water to drain. Close pons with tight fitting panels,
flush with inside faced forms, neatly fitted so that joints will not
be apparent In exposed concrete surfaces.
D. Provide chamfer smps on external comers of all exposed
concrete.
E. Construct formwork to maintain tolerances in accordance
with ACI 301.
3.04 APPLICATION OF FORM RELEASE AGENT
A. Apply form release agent on formwork In accordance with
enufacturer's instructions. Apply prior to placing
reinforcing steel, anchonng devices, and embedded items.
B. Do not apply form release agent where concrete surfaces are
scheduled to receive special finishes or applied coverings
which may be affected by agent. Soak contact surfaces of
untreated forms with clean water. Keep surfaces wet prior to
placing concrete.
3.05 INSERTS, EMBEDDED PARTS, AND OPENINGS
A. Provide formed openings where required for work embedded
in or passing through concrete.
B. Coordinate work of other Sections in forming and setting
openings, slots, recesses. chases. sleeves, bolts, anchors,
and other Inserts.
C. Install accessories In accordance with manufacturer's
instructions, level and plumb. Ensure items are not
disturbed during concrete placement
306 FORM REMOVAL
A. Nobly ArchitestEngineer prior to removing formwork.
B. Do not damage concrete surfaces during farm removal.
C. Remove formwork In same sequence as concrete placement
to achieve similar concrete surface coloration.
D. Do not remove forms and shoring until concrete has
sufficient strength to support its own weight and construction
and design loads which may be imposed upon it. Remove
load supporting forms when concrete has attained 75 percent
of required 28 day compressive strength, provided
construction is reshored.
3.07 CLEANING
A. Clean forms to remove foreign matter as erection proceeds.
B. Ensure that water and debris dram 10 extarisrthrough Gl000-
0utp0r
C. During cold weather, remove Ice and snow from forms. Do
not use de -Icing salts. Do not use water to clean out
completed forma, unless formwork and construction proceed
within heated enclosure. Use compressed sr to remove
foreign matter.
END OF SECTION
Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork - Page 2 of 2
A. Reinforcing steel bars, for cast -In -place concrete
B. Support chain, bolsters, bar supports, and spacers, for
supporting reinforcement
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork
B. Section 03300 - Cast.ln -Place Concrete: Concrete placement
and vapor barrier.
1.03 REFERENCES
B. Conform to ACI 301.
1.05 FIELD SAMPLES
A. Provide reinforcement for field sample specified in Sections
03100 and 03300.
1.06 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Secbon 01340.
1.07 CERTIFICATES
SECTION 03200 - CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
PART 1 GENERAL PART 2 PRODUCTS
1.01 WORK INCLUDED 2.01 MATERIALS
E. ASTM A615 - Deformed and Plain Billet -Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement PART 3 EXECUTION
A. Perform concrete reinforcement work in accordance with
CRSI Manual of Standard Practice, and Documents 83 and
65.
B. Indicate sizes, spacings, locations and quantities of
reinforcing steel, bending and cutting schedules, splicing,
stirrup spacing, supporting and spacing devices.
A. Submit mill test certificates of supplied concrete reinforcing.
Indicating physical and chemical analysis.
Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement - Page 1 of 1
A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615, 60 ksl yield grade billet -steel
deformed ban, uncoated finish.
2.02 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Tie Wire: Minimum 18 gage annealed type, or acceptable
patented system.
B. Metal Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, and Spacers: Sized and
shaped for strength and support of reinforcement during
installation and placement of concrete Including bad bearing
pad on bottom to prevent vapor barrier puncture. Supports to
be spaced a maximum of 4'-0' on center each way.
A. ACI 301- Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings. 2.03 FABRICATION
B. ACI 315 - Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement A. Fabricate in accordance with ACI 315, providing concrete cover
specified in Section 03300.
C. ANSI /ASTM AB2 - Cold Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete
Reinforcement B. Locate reinforcing splices not indicated on Drawings at points
of minimum stress. Indicate location of splices on shop
D. ANSUAWS D1.4- Structural Welding Code Reinforcing Steel. drawings.
F CRSI - Manual of Practice. 3.01 INSTALLATION
G. CRSI 63- Recommended Practice for Placing Reinforcing A. Before placing concrete, clean reinforcement of foreign particles
Bars. or coatings.
H CRSI 65- Recommended Practice for Placing Bar Supports, B. Place, support and secure reinforcement against displacement
Specifications and Nomenclature. Do not deviate from alignment or measurement
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE C. Do not displace or damage vapor barrier required by Section
03300.
ENO OF SECTION
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Cast -in -place concrete foundation footings.
B. Floors and slabs on fill on vapor bamer.
C. Concrete fill In Reinforced Unit Masonry.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork
B. Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement
C. Section 03370 • Concrete Curing.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ACI 301 - Specifications forStructural Concrete for Buildings.
B. Use specified concrete.
C. Obtain acceptance of surface finish.
0. Maintain sample panel exposed to view for duration of
concrete work. Remove when directed.
B. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to
appointed fine for review prior to commencement of work.
C. Testing fine will take cylinders and perform slump and sir
entrainment tests In accordance with ACI 301.
SECTION 03300 - CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
Section 03300 - Cast -In -Place Concrete - Page 1 of 2
PART 1 GENERAL conformance with requirements stated herein.
E. Three concrete test cylinders will be taken for every 75 or less
cu yds of each class of concrete placed each day.
F. One additional test cylinder will be taken during cold weather
and cured on site under same conditions as concrete It
represents.
O. One slump test will be taken for each set of test cylinders taken.
1.08 PRODUCT DATA
A. Submit product data under provisions Section 01340.
B. Provide product data for specified products.
C Submit manufacturers' Instructions under provisions of Section
01340.
PART2 PRODUCTS
B ASTM C33 - Concrete Aggregates. 2.01 CONCRETE MATERIALS
C. ASTM C94 • Ready -Mixed Concrete. A Cement ASTM 0150, normal -Type !Portland type; grey color.
D. ASTM C150 - Portland Cement
8 Fine and Coarse Aggregates. ASTM C33.
E. ASTM 0260 • Air•Entrammg Admixtures for Concrete.
C. Water: Clean, potable, and not detrimental to concrete.
F. ASTM C494 - Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.
2.02 ADMIXTURES
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A Air Entrainment: ASTM C260
A Perform work in accordance with ACI 301.
B. Chemical Admixture: ASTM 0494, Type A - water reducing.
B. Obtain materials from same source throughout the Work
203 ACCESSORIES
1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A Vapor Banter. 6 mil thick opaque polyethylene film. Type
A. Conform to applicable codes for Austin, Texas. recommended for below grade application.
1.06 FIELD SAMPLES B. Non•shrink Grout Premixed compound consisting of non-
metallic aggregate, cement water reducing and plasticizing
A. Cast field sample in formwork specked In Section 03100 agents; capable of developing minimum compressive strength
under provisions of Section 01340. o1 5000 psi in 28 days.
2.04 CONCRETEMIX
A Mix concrete m accordance with ASTM C94.
B Provide concrete of the following characteristics:
1.07 TESTS 1. Comprehensive Strength
(28 days): 3000 psi
A Testing and analysis of concrete will be performed under 2. Slump: Slabs 5'
provisions of Section 01400. All others 4'
C. Provide a minimum of 5 satin of cement per cubic yard of
concrete, with a maximum water cement ratio o10.58 for non -
air- entrained concrete and 0.46 for afr- entrained concrete.
D. Use accelerating admixtures In cold weather only when
D. Tests of cement and aggregates will be performed to ensure approved by Architect/Engineer. Use of admixtures will not
PART 3
relax cold weather placement requirements.
E. Use set - retarding admixtures during hot weather only when
approved by Architect/Engineer.
F. Add air entraining agent to concrete mix for concrete work
subject to freeze -thaw cycling.
G. No water shall be added to concrete at the site without
consent of the testing lab.
EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Verify anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement and other items
to be cat into concrete are accurately placed, held securely,
and will not cause hardship In placing concrete.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Prepare previously placed concrete by cleaning with steel
brush and apptylng bonding agent. Apply bonding agent in
accordance with manufacturer's Instructions.
6. At locations where new concrete Is dowelled to existing work,
drill holes in existing concrete, Insert steel dowels, and set
with Hilti HVA Adhesive or approved equal.
C. Install vapor bonier under interior slabs on fill. Lap joints
minimum 6 inches tape and seal- Do not disturb or damage
vapor baner while placing concrete. Repair damaged vapor
banter.
3.03 PLACING CONCRETE
A. Nobly Architect/Engineer minimum 36 hours prior to
commencement of concreting operations.
B. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 301.
C Hot Weather Placement ACI 305.
D. Cold Weather Placement: ACI 306.
6. Ensure reinforcement Inserts, embedded parts, and formed
joints are not disturbed during concrete placement
F. Maintain concrete cover around reinforcing as fellows:
Walls (Exposed to
Weather or Backfiil) 2 Inch
Footings and Concrete
Formed Against Earth 3 inch
Slabs on Fill 1 1/2 inch
G. Place concrete continuously between predetermined
construction and control joints. Do not break or Interrupt
successive pours such that cold joints occur.
H. Place floor slabs on fill In checkerboard pahem.
I. Excessive honeycomb or embedded debris in concrete is not
acceptable. Notify Architect/Engineer upon discovery.
3.04 N/A
3.05 FINISHING
Section 03300 - Cast•le•Place Concrete - Page 2 of 2
A. Provide concrete surfaces to be left exposed with smooth
rubbed finish.
B. Provide Class A tolerances to Boor slabs according to ACI 301.
C. Pitch to drains 1/4 Inch per toot nominal, or as shown on
plans.
3.06 PATCHING
A. Notify Architect/Engineer immediately upon removal of forms.
B. Patch imperfections.
3 07 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE
A. Modify or replace concrete not conforming to required levels
and lines, details, and elevations.
B. Repair or replace concrete not properly placed or not of the
specified type and/or compresseive strength, at no expense to
owner.
3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions
of Section 01400.
B. Maintain records of placed concrete Items. Record date,
location of pour, quantity, air temperature, and test samples
taken.
3,09 PROTECTION
A. Protect finished work under provisions of Section 01010.
B.
C.
Immediately after placement protect concrete from premature
drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical
injury.
Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively
constant temperature for period necessary for hydration of
cement and hardening of concrete.
END OF SECTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Finish separate floor toppings slabs on fill Under provisions
of Section monolithic floor slab.
B. Concrete hardener. Sealer. Shp - resistant coating.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 03300 - Cast -In -Place Concrete: Prepared concrete
surfaces ready for Finishing.
B. Section 03370 - Concrete Cunng.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings.
B. ASTM C309 - Uquld Membrane - Forming Compounds for
Curing Concrete.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator. Company specializing In concrete floor surface
Finishing with 3 years experience and approved by
compound hardener coating manufacturer.
B. Furnish concrete hardener sealer shp- resistant coating and
curing compound in manufacturer's packaging with
application instructions.
1.05 FIELD SAMPLES
A. Provide Field sample under provisions of Section 01340
B. Prepare trial Finish in area designated by Architect/Engineer.
1.06 PRODUCT DATA
A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01340.
B. Provide product data for specified products.
C. Submit manufacturers' instructions under provisions of
Section 01340.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Master Builders.
8. Gifford -Hill.
C Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01640.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Curing Compound: ASTM C309; clear.
B. Bonding Agent: Two component modified epoxy resin.
SECTION 03346 - CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING
Section 03346 - Concrete Floor Finishing - Page 1 of 1
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Verify floor surfaces are acceptable for application of this work
B. Ensure floor surfaces are depressed to accommodate Finish
matenals.
C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of surfaces.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Apply bonding agent priorto application of finish in accordance
with manufacturer's instructions.
3.03 FLOOR FINISHING
A. Finish concrete floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 301.
8. Uniformly spread. screed, and float concrete Do not use grate
tampers or mesh rollers. Do not spread concrete by vibration
C. Steel trowel surfaces to receive carpeting resilient flooring.
D. Steel trowel surfaces which will be left exposed.
304 TOLERANCES.
A. Maintain surface flatness with maximum variation of 1/6 inch in
10 feet
8. In areas of floor drains, maintain floor level at walls and slope
surface uniformly to drains at 1/6 inch per foot or as Indicated.
3.05 CURING
A. Cure finish floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 301. -
B Apply cunng compound on finished floor surfaces. Apply in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.06 TREATMENT
A. Apply 5ea1er on floor surfaces where concrete will be left
exposed. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's instruction.
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
ENERAL
INCIDED
oncrete curing materials and methods.
EDIRK
action 03300 - Cast I9•Place Concrete.
Elf
CI Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings
ST C309 - Liquid Membrane • Forming Compounds for
uri ncrete.
ST 103 • Polyethylene Film and Sheeting.
S Cunng Compound, Concrete, for New and
xis Surfaces.
FY ASSURANCE
on to requirements of ACI 301.
IC A TA
ub product data under provisions of Section 01340.
ro product data for specified products.
.ubmit manufacturers' installation instructions under
ro s of Section 01340.
3N AL REQUIREMENTS
tai concrete temperatures In accordance with ACI
06 Cold Weather ConcreteIng" and ACI 305R - 79 'Hot
✓e ".
'RODUCTS
4
✓ater. Clean and not detrimental to concrete.
terrne Curing Compound ASTM C309.
'TABLE PRODUCTS
1 uilders: Master Seal /MB-429.
&M nstiuction Chemicals: Suriaseal.
tiff i11 Sealco 309
u twos: Under provisions of Section 01640.
XECUTION
CTI!
'erily concrete surfaces are ready for curing.
1
1
SECTION 03370 - CONCRETE CURING
3.02 MEMBRANE CURING COMPOUND
Section 03370 - Concrete Cudng - Page 1 of 1
A. Note: No curing compounds will be allowed at file floor areas
and all other areas the contractor shall check with the floor
finish manufacturer for proper use.
B. Apply curing compound in two coats with second coat at right
angles to first
C Apply in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.
3.08 SCHEDULE
A. Cure and seal ell exposed concrete surfaces wlth approved
sealing compound.
END OF SECTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A Mortar for unit masonry.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 01400. Quality Control: Tasting laboratory services.
B. Section 04340 - Reinforced Masonry System.
1.03 REFERENCES
A ASTM C5 - Quicklime for Structural Purposes.
B. ASTM C91 - Masonry Cement
C. ASTM C94 - Ready -Mixed Concrete.
D ASTM 0144 - Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.
E. ASTM C150 - Portland Cement
F. ASTM C207 - Hydrated Ume for Masonry Purposes.
G. ASTM 0270 - Mortar for Unit Masonry.
H. ASTM C387 - Packaged, Dry. Combined Materiels for Mortar
and Concrete.
I. ASTM C476 - Grout for Reinforced and Non - reinforced
Masonry.
J. ASTM 0780 - Preconstructicn and Construction Evaluation
of Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry.
K International Masonry Industry All- Weather Council (IMIAC) -
Recommended Practices and Guide Specifications for Cold
Weather Masonry Construction.
1.04 MIX TESTS
A. Test mortar mix cubes under provisions of Section 01400.
B. Test grout mix cylinders under provisions of Section 01400.
105 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01340.
B Include design mix, environmental conditions, and admixture
limitations.
C. Submit manufacturer's Installation Instructions under
provisions of Section 01340.
1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to
minimum 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) prior to, during, and
48 hours after completion of masonry work
B Cold Weather Requirements. IMIAC - Recommended
Practicasand Guide Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry
SECTION 04100 - MORTAR
Construction.
Section 04100 - Mortar - Page 1 of 2
PART 2 PRODUCTS
202 MATERIALS
A Portland Cement ASTM C150, normal -Type I; gray color.
B. Masonry Cement ASTM C98, for general use.
C Mortar Aggregate. ASTM C144. standard masonry type; clean,
dry, protected against dampness, freezing, and foreign matter.
D. Grout Course Aggregate: Maximum 3/8 inch size
E. Grout Fine Aggregate: sand.
F. Hydrated Ume: ASTM 0207, Type S.
G. Quicklime: ASTM C5, non - hydraulic type.
H Premix Mortar. ASTM 0387, using gray cement
1. Water: Clean and potable.
2.05 MIXES
A. Mortar for Load Bearing Walls and Partitions: ASTM C270, Type
M.
B. Mortar for Non -load Bearing Walls and Pamtions: ASTM 0270,
Type M.
C. Mortar for Reinforced Masonry: ASTM C476, Type PM.
D. Pointing Mortar. ASTM C270, Type N with maximum 2 percent
ammonium stearate or calcium stearate per cement weight
206 GROUT FILL
A. Bond Beams. Lintels: Type and strength specified in Section
03300 with a stump of 6 Inches.
B. Engineered Masonry: 3000 psi strength at 28 days; 6 inches
slump; premixed type in accordance with ASTM C94.
2.07 MORTAR M0003
A Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients in quantities needed for
Immediate use In accordance with ASTM 0270.
8. Do not use anti- freeze compounds to lower the freezing point
of mortar or grout
C. If water is lost by evaporation, retemper within two hours of
mixing. Do not retemper mortar after two hours of mixing.
PART 3 IDCECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. After inspection of concrete grout spaces by Architect /Engineer,
plug cleenout holes with masonry units. Brace against wet
grout pressure.
B. Install mortar and grout in accordance with 04300.
C. Work grout into cores and cavities to eliminate voids.
D. Do not displace reinforcing steel when placing grout.
E. Clean concrete grout spaces of excess mortar and debris.
END OF SECTION
Section 04100 - Mortar - Page 2 of 2
PART 1 GENERAL
1.10 Scope:
A. This section covers the furnishing of all material, labor.
equipment, transportation and services necessary for all of
the masonry work, complete with all ties, anchors. reinforcing
and incidentals in accordance with the drawings and as
herein specified.
B. Cooperate with all other trades and provide for installation of
materials and devices specified or necessary under other
divisions of the Specifications which are built Into the work
of this section.
1. Install Inserts, sleeves, bolts, etc, specified to be
famished by others, but to be built under this section.
1.20 Related Work Specified Elsewhere:
A. Cast- in-Place Concrete - 3D
B. Waterproofing - 7A
C. Sheet Metal - 78
D. Caulking - 7C
E. Liquid Water Repellent - 7F
1.30 Samples:
A Submit samples of face brick for Architect's approval as
follows:
1.40 Qualifications:
1. Build a sample wall about 3'-0" x 4'-0 using the face
brick and mortar materials as approved for the lob with
the full range to be used.
A. All material manufacturers shall be approved by the
Architect before starting to work
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.10 Face Brick
A. Type, size, and manufacturer to match existing.
8. Brick shall be modular size, 2-1/4" x 3.5/8" x 7 - 5/0.
2 20 Mortar Materials:
A. Portland Cement; Conforming to ASTM C150, Type 1.
B. Ume Putty or Hydrated Lime; Type •S•, conforming to ASTM
0207.
C. Mason's Sand; Clean, sharp, herd, sllaceous, free from
loam, silt and organic matter, conforming to ASTM 0144,
shall not cause staining nor react chemically with cement
and shall be from a single source for uniformity.
SECTION 04210 - FACE BRICK
D.
E.
2.30
4.
Section 04210 - Face Brick Page 1 of 3
Water; Fresh, clean, drinkable, free from acid, salts, alkali,
organic and other deleterious matter.
Waterproofing Admixture; Sonnebom's "Hydrate Plus Use
one brand throughout In strict accordance with manufacturer's
pooled Instructrons.
Anchors and Reinforcing:
Corrugated lies; Where required for bonding, shall be copper
bearing, galvanized 7 @• wide x 12 gauge x length required for
proper anchorage at 18" 0.0. vertically and 32" o.c. horizontally.
B. Waterproofing; W.R. Grace & Co., Dehydrauoe No. 22.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.10 Delivery and Storage:
A. Deliver, handle, and store units to prevent Increase in moisture
content prior to laying.
B. Units shall be uniform in texture with no large voids, loose
aggregate, or honey - combing. Face of units exposed in finish
work shall be free of broken comers, chips, popouts, and other
surface blemishes.
C All materials shall be handled and stored In a m anner to
prevent deterioration, damage, and contamination.
3.20 Mixing Mortar.
A. Mix mortar in mechanical batch mixer to uniform texture, color,
and consistency. Continuous mixing will not be permitted.
B. Batch size shall be no greater than quantity of mortar which can
be used within 2 hours of mixing.
C. Quantity of mixing water shall be maximum consistent with
workability to provide maximum tensile bond within the capacity
of the mortar.
D. Retempedng will be permitted only to replace water lost by
evaporation.
E. Minor adjustments of specified proportions may be made to
compensate for sand coarseness. Once job mix Is established,
the proportions shall be carefully maintained In order to
produce mortar uniform in quality.
F. In exterior facing and back -up mortar. provide waterproofing
admixture in accordance with manufacturer's Instructions.
G. Use Type "S" mortar (ASTM 0270) for all masonry work, with
minimum compressive strength of 1800 psi. Design proportions
of the mortar mix shall be made by an independent testing
laboratory employed and paid for by the Contractor.
H. Mortar Proportions (Type S);
1. Portland Cement - 1 part by volume
2. Hydrated Ume or Ume Putty - 1/4 to 1/2 parts by volume.
3. Aggregate (damp loose) - not less than 2-1/4 times and
not more than 3 times the sum of the volumes of the
cement and lima used.
3.30 Workmanship - General:
A Lay true to dimensions, plumb, square, in bond and property
anchored. Build from foundations up.
B All courses level, joints of unform width.
C. Protection and temporary bracing shall be provided at all
times as necessary to prevent damage to the work by winds,
storms, or freezing. The tops of all walls that are not
completed or protected by other permanent work shall be
substantially protected with suitable secured covering at
night and during suspension of the work.
D. The Contractor shall cooperate with other trades whose work
Is to built Into or set In conjunction wall masonry. AU
bedding required shall be executed by the Contractor, under
the direction of the other trades whose work requires
bedding, including setting anchors, bolts, nailing plugs, and
similar dems furnished by others.
E. All vertical and horizontal joints shall be completely filled with
mortar, unless specially shown otherwise on the drawings.
Metal bucks shall be slushed hill with mortar.
F. No unit shall be shifted or re- akgned after it has been laid.
Any shifting or re- alignment shall be done by removing the
unit and relaying with fresh mortar. Keep wall cavities free
of mortar.
G. Where nails or line -pins are used, the holes left by their
removal shall be filled immediately on removal with fresh
mortar.
H. Frames shall be kept back at sufficient distance to permit a
caulked joint
I. When sooting work at a new level, the existing or previously
laid masonry shall be cleaned of all loose mortar or other
materials.
J. Cooperate with Waterproofers and Damp- proofers to allow
installation of fleshings, membranes and similar items.
Provide smooth mortar beds for installation of fleshings
where required. The Contractor shall be responsible for
damage to waterproofing and damp - proofing caused by his
work and shall pay for such damage. Damage shall be
repaired before closing in.
K Protect all adjacent finished materials from mortar and other
damage, and pay for any such damage caused by this work.
3.40 Laying Brick:
A All brick having absorption rates determined in accordance
with ASTM C67, in excess of 0 025 oz., per sq inch per
minute shall be wetted sufficiently so that the rate of
absorption when laid does not exceed this amount Wetting
shall be such as to insure that each unit Is nearly saturated,
surface dry when laid.
B. Lay brick plumb, level and true to a line in running bond or
as indicated. Lay 3 courses to B" vertically with uniform
horizontal and vemcal joints.
C. ay brick In full bed of mortar with head and edge joints
completely filled. Spread mortar for bed joint only no far
D.
5.
F. Keep cavity between brick and sheathing clear by laying a
board, 3/4" x cavity width, across a level of the ties to catch
droppings. As masonry reaches the next l8va1 for placing des,
raise the board, clean IL and lay 0 on the ties at that level.
G.
H.
I. Provide weeps in head joints 16' on centers, in first horizontal
course above fleshings. Keep cavity side of weep free from
mortar or accumulated materials.
J.
K
L
Section 04210 - Face Brick Page 2 of 3
ahead of laying units that the mortar will be plastic when umb
are laid. Butter end of brick for head joints with ample mortar
so the vertical joint is completely filled with mortarwhen brick
is shoved into place.
Rock closures into place with both head joints and closure
space spread with ample mortar. Shove against the two
adjacent bncks In place so that both horizontal and vertical
joints are completely filled Do not disturb previously lald brick
Avoid over - plumbing and pounding of the comers and jambs to
fit stretcher units after selang In place. Remove mortar and
replace with fresh mortar where adjustment must be made after
initial settings.
Protect all sills, ledges, offsets, etc, from droppings of mortar
and protect door jambs and corners from damage during
construction.
Finish joints that will remain exposed with a tool slightly larger
than the width of the jomt to form a concave surface or as
shown on drawings. Tool joints after the mortar has taken its
initial set and in such a manner as to squeeze the mortar back
into the joinL Tool vertical joints first
Cut brick where necessary for fitting or bonding, with a power
saw to insure straight evenly cut edges.
Stop off longitudinal run of masonry where absolutely necessary
by racking one -half length In each course. Remove loose
mortar before new work Is started and lightly wet old work
The new work must match the existing adjacent work in
coursing, joint size, joint tooling, joint color and brick color,
where brick work Is an addition.
3.50 Control Joints:
A Locate 3 /e" wide control joints as Indicated but do not exceed
25 feet on centers for exterior walls and 35 feet on centers for
Interior partitions. Keep vertical joints straight, true and con-
tinuous from top to bottom of masonry.
3.60 Embedded Items:
A. Build in flashing, sleeves, anchors, clips, mechanical and electri-
cal items, and other items furnished to be installed in masonry.
Accurate cut units to fit all plumbing, ducts, openings, and elec-
trical work with all holes neatly patched.
B. Install loose lintels, as Indicated, In full beds of mortar. Fill
voids at metal frames with mortar and build In frame anchors.
370 Cleaning:
A Aker masonry has been pointed and after all adjacent work
which Is liable to soil masonry has been completed, all masonry
surfaces which remain exposed or be painted shall be cleaned.
B. Cleaning solutions shall not be harmful to masonry materials.
Adjacent surfaces which may be stained or damaged by
cleaning solutions shall be protected during cleaning.
C. All surfaces shall be cleaned in a continuous operation from
the top downward. Wet all surfaces thoroughly with clean
water just prior to applying cleaning solutions.
D. Wire brushes, steel scrapers, steel wool, etc., are expressly
prohibited horn use in cleaning. Brushes shall be fiber which
will not stain.
0. After thoroughly scrubbing with solutions and clean water,
the entire masonry surface shall be washed down to
eliminate all traces of solutions or detergents.
F. Surfaces shall be left free of dirt, mortar, stains, and other
defacement ready for painting or final acceptance.
3.80 Masonry Waterproofing:
A. After all exterior brick work has been thoroughly cleaned,
apply two coats of W.R Grace & Company DEHYORATINE
N0. 22, Exterior waterproofing. Mix and spray in full
compliance with the manufacturer's specifications.
END OF SECTION
Section 04210 - Face Brick Page 3 of 3
Section 04340 - Reinforced Unit Masonry System - Page 1 of 2
PART 1 GENERAL 1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Concrete Masonry units.
B Reinforcement anchorages, and accessedes.
SECTION 04340 - REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM
1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Cold Weather Requirements: IMIAC - Recommended Practices
and Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
C. Parged masonry surfaces. 2.01 ACCEPTABLE CONCRETE MASONRYUNITMANUFACTURERS
1.02 WORK INSTALLED BUT FURNISHED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS A. Featherlite.
A. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Loose steel lintels. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01631.
B Section 05500 - Metal Fabncations: Fabricated steel items 2.02 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
C. Section 06181 - Glue laminated Structural Units A. Hollow Load Bearing Units: ASTM C95, Grade N, Type I normal
weight.
1.03 RELATED WORK
E. Masonry Units: Modular sized to 8 x 8 x 16 Inch ; provide
A. Section 01400- Duality Control: Testing laboratory services. special units for 90 degree corners, bond beams, lintels.
B. Section 04100 - Mortar. Mortar and grout 2.05 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGES
J. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Rod and sealant at control A. Single Wythe Joint Reinforcement Truss type, plain steel
Joints. construction; 3/16 inch side rods as manufactured by Dur -0-
Wall.
104 REFERENCES
B. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A815, 60 km yield grade; deformed
A. ACI 315 - Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement billet steel bars; plain finish.
B. ASTM A615 - Deformed and Plain Billet -Steel Bars for 2.07 ACCESSORIES
Concrete Reinforcement
A. Control Joints: Preformed rubber or neoprene material.
C. ASTM 055 - Concrete Building Brick
8. Joint Filler. Closed cell polyurethane oversized 50 percent self
D. ASTM C90 - Hollow Load - Bearing Concrete Masonry Units. expanding.
6. ASTM 0145- Solid Load - Bearing Concrete Masonry Units. C. Building Paper. Asphalt saturated felt
F. ASTM C652 - Hollow Brack D. Nailing Straps: Westem softwood, preservative treated, sized to
masonry joints.
G AWS 012.1 - Reinforcing Steel Welding Code
2.08 LINTELS
H. International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council (IMIAC) -
Recommended Practices and Guide Specifications for Cold A. As Indicated an Plans.
Weather Masonry Construction.
1.05 SUBMITTALS PART 3 EXECUTION
A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 01340. 3.01 PERPARATION
B. Indicate bar saes, spacings, locations, and quantities of A. Supply metal anchors to Section 05500 for placement Direct
reinforcing steel banding and cutting schedules. and correct placement
supporting and spacing dewces.
B. Verily items provided by other Sections of work are property
D. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01340. sized and located.
1.08 CERTIFICATES C. Establish lines, levels, and coursing. Protect from disturbance.
A. Submit manufacturer's certificates under provisions of D. Provide temporary bracing during erection of masonry work
Section 01340. Maintain in place until building structure provides permanent
bracing.
B. Submit manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or
exceed specified requirements. 3.02 COURSING
A. Place masonry to lines and levels indicated.
B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform width. Make vertical
and horizontal joints equal and of uniform thickness.
C Lay concrete masonry units in running bond. Course one
block unit and one mortar joint to equal 6 Inches. Form
raked motor joints.
3.03 PLACING AND BONDING
A. Lay masonry In full bed of mortar, properly jointed with other
work. Buttering comers of joints, and deep or excessive
furrowing of mortar joints are not permitted.
B. Fully bond Intersections, and external and internal comers.
C. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has taken Initial
set. Where adjustment must be made, remove mortar and
replace.
0. Remove excess mortar.
E. Perform jobsite cutting with proper tools to provide straight
unchipped edges. Take care to prevent breaking masonry
unit comers or edges.
3,04 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGES
A Install honzontal joint reinforcement 16 Inches 00.
B. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second
honzontol joints above and below openings. Extend 24
inches minimum each side of opening.
C. Place joint reinforcement continuous in first and second Joint
below top of walls.
D. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches. Extend 24
inches minimum each side of opening.
3.05 REINFORCING STEEL
A Place reinforcement in accordance with ACI 315.
B Locate reinforcing splices at points of minimum stress
Review location of splices with Architect/Engineer.
C. Weld reinforcement In accordance with AWS 012.1.
D. Place reinforcing bars supported and secured against
displacement Maintain position within 1/2 inch (13 mm) of
true dimension.
E. Venty reinforcement is clean, free of scale, dirt or other
foreign coatings which would reduce bond to grout
F. All CMU Walls to be reinforced with 144 Vertical at 48
3.06 TOLERANCES
A. Variation from Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/32 Inch (1.5 mm)
maximum.
B. Variation from Plane of Wall: 1/8 Inch in 10 feet and 1/4 Inch
in 20 feet or more.
D. Variation from Level Coursing. 1/8 Inch in 3 feet 1/4 Inch In 10
feet; 1/2 inch maximum.
E.
F.
Section 04340 - Reinforced Unit Masonry System • Page 2 of 2
Variation of Joint Thickness: 1/8 inch in 3 feet.mm/m).
Maximum Variation from Cross Sectional Thickness of Wells:
Plus or minus 1/4 Inch.
3.10 CONTROL JOINTS
A. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcing across control joints
B. Install resilient control joint to continuous lengths. Heat weld
butt and comer joints In accordance with manufacturers
Instructions.
C. Size joint in accordance with Section 07920 for sealant
performance.
3.11 BUILT -IN WORK
A As work progresses. buildin metal door frames, fabricated metal
frames, window frames, anchor bolts, plates, and other Items to
be built In the work supplied by other Sections.
8. Build -in items plumb and level.
C. Bed anchors of metal door and glazed frames in mortar joints.
Pill frame voids solid with mortar. Fill masonry cores with grout
minimum 12 inches from framed openings.
D. Do not build -In organic materials subject to deterioration.
3.12 CUTTING AND FLITTING
A Cut and fit for chases, pipes, conduit sleeves and grounds.
Cooperate with other Sections of work to provide correct size,
shape, and location.
B. Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting any area not indicated
or where appearance or strength of masonry work may be
impaired.
3.14 CLEANING
A. Remove excess mortar and smears.
8. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work.
C. Clean soiled surfaces with a non. acidic solution which will not
harm masonry or adjacent materials. Consult masonry
manufacturer for acceptable cleaners.
D. Use non - metallic tools in cleaning operations.
3.15 PROTECTION
A. Protect finished Installation under provisions of Section 01010.
B. Maintain protective boards at exposed external comer which
may be damaged by construction activities.
C Provide protection without damaging completed work
D. At day's end, cover unfinished walls to prevent moisture
Infiltration.
C. Variation from Plumb: 1/8 inch per story non. wmulative; 1/4 END OF SECTION
inch two stories or more.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Structural steel framing members, structural steel support
members, and with required bracing, welds, and fasteners.
B BasepMtes, and shear stud connectors.
1.02 WORK FURNISHED BUT INSTALLED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS
A. Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork Anchorages cast in
concrete
103 RELATED WORK
A. Section 03300 • Cast -in -Place Concrete: Grouting base
plates.
B. Section 05500 • Metal Fabricators.
1.04 REFERENCES
A ASTM A36 - Structural Steel.
B. ASTM A53 - Hot•Dipped, Znc-coated Welded and Seamless
Steel Pipe.
C. ASTM -A325 - High Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints.
D. ASTM - A500 - Cold Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon
Steel Structural Tubing In Round and Shapes.
E. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code.
F. TISC - Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection
of Strucural Steel for Buildings.
1.05 SHOP DRAWINGS
A Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 01340.
B. Indicate profiles. sizes, spacing and locations of structural
members, connections, attachments and fasteners.
C. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS welding
symbols. Indicate net weld lengths.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Structural Steel Members: ASTM A36.
B. Structural Tubing: ASTM 500, Grade B.
C. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A307.
D. Welding Materials: AWS 01.1; type required for materials
being welded.
E. Primer. Zino Chmrate.
2.02 FABRICATION
SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL
3.01
Section 05120 • Structural Steel • Page 1 of 1
A Fabricate structural steel members in accordance with AISC
Specification.
B. All welding shall be performed by welders certified within
previous six months In accordance with AWS specifications.
2.03 FINISH
A. Clean and prepare surfaces of all rust, scale, grease and foreign
matter in accordance with SSPCSP6 Commercial Blasting
Cleaning requirements.
B. Shop pnme structural steel with 2 coats of primer, with a
minimum wet thickness of 4 mil.
C. Do not prime surfaces to be field welded or In contact with
concrete.
D. Field touch up all damaged areas with primer after erection.
PART 3 EXECUTION
ERECTION
A. Erect Structural steel in accordance with AISC Specification.
B. Make provision for erection bads, and for sufficient temporary
bracing to maintain structure safe, plumb, and true alignment
until completion of erection and Installation of permanent
bracing.
C. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of
Architect/Engineer.
D. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop
primed, except surfaces to be in contract with concrete. Use a
primer consistent with shop coat
END OF SECTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A Shop fabricated ferrous metal items, prime painted.
1.02 WORK FURNISHED BUT INSTALLED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS
A. Furnish metal fabrications to be cast In concrete to Section
03300 - Cast -In -Place Concrete.
1.03 REIATED WORK
A Section 05120 - Structural Steel: Structural anchor bolts.
B. Section 09900 - Painting: Paint finish.
1.04 REFERENCES
A ASTM A36 • Structural Steel.
B. ASTM A53 • Hot - Dipped, Zinc-coated Welded and Seamless
Steel Pipe.
C. ASTM A307 • Low•Carbon Steel Externally and Internally
Threaded Fasteners.
D. ASTM A325 - High Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints.
E. ASTM A366 • Znc- Coating (Hot -Dip) on Assembled Steel
Products.
F. ASTM A500 - Cold- formed Welded and Seamless Carbon
Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes.
G ASTM A501 • Hot - formed Welded and Seamless Carbon
Steel Structural Tubing.
H. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code.
1.05 SHOP DRAWINGS
A Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 01340.
B. Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing,
anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories.
C. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where
applicable.
D. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS welding
symbols. Indicate net weld lengths.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A Steel Sections: ASTM 036.
B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B.
C. Bolts. Nuts. and Washers: ASTM 0307.
SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS
being welded.
E. Primer. ZJne Chromate.
Section 05500 • Metal Fabrications - Page 1 of 1
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Venfy dimensions on site pnor to shop fabrication.
B Fabricate Items with faints tightly fitted and secured
C. Fit and shop assemble in largest practical sections, for delivery
to site.
D. Grind exposed welds flush and smooth with adjacent finished
surface. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius.
E. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or
bolts; unobtrusively located; consistent with design of structure,
except where specifically noted otherwise.
F. Make exposed joints butt fight, flush, and hairline.
G Supply components required for anchorage of metal
fabrications. Fabricate anchorage and related components of
same matenal and finish as metal fabrication, except where
specifically noted otherwise.
2.03 FINISH
A Clean surfaces of rust. scale, grease, and foreign matter prior
to finishing in accordance with SSPC•SP6 Commercial Blast
Cleaning Requirements
B. Do not prime surfaces In direct contact bond with concrete or
where field welding is required.
C. Prime paint items scheduled with two coats, minimum of 4 mil.
wet thickness.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Obtain Architect/Engineer approval pnor to site cutting or
making adjustments not scheduled.
B. Clean and strip site primed steel dams to bare metal where site
welding Is scheduled.
C. Make provision for erection loads with temporary bracing. Keep
work in alignment
D. Supply Items required to be cast Into concrete with setting
templates, to appropriate Sections.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free front
distortion or defects.
B. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS 01.1.
C. After Installation, touch -up field welds, scratched or damaged
surfaces with primer.
D. Welding Materiels: AWS 01.1; type required for materials END OF SECTION
1
1
1
GENERAL
lied:
framing and sheathing for parapet wall and roof deck
B ng for metal roofing system and related fleshings.
lilting and cants for roof mounted mechanical items.
Preservative treatment of wood members where required.
I IInd wall wood blocking for support of washroom
a ssories, wall cabinets. and miscellaneous items.
to rk
S on 06110: Sheathing.
Section 07220. Roof Insulation.
lity,surance:
Lumber to have cemficate or visible grade stamp of and
airy certified by NFPA
F retardant treated products to have certificate or label
Issued by Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
001 Standards:
Al: American Wood Preservers Institute, 1651 Old
Meadow Road, McLean, Virginia 22102, U.S.A.
I 1. LP-3- Softwood Lumber and Plywood Pressure
Treated wt h Light Petroleum Solvent -Pants
Solution.
2. LP-4 - Softwood Lumber and Plywood Pressure
Treated with Volatile Petroleum Solvent.
LPG -Penta Solution.
I A: National Forest Products Association, Technical
Services Division, 1619 Massachusetts, Avenue N.W.,
Vl h ' ngton, D.C. 20036, U.S.A.
1. National Forest Design Specification for Stress
Grade Lumber and Its Fastemng.
PS: Voluntary Products Standards, National Bureau of
• dards, Superintendent of Documents, Govemment
P 'ng Office, Washington, D.C. 20402, U.S.A.
1. PS 20-70- American Softwood Lumber Standard.
1
I Underwriters Laboratories. Inc., 333 Pfingsten Road,
brook, Illinois 60062, U.S A.
'0 PRODUCTS
L ber and Sheet Materials:
Lumber. PS 20, and graded in accordance with NFPA
p ing Rules; maximum moisture content of 19 percent;
species; construction grade.
All plywood: Select sheathing grade; exterior waterproof
type.
SECTION 06110 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
Section 06110 - Rough Carpentry Page 1 of 2
C. Roofing plywood: Plywood for roof deck shall be APA grade
- trademarked. C-C Grade, aidedor type. structural 1.
2.20 Accessory Materials.
A. Nails, spikes, and staples: Galvanized for exterior locations,
high humidity locations, and treated wood; plain finish for other
interior locations; size and type to suet application.
B. Bolts, nuts, washers, Zags. pins, and screws: Medium carbon
steel; sized to suit application; galvanized for exterior locations,
high humidity locations, and treated wood; plain finish for other
Intenor locations.
C. Fasteners Toggle bolt type for anchorage to hollow masonry,
expansion shield and lag bolt type for anchorage to solid
masonry or concrete, bolts or power activated type for
anchorage to steel.
D. Wood preservative: Type complying with AWPI LP-3 and LP-4
as applicable.
PART THREE IXECUTION
3.10 Wood Treatment
A. Apply preservative treatment on wood In contact with cemen-
tioos materials, roofing and related metal fleshings.
8. Pressure preservative treated lumber, not over 5 inches thick,
and plywood In accordance with AWPI LP-3 or LP -4. Label
each piece of preservative treated lumber or plywood with a
permanent mark indicating conformance with the applicable
AWPI quality mark or that of an approved independent
inspection agency that maintains continuing control. testing,
and Impaction over the quality of the product.
C. The exposed areas of treated wood that are cut to drilled after
treatment shall be well brush coated with the preservative used
in the treatment
320 Placement
A. Place miscellaneous blocking, furring, canting, nailing
strips, framing and sheathing. Place members true to
linens and levels. Secure rigidly in place.
B. Space miscellaneous framing and furring at 16 inches on
center.
C Construct members of continuous pieces of longest possible
lengths.
3.30 Anchors for Securing Wood to Concrete:
A Headed drive studs, powder actuated method of fastening.
8. Minimum 114 inch headed, 5/32 Inch shank diameter. length as
required to provide 1 inch penetration of concrete.
C. Space fasteners maximum 24 inches on centers.
3.40 Sleepers for Mechanically Fastened Neoprene Roofing:
•
1
1
Coordlnate with Section 07220 for roof insulation type,
thi ess an taper or slope.
Wc� sleepers adjacent to
board roof insulation shall be the
same thickness as the board roof Insulation. The top surface
of sleepers shall be flush with top surface of insulation.
W s leepers, cants, blocldng, etc , on roof shell be applied
sr eously with roof insulation work.
A
e lt sleepers to concrete with powder actuated fasteners.
d
Install plywood roof decking where detailed with the face
gr rpendicular to supports and butt edges to a close but
no ht fit Use ring -shank or screw -type nails on S centers
at es and Intermediate supports. Dnve nails close.
I edge support canNot be provided, Install one metal
clip for spans less than 48• or longer.
At two layer construction. install second layer of plywood
decking In broken joint construction so that aacX layer
br joints both ways with Inc t first layer. In addition to
ical attachment, second layer shall Inc glued to first
la of plywood decking with waterproof glue.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
END OF SECTION
Section 06110 - Rough Carpentry Page 2 012
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A Structural floor, wall, and roof framing.
B Built -up structural beams and columns.
C. Diaphram trusses built on site.
D. Wall and roof sheathing.
E. Subfloor sheathing and overlay.
F. Preservative treatment of wood.
G. Sill gaskets flashing insect guards.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 03300 - Cast -In -Place Concrete. Setting anchors in
B. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications Prefabricated steel
structural supports.
C. Section 06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ALSC - American Lumber Standards Committee: Softwood
Lumber Standards.
B. ANSI A135.4 - Basic Hardwood.
C. ANSI A208.1 • Mat Formed Wood Particleboard.
D. APA - American Plywood Association.
E AWPA - American Wood Preservers' Association: Book of
Standards.
F. FS - 1T -W -571 - Wood Preservation: Treating Practices.
G. NFPA - National Forest Products Association
H. RIS - Redwood Inspection Service: Standard Specifications
for Grades of California Redwood Lumber.
I. SFPA - Southern Forest Products Association.
J. WCLIB • West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau: Standard
Gmding Rules for West Coast Lumber.
K W WPA - Western Wood Products Association.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Lumber Grading Agency: Candied by ALSC.
B. Plywood Grading Agency: Certified by APA.
1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable code for lire retardant and size and
type of fasteners requirements.
SECTION 06112 - FRAMING AND SHEATHING
Section 06112 - Framing and Sheathing - Page 1 of 2
B. Conform to UL requirements to achieve rating indicated.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01340.
B. Provide technical data on wood preservable materials and
application instructions.
C. In lieu of grade stamping exposed - to-view lumber and plywood,
submit manufacturer's cerABcate under provisions of Section
01340 that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.07 DELIVERY. STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store and protect products under provisions of Section
B. Studding: SPF species, #2 grade, 15 percent maximum
moisture content, or as noted on drawings.
PART2 PRODUCT
2.01 General
A. Lumber Grading Rules: NFPA
B. Beam Framing: SYP species, #1 grade, 15 percent maximum
moisture content
C. Joist Framing: SYP species, #1 grade, 15 percent maximum
moisture content
D. Rafter Framing: SYP species, #2 grade, 15 percent maximum
moisture content
E. Non - structural Light Framing: SPF species, 42 grade, 15
percent maximum moisture content
2.02 PLYWOOD MATERIALS
A. Roof Sheathing: 3/4" - 16/32 APA Exterior C-C.
B Wall Sheathing: 1/2" - 16/32 APA Exterior C.C.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners: Hot - dipped galvanized steel for exterior, high
humidity, and treated wood locations; plain finish elsewhere;
size and type to suit condition.
B. Joist Hangers: Galvanized steel, sized to suit joists and framing
conditions; manufactured by Simpson Strong Tie.
C. Anchors: Expansion shield end lag bolt type for anchorage to
solid masonry or concrete. Bolts or ballistic fasteners for
anchorage to steel.
2.04 WOOD TREATMENT
A. Fire Retardant Chemically treated and pressure impregnated.
B. Wood Preservative Pressure Treatment AWPA Treatment C2
using waterbome preservative with 0.30 percent retainage.
C. Wood Preservative (Surface Application): Clear type.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT
A Brush apply two coats of preservative treatment on wood in
contact with cementitious matenats and roofing and related
metal fleshings
B. Apply preservative treatment In accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
C. Treat site -sawn ends.
D. Allow preservative to cure prior to erecting members.
3.02 FRAMING
A. Erect wood framing members level and plumb.
B. Place horizontal members laid flat crown side -up.
C. Construct framing members lull length without splices.
D. Double members at openings over one sq It Space short
studs over and under opening to stud spacing.
E. Construct double joist headers at floor and ceiling openings.
Frame rigidly into joists.
F. Construct double joists under wall studding.
G. Bridge framing In excess of a feet span at mid -span
members or 10'-0' c/c which ever provides the greatest
bridging. Fit solid blocking at ends of member.
H. Place full width continuous sill fleshings under framed walls
on cementitious foundations. Lap flashing joint 4 inches
(100 mm).
I. Place sill gasket directly on cemenutious foundation.
Puncture gasket clean and ht tight to protruding foundation
anchor bolts.
J. Coordinate Installation of wood decking glue laminated
structural units.
3.03 SHEATHING
A. Secure roof sheathing perpendicular to framing members
with ends staggered. Secure sheet edges over firm bearing
with all edges blocked.
B. Secure wall sheathing perpendicular to wall studs, with ends
staggered. over firm bearing
C Place budding paper over wall ehoathing; weatheriap joints.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A. Framing Members: 1/4 Inch maximum from true position.
B. Surface Flatness of Floor. 1/4 inch In 10feet maximum.
END OF SECTION
Section 06112 - Framing and Sheathing - Page 2 of 2
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Roof curbs.
B. Blocking in wall and roof openings.
C. Wood tuning and grounds. 202 WOOD TREATMENT
D. Concealed wood blocking for support of washroom A. Wood Preservative (Surface Application): Clear, type.
accessories and wail cabinets.
B. Wood Preservative (Pressure Treatment): AWPA Treatment C2
E. Wood treatment using water bome preservative with 0.30 percent retainage.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 06112 - Framing and Sheathing.
1.03 REFERENCES
B. APA - American Plywood Association: Grades and Standards.
C. FS TT -W -571 - Wood Preservation: Treating Practices.
D. NFPA - National Forest Products Association.
H. WWPA- Western Wood Products Association.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Lumber Grading Agency: Certified by ALSO.
B. Plywood Grading Agency: Certified by APA.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01340.
B. Provide technical data on wood preservative materials and
application Instructions.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Umber Grading Rules: WWPA.
B. Softwood Umber. SYP species, #2 grade, 15 percent
maximum moisture content
C. Plywood: APA Grade C-D, with waterproof glue, unsanded
SECTION 06114 - WOOD BLOCKING AND CURBING
Section 06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing - Page 1 of 1
D. Fasteners: Hot -dipped galvanized steel for exterior. high
humidity, and treated wood locations; plain finish elsewhere;
size and type to suit condition.
E. Anchors: Expansion shield and lag bolt type for anchorage to
solid masonry or concrete. Bolts or ballistic fasteners for
anchorages to steel.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT
A. Brush apply one coat of preservative treatment on wood in
A. ALSO - American Umber Standards Committee: Softwood contact with cementitious materials and roofing and related
Lumber Standard. metal fleshings.
B. Apply preservative treatment in accordance with manufacturer's
Instructions.
C. Treat site •sawn ends.
D. Allow preservative to cure prior to erecting members.
E. RIO - Redwood Inspection Service: Standard Specifications
for Grades of California Redwood Lumber. 302 INSTALLATION
F. SFPA - Southern Forest Products Association. A. Erect wood framing members level and plumb.
G. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau Standard B Space framing 16 Inches oc.
Grading Rules for West Coast Lumber.
C. Curb all roof openings except where prefabricated curbs are
provided. Form comers by lapping side members alternatively.
D. Coordinate work with installation of decking and support of
decking at openings.
END OF SECTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A Glue laminated decking.
1 02 Related Work
A. Section 06112- Framing & Sheathing: Wood plates on wood
supports.
B. Section 06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing.
C. Section 06130 - Heavy Timber Framing.
D. Section 06181 - Glue Laminated Structural Units.
1.03 REFERENCES
A AITC - Amencen Institute of Timber Construction.
B. ALSC - Amencan Lumber Standards Committee: Softwood
Lumber Standards.
C. ANSI A190 1: Structural Glue Laminated Timber.
D APA - American Plywood Association.
E ASTM 02559 - Adhesives for Structural Laminated Wood
Products for Use Under Exterior (Wet Use) Exposure
Conditions.
F. AWPA - American Wood Preservers' Association.
G AWPI • American Wood Preservers' Insewte.
H. FS TT -W -571 • Wood Preservation: Treating Practices.
I. NFPA - National Forest Products Association.
J. RIS - Redwood Inspection Service: Standard Specifications
for Grades of California Redwood Lumber.
K SFPA - Southern Forest Products Association.
L UL - Undemmters' Laboratories, Inc.
M. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau: Standard
Grading Rules for West Coast Lumber.
N. WWPA- Westem Wood Products Association.
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A Design Roof Live Load: 20 Ibs sq ft with deflection limited to
1/240.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A Lumber Grading Agency: Certified by ALSC.
B. Plywood Grading Agency: Certified by APA.
C. Manufacturer: Company specializing In manufacture of glue
laminated decking with three years minimum experience, and
SECTION 06125 - WOOD DECKING
certified by AITC.
Section 06125 - Wood Decking Page 1 of 2
D. Design decking under direct rupervision of Professional
Engineer experienced In structural framing design, registered in
State of Texas.
1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A ConfOrm to applicable code.
B. Conform tO UL(requirements to achieve ratingindicated.
1.07 SUBMfTTALS
A. Submit shop drawings [and product data] under provlslOne of
Section 01340.
B. Indicate deck framing system, loads and cambers, bearing
detaiis,and framed openings.
C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions
of Section 01340.
1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01615.
B Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01615
C. Protect glue laminated members In accordance with AfTC
requueMents for bundle wrapped material.
2.01 MATERIALS
A Lumber Grading Rules: WWPA.
B. Lumber Decking: SYP species, #1 grade, 15 percent moisture
content: bevel edges; single tongue.
C. Plywood: APA Structural I, Grade C-D; unsanded.
D. Glue Laminated Decking: SYP softwood lumber, ASTM 02559
type adhesive for 'wet' condition of service; bevel edges; single
tongue: designed to the following values:
1. Bending (Fb): 1668 psi
2. Tension Parallel to Grain (Ft): 1100 psi
3. Compression Parallel to Grain (Fc): 1450 psi.
4. Horizontal Shear (Fn): 95 psi.
5. Modulus of Elasticity (E): 1,900,000 psi.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners: Galvanized for exterior, high humidity, and treated
wood locations; plain finish elsewhere; size and type to suit
condition.
2.04 FABRICATION
A Fabncate glue laminated decking In accordance with ARC
architectural grade.
B. Verify dimensions and site conditions prior to fabrication.
C. After end trimming, seal with penetrating sealer In accordance
with AfTC requirements. 3 07 SCHEDULE
2.05 WOOD TREATMENT
A. Wood Preservative (Pressure Treatment): AWPA Treatment
C2 using water borne preservative with 0.30 percent
retainage.
B. Wood Preservative (Surface Application): Clear. type.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Verity that surfaces are ready to receive decking.
B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing
conditions.
3.02 PREPARATION
A Coordinate placement of bearing support items.
3.03 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT
A. Brush apply two coats of preservative treatment on wood In
contact with cementtious materials and roofing and related
metal fleshings.
B. Apply preservative treatment in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
C Treat see -sawn ends.
0. Allow preservative to cure prior to erecting members
3.04 INSTALLATION - PLYWOOD DECKING
A Secure decking perpendicular to framing members with
ends staggered over firm bearing. On sloped surfaces, lay
deoldng with tongue upward.
B. Place plywood decking, end mints staggered, perpendicular
to framing Secure sheets over firm bearing. Attach decking
with subfloor glue and nails.
C. Use sheathing clips between plywood sheets between
framing members.
D. Side spike planks together, through pre - drilled holes.
3.05 INSTALLATION GLUE LAMINATED DECKING
A. Secure decking perpendicular to framing members with
ends staggered over firm bearing. On sloped surfaces, lay
decking with tongue upward.
B. Fit butt end loins mooring between support members with
metal splines to maintain tight, aligned loins.
C. Side spike planks together, through pre - drilled holes.
D. Maintain deck loins of 1/16 inch.
3.00 TOLERANCES
A Surface Flatness of Floor and Roof: 1!4 inch In 10 feat
maximum.
Section 06125 - Wood Decking Page 2 of 2
END OF SECTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Heavy structural timber for posts, and beams.
B. Connection hardware.
1.02 WORK FURNISHED BUT INSTALLED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS
A. Fumish steel support fabrications to be cast in concrete to
Section 03100- Concrete Formwork
1.03 RELATED WORK
A. Section 06112 - Framing and Sheathing: Structural
dimension lumber framing.
B. Section 06181 - Glue- Laminated Structural Units.
104 REFERENCES
A. ALSC - American Lumber Standards Committee: Softwood
Lumber Standards.
B. ARC - American Institute of Timber Construction.
C. ANSI /ASTM Al23 - Zunc (Hat Galvanized) Coatings on
Products Fabncated from Rolled, Pressed, and Forged Steel
Shapes, Plates, Bars, and Strip.
D. ANSI/AWS 131.1 - Structural Welding Code.
E. NFPA - National Forest Products Association.
F. RIS • Redwood Inspection Service: Standard Specifications
for Grades of California Redwood Lumber.
G. SFPA - Southern Forest Products Association.
H. WCUB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau: Standard
Grading Rules for West Coast Lumber.
L WWPA - Western Wood Products Association.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Lumber Grading Agency: Certified by ALSC.
B. Manufacturer :Company specializing In manufactureofheavy
timber framing certified by ARC with three yearn minimum
experience.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of
Section 01340.
B. Indicate dimensions, wood grades, component profiles,
drilled holes, fasteners, connectors, erection details and
sequence.
C. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS welding
symbols. Indicate net weld lengths.
SECTION 06130 - HEAVY TIMBER FRAMING
D. Submit product data on proprietary connection devices.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIAL
A. Lumber Grading Rules: WWPA.
B. Lumber. SYP species; #1 grade :maximum moisture content of
15 percent.
2.02 ACCESSORIES
A. Connectors: Type weldable steel; manufactured by Simpson.
Stoney -Tie Co.
B. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, and Screws: Medium carbon steel;
plain finish; size and type to suit application.
C. Zmc Chromate Primer.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. Fabncate components in accordance with ARC, with joints
neatly fitted, welded, and ground smooth.
2.04 FINISHES
A. Prime connectors, except where cast In concrete.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 ERECTION
A.
B.
Section 06130 - Heavy Timber Framing - Page 1 of 1
Set structural members level and plumb, in correct position.
Make provision for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary
bracing to maintain structure safe, plumb, and In true alignment
until completion of erection and Installation of permanent
bracing.
C. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of
Architect/Engineer.
D. After erection, touch up primed galvanized surfaces with primer
consistent with shop coat.
END OF SECTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Glue laminated wood bean. and pudins
B. Preservative treatment of wood.
C. Steel hardware and attachment brackets.
1 02 WORK INSTALLED BUT FURNISHED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS
A. Furnish attachment bracket anchor bolts to Section 05500 for
placement.
1.03 RELATED WORK
A. Section 05500-Metal Fabrication Prefabricated steel structural
supports.
B. Section 06112 - Framing and Sheathing: Roof sheathing.
C. Section 06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing.
D. Section 06125 - Wood Decking.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. AITC - American Institute of Timber Construction
8. ALSC - American Lumber Standards Committee: Softwood
Lumber Standards.
C. ANSI A190.1 - Structural Glued Laminated Timber.
D. ASTM A36 - Structural Steel.
E. ASTM Al23 - Znc (Hot Galvanized) coatings on Products
Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed, and Forged Steel Shapes,
Plates, Bars, and Strip.
F. ASTM A167 - Stainless and Heat Resisting Chromium Nickel
Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.
G. ASTM A325- High Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints.
H. ASTM D2559 - Adhesives for Structural Laminated Wood
Products for Use Under Exterior (Wet Use) Exposure
Conditions.
I. AWPA - American Wood Preservers' Association.
1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design Roof Live Load: 20 Ibs/sq h with deflection limited to
1/240.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
SECTION 06181 - GLUE LAMINATED STRUCTRUAL UNITS
A Manufacturer. Company specializing In manufacture of glue
laminated structural units with throe years minimum
experience, and certified by the ARC.
8. Elector. Company specializing In erection of glue laminated
structural units with 3 years experience.
Section 06181 - Glue Laminated Structural Units - Page 1 of 2
C. Design structural members under direct supervision of
Professional Engineer experienced In design of glue laminated
structural unite. registered in State of Texas.
1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable code for loads, seismic zoning, and other
load criteria
1.08 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of
Section 01340.
B. Indicate framing system, sizes and spacing of members, loads
and cambers, bearing and anchor details. bridging and bracing,
and framed openings.
C. Provide technical data on wood preservative materials,
application technique. and resultant performance information.
1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01010.
B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01010
C. Protect members in accordance with AfTC requirements for
Individually wrapped material
D. Leave Individual wrapping In place until finishing occurs
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Lumber. Softwood Southem Pine lumber conforming to
Southern Pine Inspection Bureau grading rules. Design for the
following values:
1. Bending (Fb): 2400 psi
2. Tension Parallel to Grain (Ft): 1925 psi
3. Compression Parallel to Grain (Fc): 1925 psi
4. Compression Perpendicular to Grain Bosom (Fel): 405 psi
5. Compression Perpendicular to Grain Top (Fat): psi 405
kPa).
6. Honzontal Shear (Fv): 65 psi
7. Modulus of Elasticity (E): Z000,000 psi
B. Steel Connections and Brackets: ASTM A36; weldable quality.
C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A307 steel.
D. Beating Plate Anchors: Expansion shield and lag bolt type for
anchorage to solid masonry or concrete. Bolts or ballistic
fasteners for anchorage to steel.
203 WOOD TREATMENT
A. Wood Preservative (Pressure Treatment): AWPA Treatment C2
using water borne preservative with 0.30 percent retainage.
2.04 FABRICATION
A Fabricate glue laminated structural members in accordance with
ARC architectural grade.
B. _Vent' dimensions and site conditions prior to tabncation.
C.
1
1
D.1Fabricate member with camber bud In.
E. 0o not splice or join members In locations other than that
indicated, without permission.
F. ' Fabricate steel hardware and connections with joints neatly
fitted, welded, and ground smooth
G. Alter end trimming, seal with penetrating sealer in
accordance with ARC requirements.
" 3 'EXECUTION
INSPECTION
A'Verify that supports are ready to receive trusses
8 Vent' sufficient end bearing area
C.1 Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing
conditions.
PREPARATION
A. 'Coordinate placement of bearing and support Items.
ERECTION
A. 'Set structrual members level and plumb, In correct positions.
B. Provide temporary bracing and anchorage to hold members
In place until permanently secured.
C. , Fit members together accurately without trimming, cutting, or
any other unauthor¢ed modification.
T RANCES
Framing Members: 1 inch maximum from true position.
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Cut and fit members accurately to length to achieve tight
joint fit
Section 06181 - Glue Laminated Structural Units • Page 2 of 2
SECTION 06193 - PLATE CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Prefabrieeted wood trusses for r000raming.
B. Bridging, bracing. and anchorage.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Section 06112 - Framing and Sheathing: Roof sheathing.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ALSC - Amencan Lumber Standards Committee: Softwood
Lumber Standards.
B. ASTM A167 - Stainless and Heat Resisting Chromium - Nickel
Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.
C ANSI/ASTM A446 - Sheet Steel, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) by
the Hot -Dip Process. Physical (Structural) Quality.
D AWPA - American Wood Preservers' Association.
E. FS TT -W -571 - Wood Preservation: Treating Practices.
F. NFPA - National Forest Products Association.
G RIS - Redwood Inspection Service: Standard Specifications
and Grades for California Redwood Lumber
H. SFPA - Southem Forest Products Association.
I. TPI - Truss Plate Institute.
J UL - Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.
K WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau: Standard
Grading Rutes for West Coast Lumber.
L WWPA - Westem Wood Products Association.
1 04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design Roof Uve Load: 20 lbs/sq ft with deflection limited to
1/360.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer. Company specializing in manufacture of
prefabricated wood trusses with three years minimum
experience.
B Design trusses under direct supervision of Professional
Engineer experienced in structural framing design of trusses
registered In State of Texas.
C. Lumber Grading Agency: Certified by ALSC.
D. Truss Plates: In accordance with Truss Plate Institute.
1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A Conform to applicable code for bads, seismic zoning, and
other governing load cntena.
B. Conform to applicable code for fire retardant requirements.
C. Conform to UL requirements to achieve rating indicated.
107 SUBMITTALS
A Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of
Section 01340.
B. Indicate sizes and spacing of busses, loads and truss cambers,
beanng and anchor details, bridging and bracing, and framed
openings.
1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01010.
B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01010.
C. Transport and store trusses In vertical position resting on
bearing ends.
D. Protect trusses from moisture, warpage, and distortion during
transit and when stared.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
6.
C.
D.
Section 06193 - Plate Connected Wood Trusses - Page 1 of 2
Round Rock Truss, Round Rock Texas
Truss end Component Co, Inc.. San Antonio, Texas.
Rabo-Truu, San Marcos, Texas
Custom Truss, Cedar Park, Texas
E Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01001.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Lumber Grading Rules: NFPA.
B. Plywood Gussets: Not Allowed
C. Steel Connectors: ANSI/ASTM A446 steel, Grade A; galvanized;
die stamped with Integral teeth.
D. Fasteners: Galvanized for exterior, high humidity, and treated
wood locations; plain finish elsewhere; size and type to suit
condition.
E Bearing Plate Anchors: Expansion shield and lag bolt type for
anchorage to hold masonry or concrete.
G. Wood Blocking: Framing for Openings: Softwood lumber.
Southern Yellow Pine species, No. 2 grade, 101sdned with a
maximum moisture content of 15% percent.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. Verify dimensions and site conditions pnor to fabrication.
B. Cut members accurately to length to achieve tight joint
connections.
C Jig trusses during fabrication to assure accurate
configuration. Press connectors into lumber, both sides of
joint simultaneously, ti withen 1/37 of wood face.
D Build camber Into truss.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Verify that supports and openings are ready to receive
trusses.
B. Verify sufficient end beanng area.
C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing
conditions.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate placement of beating Items
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install trusses in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Place trusses true to line and level
C. Provide temporary bracing to hold busses in place until
permanently secured.
D. Place permanent bridging, bracing, and anchors to maintain
trusses straight and in correct position before inducing loads.
0. Do not field cut trusses.
F. Place headers and supports to frame openings required.
G. Frame openings between trusses with lumber.
H. Coordinate placement of sheathing with work of this Section.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A. Framing Members. 1/2 Inch maximum from true position.
END OF SECTION
Section 06193 - Plate Connected Wood Trusses - Page 2 of 2
PART ONE GENERAL
1.10 Work Included:
A. Finish carpentry items, other than shop fabricated cabinet
work, complete with required hardware and attachment
accessories. Refer to schedule at the end of this Section.
1.20 Related Work:
A. Section 06100: Rough carpentry.
B. Section 06410: Shop fabricated cabinetwork
C Section 08210: Wood doors.
D. Section 09900: Painting and finishing of finish carpentry
items.
1.30 Quality Assurance:
A. Perform finish carpentry work In accordance with
recommendations of the Millwork Standards of the
Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI).
1.40 Reference Standards:
A. AWI: Architectural Woodwork Institute, 2310 South Walter
Reed Dnve, Arlington, Virginia 22206, U.S A.
B. PS: Voluntary Product Standards, National Bureau of Stand-
ards, Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government
Printing Office. Washington, D.C. 20402, U.S.A.
1. PS 1 -74 - Construction and Industrial Plywood.
2. PS 20-70 - Amencan Softwood Lumber Standard
3. PS 58 - Basic Hardboard.
1.50 Submittals;
A. For submittal procedures refer to Section 01340.
B.
Samples:
1. Submit 41nch x 12 inch size sample of each type
of solid and veneer plywood, indicating required
grade and finish.
2. Submit samples of standard colors and patterns
of plastic laminate for Architect/Engineer's
selection.
C. Shop drawings:
1. Indicate materiels, component profiles, fastening,
jointing details, finishes, accessories, and
hardware.
1.60 Delivery and Storage:
A. 00 not deliver finish carpentry Items until site conditions are
adequate to receive the work of this Section. Protect
materials from weather while In transit.
B. Store indoors, In ventilated areas with a constant but
minimum temperature of 60 degrees F and maximum relative
humidity of 25 to 55 percent
SECTION 06200 - FINISH CARPENTRY
PART TWO PRODUCTS
2.10 Lumber Products:
Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry Page 1 of 2
A. Softwood lumber- PS 20; graded in accordance with require-
ments of AWI; maximum moisture content of 6 percent for
interior work
8. Hardwood lumber. PS 58; graded In accordance with the
requirements of AWI; maximum moisture content of 6 percent
2.20 Sheet Materials:
A. Softwood plywood; PS 1; gtaded in accordance with AWI; core
material of veneer; of thickness indicated on drawings.
B. Douglas fir plywood: Graded in accordance with AWI; core
material of veneer.
2.30 Finish Materials:
A. Plastic laminate: General purpose type; minimum 1/16 inches
thick; finish and color as selected by Architect
B. Plastic laminate backing: High pressure paper base laminate
without a decorative finish; minimum 1/32 Inches thick
C. Adhesive: Contact type.
2.40 Accessories:
A. Nails Size and type to suit application.
B. Bolts. nuts. washers, lags, pins, and screws: Size and type to
suit application.
PART THREE EXECUTION
3.10 Installation:
A. Perform finish carpentry work to extent Indicated In schedule at
the end of this Section. Construction joining and prefinishing
of assemblies and items: Custom grade, as established by AWI.
B.
C.
0.
E.
F.
G.
H.
Set and secure materials and components in place, ngid,
plumb, and square.
Ensure all mechanical and elocmcal items affection this Section
of work are property places, complete, and have been inspected
by Architect/Engineer before staabng installation.
Prime paint contact surfaces of items and assemblies in contact
with cementitious materials.
Fit plywood shelving and site -made casework with 3/8 inch thick
hardwood edging. Width. Governed by thickness of plywood
Install hardware, fodures and accessories supplied under other
Sections for Installation.
Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's recommen-
dations.
Apply plastic laminate, cork and fabric finishes where Indicated.
Adhere over entire surface. Make joints and comers hairline.
Match pattems. Cap exposed edges with trim of same finish
and pattem. Apply laminate backing on reverse side of
plastic laminate finished surfaces
3.20 Preparation for Finishing:
A Sand work smooth and set exposed naffs and screws. Apply
wood filler in exposed nail and screw Indentations and leave
ready to receive site - applied finishes. On Items to receive
transparent finishes, use wood filler which matches sur-
rounding surfaces, and of types recommended for applied
finishes
B Seal and varnish concealed and semi - concealed surfaces.
Brush apply only.
C. Seal surfaces in contact with cementitious materials.
PART FOUR SCHEDULE
4.10 Interior:
A Window sills.
B. Moldings, bases, casings, stools, miscellaneous trim and
stops.
C. Loose shelving.
D. Millwork and installation of finish hardware.
E. On -site applied plastic laminate work
F. Wood columns, caps, and bases.
O. Plywood rutting.
END OF SECTION
Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry Page 2 of 2
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 Description:
SECTION 06400 - ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
A. See drawings schedule and details for I cations and quantity
of carpentry and millwork required. Section 06200 -
Carpentry includes all items not specified in 06400 -
Architectural Woodwork or other following sections.
1.02 Scope:
A. Furnish and deliver all architectural woodwork es shown and
as specified. Architectural woodwork as used herein means;
'All extenor and Interior woodwork exposed to view in
finished building, except as exempted below. All exposed
wood, plywood, hard plastics, and wood doers are included'
1.03 Work Not Included In This Section:
A. Typical exempted wood items ere: Lumber yard or specialty
items of floonng, shingles, exposed roof decking, ceiling,
siding, structural roof trusses and rafters, overhead doors,
and wood bumpers.
1.04 General Requirements:
A. Quality Standards: The Quality Standards of the
Architectural Woodwork Industry (AIA Fie No. 19E) shall
apply and by reference are made a part of these
Specifications.
B.
C.
Competence: The Architect reserves the right to approve the
woodwork manufacturer selected to furnish all of the
woodwork The approved woodwork manufacturer must
have a reputation for doing satisfactory work on time and
shall have successfully completed comparable work.
Shop Drawings: Shop drawings shall be furnished for all
woodwork, except when shown full size on the architectural
drawings, or for stock items referred to by manufacturer's
catalog number, and shall be drawn in related and /or
dimensional position with secoons shown either full size or
3" scale.
D. Delivery and Storage: The woodwork manufacturer and the
general contractor shall Jointly be responsible to make
certain that items of woodwork are not delivered until the
building and /or storage area is sufficiently dry so that the
woodwork will not be damaged by excessive changes in
moisture content.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 Woodwork
A. Materials: Clear select Red Oak for solid stock; A -D select
Red Oak plywood for paneling.
B. Quality Standards: Furnishings shall comply with the
Architectural Woodwork Institute's - Custom grade
constmctIon.
202 Hardware:
PART 3 EXECUTION
301 Workmanship
Section 06400 - Architectural Woodwork Page 1 of 1
A. To be furnished under this Section shall Include drawer guides,
shelf brackets, and standards, as shown on the drawings, and
not to be Included In the hardware allowance. All other finish
hardware, such as hinges, pulls, and catches, will be furnished
under the hardware allowance.
A. All carpentry shall be done by expenenced mechanics and shall
be left In first class condition with all nail holes set and all Joints
sanded smooth to receive finish.
Allowable Deviations: Deviations from the quality grade,
species, and finish selected below will be allowed for individual
items or components only if specified under specified headings
covering such items.
Job Assembled Work: The general contractor, when Installing
items not shop-assembled, shall distribute to best over -all
advantage the defects allowed in the quality grade specified.
Field Dimensions: The woodwork manufacturer is responsible
for details and dimensions not controlled by job conditions and
shall show on his shop drawings all required field
measurements beyond his control. The general contractor and
the woodwork manufacturer shall cooperate to establish and
maintain these field dimensions.
END OF SECTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.10 Descriptions
A. Work Included: Waterproofing required for this work In-
cludes, but Is not necessarily limited to below-grade water-
proofing of wells and underslab waterproofing wheresynthet-
ic floors on grade are indicated.
1.20 Quality Assurance
A. Qualifications of Installers: One person, thoroughly expe-
rienced in Installation of specified products, shall be present
at all times to direct work under this Section.
B. Contractor's Certification: Upon completion 01 this portion
of work, and as a condition of its acceptance, deliver to
Architect a written certificate, signed by the contractor that
the materials were Installed in complete accordance with the
manufacturer's current recommendations.
1.30 Submittals
A. Materials Usk Before any materials are delivered to Job Site,
submit to Architect a complete list of matenals proposed to
be furnished and installed.
B Guarantee:
1. Submit 2 copies of 2 -year Guarantee for waterproofing
and Associated Work signed by the Contractor.
2. Guarantee shall agree to repair or replace any work
which leaks water, deteriorates excessively or other-
wise fails to perform.
1.40 Product Handling
A. Protection: Protect waterproofing materials, Installed work
and work of other trades before and dunng installation.
B. Replacements: In even of damage, make all repairs and
replacements at no additional cost to Owner.
PART 2 PRODUCTS:
2.10 Below Grade Wall Waterproofing•
A. Wall Waterproofing membrane shall be one of following or
an equal approved by Architect In advance of bidding.
B. Bentonite Waterproofing System (Volclay) by American
Colloid Company. 07 3
C. Celotex Cold Membrane•p705XS10tp1111,
D. Tex -Mastic Cyloplasbc Membrane.
2,20 Other Materials
A. Protective coverings, mastics, sealants, etc. for below -grade
waterproofing: As recommended by manufacturer or
materiels and subject to approval of Architect
PART 3 EXECUTION:
SECTION 07130 - WATERPROOFING
3.10 Surface Conditions:
Section 07130 - Waterproofing - Page 1 of 1
A. Inspection:
1. Inspect installed in accordance with original design and
manufacturer's recommendations.
2. Venfy that waterproofing may be installed in accord ante
with onginal design and manufacturer's recommen-
dations.
B. Discrepancies:
1. In event of discrepancy, notify Architect
2. Do not proceed with installation until discrepancies have
been resolved.
3.20 Installation:
A. Preparation: Prepare surfaces to receive waterproofing in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Installation:
1. Install waterproofing In accordance with manufactur er's
recommendations.
2. Cover all surfaces where waterproofing is indictated or
required to prevent moisture penetration into building.
3. Install required protective cover to prevent damage
during backfill.
END OF SECTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.10 Descriptions
A. Work Included: Damproofing of all exterior emu walls and all
foundation walls below grade.
1.20 Quality Assurance
A. Qualifications of Installers: Use only workmen thoroughly
trained and experienced in the skills required, who are
completely familiar with manufacturer's recommended
methods of application and the requirements of this Section
of the Specifications.
1.30 Submittals
A. Materials List: Submit to Architect a list of materials
proposed to be installed under this Section.
B Contractor's Certification: Upon completion of work deliver
to Architect a written certificate, signed by the Contractor
Indicating that:
1. Matenals applied conform to requirements of the
specifications.
2. Materials were applied In accordance with manufactur-
er's current recommendations.
C. Guarantee: Deliver guarantee signed by applicator and
endorsed by manufacturer stating that damproofing will
remain Intact and resist water for 5 years following date of
application.
1.40 Product Handling
A. Protection:
1. Protect materials before and dunng application.
2. Protect installed work of other trades.
B. Replacements: In the event of damage, make all repairs and
replacements at no additional cost to Owner.
PART 2 PRODUCTS:
A Damproofing materials shall be the following or an equal
approved in advance by the Architect
1. Emulsified Asphalt Compounds:
o. Sonnebom - Hydrocide 600 for brush or spray
application.
b. Sonnebom - Hydrocide 700 for trowel
application.
B Damproofing shall be compatible with any insulation Installed
in the same area as the damproofing.
PART 3 EXECUTION:
3.10 Surface Conditions:
A. Inspection:
1. Inspect work of other trades and verify such work is
complete to the point where this installation may
commence.
SEC110N 07160 -BITUMINOUS DAMPROFFING
Section 07160 - Bituminous Damproffing - Page 1 of 1
2. Verify that damproofng may be Installed In accordance
with original design and manufacturer's recommenda-
lions.
B. Discrepancies:
1. In event of discrepancy, notify Architect
2. Do not proceed with installation until discrepancies have
been resolved.
3.20 Application:
A. Preparation: Prepare surfaces to receive damproofing com-
plying with manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Apply demarcating In accordance with manufacturer's recom-
mendations.
C. Cover all areas where damproofing is required to prevent
moisture penetration.
END OF SECTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.10 Related Documents:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract Including
General and Supplementary Conditions and Division - 1
specification sections. apply to work of this section.
1 20 Description of Work:
A. Extent of insulation work as shown drawings and indicated
by provisions of this section.
1.30 Schedule of Work: The extent of each type of insulation Is shown
on the drawings or herein specified. Locations of various types
shall be as follows:
A Attic Space Below Roof Dec.: Batt insulation of a thickness
as indicated on plans and details.
B. Exterior Wells: 6 thick thermal Insulation (foil faced).
C Restroom Walls: 3 1/2' Sound attenuation Insulation.
1.40 Quality Assurance:
A. Thermal Conductivity: Thickness indicated are for thermal
conductivity (k -value at 75 F or 24C) specified far each
material. Where insulation is identified by 'R' value, provide
thickness required to achieve indicated value.
B. Fire and Insurance Rating: Comply with fire- resistance,
flammability and Insurance ratings indicated, and comply
with regulations as interpreted by goveming authorities.
150 Submittals:
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product specifications
and installation instructions for each type of Insulation and
vapor barrier matenal required.
1.60 Product Handling:
A. General Protection: Protect insulations from physical
damage and from becoming wet, soiled, or covered with Ice
or snow. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for
handling, storage and protection during installation.
B. Protection for Plastic Insulation: Do not expose to sunlight
except to extent necessary for period of installation and
concealment.
C. Protect Against Ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic
Insulating materials to project site ahead of installation time.
Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as
rapidly as possible In each area of work
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.10 Materials:
A. Glass Fiber Blanket/Batt Insulation: Inorganic (nonasbestos)
fibers formed with binders into resilient flexible blankets or
semi -rigid belts; FS H1- 1-521, TO as indicated, densities
of not less than 0.5 Ib. per cu. ft for glass fiber units and not
less than 2.5 Ib. per cub. ft for mineral wool units, k -valve of
SECTION 07200 - INSULATION
3 20
0.
Section 07200 - Insulation - Page 1 of 2
0 27; manufacturors standard lengths and widths as required to
coordinate with spaces to be insulated; types as follows:
1. Provide Type 111 reflective vapor barrier faced units with
integral nailing flanges; aluminum foil barrier with rating
of 0.5 perms, other face (V any) with rating greater than
5.0 perms.
B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with
requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be
Incorporated in the work Include, but are not limited to, the
following:
Certain -Teed Products Corp.; Valley Forge, PA
Clecon Inc.; Cleveland, OH
Manville Bldg. Materials Corp.; Denver, CO
Mizell Bros Co.; Atlanta, GA
Owens - Corning Fiberglass Corp.; Toledo, OH
C, Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Type recommended by
Insulation manufacturer, and complying with lire resistance
requirements.
D. Mechanical Anchors: Type and size shown or, if not shown, as
recommended by insulation manufacturer for type of application
and condition of substrate.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.10 Inspection and Preparation:
A. Installer must examine substrates and conditions under which
insulation work is to be performed, and must notify Contractor
In writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with
insulation work until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer.
B. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulations or vapor
barriers, including removal of projecbons which might puncture
vapor bamers.
Installation
Comply with manufacturer's instructions for particularconditions
of installation in each case. If printed Instructions are not
available or do not apply to project conditions, consult
manufacturer's technical representative for specific
recommendations before proceeding with work.
8 Extend Insulation full thickness as shown over entire area to be
insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions, and fill voids
with Insulation. Remove projections which interfere with
placement.
C.
D.
Apply a single layer of insulation of required thickness, unless
othenwlse shown or required to make up toad thickness.
Set foil faced units with foil to warm side In summer of
construction, except as otherwise shown. Do not obstruct
ventilation spaces, except for firestopping.
P. Stuff blanket/batt insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavity
spaces where shown.
3.30 Protection
A. Protect installed insulation and vapor barriers from harmful
weather exposures and from possible physical abuses, where
possible by nondelayed Installation of concealing work or,
where that is not possible, by temporary covering or
enclosure. Installer shall advise Contractor of exposure
hazards, including possible sources of detenoration and fire
hazards.
END OF SECTION
Section 07200 - Insulation - Page 2 of 2
PART 1 GENERAL:
1.01 Work Included:
A. Erectors Qualifications:
1. Erection of the formed mead roofing. and accessories
shall be preformed by one of the following.
a Roofing manufacturer's crew.
b. Erectors authorized by the manufacturer as
trained and qualified to erect the manufacturer's
product. In this case, the manufacturer shall
inspect the work and certify its correctness.
e Design Criteria
1. The formed metal roofing shall be be the product of a
manufacturer who Is regularly engaged in the
fabrication of metal panels. All materials shall be new,
unused, free from defects and of American
manufacturer.
2. The following standards and criteria (of most recent
issue) shall be used where applicable in the structural
design of the roofing and wall panels covered by this
specification.
a 'Recommended Design Practices Manual" Metal
Budding Manufacturer Association.
b. 'Steel Construction Manual' American Institute of
Steel Construction.
c. 'Cold Formed Steel Design Manuel" American
Iron and Steel Institute.
d. "Code of Welding in Building Construction ",
American Welding Society.
3. Design Loads:
a The basic design loads shall include live and
wind loads in addition to dead load. All other
design load, whether they be of static dynamic or
Idnetic nature, shall be considered as auxiliary
loads.
b. Vertical Uve loads. Roof covering shall be
designed for either 50 psf uniform distnbuted or
a 200 pound concentrated (point) load (over
1 k1' area) located at center of maximum roofing
(panels) span. The most severe conditions shall
govem. All the above loads to be in addition to
the applicable dead loads and shall be applied
to the honzontal project of the roof.
Deflection: Roof panels shall not exceed 1)180
for the specified loading.
Wind loads: The root construction shall carry an
Underwriter's Laboratories Consimction (Uplift)
rating of not less than Class 90. The installation
is based on U. L construction No. 201.
C. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies:
1. The following criteria shall be applicable.
a Underwnters Laboratories, Inc.
1.03 Submittals:
d.
SECTION 07410A - TENNESSEE 'V' METAL ROOFING
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with Section
01340
B. installation Methods: Submit two copies of manufacturer's
recommended Installation method showing all requirements
for blocking and bracing.
Section 07410A • Tennesse'V Metal Roofing Page 1 of 2
C. Certification:
1. All bidders must submit with their bid
proposal, a letter from the metal panel
manufacturer certifying that the roofing system
proposed will be fumished to meet or exceed
all above design load criteria
1.04 Guarantee:
A. Coverage: The manufacturer shall guarantee that the coating
system will protect the substrate against perforation and loss of
structural qualities fora period of 20 years. The manufacturer
shall also guarantee that for a period of 10 year: the coating
system will not change color more than 5 N B.S. units as
determined by ASTM 02244-78, that the coating will not crack
peel or otherwise lose adhesion (the term "crack. does not
Include minute fracturing which may occur during fabrication),
and the coating will not chalk in excess of sting 38 as defined
by ASTM D659.74.
6. Manufacturer's Performance: The manufacturer will Issue an
agreement assunng the Owner that the manufacturer will make,
at its own cost and expense, any repairs of damage to the roof
as required above or as required to maintain the roof watertight
due to ordinary wear and tear of the elements.
1.05 Product Handling:
A. Protection:
1. Protect roof and wall panels before, during and alter
Installation.
2. Protect installed work of other trades
B. Replacements: In event of damage, make necessary
replacements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS:
2.01 Metal Panels: Type 1
A. Material: ASTM A366 of 26 gage (minimum) steel; chemically
cleaned and hot -dipped galvanized ASTM A525 G90.
8. Profile: Tennessee V."
C. Finish: Galvalume
2 02 Accessories:
A. Materials: Provide all accessories required including neoprene
closures, flashing, sealants, etc. Material to match roof panels
with ASTM A525 G90 zinc coating.
B. Finish: Finish and coat to match roof panel.
C. Fascias, Trim and Scuppers: 24 gage.
2.03 Fabrication:
A. Comply with dimensions, profile limitations, gauges and
fabneafion details shown and, if not shown, provide standard
product fabrication.
B. Fabricate components of the system in factory, ready for field
assembly.
C. Fabricate components and assemble units to comply with
performance requirements specified.
D. Apply specified finishes in conformance with manufacturer's
standards and according to manufacturer's instruction s.
2.04 Roof Openings:
A. Round openings, 12 diameter or smaller to be flashed and
sealed to roof panels with •Decktite molded plastic gashing.
Install per manufacturer's recommendations. Manufacturer.
Buddex (800) 323 - 3333.
B. Roof openings, larger than 17, round or square, shall be
framed with a welded metal base. The base shall be
supported by the roof structure and/or header framing if
required. The base shall have a minimum projection of 8'
above the weather surface of the roof and the configuration
of the flanges shall match the roof panel The
flange - to-panel Joint shall be sealed with a non - hardening
sealant and fastened in such a manner to provide complete
support and weather tightness. Finish and color to match
panels.
PART 3 EXECUTION:
301 Surface Conditions:
A. Inspection:
1. Inspect Installed work of other trades and venfy that
such work is complete to a point where this work may
commence.
2. Verify that installation may be made in accordance with
approved Shop Drawings and manufacturer's
instrucuona
8. Discrepancies:
1. In event of discrepancy, notify Architect.
2. Do not proceed with installation until discrepancies
have been resolved.
3 02 Installation:
A. Install where indicated, anchonng all components firmly in
place in complete accordance with approved Shop Drawings
and the manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Replace all panels damaged as a result of installers failure to
comply with manufacturer's instructions.
END OF SECTION
Section 07410A - Tennesse 'V' Metal Roofing Page 2 of 2
PART 1
GENERAL'
1.01 Work Included:
SECTION 07410B - STANDING SEAM METAL ROOFING
A. Erectors Ouekficadons:
1. Erection of the formed metal roofing, and accessories
shall be preformed by one of the following:
a Roofing manufacturer's crew.
b. Erectors authonzed by the manufacturer as
trained and qualified to erect the manufacturer's
product Erector shall have at least (2) years
experience applying these type matenals with
successful completion of projects of similar
scope. The manufacturer shall Inspect the work
and certify its correctness.
B Design Criteria
1. The formed metal roofing shall be the product of a
manufacturer who is regularly engaged in the
fabrication of metal panels. All materials shall be new.
used, free from defects and of American
manufacturer.
2. The following standards and criteria (of most recent
Issue) shall be used where applicable in the structural
design of the roofing and wall panels covered by this
specification.
a. "Recommended Design Practices Manual" Metal
Building Manufacturer Association.
b. "Steel Construction Manual" American Institute of
Steel Construction.
c. "Cold Formed Steel Design Manual" American
Iron and Steel Institute.
d. "Code of Welding in Building Construction ",
American Welding Society.
3. Design Loads:
a. The basic design loads shall Include live and
wind loads in addition to dead Toad. All other
design load, whether they be of static dynamic or
kinetic nature, shall be considered as auxiliary
bads.
b. Vertical Live Loads: Root covering shall be
designed for either 50 psi uniform distributed or
a 200 pound concentrated (point) load (over a
15,1' area) located at center of maomum roofing
(panels) span. The most severe conditions shall
govem. All the above loads to be in addition to
the applicable dead bads and shall be applied
to the horizontal project of the roof.
c. Deflection: Roof panels shall not exceed 1/180
for the specified loading.
d. Wind loads: The roof construction shall carry an
Underwriter's Laboratories Construction (Uplift)
rating of not less than Class 90. The installation
is based on U. L. construction No. 201.
C. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies:
1. The following criteria shall be applicable:
e. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
1.03 Submittals:
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit Shop Drawings In accordance with Section
01340
B. Installation Methods: Submit two copies of manufacturer's
C. Certification:
1.
1 04 Guarantee:
Section 074108 - Standing Seam Metal Roofing Page 1 of 2
recommended installation method showing all requirements for
blocking and bracing.
All bidders must submit with their bid
proposal, a letter from the metal panel
manufacturer certifying that the roofing system
proposed will be furnished to meet or exceed
all above design load criteria.
A. Coverage: The manufacturer shall guarantee that the coating
system will protect the substrate against perforation and loss of
structural qualifies for a period of 20 years. The manufacturer
shall also guarantee that fora period of 10 years the coating
system will not change color more than 5 N.B.S. units as
determined by ASTM 02244 -78, that the coating will not crack
peel or otherwise lose adhesion (the term "crack" does not
include minute fractunng which may occur during fabrication),
and the coating will not chalk In excess of rating 48 as defined
by ASTM D659 -74.
B. Manufacturer's Performance: The manufacturer will issue an
agreement assuring the Owner that the manufacturer will make,
at its own cost and expense, any repairs of damage to the roof
as required above or as required to maintain the roof watertight
due to ordinary wear and tear of the elements.
C. A two (2) year weathertightness guarantee is required from
panel applicator.
1.05 Product Handling:
A. Protection:
1. Protect roof and wall panels before, during and after
installation.
2. Protect installed work of other trades.
8. Replacements: In event of damage, make necessary
replacements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS:
2.01 Metal Roofing System shall be equal to AEP -SPAN, Dallas,
Texas.
2.02 Metenals:
A. Profile. SN18
B. Gauge: 24 gauge steel
C Finish: All standard 24 -gauge steel Kynar colors. Color as
selected by Architect
D. fleshings, Closures, Trim, etc.: Fabricate of same material,
gauge and finish as adjacent panels.
E. Fasteners: Shall be as per manufacturer's recommendations.
U1.90 Rated.
2.03 Delivery
A. Delivery of material shall be made only after suitable facilities
for its storage and protection are available at the site
B. Upon receipt of preformed metal panels, 0atsheets, fleshings
and panel accessories; installer shall examine each shipment
for damage and for completeness of consignment
2.04 Storage
A. Store matenals out of the weather, in clean. dry place. One
end of each container should be slightly elevated to allow
any moisture to run off.
B. Panels and /or fleshings with strippable film must not be
stored in areas exposed to sunlight
C. Care shall be taken to prevent contact with any substance
which may cause a discoloration in the finish dunng storage.
D Store materials to provide ventilation and prevent bending,
abrasion, or twisting.
2.05 Handling
A. Care should be taken to avoid gouging, scratching or
denting
8. Do not allow traffic on completed roof. If required, provide
cushioned walk boards.
C. Protect installed products from damage caused by foreign
objects and adjacent construction until completion of project.
206 Fabrication:
A. Comply with dimensions, profile limitations, gauges and
fabrication details shown and, if not shown, provide standard
product fabrication.
B. Fabricate components of the system In factory, ready for field
assembly.
C Fabricate components and assemble units to comply with
performance requirements specified
D. Apply specified finishes in conformance with manufacturer's
standards and according to manufacturer's Instruction s.
2.07 Roof Openings:
A. Round openings, 12" diameter or smaller to be gashed and
sealed to roof panels with •Decktite molded plastic flashing.
Install per manufacturer's recommendations. Manufacturer:
Buddex (800) 323 - 3333.
8. Roof openings, larger than 17, round or square, shall be
framed with a welded mead base. The base shall be
supported by the roof swcture and/or header framing if
required. The base shall have a minimum projection of a•
above the weather surface of the roof and the configuration
of the flanges shall match the roof panel. The
flange - to-panel joint shall be sealed with a non - hardening
sealant and fastened in such a manner to provide complete
support and weather tightness. Finish and color to match
panels.
PART 3 EXECUTION:
3.01 Connecting Work
A The applicator shall examine surfaces on which his work is to
be applied, and shall notify the architect In writing If not suitable
to receive his work. Work on any surface shall constitute
acceptance of this surface by the installer.
1. Inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such
work is complete to a point where this work may
commence
2. Verity that installation may be made in accordance with
approved Shop Drawings and manufacturer's instructions.
B. Discrepancies:
1. In event of discrepancy, notify Architect
2. Do not proceed with installation until discrepancies have
been resolved.
3.02 Field Measurements.
A Take field measurements to vent' or supplement dimensions
indicated prior to fabrication of metal panels.
3.03 Installation:
Section 0741013 - Standing Seam Metal Roofing Page 2 of 2
A. Install where indicated. anchonng all components fimty In place
in complete accordance with approved Shop Drawings and the
manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Replace all panels damaged as a result of installers failure to
comply with manufacturer's Instructions.
C. Workmanship shall conform to standards set forth in the
architectural sheet metal manual as published by SMACNA.
D. Panels shall be installed in such a manner that, horizontal lines
are true and level, and vertical lines are plumb.
E. All starter and edge fleshings shall be installed prior to panels.
F. Do not allow panels or trim to come Into contact with dissimilar
materials.
304 Touch Up
A Only minor scratches and abrasions will be allowed to be
touched up. Any other damaged material shall be replaced.
3.05 Clean Up
A Leave work areas clean. Tree from grease, finger marks and
stains.
B. Remove scrap and debns from surrounding areas and grounds.
END OF SECTION
PART1 GENERAL
1.10 Applicable provisions of 'General Conditions' govem work under
this Section.
2.10 The Contractor. Provide all items, articles, matenals, operations, or
methods listed, mentioned, or scheduled on the Drawings and /or
herein, Including all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals
necessary and required for their completion.
3.10 Work Included:
A. Furnish labor and matenals to complete sheet metal work
indicated as specified herein, or both.
PART2 PRODUCTS
1.10 Acceptable Manufacturers:
A. Manufacturer and Type: "Color lead' pre - panted metal - 24
gauge galvanized steel (Commercial quality, extra smooth)
primed and finished one side with fluompoymer coating 1.0
+ .01 mil total dry film thickness, Duranar 200 by PPG
Industries, Inc., as manufactured by Vincent Brass &
Aluminum Company. Color as selected by Architect
B. Substitutions: Items of same funcbon and performance are
acceptable as approved by Architect
2.10 Accessory Materials and Components:
A. Fasteners: concealed hook stop or clip type; of same
maenal as fleshings; sized to suit application.
B. Reglets: recessed galvanized steel; face and ends covered
with plastic tape.
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a Springlak Flashing System Type "MA "; Fry Reglet
Corporation.
b. Items of same function end performance are
acceptable as approved by Architect
C. Solder and Flux: type recommended for materials being
used.
D. Plastic Cement cutback asphaltic type. FS SS- C- 00153a
E. Bituminous Paint acid and alkali resistant type; black color.
F. Sealant o n e component polysulphlde, conforming to FS
TT- S- 00230non- staining; non - bleeding; non - sagging; of
color selected by Architect/Engineer.
G. Sheet Metal: Galvanized steel, ASTM A -93, latest edition, for
finished sheets.
3.10 Fabrication:
A. Fonn sections square, true and accurate to size, Tree from
distortion and other defects detrimental to appearance or
performanco.
SECTION 07600 - SHEET METAL
B. Fonn sections In B foot lengths. Make allowances for expansion
at joints, Provide 6 wide joint covers at each joint. Install to
make allowances for expansion. Joint covers to chp on
continuous cleat over fascia material. Joint covers to match
color and material of fascia material.
C. Seams are to be flat lock type except comers. Fabricate
comers minimum 18 inches x 18 Inches, mitered, soldered or
welded, and sealed as one piece.
D. Wipe and wash clean, soldered joints, to remove traces of flux
Immediately after soldering.
E. Hem exposed edges of flashing on underside 1/2 inch.
F Fabricate fleshings to allow toe to extend minimum 2 Inches
horizontally over roofing gravel, and return brake edge.
G. Fonn plastic pans watertight with minimum 2 -1/2 inch upstand
and 4 inch flanges. Form pans minimum 6 inches wider than
member passing through roof membrane.
H. Back paint fleshings with bituminous paint where expected to be
in contact with cementitious materials or dissimilar metals.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.10 Supply fleshings to respective trade for installation. Coordinate
their correct placement.
3.20 Secure fleshings In place using specified type fasteners Use
exposed fasteners in locations approved by Archltect/Englneer.
When using exposed fasteners, they are to be of same finish as
(lashings.
3.30 Apply sealing compound at junction of metal fleshings and
asphalt lest fleshings.
3.40 Lock seams and end joints At fleshings tight in place. Make
comers square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines
accurate to profiles.
3.60 Install plastic pans. All pans with plastic cement
3.60 Counter -gash mechanical and electrical items projecting
through membrane roofing.
3.70 Set splash pads under downspouts and scuppers, Including
those provided by Mechanical.
3.80 Schedule:
Section 07600 - Sheet Metal - Page 1 of 2
A Supply and install sheet meta fabrications listed herein,
complete with anchorage and attachments necessary for
installation. All sight exposed fleshings and sheet shall be
fabricated from prefinished sheet metal. Sight exposed backing
of prefinished sheet metal shall not be allowed.
B. Roof Base Flashing and Counter Flashing: Install with all joints
lapped 6 inches In plastic cement and secured to bacldng with
galvanized sheet metal screws at three points each joint
C. Pitch Pan: Fabricate with one Inch minimum clearance from
penetration item and 4 inch flanges x 3 inch minimum collar.
D. Roof Penetration Flashing: Fabricate with one inch minimum
clearance from penetration item and 6 Inch flanges x 8 inch
minimum collar. Install rain cap with draw band and sealant
closure at the top.
E. Expansion Joint Back -up: Provide a minimum of 12 Inches
of sheet metal back -up behind all expansion and
contractions joints; embed fleshings In plastic cement
Fxpanamn pints shall be located at 12 feet o.c. or as shown
on the Drawing.
F. Gravel Stop, Wall Copings, and Parapet Cap Fleshings:
3.90 Workmanship:
1. Matenal: Pre - finished sheetrnetal, of design and width
detailed.
2. Secure fabrication bedded In plastic cement to
blocking. At joints, bed fabrication in plastic cement
and secure on side to backing strip by soldering solid.
Do not use screws or nails on sight exposed lace of
fabrication.
Lower edge of fabrication shall be securely hooked to
hook stnp secured to wood blocking with galvanized
sheet metal screws at 8 inches o.c.
G. Thru -Wall Scupper. Install in plastic cement prior installing
membrane roofing flood coat
H. Refer to Drawings for additional items to be provided under
this section.
A. General: Surfaces to be covered with sheet metal, free from
detects of every description. Clean off dirt rubbish and
other foreign matenals before sheet metal work is started.
Drive projecting nails flush with roof boarding.
B. Tinning: Tin edges on both sides of metal sheets to be
soldered for 14/2• width.
C. Soldering: Solder slowly with well heated coppers. Heat
sheets thoroughly. Completely sweat solder through full
searn width. Use ample solder. Apply 1 of evenly flowed
solder on seam. Solder seams a second time on slope
steeper then 45 degrees.
D. Cross Folded Loose Seams: Where metal Is folded In one
direction, than folded at right angles to first fold, I.e., slip
joints of base fleshings, expansion joints, and similar cross
folded joints, slit folded portion of copper at cross folds,
solder patch of metal over slit to avoid binding at cross fold
3.95 Wall Flashing:
A. Extend Into wall 4' through first course of masonry and tum
up 1/2' back and down outside as required by flashing detail.
Use 26 ga Galvanized iron.
B. Where required: Install wall flashing in masonry walls or
parapet for connection to following items and elsewhere as
indicated.
1.
2.
Base flashing on built -up roofs.
Under all stone coping, where indicated, or where
height above roof will permit Installation.
C. Reglets: Install for metal flashing In concrete where
Section 07600 - Sheet Metal - Page 2 of 2
Indicated. Regleb Closed friction type, made from 16 oz. CRC;
join endsof each lengthtogether by ?locking tongue forming
lap slip joint Fasten regiet to concrete forms with special
double- headed copper nods spaced 12' on centers. Use not
lesathan 10 oz. copper msertflashing when concealed; use 16
• copper where exposed. Insert flashing full slot depth;
• ure by indenting reglet face with dull pointed center punch
every 12'.
D. Sill and Head Fleshings; Install sill and head flashing where
Indicated. Form flashing (to provide mechanical bond In mortar
bed In three directions) vertically, laterally, and horizontally.
E. At all sills, as detailed, install waterproofing course, consisting
of 2 piles of saturated waterproofing fabric and three full trowel
coatings of plastic Elasti cement, applied alternately.
Waterproofing course shall be continuous and extend to within
one Inch of outside wall under sill and tumed up and cemented
to masonry back at sill. .411 end laps shall be not less than 3'
and each succeeding layer shall break joints with underlying
layer. Fabric shall be applied without wrinkles or buckles, and
all trowel coatings shall be smooth and full. Care shall be taken
not to Injure the waterproofing course either during application
or after completion. Fabric and cement shall be as
manufactured by Barrett Division, Allied Chemical and Dye
Corporation, 40 Rector Street, New York, New York 10006, or
approved equal. Entire installation shall be in strict accordance
with manufacturer's recommendations. One ounce
copper- backed Sisal -Kraft may be used in lieu of asphalt felt
but it shall be cemented at sides and ends as descnbed for
felts.
F. Flashing of pipes through roofs: Flashing furnished by
plumbing contractor.
G. Provide clearance between vent pipe and flashing to permit free
movement due to expansion, contraction. Build In flashing on
pitched roofs with roofing materials. Mop in fleshings on
built -up roofing with roofing plies.
END OF SECTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.10 This Section Includes, but is not limited to, Caulking, Sealing, and
other related Items necessary to complete projects as indicated by
the Documents unless specifically excluded.
1.20 Specified Elsewhere
A
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
1.30 Standards
Miscellaneous Requirements
Temporary
Rough Carpentry
Millwork
Doors and Sash
Weatherstripping
Glazing
Finish Painting
A. Meet requirements and recommendations of applicable
portions of Standards listed.
140 Examining
B. o not start caulking until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
C. Proceeding with installabon of caulking will be construed as
evidence of acceptance of conditions under which work will
be done.
1. American Society for Testing and Materials. ASTM
2. Federal Specificobons FF TTS 00230
3. United States of America Standards Institute USASI
(ASA)
A. Examine surfaces that are to be caulked. Report
unsatisfactory conditions.
1.50 Protecting
A. Handle caulking items to avoid injury to persons and to
avoid damage to materials or to work In place. Satisfactonly
repair or remove and replace work that has been damaged.
B. Protectadjacentsurfaces from damage, soiling, and adhering
of compound.
C. Protect caulked surfaces from scratching, scraping, and
puncturing.
1.60 Delivery and Storing
A Deliver packaged materials to site in manufacturer's original
unopened, labeled containers.
B. Arrange deliveries to provide sufficient quantifies 10 permit
conbnuity of any phase of work.
C. Store and handle caulking items to prevent damage to
materials or work in place.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
SECTION 07920 - CAULKING
210
B.
C.
D.
Sealant Materials
Sealant: polysulphide base, single component, chemical
tiring; conforming to requirements of FS 11. 5.230, Type II,
Class A; Shore A hardness of minimum 15 and maximum 50;
non- sudning and non- bleeding; color as selected.
Sealant polysulphide base, two component, chemical curing;
Type 2 - non - sagging; conforming to requirements of FS
TT-S-227, Class A; Shore A hardness of minimum 15 and
maximum 50; non - staining and non - bleeding; color as selected.
Sealant Silicone fuse, single component solvent curing;
conforming to requirements of FS 1TS1543. Class A; Shore A
hardness of maximum 50; non - staining; color as selected.
Sealant Acrylic emulsion base, single component, capable of
withstanding movement of up to 7.5 percent of joint width and
satisfactorily applied throughout a temperature range of 40 to 60
degrees F; Shore A hardness of maximum 60; non - staining;
non- bleeding; non - sagging; color as selected.
2.20 Accessories
A. Primer: non- stalning type, recommended by sealant
manufacturer to suit application.
B. Joint Cleaner noncorrosive and non - staining type.
recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint
forming materials.
C. Backup: Shall be Dow Ethafoam SB Sealant backer rod or
Minicel backer rod of proper size for the condition where it is 10
be used. Oakum or rope fiber will not be permitted.
0. Bond Breaker: pressure sensitive tape recommended by
sealant manufacturer to suit application.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.10 Preparing
Section 07920 - Caulking - Page 1 of 2
A. Properly prepare joints and surfaces to receive caulking
compound. Mask or protect as necessary to prevent smearing
of adjacent surfaces.
8. Remove dust, moisture, rust grease, glaze, and loose materials
that could interfere with adhesion of compound.
C. Rake joints as necessary to obtain minimum of 1/4 for caulking
Maintain caulking width of not more than 1" or as shown on the
Drawings.
3.20 Installing
A. Pack joints more than 3/4" deep and joints not propedy backed
with back -up to within 3/4" of adjacent surface.
B. Prime surfaces to be caulked by applying primer as
recommended by manufacturer of caulking compound.
C. Apply compound with sufficient pressure to completely fill voids.
Leave joint slightly concave. Caulk joints to be completely
weatheNght and securely adhered at both sides.
D. Complete joint caulking before finish painting is started.
Remove excess compound and clean compound from
adjacent surfaces.
6. Do not apply caulking compound when surrounding
temperature Is below 40 degrees F. or when excessive
moisture Is present.
3.30 Areas To Be Caulked
A. Around all doors, windows. exterior openings, soffits.
expansion joints, control joints, Wm moldings, and elsewhere
as noted, in outside walls, and at intoner walls and ceilings
and elsewhere, by packing with Ethafoam rod where crack t
is large enough and then finish with Butyl Rubber Caulking
compound applied with a gun thoroughly and positively
filling all crocks around frames and joints. Where crack is
too small to use back -up material, remove molds and replace
after buttering the back completely with caulking compound.
Caulking shall provide a thoroughly weathereght condi0on
around the perimeter of the frame and wall openings or
joints. Atter application of caulking, Contractor shell smooth
the face of caulking and eliminate all ridges created by
caulking gun. Keep caulking from smearing over adjacent
surfaces. Caulk all Interior and exterior joints between
precast parts or panels, or elsewhere as required.
B. Workmanship shall be done by experienced mechanics only.
Work that Is rough or messy shall be removed and replaced
w. hout additional cost to the Owner.
3.40 Cleaning
A. Remove soil, stain, and extraneous materials caused by
caulking from adjacent surfaces.
B. Repair or replace damaged or defective work. Remove and
replace work that cannot be satisfactonty cleaned.
3.50 Schedule
A. Type "1": Polysulphlde base, single or double component
sealant all exterior applications. and interior sight exposed
applications subject to movements.
B. Type 2": Silicone base sealant: glazing applications and
special applications, such as sealant bed under thresholds.
C. Type "3 ": Acrylic emulsion base sealant interior sight
exposed applications not subject to movement, and for use
at component assembly for appearance correction, joint
closures, etc.
3 60 Guarantee
A. This Contractor shall and hereby does warrant and
guarantee all work and materials to be free from defects for
a period of two years from date of find acceptance, and
further agrees that he will at his own expense repair and
replace all such damaged work and all other work damaged
thereby which becomes defective during the term of
Guaranty- Warranty, except that Guaranty- Warranty will not
apply 10 defects caused by failure or work of others, if such
defects were impossible to detect at time of examination or
work
END OF SECTION
Section 07920 - Caulking - Page 2 of 2
PART 1 GENERAL
1.10 WORK INCLUDED
A. Standard type steel doors with seamless faces. •
B. Standard pressed steel frames and &delight frames.
1.20 RELATED WORK
A. Section 08700: Finish hardware for doors and frames.
8. Section 08800: Glass and glazing for doors and sidelights.
1.30 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. SDI:Steel Door Institute, 712 Lakewood Center North, 14600
Detroit Avenue, Cleveland, Ohio 44107, U.S A.
1. SDI - 100-83 - Recommended Specifications;
Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
B. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials, 1916
Race Street Philadelphia, Pennsylvania 19103, U.S A.
1. A 366-72 • Steel Sheet Carbon, Cold - Rolled,
Commer ciat Quality.
1.40 SUBMITTALS
A. For submittal procedures refer to Section 01340.
8. Shop drawings:
1. Indicate general construction, configurations,
joint ing methods, reinforcements, anchorage
methods, hard ware locations and installation
details.
C. Product data:
1. Submit 2 copies of manufacturer's specifications
for fabncaoon, shop painting. and installation
Instruc tions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.10 Manufacturers acceptable contingent upon products' compliance
with the specifications:
A. Amweld Building Products Division, American Welding &
Manufacturing Company, Plant Street , Niles, Ohio 44446,
U.SA
8. Coco Corp., Fabricated Steel &Building Products, 5601 West
26th Street, Chicago, Illinois 60650, U.S.A.
C. Fenestra Division. Marmon Group, Inc., 4040 -T West 20th
Street Erie, Pennsylvania 16505, U.S.A.
D. Meeker Industries Inc., 6002A North Undgargh Boulevard,
Hazelwood, Missoun 63042 U.S.A.
E Overly Manufacturing Company, Hollow Metal Doors &
Frames, Overly Way,Greensburg, PenrtsyNania 15601, U.S.A.
F. Pioneer Industries, Division, Core Industries, Inc., 401
Washington Avenue, Carlstadt New Jersey 07072, U.S.A.
SECTION 08110 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames Page 1 of 2
G. Republic Builders Products Corporation, P.O. Box 47B-T,
McKenzie, Tennessee 38201, U.S.A.
H. Steelcndt Manufacturing Company, 9017 -T Blue Ash
Road, Cincinnati, Ohio 45242, U.S.A.
I. Trussbilt, Inc., 2575 Como Avenue, St. Paul, Minnesota
55108 U.S.A.
2 20 STEEL DOORS
A. Materiels and fabrication: SDI•100 except as amended in
this Section.
B. Interior doors: Grade II • Heavy -duty 1-3/4 inch, Model 3.
Facae sheets: Minimum 18 gauge ASTM A 366.
C. Exterior doors: Grade III • Heavy -duty 1.3/4 inch, Model
3. Face sheets: Minimum 16 gauge, galvanized ASTM A
525, G90 coating
2.30 FRAMES
A. Type: Welded frames. All exterior doors to have welded
frames.
B. Mortar guard boxes: Minimum 22 gauge; welded frames.
2 40 FABRICATION OF DOORS
A. Fabricate doors of seamless construction, 1-3/4 inch thick
B. Stiffen face sheets with fanned steal sections. Sound -
deaden with inorganic noncombustible material.
C. Use Insulating core In extenor doors.
D. Close top and bottom edges with continuous recessed
channel. Use additional flush closing channel at top
edges of exterior doors.
E. Reinforce and prepare doors to receive hardware. Refer
to Section 08700 for hardware requirements.
1. Mortise , reinforce, dnll and tap doors at the facto ty
for fully tempiated hardware only, inaccordance
with the approved hardware schedule and
templates provided by the hardware supplier.
Where surface- mounted hardware Is to be applied,
use reinforcing plates only; all drilling and tapping
will be done by hardware installer.
2. Minimum gauges for hardware reinforcing plates:
a. Hinge and pivot reinforcements: 7 gauge.
b. Reinforcements for lock face, gush bolts,
concealed holders, concealed or
surface- mounted closers: 12 gauge.
c. Reinforcements for all 'other surface- mounted
hardware: 16 gauge.
F. Fill surface depressions with metallic paste filler and grind
to smooth uniform finish.
G. Chemically treat surfaces and apply one coat of primer.
2.50 GLASS MOLDINGS AND STOPS
A. Where scheduled, provide frames with hollow metal moldings
to secure glass in accordance with glass opening sizes
shown on approved shop drawings. Glass specified In
Secs0on 08800.
B. Securely weld fixed moldings to the frames on the security
side.
C. Provide minimum 20 gauge steel loose stops with mitered
comer joints, secured to the framed opening by cadmium- or
zinc-coated countersunk screws. Snap -on attachments will
not be permitted.
2.60 FABRICATION OF FRAMES
A. For Interior openings fabricate of not less than 16 gauge
steel. ASTM A 366, for openings less than 48 Inches wide:
not less than 16 gauge steel for openings greater than 48
inches wide.
B. Accurately form and cut mitered comers of welded type
frames. Weld on inside surfaces. Grind welded Joints to
smooth uniform finish.
C. Accurately cope and securely weld butt faints of mullions
and transoms of glazed lights. Gnnd welded joints to
smooth uniform finish.
D.
E.
Provide stops of minimum 5/8 inch depth.
Reinforce and prepare frames toi receive hardware. Refer to
Section 08700 for hardware requirements.
1. Mortise. reinforce, drill and tap frames at the
factory for fully templated mortised hardware
only, In accordance with approved hardware
schedule and templates provided by the
hardware supplier. Where surface- mounted
hardware is to be applied, provide frames with
reinforcing plates only.
2. Minimum thickness of hardware reinforcing
plates:
Hinge and pivot reinforcements: 7 gauge, 1 -1/4
Inch x 10 Inch minimum size.
Strike reinforcements: 12 gauge.
Flush bolt reinforcements: 12 gauge.
Closer reinforcements: 12 gauge.
Reinforcements for surface - mounted hardware.
12 gauge.
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
F. Floor anchors: Minimum 16 gauge, weld Inside each jamb,
provide 2 holes at each jamb for floor anchorage.
G. Jamb anchors:
1. For frames In masonry walls provide adjustable
Jamb anchors of the T -strap type, not less than
16 gauge steel. Minimum number of anchors on
each jamb:
Frames up to 7 feet 6 inches height 3 anchors.
Frames 7 feet 6 inches to 8 feet 0 inches height
4 anchors.
(c) Reinforcements for surface - mounted hardware:
12 gauge.
2. For frames in metal stud partitions provide steel
anchors of suitable design, net less than 18
gauge thickness, welded inside each jamb as
follows:
Frames up to 7 feet 6 Inches height 4 anchors.
Frames 7 feet 6 inches to 8 feet 0 Inches height
5 anchors.
(aj
(b)
H. Frames over 4 feet 0 inches wide for isntallation In
masonry walls shall have an angle or channel stiffener,
not less than 12 gauge and not longer than the opening
width. welded Into the head at the factory. Such stiffeners
shall not be used as lintels or load- carrying members.
1 Fill surfasce depressions of steel frames with metallic
paste filler and grind to smooth finish.
J. Chemically treat surfaces and apply one coat of primer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.10 INSTALLATION
A. Install doom only when door closers and stop and holders
can be installed simultaneously for protection of doors.
B. Install doors and frames In accordancea with 001-100
except es ameended In this Section.
C. Instal steel doors plumb square, and with maximum
diagonal distortion of 1/16 Inch.
D.
E.
Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames Page 2 of 2
(0)
Frames over 8 feet 0 inches height 5 anchors
plus one additional for each 2 feet or fraction
thereof over 8 feet 0 inches.
3. Provide frames to be anchored to previously
placed concrete, masonry or structural steel with
anchors of suitable dosing as shown on approved
shop drawings.
Coordinate installation of glazing in frames.
Install frames plumb and square, in correct locations indi-
cated on drawings and with a maximum diagonal
distortion of 1/16 Inch. Ensure frames are anchored
securely and rigidly to adjacent construsetion.
F. Install interior galzed partitions with welded galls stops on
secunty side.
G. After installation, touch -up scratched or damaged
surfaces. For galbanized metal use type of primer
recommended for galvanized surfaces and for shop
coated items use coating Identical to that used for shop
coat
END OF SECTION
PART ONE GENERAL
1.10 Scope:
A. Furnish all Architectural woodwork shown on drawings and
specified herein. Architectural woodwork Includes all exterior
and Interior woodwork exposed to view in finished budding,
and Includes plywood, doore and high-pressure laminates.
Flush Doors, Stile and Rail Doors.
B. Work specified in other sections. Finish Carpentry
1.20 Quality Assurance
A. Standards:
1. The Quality Standards of the Architectural
Woodwork Institute shall apply and by reference
are hereby made a pad of this specification.
Any reference to Premium, Custom or Economy
in this specification shall be as defined in the
latest edition of the AWI Quality Standards.
2. Any Item not given a specific quality grade shall
be Custom grade as defined In the latest edition
of the AWI Quality Standards
B. Competence.
1. The approved woodwork manufacturer must have
a reputa tion for doing satisfactory work on time
and shall have successfully completed
comparable work The architect reserves the
right to approve the woodwork manufacturer
selected to furnish all of the woodwork.
1.30 Submittals:
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit shop drawings on all items of
architectural woodwork
B. Brochures:
1.
1.40 Field Dimensions:
1.50 Product Handling:
Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature of
spe malty Items not manulaoturered by the
architectural woodworker, as requested by the
architect
C. Samples:
1. Submit samples of each wood species which is
to re calve transparent finish at job site, as
requested by the architect
2. Submit finished samples of each finish to be
applied at factory.
A The woodwork manufacturer Is responsible for details and
dimensions not controlled by job conditions and shall show
on his shop drawings all required field measurements
beyond his control. The general contractor shall cooperate
to establish and maintain these field dimensions.
A. The woodwork manufacturer and the contractor shell be
jointly responsible to make certain that woodwork Is not
delivered until We building and slomge areas are sufficiently
SECTION 08210 - WOOD DOORS
Section 08210 - Wood Doors Page 1 of 2
dry so that the woodwork will not be damaged by excessive
changes in molsture content
PART IWO PRODUCTS: -
2.10 Architectural Flush Doors:
4, Interior Doors:
1. For Transparent Finish
a Faces - species and cut red oak - rotary sliced
b. AWI Grade Custom
2. For Opaque Finish
e. Faces_(mill option close grain hardwood
unless otherwise specified.)
b. AWI grade_ (mill option close grain hard-
wood unless otherwise specified.)
C. Prefittinf and Premachining:
1. Prefit doers at factory with tollerances
1/8" on each vertical edge
1 /8" on lop
1/2" on'bottom
Bevel lock edge of door (1/0" In 21
Provide radius edges at double acting doors if re qulred
by hardware design.
2. Machine doors nor hardware as required by
Hardware Schedule in bid documents. Hardware
Schedule by hardwire supplier wyll be furnished
bomplouvers, astragals and laminated overlays shall
be performed In conformance with the manufac-
turers' inspection service procedure and under lable
service.
F. Preparation for surface applied hardware, function holes
for mortise locks, holes for labeled viewers, a maximum
3/4" wood and composite door undercutting, and
protection plates may be performed at the job site.
FD and FD -1/2 hour labeled solid wood core doors
may be prepared In the field for fittings, hardware and
astragals.
2.70 Show Through:
PREFRTING CLEARANCES
Hinge edge - 1/8" clearanoa. Radius for double -acting
doors.
Lock edge - 1/8" clearance. Bevel 1/8" In 2". Radius for
double acting doors.
Meeting edges of pairs - 1/16" per leaf. Bevel 1/8" in 2".
Radius for double-acting doors.
Top - 1 /8" clearance.
Bottom - 1/8" from top of decorative floor covering.
1/4" from top of threshold, if any.
A. Stile, rail end core show - through (telegraphing) shall be
considered a defect when the face of the door varies from
a true plane in excess of 0.010 inch in any three inch
span. The selection of high gloss laminates of finishes
should be avoided, because they tend to accentuate
natural telegraphing.
GENERAL INFORMATION
2.80 Grade of Doors:
A. limited to premium and custom grades.
2.90 Fleshings:
A. If the woodworker is to gash the top of outswinging exterior
doom, it must be specified.
2.91 Edges of veneered stiles and rails (exposed to view) shall be of
same species as face veneer.
2.92 Standards:
A. In the absence of details or specifications to the contrary, the
following standards shall apply.
9. Minimum Material Thickness and Width:
1. Due to the wide venation in function and design
of specially fabricated stile and rail doom. the
details should be specific ea to component
dimensions.
PART THREE EXECUTION
3.10 Assembly Joinery
A. Subject to design consideration, connecting joints between
07 3 stiles, rails and mullions shall be mortised and
tenoned, or doweled and glued under pressure using Type
1 exterior glue on exterior doors. (Applicable in both
premium and Custom Grades.)
1. Joining, Stiles, Rails & Mullions: Joints to be
mortised and tenoned or doweled. Glued under
pressure (using type 1 glue for exenor doors).
2. Stiles, Rails & Mullions: If hardwood other than
mahogany construction 9arne as for premium
grade. If softwood or mahogany, members may
be solid lumber. My member exceeding 7 -1/4"
may be glued up.
3. Panels:
a. Raised Panels. Exceeding 10" in width
shall be composed of laminations with face
lamination of sufficient thickness to contain
depth of raise. Panels 10" wide or less may
be solid or glued for width lumber.
b. Flat Panels. Minimum thickness as outlined
in 1400-0-1.
320 Profiles:
Stiles, Rads. Mullions 1-3/8"
Raised Panels 1 -1/8'
Flat Panels 318 " -3 sq.fLor less
1/2" -over 3 sq.fL
Veneer for Stiles & Rails 1 /10"heforesandmg
Veneer for Panel Product Industry Standards
A. Moulded profiles (sticking) shall be at the opodon of the
woodworker, unless full size detail is shown. All profiles
must be capable of being coped.
8. Preservative Treatment:
1. All exeenor windows shall be treated with a wood
preservative In accordance with 1001 -Sj-4 of
these standards.
Section 08210 - Wood Doom Page 2 of 2
C. Surface Smoothness Requirements:
Surfaces Custom Grade
Lumber
Panel
D Tightness of plant assembled joints:
Test for Custom
Maximum Gap Allowed in 20% of Joint Length
Stile & Rail, Flat Miter
& Similar Joints
Maximum Gap
END OF SECTION
Sanded with not coarser than 120
grit cross scratches exceeding
1/4" not permitted.
Sanded with not coarser than 120
grub cross scratches exceeding
1 /4" not permitted.
.015" x 5" and not more than
4 openings allowed In any
door face.
Stiles & Rails No venation permitted
Mouldings, beads, rims, etc. .015"
E. Warp:
1. Warp Is any distortion In the door itself, and is does
not refer to the door in relation to the frame or the
jamb in which it is hung. Warp is measured by
placing a straight edge _r a taut string on the
c /ncave face and determining the maximum
distance from straight edge or string to door face.
Door Thickness Door Size
1-3/4" 3)6" x 7'-0" or smaller
or thicker larger than 3'- 8'x -D"
Under manufacturers warranties, action on any
claim for warp or telegraphing defects may be
deferred at the option of the maNufacturer for a
period not to exceed twelve months after prOJect
completion to permit doom to acclimate to tempera-
ture and humidity condition.
PART 1 GENERAL
1.02 OUALITY ASSURANCE
1.03 SUBMITTALS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Overhead Doors
B. Electric Operator and Controls
PART 3 - EXECUTION
SECTION 08362 - SECTIONAL METAL OVERHEAD DOORS
1.01 DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK A. Install overhead door to fit tightly within the opening provided.
Weatherstrip as required to meet the air infiltration limits specified.
A. Furnish and Install Sectional Metal Overhead Doors as shown on
the drawings and descnbed herein B. Test controls for proper operation. Adjust tension and limit controls
as required.
A. Fumish the Owner with a one year warranty for the workmanship END OF SECTION
and matenals of Sectional Doors.
A. Submit shop drawings and obtain Architect's approval prior to
manufacturing. Shop drawings shall show full site sections of
doors, thiclmess of metal, details of construction, hardware.
methods of anchoring and connection to adjacent work. Shop
drawings shall be submitted to accordance with the
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS.
1. Steel Sectional Upward Acting Doors at dock shall be Series
418 by Overhead Door Corporation, or equal. Sections
rolled of 16 gauge one coated steel, prime painted on both
sides, ribbed and grooved for strengthening. Overhead
doors shall be insulated with 162 inch polystyrene
(R= 7.352).
2. Door weather stripping to be integral with door. Head and
lamb to have neoprene foam with adhesive back and 3.0 mil
polyester surface. Standard extruded bottom seal shall be
attached across the bottom edge of the door, designed to
limit air leakage. Weather stripping shall provide penmeter
sealing to a maximum of 2.4 CF per loot of jamb at wind
velocity of 25 MPH.
3. Doors are to be furnished complete with all hardware
Including side tracks. hinges, rollers, counterbalance and five
pin tumbler lock Operation shell be electric with manual
override by chain hoist
1. Electric Motor - Overhead Series FL 1/3 HP 115/230V 3
phase totally enclosed Instant reversing, double V.beltdriven,
trolley mounted.
2. Controls - Push button station with provisions for chain and
sprocket override. Push button controls shall have (open,
close, and stop positions and shall fight up when activated).
Provide keyed switch for one exterior door.
3 Remote controls - Provide one for each door.
4. Pull Switch - Provide one for each door and mount as per
plans.
Section 08362 Sectional Metal Overhead Doors - Page 1 of 1
3.01 INSTALLATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION: Provide aluminum storefront system, including
doors, glass and glazing, miscellaneous aluminum him, anchors,
accessories and perimeter sealing of framing.
1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Applicable requirements of the General
Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements
apply to the work specified In this section.
1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:
Sealant - Section 07900
Finish Hardware - Section 08700
Aluminum Windows - Section 08520
Glass and Glazing - Section 08800
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Kawneer Architectural Products.
2. Howmet Corp., Architectural Products Div.
3. PPG Industries, Inc.
B. Qualifications: Fabricator and erector shall have a minimum
of 5 yearn experience in providing similar systems.
C. Structural Design: Provide structural calculations providing
conformance with specification requirements. Design,
fabricate and install storefront system to withstand a 25 psf
uniform wind load, with a maximum deflection not exceeding
L/175 or 3/4" maximum.
D Requirements of Regulator Agencies: Safety Standard for
Architectural Glazing Materials, 16 CFR 1201.
105 SUBMITTALS:
A Shop Drawings: Submit In accordance with Section 01340.
Indicate construction, sizes, jointing, fastening, anchors and
miscellaneous accessories in detail. Also indicate adjacent
building materials, locations and types of finishes, matenats
and structural calculations. Indicate door construction,
materials, finishes, sizes, quantities and related hardware.
B. Samples: Submit following samples, d requested, for
Architect's approval:
1. 12" - long, full -size section of each type and finish
aluminum member.
2. Section of glazing bead.
3. 6' - square sample of glass.
1.06 DELIVERY AND STORAGE:
Deliver, store, and handle materials In such a manner as to
prevent damage or deterioration of materials.
1.07 COORDINATION:
Examine substrate and conditions under which aluminum work is
to be installed and notify Contractor in writing of any detrimental
conditions. Do not proceed with work until conditions are
acceptable to Installer.
1.08 GUARANTEE:
SECTION 08410 - ALUMINUM FRAMES AND DOORS
Provide Owner a wntten guarantee, signed by General
Contractor and Aluminum Storefront System Subcontractor that shell
guarantee completed system to be free or leaks and defects In
material and workmanship fora period of 1 year after acceptance.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
A
B.
C.
D.
E
F.
G.
H.
.1.
K
L
2.02
A
C.
D.
Section 08410 - Aluminum Frames and Doors - Page 1 of 2
MATERIALS:
1 - 3/4 " x 4' Aluminum Framing Members: Flush glazing
system, as detailed, extruded of aluminum alloy 6063 -T5, equal
to Kawneer Tri- Fab 450 Pocket Type Frame for 1/4" glazing. All
perimeter framing shall be closed back All jamb frames for
aluminum and wood doors shall be 1/8" thick minimum.
Steel Reinforcing: M recommended by manufacturer to meet
structural design.
Aluminum Trim: Miscellaneous extruded and formed aluminum
components, Including trim, sill and jamb closures, shall match
alloy and finish of adjacent framing members. Provide in
thickness, size and shape detailed. Provide aluminum sill
flashing members at aluminum sills.
Fasteners: Aluminum, stainless steel or non - corrosive fasteners
compatible with framing system.
Anchoring Devices: Provide plates, angles, spacers, clips and
other devices necessary to support aluminum framing. Provide
8' x 1/8" tapping plate reinforcing at hinges.
Glazing Gaskets: Extruded vinyl glazing gaskets as detailed.
1/4" Glass: As specified In Section 08800.
Sealant: As specified in Section 07900.
Pnmer. As recommended by sealant manufacturer.
Joint Bacldng: Closed -cell polyethylene.
Security Latch: As manufactured by Security Latch, 13895
Burchett Plainwell, MI 49080, telephone 616/664 -4722
ALUMINUM DOORS:
General: Model "500', wide style, 1 3/4" thick aluminum
entrance doors as made by Kawneer Co., or equal; size as
scheduled.. Major sections of doors shall have 0.125" minimum
wall thickness. Glass stops shall not be less than 0.050" thick
Standard fastening devices shall be stainless steel. Provide
threshold as detailed.
Materials: Extruded Section 6063 -T5 aluminum alloy. Door
stiles .125 thickness, glazing molding .050' thickness.
Construction: Vertical stiles shall be 3. 17/32', top rail 3. 17/32'
and bottom rail 6- 17/32'. Deep - penetration weld and
mechanical - fastened come /construction. Snap -in type glazing
stops with neoprene bulb -type glazing. No exposed screws
allowed. Exterior stops lock -in, tamper- proof.
Weatherstripping: Metal- backed pile cloth Installed In door on
three sides. Provide adjustable, astragaii -type at meeting stiles.
Provide bottom pile sweep strip attached to door rail
0. Glass: As specified in Sechon 06800.
2.03 ALUMINUM DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE: (See Attached).
2.04 FINISHES:
A. Colored Anodized Finish: Permanodic No. 40, Kelsolor or
Duranodic 313 Dark Bronze finish, Architectural class I
anodic coating with integral color M21C22A42, having a
minimum coating thickness of 0.7 mils and minimum coating
weight of 27 mg /sq.in.
2.06 FABRICATION:
A. Form sections true to details with clean, straight,
sharply-defined profiles. and smooth surfaces of uniform
color and texture, free from defects impairing strength or
durability.
B. Design members and connections to meet specified
structural properties.
C. Provide supplementary parts necessary to famish a complete
job.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
0. Comply with manufacturer's specifications for the installation
of aluminum frames and doors.
B. Anchors and Bracings: Propedy locate and fasten anchoring
devices into structure.
C. Dissimilar Materials: Isolate aluminum surfaces contacting
steel or other ferrous metals using EC -1202 tape or zinc
chromate paint. Isolate aluminum surfaces contacting
concrete or masonry using asphalt mastic. Apply isolation
materials to dissimilar surfaces.
D. Erection: Install framing true - to-line, plumb, level, square
and in proper planes, free from sags, waves, buckles or
other objectionable defects. Connecting joints shall be even,
haldine joints. Securely fasten anchonng devices and
structural bracing. Exposed fastener are prohibited, except
where specifically detailed at tnm items Install aluminum
trim, closures and covers as detailed. Set sill members and
thresholds in full bed of sealant
E. Thresholds and sill members shall be set in a polysuifide
sealant to make a watertight Installation. Entire penmeter of
lambs and heads shall be prepared and caulked with a
polysulfide sealant equal to PRC 500 rubber caulk in a color
to match the aluminum.
3.02 ALUMINUM DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE:
A. Vestibule Double Doors:
1. Double Doors, Push -Pull, No Lock:
Each pair to have:
3 pr. Butts: 4 -1/2 x 4 ball bearing equal to B51279 x
US26D
2 Closers: LCN 4040, adjustable, finish to match door
2 Push -Pull Sets: Style T
2 Holders: Drop arm door holder, finish to match door
2 Stops: Floor stop, finish to match door.
2 Panic Devices
Removable Mullion
Section 08410 - Aluminum Frames end Doors - Page 2 of 2
Locking Cylinders on Exterior Doors only
END OF SECTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 Related Documents:
- A Drawings and general provisions of Contract Including
General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1
Specifications sections, apply to work of this section.
1.02 Description of Work:
A Extent of each type of aluminum window unit is indicated on
drawings and schedules.
B. Types of aluminum windows required include the following:
1. Fixed Windows
2. Single Hung Windows
C. Applications of aluminum windows on project include the
following.
1.04 Submittals:
1. Individual units set in conventional wall construction.
O Aluminum Trim: Refer to sections of Division 6 for interior
and exterior tnm (if any) not specified as Integral
components of window units (casings, moldings, stools,
aprons. subsills, mullion covers and similar components)
Window trim specified elsewhere includes:
1. Inside and Outside Trim
1.03 Duality Assurance:
A Standards: Comply with General Requirements of ANSI
A200 1, "Industry Standards for Aluminum Window Units
I.S.2.73" by the National Manufacturers Association (NWMA),
except to the extent more stnngent requirements are
indicated.
B Performance and testing. Provide windows which have been
tested and labeled for structural performance (ASTM E 330),
air infiltration (ASTM E 283), and water penetration (ASTM E
331); and with results complying with NWMA Standard
I.S.2 -73 for Class "8" window units.
A. Product Data Submit manufacturers specifications,
standard details, and recommendations for each type of
aluminum window unit required.
1. Include manufacturer's certified test report Indication
that each type of unit has been tested and complies
with requirements for performance as specified.
8 Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings, Including wall
elevations at 1/4" scale, unit elevations at 314" scale, and
hall -size section details of every typical composite member,
including glazing.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 Acceptable Manufacturers:
SECTION 08520 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS
Section 08520 - Aluminum Windows - Page 1 of 2
A. Manufacturer. Subject to compliance with requirements,
provide window units by one of the following:
1. Aluminum Window Units:
a. EFCO Corporation, Monett Missouri, (800)
221 -4169.
B. Substitutions may be made in compliance with Division 1 and
the Supplementary General Conditions.
2.02 Materials.
A. Aluminum:
8. Fasteners: Comply with NWMA requirements for fabrication and
with manufacturer's recommendations and standard industry
practices for type and size of installation fasteners.
C.
D.
F.
G.
1. For fabncation of aluminum windows, use zinc-coated or
nonferrous nails and screws.
2. For installation of aluminum window units, use zinc- coated
or nonferrous nails and screws.
3. For hardware and accessory installation use brass screws.
Compression Weatherstripping. Manufacturer's standard
nonferrous spring metal or vinyl gasket designed for
permanently resilient sealing under bumper or wiper action,
completely concealed when window sash Is closed.
Glass Fiber Insect Screening: 18 x 16 or 18 x 14 mesh of
plastic- coated glass fiber threads, woven and fused to form
fabnc mesh which Is resistant to corrosion, shrinkage, stretch,
impact damage, and weather deterioration; black, dark brown
or dark grey. Comply with FS L -S-125
Insect Screens Frames: Manufacturer's standard formed
aluminum or extruded aluminum frames, with anodized
aluminum finish or baked-on organic coating; removable vinyl
fabric - retainer spline.
1. Finish Color. As selected by Architect
Hardware: Manufacturer's standard design for operation
indicated.
Glass and Glazing Materials. Refer to "Glass and Glazing"
section for requirements applicable to aluminum window units.
1. Double glaze with clear glass of the type and thickness
indicated on the drawings. Where not indicated, glaze
with manufacturer's standard product suitable for the sash
condition detailed
203 Window Types:
A. General: Following paragraphs define operating arrangement
for sash (ventilators) in window units. Drawings show which
panels of each unit are operable and which are fixed. Refer to
NWMA I.S.2.73 for minimum operating requirements.
B. Single -Hung aluminum Windows:
1
1. Provide units containing one fired sash and one
balanced verticalty sliding sash, requiring a pair of
manufacturer's standard concealed counterbalancing
mechanisms, pair of lift handles, and latch at meeting
rail.
a. For sash less than 3'-0" wide, provide single
handle at lower rail.
-
C. Fixed Aluminum Window Units: Provide units containing
fixed sash In configuration as Indicated on drawings. Include
frames. sash, Interior and extenor extension/trim, extenor
head and sill flat casings and trim, and other trim
components necessary for a complete, secure and
weathertight installation.
204 Fabncadon:
A.
B.
Sizes and Profiles: Confirm to size and profile limitations as
shown which may be based on one or more manufacturer's
published details. Similar details by other manufacturers are
acceptable If In close conformance with sizes and profiles
shown, as acceptable to Architect.
Where custom sizes are Indicated, coordinate dimensions
with actual measure of window openings In construction
work. However coordinate fabrication schedule with
construction progress and where necessary, fabricate without
field measurement providing installation tolerances to ensure
proper fit of window units.
C. Extent of each window unit, except as otherwise indicated,
Includes sash and sashes, frame. stops, sill (including
undersill or nosing), exterior flat casing, hardware and
accessories.
3.01 Installation:
1. Provide removable insect screen for each operating
sash, with location (exterior or interior) determined by
manufacturer except as otherwise indicated.
2. Provide aluminum glazing stops (beads), coordinated
with glass selection and glazing system as Indicated.
3. Groove glazing: Pre - glazed units without removable
stops or other provision permitting convenient field
disassembly to facilitate replacement of broken glass
will not be accepted.
D. Pre-glaze aluminum window units at shop before delivery,
except do not pre -glaze light sizes in excess of 100 united
inches.
1. Comply with Section 'Glass and Glazing' requirements
for factory and site glazing.
PART 3 EXECUTION
A. Comply with manufacturer's Instructions and
recommendations for installation of aluminum window units,
hardware, accessories, and other components of work.
B. Set units plumb. level. and we to line, without warp or rack
of frames or sash. Provide proper support and anchor
securely In place. Refer to Division 7 sections for joint fillers
and sealants required for installation.
302 Adjust and Clean:
Section 08520 - Aluminum Windows - Page 2 of 2
1. Set aluminum windows in a continuous bead of sealant in
such a manner as to achieve air tight and watertight
performance.
Adjust operating sash and hardware to provide smooth
operation with tight. weatherproof closure. Lubricate hardware
and moving parts.
Refer to Division 9 sections for required finish to be applied on
aluminum window units at project site. Glaze each unit before
application of final finish coat
Clean glass of window units properly after installation wash and
polish glass on both faces not more than 4 days prior to date
scheduled for final inspection (of each area of project). Comply
with glass manufacturer's recommendations for final cleaning
and maintenance.
1. Remove and replace glass which has been broken,
chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged in other ways
during the construction pedod, Including natural causes,
accidents and vandalism.
D. Institute protection required through remainder of construction
period, to ensure that aluminum window units will be without
damage or deterioration (other than normal weathenng) at time
of acceptance.
END OF SECTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF THE WORK:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
The work to be done under this specification consists of
furnishing and delivering to the General contractor, at the
building, all Finish hardware.
The installation of this material shall be done by the General
Contractor, but this Contractor shall deliver all Items to the
building properly marked and identified. The General
Contractor is responsible for protecting the original finish and
texture of all items of Finish Hardware.
The Finish Hardware shall be installed by mechanics skilled
in this type of work. The excutcheons must be set plumb
and lock, knobs, and cylinders must be installed square with
the door. The materials shall be installed In a neat and
workmanlike manner and all knobs, latches, etc., shall work
free and easily. Supply all necessary template information
to the venous manufacturers. Sims, functions, designs, and
types of hardware specified must be furnished. No
subsbtutions will be considered.
If hardware for any particular door is not listed or described,
it shall be furnished and shall be specified for similar
locatlons.
The hardware items listed m this specification are from the
catalogs of the manufacturers as noted on the schedule
Suppliers of other manufacturers not covered by this
specification 'must secure approval of the Architects in
writing not less than one (1) week before date of letting.
1.02 ROUGH HARDWARE:
A. Not a part of this section of the specification. General
Contractor to furnish and set all items that are specified or
'necessary for a complete job, and all hardware specified In
other sections.
1.03 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
A. This material shall be procured from a source of supply
approved by the Architect as competent to Correctly interpret
the plans, details and specifications, and, be prepared at all
times to promptly and satisfactorily service the hardware on
the job. This supplier must be an established Contract
Builders' Hardware firm, who meets all the above
requirements, and who maintains and operates an office,
display room and stock in the State of Texas. This material
must be furnished by or under the direct supervision of an
Architectural Hardware Consultant, as eemfied by the Door
& Hardware Iestltute, Inc., regularly employed by this
supplier, and all bids must be 50 certified. Bids on this
material will not be acceptable from firms who have not been
successfully engaged in selling and servicing Contract
Builders' Hardware for a period of at least five (5) years.
1.04 CONTRACTORS'S HARDWARE SCHEDULE:
A. Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect five (5)
copies of a complete schedule of all Finish Hardware
required. Schedule shall follow requirements of
specifications and shall indicate types, manufacturer's name,
SECTION 08700 - HARDWARE
1.05 SAMPLES:
1.10
A
1.11
A.
Section 08700 - Hardware Page 1 of 1
and number location and finish of each item required Approval
of schedule will not relieve contractor of responsibility for
furnishing all necessary hardware.
A. Submit such samples as required by the Architect for approval.
Do not deliver hardware until approval is obtained.
1.06 PACKING AND MARKING:
A. Package each item of hardware and each lock set separately in
individual containers, with necessary screws, keys, instruction
and installation templates for spatting mortleing tools. Mark
each container with item number corresponding to number
shown on Contractor's Hardware schedule.
1 07 ITEMS NOT INCLUDED:
A. Hardware for following items are not included under this
section; Metal windows, Metal screens and Access doors.
1.08 DOOR SILENCERS:
A. Furnish rubber door silencers forwood frames and hollow metal
frames. Four (4) each double frame. Three (3) each single
frame.
109 DOOR CLOSERS:
A. All must be full rack and pinion construction with cast hydraulic
Iron case. All to have two (2) valve controls back check and
adjustable spnng power of sizes and types specified. Valves to
be concealed against unauthonzed adjustments. All surface
closers applied to door with hex nuts and bolts.
FINISH:
All hardware finishes throughout be as selected by Architect
KEYING:
All locks and cylinders; four keys each, keyed alike or different
as directed by the Architect Furnish six (6) master keys. All
keys shall be stamped with control numbers.
1.12 ALLOWANCE:
A. Allow the sum of 08,000.00 (eight thousand dollars for finish
hardware.
END OF SECTION
PART1 GENERAL
1.10 DESCRIPTION:
SECTION 08730 - WEATHERSTRIPPING, UGHTPROOFING, AND SOUNDPROOFING
A. Provide weatherstripping on exterior swing doors, including
head, jamb, sill and meeting stile weatherstripping, and
thresholds.
1.20 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Applicable requirements of the General Conditions, Supple-
mentary Condmons and General Requirements apply to the
work specified in this section.
1.30 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:
A. Alternates - Section 01100
B. Caulking and Sealant - Section 07900
C. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames - Section 08100
D. Weatherstripping for Aluminum Doors - Section 08400
1.40 SUBMITTALS.
A Submit physical samples and technical data for each type of
weatherstrip for Architect's approval. Submittal shall be in
accordance with Section 01340.
1.50 DUALITY ASSURANCE:
A Manufacturers:
1. Model numbers shown are from the catalog of
Pemko Mtg. Co. and am listed as a standard
quality, unless otherwise noted.
2. Equivalent items of the following manufacturers
are acceptable:
Zero Weather Slipping Co., Inc.
Accurate Metal Weatherstnppmg Co.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.10 WEATHERSTRIPPING MATERIALS:
A. Head and Jamb Weatherstrip. No. 297AV extruded clear
anodized aluminum vinyl and bubble with matching
fasteners
B. 541 Weatherstrip: No. 315 AN, extruded clear anodized
aluminum.
C. Thresholds: 4" x 1/2', No. 170A, extruded aluminum, mill
finish.
D. Meeting Stile Weathersmp: No. 305 AN, extruded clear
anodized aluminum, black neoprene.
E. Sealant Sealant for thresholds is specified In Section 07900.
F. Fasteners: Color- matched fasteners as recommended by
manufacturer.
Section 08730 - Weathersmpping, Ughtproc9ng and Soundproofing Page 1 of 1
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.10 WEATHERSTRIPPING INSTALLATION:
A. Install weatherstrip with color - matched fasteners spaced
as recommended by manufacturer. Attach
weatherstripping complete and In perfect working order.
8. Set thresholds In lull bed of sealant and securely fasten
with plated to match, gat head stainless steel expansion
bolts. Notch ends to Tit frame profile.
END OF SECTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.10 DESCRIPTION:
A Perform all work required to complete the Glass and Glazing
Indicated by the Contract Documents. Furnish all material
and supplementary items necessary for the proper Installa-
tion.
1.20 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Applicable requirements of the General Conditions, Supple -
mentary Conditions and General Requirements apply to the
work specified in this section.
1.30 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Alternates - Section 01100
8.
O.
D.
Hollow Metal Doors and Frames - Section 08100
Wood Doors - Section 08211
Overhead Doors - Section - 08360
E Aluminum Frames and Doors - Section 08400
F. Aluminum Windows - Section 08520
1.40 SUBMITTALS.
A Shop Drawings: Submit m accordance with Section 01340.
B. Samples: Submit samples 12" square, of each type of glass,
0 requested by the Architect
1.50 QUALITY ASSURANCE.
A. Reference Standards
1. Flat Glass Marketing Assoc. (FGMA): Glazing
Manual, 1974 Edition
2. Amedcan National Standards Institute (ANSI):
ANSI 097.1 -1.
B. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Safety Standard for
Architectural Glazing Materials, 16 CRP 1201, as
established by the Consumer Product Safety Commission.
1.60 DELIVERY AND STORAGE:
A. Deliver glass with manufacturer's labels intact. Do not
remove labels until glass has been installed.
B. Keep glass Tree from contamination by materials capable of
staining glass.
C. Deliver compounds in manufacturer's unopened, labeled
containers.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.10 GLASS MATERIALS:
A. Clear Glass: 1/4" thick clear float glass by ASG, LOF or
SECTION 08800 - GLASS AND GLAZING
B. Insulated Glass: 5/8" overall thickness. clear float by ASG,
LOF or PPG. Provide tempered or tinted where scheduled
- and as selected by Architect
2.10 ACCESSORIES:
A Glazing Compound Bedding. channel and stop glazing
sealant by Percora Tremco, or Master Putty Mfg. Co.
B Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 70-90 shore "A" durometer
hardness.
C. Spacers: Neoprene, 40-50 shore "A" durometer hardness
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.10 PREPARATION:
A. Check that glazing channels and glass are free of
Imperfections or damage that would prevent proper
installation of glass.
B. Carefully measure glass openings and provide minimum
required tolerances and clearances.
C. Clean sash and glass surfaces free of foreign matter. 07 3
D. Perform glazing only when temperature is above 50 deg.
F.
320 GLAZING
Section 08800 - Glass and Glazing Page 1 of 2
PPG. Provide tempered glass where scheduled.
C. Tinted Glass: 1/4" thick gray glass, by ASG, LOF or PPG.
Provide tempered glass where scheduled.
D. Minors: Provide twin - ground, polished, electro
plated, 1/4' thick No. 1 quality plate glasas minors in ac-
cordance with CS-27. Mirrors shall bear manufacturer's
labels Mirrors shall be provided with Type 302
satin- finishedstainlesssteel frameswith corrosive- resistant
steel backing and concealed, positive- Lock theftproof
device on concealed hangers. Mirrors shall be of sizes as
indicated on drawings.
A Install in accordance with applicable procedures
recommended by glazing manufacturer, FGMA Glazing
Manual, and in accordance with requirements of 16 CFR
1201.
B. Set and block glass to provide equal margins at
penmeter, with glass not In contact with frames.
C. Set in full beds of compound and hold glass in place with
spacers
D. Secure stops In place and back -bed to insure full beds.
Trim excess compound.
E Mirrors: Install mirrors with theftproof mountngs In
accordance with approved shop drawings.
3.30 CLEANING:
A. Remove excess glaang compound from Installed glass.
B. Remove labels from glass.
C. Thoroughly wash and polish both faces of glass,
D. Remove debns from site.
3.40 PROTECTION:
A. Replace broken, scratched, chipped or otherwise damaged
glass.
B. Attach crossed streamers away from glass face
END OF SECTION
Section 00800 • Glass and Glazing Page 2 of 2
PAR! ONE
1.10 DESCRIPTIONS
GENERAL'
A. Work included: Floor and base where scheduled
1.20 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples: Before delivery to Job Site. submit to Architect
three samples of each scheduled pattern and color.
1.30 PRODUCT HANDLING
P. Delivery and Storage:
1. Deliver rnatanels to Job Site in original unopened
containers with legible labels intact.
2. Store specified materials under cover In a manner to
prevent damage and contamination.
B. Protection:
1. Protect materials before, during and after installation.
2. Protect installed work and materials of other trades.
C. Replacements: In event of damage, make necessary repairs
and replacements at no additional cost to Owner.
PART TWO PRODUCTS:
2 10 GYPSUM WALLBOARD
A. Provide gypsum wallboard materials In accordance with
recommendation GA 216.
B. Fire Rated Gypsum Board: UL rated, 5/8 inch thick;
maximum permissible length(s); ends square cut, tapered
edges.
C. Gypsum Sheathing Board (Asphalt Treated Gypsum Board):
standard type; 1/2 inch thick; 2 feet wide; maximum permis-
sible lengths; ends square cut; tongue and groove edges for
horizontal application; water repellent paper faces.
D. Moisture Resistant Gypsum Board (Tile Backer Board): 1/2
inch thick; maximum permissible length(s); end square cut
tapered faces.
E. Exterior Gypsum Board: UL rated; 5/8 inch thick. maximum
permissible length(s); ends square cut tapered edges.
2.20 GYPSUM WALLBOARD ACCESSORIES
A Provide gypsum wallboard accessories in accordance with
GA 210.
B. Corner Beads: metal.
C. Edge Trim: LC bead.
D. Reinforcing tape, Joint compound, Adhesive, Water, Fasten-
ers: GA 216.
PART THREE EXECUTION:
SECTION 09260 - GYPSUM WALLBOARD SYSTEMS
Section 09260 - Gypsum Wallboard Systems - Page 1 of 1
3.10 WALL FURRING INSTALLATION
A. Install members to provide surface plane with maximum varia-
8on 61 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction.
B. Erect furring channels vertically. Secure in place on alternate
channel flanges at maximum 24 Inches on center.
C. Space tuning channels maximum 16 inches on center, not
more than 4 Inches from abutting walls.
3.20 GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION
A. Install gypsum board in accordance with
recommendations of GA 216.
B Erect single layer fire rated gypsum vertically, with edges
and ends occumng over firm bearing.
C. Erect exterior gypsum sheathing board horizontally, with
edges butted tight and ends occurring over fine bearing.
Tape or seal all joints. Seal all gaps.
D Use screws when fastening gypsum board to metal furring or
framing. Use nails or screws when fastening gypsum board to
wood fumng or framing.
6. Treat all edges and holes In moisture resistant gypsum
board with sealant Treat joints with plasbc cement or
acrylic tape
F Place control joints to be consistent with lines of building
spaces and in consistent pattern as directed by Architect
G. Place corner beads at external comers. Use longest
practical lengths. Place edge trim where gypsum board
abuts dissimilar materials.
H. Tape, fill, and send exposed joints. edges. comers, open-
ings and fixings, to produce surface ready to receive sur-
face finishes. Feather coats onto adjoining surfaces so
that camber Is maximum 1/32 Inch.
I. Remove and re-do defective work
END OF SECTION
PART 1 GENERAL 1.06 QUALIFICATIONS
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Manufacturer. Company specializing in the manufacture of
products specified in this Section with minimum three years
A. Ceramic tile floor, wan. and base finish using the thinset experience.
epplicabon method.
B. Installer. Company specializing in applying the work of this
B. Thresholds at door openings. Section with minimum 3 years experience.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 03346 - Concrete Floor Finishing: Trowelling of floor
slab for tile application. A. Deliver products to site one week prior to scheduled start of
installation.
1.03 REFERENCES
B. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturer's
A ANSI/TCA M08.4 • Installation of Ceramic Tile with Water instructions.
Resistant Organic Adhesive
C. Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating In accordance
B ANSI/TCA A108.5 - Ceramic Tile installed with Dry•Set with manufacturer's Instructions.
Portland Cement Mortar or Latex Portland Cement Mortar
C. ANSI/TCA A108.6 • Ceramic The Installed with Chemical
Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile- Setting and Grouting Epoxy. A. Do not Install adhesives In a closed, unventilated environment
D. ANSI/TCA A118.1 - Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar. B. Maintain 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) during installabon of
mortar materials.
E. ANSI/TCA A118.3 - Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable
Tile-Setting and Grouting Epoxy.
F. ANSI/TCA A118.4 • Latex•Portland Cement Mortar.
G. ANSI/TCA A136.1 - Organic Adhesives for Installation of
Ceramic Tile, Type 1 and Type 2.
H. ANSI/TCA A137.1 - Specifications for Ceramic he.
C. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01340.
SECTION 09311 - CERAMIC T1LE FINISH
1.07 DEUVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
1 08 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS - TILE
A. American Olean Tile
B. Dallas Ceramic Company
A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 01340. 2.0 TILE MATERIAL
Section 09311 • Ceramic Tile Finish - Page 1 of 2
I. TCA (file Council of America) • Handbook for Ceramic Tile C. Florida Tile
Installation.
1.04 SBMITTALS D Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01640.
B. Submit shop drawings indicating tile layout, patterns, color A. Cramic Floor Tile: conforming to the following:
arrangement, perimeter conditions, [unctions with dissimilar
materials, thresholds, [and setting details. Size 8' x 8" inch
Color As selected
B. Base: Match floor tile for moisture absorption, surface finish,
D. Submit product data Indicating material specrficabons, and color; tile length 8 Inch long x 4 Inch high.
characteristics, and Instructions for using adhesives and
grouts. 2.03 MANUFACTURERS - ADHESIVE
E. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01340. A. As recommended by the manufacture
2.04 MANUFACTURERS • MORTAR AND GROUT
F. Submit maintenance data under provisions of Section 01340.
A Tex -Rite
G. Include recommended cleaning and stain removal methods,
cleaning materials, and polishes and waxes. B. Tamms
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE C. Kaiser Brand
A Conform to ANSI/TCA A137.1 D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01640.
2.05 MORTAR MATERIALS
A. Mortar Materials: ANSIfTCA A118.1, Portland cement sand,
and water.
6. Color Admixture: type, color, and manufacture as selected by
Architect
2 06 GROUT MATERIALS
A. Grout Cementitious dry cure type with acid resistant
additive.
B. Color Admixture: type, color, and manufactured as selected
by Architect.
PART 3 EKECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Venfy that surfaces are ready to receive work
B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts condition of
existing surfaces and substrate.
302 PREPARATION
A. Protect surrounding work from damage or disfiguration.
B. Vacuum clean existing surfaces and substrate and damp
clean.
C Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing
substrate surfaces to acceptable flatness tolerances.
D. Apply sealer or conditioner to surfaces as recommended by
adhesive manufacturer.
3.03 INSTALLATION - THINSEr METHOD
A. Install adhesive, tile, threshold, and grout in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions
B. Request tile pattern from Architect Do not interrupt tile
pattern through openings.
C. Place thresholds and /or edge strips at locations indicated on
Drawings.
D. Cut and fit tile tight to penetrations through tile. Form
comers and bases neatly. Align floor, base , and wall joints.
E. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in
tolerance allowed In tile size. Make joints watertight without
voids, cracks, excess mortar, or excess grout
F. Sound the after setting. Replace hollow sounding units.
G. Keep expansion and control joints free of adhesive or grout
H. Allow tile to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting.
I. Grout 111. joints.
J. Apply sealant to junction of ble and dissimilar materials and
at junction of dissimilar planes.
3.04 INSTALLATION - FULL MORTAR BED METHOD
A.
B.
C.
D
E.
F.
G.
H.
0.
L
3 05
A.
B.
3.06
A.
B.
3.07
A.
Section 09311 - Ceramic Tile Finish - Page 2 of 2
Install mortar bed, tile, threshold, and grout In accordance with
manufacturer's Instructions.
Install cleavage membrane.
Apply mortar bed over surfaces to a thickness of 5/8 inch.
Request tile pattern from Architect Do not Interrupt tile pattern
through openings.
Place thresholds and /or edge strips at locations indicated on
Drawings.
Cut and fit tile tight to penetrations through tile. Form comers
and bases neatly. Align floor, base, and wail joints.
Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in
tolerance allowed In tile size. Make joints watertight without
voids, cracks, excess mortar, or excess grout.
Sound ale after setting. Replace hollow sounding units.
Keep expansion and /or control] joints Tree of mortar or grout
Apply sealant to joints.
Allow Ole to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting.
Grout tile joints.
Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materals and
junction of dissimilar planes.
CLEANING
Clean work under provisions of 01710.
Clean tile surfaces.
PROTECTION
Protect finished installation
Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface.
SCHEDULE
Refer to Drawings for details.
END OF SECTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.10 DESCRIPTION:
A. Provide vinyl composition tile flooring. vinyl composition
flooring, vinyl base. sheet vinyl flooring. specialty flooring
materials, and stair covering materials.
1.20 RELATED DOCUMENTS.
A. Applicable requirements of the General Conditions and
General Requirements apply to the work specified in this
section.
1 30 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:
A. Alternates - Section 01100
B. Concrete sub -floor finish - Section 03300
C Carpet - Section 09680
1.40 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A Subfloor Tolerances: Tolerances are plus or minus within
specified distance and are not cumulative.
1. New or Existing Slabs at Resilient Floors:
True to plane within 1 /8" In 10 ft.
1.50 SUBMITTALS• Submit in accordance with Section 01340
A. Manufacturer's Date: Submit copies of manufacturer's tech-
nical data and Installation Instrucllnns for each type of
material and accessories.
8. Maintenance Instructions: Submit copies of manufacturer's
wntten instructions for recommended maintenance practices
for each type of materials and accessories.
C. Samples: Submit samples of resilient flooring, specialty
flooring materials, stair covering materials and base materials
to Architect for approval and selection of color and pattem.
Do not Order or deliver materials unbl after Architect's
selection and approval. Materials delivered to project shall
match approved samples.
1.60 DELIVERY AND STORAGE:
A. Deliver materials in unbroken factory containers and store in
cool, dry place. Each container shall bear manufactur oS 3
er's name, pattern number, and lot number.
1.70 JOB CONDITIONS: Examine the areas and conditions under which
resilient flooring and accessories are to be installed and notity the
Contractor in wnting of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed
with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
L80 EXTRA STOCK: At completion of project, deliver to Owner the
following minimum amountq of materials of same brand, size, and
pattern as used on project; furnish materials from same manufac-
tured lot as the materials installed:
Floor tile - one complete canon of each type and pattem
installed.
Base - 20 Lin. ft. of each color and type installed.
SECTION 09650 - RESIUENT FLOORING
Section 09650 • Resilitent Flooring - Page 1 of 2
1.90 GUARANTEE. Provide Owner a written guarantee that shall
guarantee completed installation to be tree of defects in
materials and workmansHip for period of two years after final
acceptance. GuaraNtee shall provide for replacement of
defective wnrk at no cost to Owner.
1.95 TESTING: ALL FLOORING MATERIALS. BASE AND MASTICS
SHALL BE SUBMITTED TO THE ARCHRECT ONE WEEK
PRIOP TO INSTALLATION. THESE SAMPLES WILL BE
TESTED BY AN INDEPENDENT TESTING LAB FOR THE
PRESENCE OF ASBESTOS THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOT
INSTALL ANY MATERIALS IN THE FACILITY THAT CONTAIN
ASBESTOS
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.10 GENERAL'
A. Materials shall be uniform In thickness and size.
B Edges cut accurately and square.
C. Uniform color with variations in variegated patterns kept
to a minimum
D. Base materials shall be as long of lengths as practical to
suit conditions of installation.
E. Patterns: Provide for approximately 5% of the to be of
differing color to form borders and /or patterns.
2.20 FLOOR COVERING MATERIALS:
A. Vinyl Composition Tile (VC): Vinyl composition tile, meet-
ing requirements of FS SS - T - 3128, Type IV, selected from
one of the following:
Type 1 Tile:
1. Armstrong Supreme Vinyl Conon Tile and Feature
Tile, 1/8" x 12" x 12" size, by Armstrong Cork Co„
Flooring Division.
2. Tarkett Vinyl Composition Tile, Royal Stoneglow,
1/8" 012" x 17 size, by Gafstar.
3. Or Approved Equal.
2.30 BASE MATERIALS:
A. Vinyl Base: Vinyl cove base as scheduled in 50 ft rolls,
4" or 6" x 1/8" gauge, F.S. SS- W-40a, Type II. Color se-
lected.
2.40 SPECIALTY FLOORING MATERIALS:
A. Vinyl Reducer Strip: Standard 1• wide tapered vinyl
edging, 1/8" thickness, color sa selected.
B. Feature Ships : Solid, plain color vinyl composition floor-
ing material, I/O" thick by width noted on Drawings.
Colors as noted on Drawings.
2.50 LEVELING MATERIALS:
A. Floor Leveling Compound: Latex -base liquid emulsion
with Portland Cement and sand, by Camp's: or
Sonocrete by Sonnebom.
2.60 APPUCATION MATERIALS:
A Concrete Slab Primer. Nonstaining type as recommended
by flooring manufacturer.
B. Tile Adhesive: As recommended by ble manufacturer and as
compatible with existing encapsilanl.
2.70 WAX: Water emulsion floor was as recommended by flooring
manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.10 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION:
A. Prior to installation of finish floor coverings, remove dirt oil,
grease, paint and other foreign matter from surfaces.
B Inspect surfaces for holes, cracks and other abrasions, and
fill with latex floor-leveling compound.
C. Inspect surfaces for deviations beyond allowable tolerances.
Till depressions with latex floor - leveling compound and grind
down spots to obtain allowable tolerances.
D. Trowel and featheredge leveling compound to a smooth and
level surface.
E. Leave subiloors clean, true to plane within allowable toler-
ances, and ready to receive finish flooring.
F. Maintain 70 deg. F. minimum temperature 24 hours before
and attar laying floor. Stack materials in prepared areas at
70 deg. F. 24 hours prior to laying floor.
3 20 INSTALLATION - GENERAL:
A. Instal flooring and base after finishing operations, including
painting, have been completed and permanent heating
system Is operating. Moisture content of concrete slabs,
building air temperature and relative humidity must be within
limits recommended by floenng manufacturer
3 30 INSTALLATION OF TILE MATERIALS:
A Apply thin uniform film of adhesive, spread evenly with
notched steel trowel, In accordance with directions on
container. Allow adheswe to cure 30 minutes prior to tile
installation.
B. Lay tile starting at center of room, working toward walls,
square with room axis. Adjust width of border tiles as
required and scribe to walls and projection.
C. Joints shall be tight butt joints, true to line.
D. Verify pattern of tile (directions of gran) with Architect before
laying tile.
E. Install flooring on covers for telephone and electrical ducts,
and other such items as occur within finished floor areas:
maintain continuity of color and pattern.
3.40 INSTALLATION OF BASE:
Section 09650 - Resditent Flooring - Page 2 of 2
A. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, millwork,
casework and other permanent factures in rooms or areas
where base Is required.
B. On masonry surfaces, or other similar irregular surfaces,
full voids along top edge of resilient well base with menu -
lecturer's recommended adhesive filler material.
C Cement base to wall using recommended adhesive,
straight with tight butt joints
D. Form in and out corner angles tightly and neatly.
E. Scribe base accurately to door and cabinet blur.
3.50 INSTALLATION OF SPECIALTY MATERIALS:
A. Reducer Strips: Install vinyl reducer strips where detailed
07 3 and where tile terminates at exposed concrete
floors.
B. Feature Strips: Instal feature strips for gymnasium game
lines where shown on Drawings, cm to shapes, sizes and
profiles shown.
3.60 CLEANING AND WAXING:
A. Allow 24 hours after laying flooring materials before begin-
ning cleaning process. Clean flooring materials with a
neutral cleaner and allow to dry.
B. Apply first coat of wax full strength, and machine but.
C. Immediately prior to final inspection, apply a second coat
of wax and machine buff.
D. Clean resilient base and star covering thoroughly and
remove excess adhesive from surfaces.
E. Remove cartons and rubbish from site.
END OF SECTION
PART ONE GENERAL
1.10 Work Included:
A. Prepare sudaees to receive carpeting.
B. Apply glue down carpeting on floor surfaces where indicated,
complete with required accessories.
1.20 Related Work
A. Section 03345: Finish troweling of concrete floor slabs.
1.30 Reference Standards:
A FS: Federal Specifications, Specification Sales, (3FROS),
Building 197,Washington Navy Yard, General Senrices
Administration. Washington, D.C. 20407, U.S A.
1. DDO -C-95A - Carpet and Rugs, Wool, Nylon,
Acrylic, Modacrylic, Polyester, Polypropylene.
1.40 Submittals:
A Submit samples and shop drawings in accordance with
Section 01340.
B. Samples:
1. Submit 1 sample of each type of carpel to be
used, sufficiently large to clearly indicate
construction In addition, submit 1 duplicate
sample of each color selected.
C. Shop drawings:
1. Clearly indicate the location of all seams, method
of joining seams, direction of carpet type of
adhesive to be used, method integrating edge
stnps with carpet and installation procedures.
1.50 Job Environment
A. Do not begin carpet installaton until painting and finishing
work is complete and ceilings and overhead work tested,
approved and completed.
B. Maintain room temperature at minimum 60 degrees F for at
least 24 hours before installation and relative humidity at
approximately that at which the area is to be maintained.
C. Provide sufficient lighting.
1.60 TESTING: All flooring materials, base and mastics shall be
submitted to the Arohdect one week prior to instatiauon. These
samples will be tested by an independent testing lab for the
presence of asbestos. The Contactor shall NOT install any
materials in the facility that contain asbestos.
PART TWO PRODUCTS
2.10 Manufacturers acceptable contingent upon product's compliance
with the specifications:
A. Bigelow Sanford Inc., P.O. Box 3039, Greenville, South
Carolina 29602, U.S A
SECTION 09697 - CARPETING GLUE DOWN
2.20 Matenals.
PART THREE EXECUTION
3.10 Preparation of Surfaces:
Section 09697 - Carpeting Glue Down - Page 1 or 2
8. Mohawk Commercial Carpet 1755 The Exchange, Atlanta,
Georgia 30339, U.S A.
A. Carpet: Investment by Bigelow:
accordance with the following:
1. Weave:
back
2. Pitch
3. Rows Per Inch:
4. Surface Yam:
5. Yarn Weight:
6. Total Weight
7. Color:
8. Carpet: Top Notch by Mohawk; FS DD.0-95A and in
accordance with the following:
1. Weave Woven Interlock
P.O.&
2. Pitch
3. Rows Per Inch:
4 Surface Yarn:
5. Yam Weight
6. Total Weight:
7. Color:
FS 00 -C-95A and in
Velvet Woven thin
216
8.25
Zeftron 500
B.F.C. Nylon with
Static Control
26 0 oz /sq yd.
56.0 oz./sq.yd
As selected by
the Architect
165
8.00
Anton III CEN
with Static
Contra
26.0 oz /sq.yd.
63 35 oz /sq.yd
As selected by
the Architect
C. Adhesive: Type recommended by carpet manufacturer to suit
application and expected service. Adhesive shall NOT contain
asbestos in any quantity.
A. Clean floors of dust din, solvents, oil, grease, paint plaster and
other substances detrimental to proper performance of adhesive
and carpet Allow floors to dry thoroughly.
B. Ensure floors ARE LEVEL with maximum surface variation of
1/4 inch in 10 feet, noncumulative.
C. Ensure concrete floors are free from scaling and irregularities
and exhibit neutrality relative to acidity and alkalinity.
D. Use an approved cementitious Tiller to patch cracks, small holes
and for leveling.
3.20 Installation:
A. Lay out rolls of carpet full for Architect/Engineer's approval.
8. Check matching of carpet before cutting and ensure mere is no
visible venation between dye lots.
C. Cut carpet where required, In manner to allow proper seam
and pattern match. Ensure cuts are straight and true and
unlrayed.
D. Where possible and practical, locate seams In areas of least
amount of traffic.
0. Join seams in recommended manner so as not to detract
from the appearance of the carpet installation and decrease
its life expectancy. Ensure seams are straight, not
overlapped or peaked and are Tree of gaps.
F. Vacuum clean substrate. Spread adhesive in quantity recom-
mended by manufacturer after primer application to ensure
proper adhesion over full area of installation. Apply only
enough adhesive to permit proper adhesion of carpet before
initial seL
G. lay carpet on floors with the run of the pile In some direction
of anticipated traffic. lay carpet on stairs with run of the pile
in opposite direction of anticipated traffic to avoid peaking of
backing at nosing.
H Do not change run of pile in any one room or from one room
to next where continuous through a wall opening.
I. Cut and fit carpet neatly around projections through floor
and to walls and other vertical surfaces.
J. Fit carpet snugly to walls or other vertical surfaces where no
base Is scheduled, leaving no gaps.
K Do not place heavy objects such as fumiture on carpeted
surfaces for minimum of 24 hours or until adhesive n seL
L Entire carpet installation is to be laid tight and flat to
subfloor, well fastened at edges and present a uniform
pleasing appearance. Ensure monolithic color, pattern and
texture match within any one area
M. Unless detailed otherwise, Install edging strips where carpet
terminates at other floor coverings. Use full length pieced
only. Butt tightly to vertical surfaces. Where splicing cannot
be avoided, butt ends tight and flush.
N. Adhere carpet tightly to treads and riser of stain.
3.30 Clean -up:
A. Upon completion of installation, remove all waste and excess
materials, all tools and equipment and vacuum clean the
entire floor surface carefully and thoroughly with vacuum
cleaner.
0. Remove all soil with the proper remover.
C. Remove all loose pieces of face yam with sharp scissors.
D. Leave all usable pieces of trimmed carpet not necessary to
complete work on the jobsite. Place In an orderly manner in
an area designated by the Architect/Engineer.
END OF SECTION
Section 09697 - Carpeting Glue Down - Page 2 of 2
1
1
sere possible and practiceL locate seams in areas of least
0 o traffic.
n s in recommended manner so as not to detract
m the appearance of the carpet installation and decrease
life expectancy. Ensure seams are straight, not
Idled or peaked and are free of gaps.
ru clean substrate. Spread adhesive in quantity reoom-
nded by manufacturer after primer application to ensure
dhesion over full area of Installation. Apply only
u dhesive to permit proper adhesion of carpet before
r carpet on floors with the run of the pile in same direction
Tsn ed traffic. lay carpet on stairs with run of the pile
>p ile direction of anticipated traffic to avoid peaking of
:kl at nosing.
e mange run or pile in any one room or from one room
ti here continuous through a wall opening.
1 and fit carpet neatly around projections through floor
i to walls and other vertical surfaces.
cat snugly to walls or other vertical surfaces where no
>e cheduled, leaving no gaps.
tams heavy objects such as furniture on carpeted
fa for minimum of 24 hours or until adhesive Is set
tire carpet installation is to be laid tight and flat to
Aloof, well fastened at edges and present a uniform
as appearance. Ensure monolithic color, paaem and
tur etch within any one area
less detailed otherwise, install edging steps where carpet
yl iat other floor covenngs. Use full length pieced
t tightly to vertical surfaces. Where splicing cannot
av d, butt ends tight and flush.
here carpet tightly to treads and riser of stairs.
I: 1
on completion of installation, remove all waste and excess
to all tools and equipment and vacuum clean the
ire r surface carefully and thoroughly with vacuum
an
move all soil with the proper remover.
001811 loose pieces of face yam with sharp scissors.
we all usable pieces of trimmed carpet not necessary to
np����ppQQ work on the jobsite. Place in an orderly manner m
ar esignated by the Architect/Engineer.
1
1
1
1
ENO OF SECTION
Section 09697 - Carpeting Glue Down - Page 2 of 2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
PART ONE
1.10
GENERAL
GENERAL CONDITIONS:
A The painting contractor shell read and be govemed by the
General Conditions at the head of the complete Specifica-
tions for this project
B. The painting contractor agrees to save the Owner harmless
from all liens or damages ansing from or caused by this work
and to carry liability Insurance and workman's compensation
lnsurance for all workmen.
C. SAFETY: AlI coatings shall conform to NAtional Fire Protec-
tion Association Standards as set forth in NFPA # 101 and
AIA File # 40 B7 Section (6-2), (6-3), and (6-4). All materials
with ratings that will not conform to said standards will not be
allowed on the job site.
D. All products must meet or exceed applicable Federal Specifi-
natons in qualily and performance. Each sample of matenal
may be kept or tested at the Architects discretion. Any
product not meeting said requirements will be removed from
the job site and area repainted with approved material. All
material must withstand one full year of normal use with
minimum fading or chaulking.
E. At the request of the Architect, a published retail price sheet
shall be furnished, showing prices of said materials to be
used. At no time shall second -line materials be allowed
without Architect's knowledge.
F. STANDARD
1 It shall be the responsibility of the General Contras tor
to provide an average room ready for painting prior to
completion of other rooms.
2. Panung contractor shall finish room in specified
manner. This room shall be referred to as a standard
thoroughout job when accepted by Architect.
1.20 SCOPE OF WORK
A. EXTERIOR: Includes finishing of all exposed wood and
masonry requiring paint finish, and metal (except copper and
aluminum). Buildings, as shown on Drawings, shall have
brick veneer coated with 3 coats (full coverage) of vinyl base
paint.
B. INTERIOR: Includes finishing of all areas and surfaces as
scheduled and/or specified.
C. The panting contractor shall supplyall labor, materials, tools,
ladders, scaffolding, and other equipment necessary for the
completion of this work. See schedule of Finishes for types
of paint or finish for various areas. The panting contractor
shall examine the Specifications for the various other trades
and shall thoroughly familiarize himself with all their
provisions regarding their paintings. All surfaces that are left
unfinished by the requirements of other Specifications shall
be painted or finished as a part of this Contract Roof top
units shall be panted.
D. Copper, bronze, chromium plate, nickel, stainless steel,
aluminum and monel meta shall not be painted or finished,
except as otherwise specified. B woodwork, meta, or any
SECTION 09900 - PAINTING AND FINISHING
1.30 EXTRAS
Section 00900 - Painting and Finishing - Page 1 of 4
other surface to be finished cannot be put in proper condition
for finishing by customary cleaning, sanding, or puttying
operations, the painting contractor shall Innediately notify the
General Contractor and have the conditions corrected , or
assume responsibility for and recbly any unsatisfactory finish
resulting.
A The painting contractor shall not be entitled to payment in
excess of the amount agreed upon in his Contract for any extra
work over and above that specified herein, unless authorized in
writing by the Architect or the Architacat's duly authorized
representative.
1.40 STORAGE
A. All materials used on the job shall be stored in a single place
designated by the General Contrac tor. Such storage place shell
be kept neat and clean, and all damage thereto or to its
surroundings shall be made good. Any oily rags, waste, etc.,
must be removed from the building every night, and every
precaution taken to avoid the danger of fire.
PART TWO PRODUCTS
2.10 MATERIALS
A. Materials shall be delivered to the building In original
sealed containers and remain unopened until inspected
and approved by Architect No paint, varnish, stain, or
enamel shall be reduced or adulterated In any way except
as specified. Thinner, if required, shall be product of
manufacaturer of the matenal to be thinned.
B. Unless otherwise specified, all matenals shall be best grade as
manufactured by Pratt & Lambert, Inc., or other approved
manufacturer whose products are equal in quality and durability
and which will produce the required finish. Manufacturers will
be given consideration, subject to approval of samples. Colors
to be selected by Architect o7 3
220 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
A Sherwin-Williams • Super Kem•Tone series only.
B. Valspar Corporation.
C. Specialty Products Company
D. Pittsburgh
E. Or Approved Equal as approved by Architect
2.30 APPROVAL OF MATERIALS
A Contractor shall at least 10 days in advance of starting of work
submit to Architect for his approval a complete list of the
manufacaturer's products that he proposes to use, together with
trade names of specific articles to be used and formulas if
required by the Architect It is understood, however, that no
general approval of such schedule shall sconstltute a waiver of
any specific requirement of this Specification. Aker approval Is
obtained from the Architect no substitution whatsoever shall be
made.
240 SELECTION OF COLORS
A. The Architect will prepare a group of color chips approxi-
mating the various colors required for the job. The painting
contractor shall then prepare samples, either on the wall or
on separate panels, approximately 30' x30' square, for each
one of the color chips. From these the Architect will make
selections or suggested changes. The Architect reserves the
right to change these color selections by the addition of
white, grays, or other tints d It appears necessary to do so
when colon are applied. In no event shall the painted
proceed with the painting of the final coat in any room until
he has received the final color approval by the Architect
Apply 30" x 30" color samples on walls for final color
approval.
PART THREE EXECUTION
3.10 WORKMANSHIP
A. The workmanship shall be of the very best; all materials shall
be evenly spread and smoothly flowed on without runs or
sags. Only skilled mechanics shall be employed. All
surfaces to be painted, Including floors. shall be cleaned free
of loose dirt and dust before painting is started, and no
sweeping shall be done near places where paint or varnish
has not dried dust -free. All knots, pitch streaks, and sappy
spots shall first be touched up with shellac where the finish
calls for paint or enamel. All necessary puttying o7 3 of
nail holes. cracks, and similar places shall be done after the
first coat, with putty of a color to match that of the finish.
Puny shall be brought flush with the adjoining surface in a
neat and workmanlike manner.
B. All metal surfaces shall first be washed with 5% Clepo 190 to
remove any dirt or grease before applying matenals. Where
rust or scale Is present 11 shall be sire - brushed or
sandpapered clean and smooth before painting. Shop coats
of paint that become marred shallo be cleaned and touched
up with the primer specified. All galvenrzed metal surfaces
shall be chemically treated with a compound designed for
this purpose and approved by the Architect in accordance
with manufacturer's directions for use, before applying the
first coat of paint
C.
D.
All scratches, cracks, and abrasions in plaster surfaces and
openings adjoining trim shall be repaired as required, than
filled with apaclde or other approved patcshing plaster, flush
with adjoining plaster surfaces and sealed before application
of priming coat
The priming coat on plaster shall be tinted to the approxi-
mate shade of the final coat All suction spots of'Hot Spots"
in plaster or cement after the application of the first coat shall
be touched up before applying the second coat to produce
an even result in the finish coat The Contractor shall secure
color schedules for rooms from the Architect before priming
walls.
E. Projecting mortar shall be removed from lightweight concrete
files, and any mortar joints which need repair shall be
touched up by masonry contractor before paint Is applied.
Surfaces to be stained shall be covered with a uniform coat
of stain and wiped o0 if required. All undercoats of paint and
enamel shall be of the same or approximate shade as the
final coat All woodowrk to be finished with enamel or
3 30
A.
Section 09900 - Painting and Finishing - Page 2 of 4
vamah shag be sanded smooth and 0he surface cleaned before
proceeding with the application of the first coat. Enamel or
varnish finish applied to wood or metal shell be sanded
between coats with fine sandpaper to produce an even, smooth
finish. All coats shall be thoroughly dry before applying
succeeding coats.
F. AK work wfiere a coat of material has been applied must be
inspected by the Architect before are applbtion of the
succeeding cost otherwise no credit for the coat applied will be
given, and the contractor automatically assumes the
responaibirdy to remelt the work in question. The Painting
Contractor will furnish the Architect a report of the particular
coat applied when completed for Inspection and approval to
comply with the above.
G. Tops, bottoms, and edges of doors shall be finished same as
balance of doors after they are fitted by the carpenter. All
closets and the intents, of all painted cabinets shall be finished
the same as nearest of adjoining surfaces unless othennse
shown; insides of drawers shall receive coat of shellac. No
painting shall be done outside in extremely cold, frosty, foggy,
or damp weather or when sand is blowing. Room temperatures
shall be 60 degrees F. or above while finishing mtenors. No
coats of paint shall be applied on either wet or damp surfaces
and in no case unless preceding coat Is dry and hard.
H Where interior or exterior wood and metal are primed in the mill
or shop, the material shall In every case be that specified for
such surfaces and shall be used in accordance with the
manufacturer's directions for the first or prime coat.
I. The painting contractor shall not only protect his work at all
times but shall also protect all adjacent work and materials by
suitable covering or other method dunng the progress of his
work Upon completion of the work, he shall remove all paint
and varnish spots from the floors, glass, hardware, and other
surfaces. He shall remove from the premises all rubbish and
accumulated materials of whatever nature not caused by other
trades and shall leave the work in clean, orderly , and
acceptable condition.
320 PRIMING
A. All exterior frames shall be pnmed upon arrival at site wltah
exterior primer, and interior woodwork which Is to receive either
stain or varnish shall be primed on the back and other
concealed surfaces with a coat of penetrating sealer. All wood
finish which receives paint or enamel shell be primed conpletely
before glazing Is done with primer recommended by
manufacturer for pnmmg surfaces to be finished with these
materials. All trim and molding shall be primed before any
glazing is done.
PAINTING ON METAL
Shop or pnming coat on all structural, omementd, and
miscellaneous Iron and sleet Is specified under these headings.
All parts exposed to view or weather shall receive additional
coats of outside or inside finish by this Contractor as specified.
3.40 RETOUCHING
A. Retouching shall be done where required, whether defects
are due to painter's negligence or due to negligence or
necessities of others. If necessary to preventy retouching
from showing to any extent unacceptable to the Architect
the entire wall, door frame, or other piece of work
Involved shalol be repainted.
3.50 METHOD OF APPUCATION
A The Contractor, at his option, may spray paint (preferably
airless spray) certain areas as outlined below.
1. Ceiling and structural steel In areas without finish
ceilings or where there Is no danger of
contaminating areas.
2. All other areas shall be painted by brush or roller
application.
3. Exceptions to part "2' may be made by the
Architect prior to the Contractor's beginning
work on a given area
3.60 STRUCTURAL STEEL
A. In addition to the shop coat, all exposed' structural steel
shall be cleaned after erection by the following methods:
1. Wire brush to remove slag, dirt or other foreign
matter.
2. Wash surface of structural steel with suitable
maten al where neccessary to remove
contamination from surface. I.e. water to remove
din, 5% water and phosphate solution to remove
oil.
3.70 PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. The various surfaces and areas receiving finishes are indi-
cated on the Schedule of Room Finishes shown on the
Drawings. The desired finishes are shown by code numbers.
The required materials for each code number shown on the
Finish Schedule are specified below under the corresponding
code numbers. Note: Complete coverage is mandatory
regardless of number of coats specified.
1. Exterior Metal (Cade 100):
Including gashing, vents, doors. window tnm, and
grilles (except aluminum):
1st Coat: P & L Noxide One Day Primer
End Coat: P & L Effecto Enamel
3rd Coat: Same as Second
2. Exterior Wood (Code 101):
Including wood doors, screens, and asbestos board trim:
1st Coat P & L Vapex House Paint Primer
2nd Coat P & L Vapex House Paint
3rd Coat Same as Second
3. Intenor Wood (Code 103) Natural Wood:
1st Coat P & L Tonetic Wood Slain
2nd Coat P & L #38 Pale Trim Varnish Gloss
3rd Coat: P & L # 38 Pala Trim Varnish - Gloss -
Satin Dull or Flat
4. Intoner Wood or Metal - Panted Surface, Enamel
(Code 1041:
1st Coat: P & L Interior Trim Primer
2nd Coat. P & L Vitralite Enamel Undercoater
3rd Coat P & L VItralite Enamel - Gloss
- Eggshell - Dull
5. Interior Wood Varnish Surface - Epoxy (Code 105):
Section 09900 - Painting and Finishing • Page 3 of 4
1st Coat P & LTonetic Wood Stain
End Coat P & L Pal Gard Epoxy Clear
3rd Coat Same as Second
6. Interior Gypsum Board, Latex Finish (Code 106)
1st Coat: P & L Latex Pdmer Paint
2nd Coat: P & L Vapex Flat Wall Finish
3rd Coat Same as Second
7. Acoustical Paint - Texture for Ceilings (Code 108):
1st Coat Thoroughly clean surface to be painted
of all forms of oil or other foreign matter, and apply
an approved vinyl primer approved by the
manufacturer and Architect
2nd Coat: Apply by spray equipment 1/8•
Wel -Cote Acoustic. Spray. Apply in compliance with
the menu lecturer's directions. (Manufacturer is
Welco Menu lecturing Co., 8900 Sovereign Row,
Dallas, Texas. Distributed by Specialty Products
Co., Lubbock Texas.)
3rd Coat: P & L Latex Ceiling Flat White
8. Two Component Epoxy Coating for Floors (Code 109):
1st Coat P & L Pal Gard Epoxy
2nd Coat P & L Pal Gard Epoxy and Non -slip
additive Use third coat d necessary. Apply in exact
accord ante with manufacturer's directions
9. Two Component Epoxy Coating for Gypsum Board Walls
Code
1st Coat: P & L Primer Coat as per
manufacturer's requirements. (If Epoxy is over
concrete masonry units, fill block as required by the
manufacturer before 1st Coat is applied)
2nd Coat Two Component epoxies as
manufactured by P & L Co.
3rd Coat: This material Is to be applied according
to manufacturer's recommendations and not to
exceed 300 sq. ft per gallon coat
10. Exterior Masonry and Brick • Painted or Unpainted •
(Coded 111):
Shall receive 5% solution of silicone • water
repellent
NOTE: See Architect for approval of surface prior
to application of coating.
11. Exterior Masonry, Concrete or Stucco (Code 112):
1st Coat: #926 Colorcoat Primer
(Sonnebom- Desoto). Sonnesbom Hydrocide
Colorcoat Apply according to manufacturers
specifications for complete coverage, and apply for
manufacturer's standard five - ylear guarantee.
12. Extenor Masonry, Concrete or Stucco (Code 113):
1st Coat: #926 Sonnesbom Colorcoat Primer.
Senna born Hudrocide Super Colorcoat Apply
according to manufacturers specifications for
complete coverage, and apply for manufacturer's
five-year guarantee on labor and materials. Secure
and deliver to the Archl tact the manufacturers
standard five -year guarantee.
13. Interior Metal, Masonry, Plaster Wallboard, Etc, (Code
1141_
1st Coat: P & L Primafil Block Filler
2nd Coal: P & L All Alkyd Base Flowing Flat
Finish
3rd Coat Same as Second
14. Exterior Metal (Code 120):
First thoroughly clean steel Ito be painted of all 00,
grease, dirt soil, salts, and contaminates by the use of
Steel Structures Paint Council method (SSPC 1.63)
solvent vapor, alkali emulsion, or steam, or any one
of their other methods of cleaning new steel.
1st Coat• Prime with Tnemec Inorganic Zne
Primer (92 Tnemec- Znc)
2nd Coat Tnemec Violins HI - Build Mastic
Comply fully with the manufacturer's
applicabon directions. TNEMEC Company, Inc., North
Kansas City, Missouri 64116, or manufacturer's
representative, Robert S. Kerr, P.O. Box 224,
Oklahoma City, Oklahoma 73101, phone (405)
236 -6679 or (405) 842 -2420.
M. Open Grain Wood Floor (Code 121)•
a Floor shall be sanded after all other trades are
finished. All wood floors shall be sanded with a
heavy power -driven sander. The floors shall be
swept clean. For the that cut the floor shall be
traversed in both directions, going with the grain
of the flooring, using No. 2-1/2 sandpaper.
Follow with No. 1-1/2 sandpaper and than with
No. 1/2, finishing with No. 00 sandpaper. All cuts
shall be made with the grain. Finish sanding
across the stnp will not be permitted.
b. After sanding, th6 Contractor shall sweep all
wood floor surfaces to remove all dust.
Finishing
a. Wood floor shall be finished with Pratt & Lambert
Urethane Varnish Specificabons No 712. Finish
in compliance with the manufacturer's
specifications. Procedure shall be as follows:
Afer proper sanding, floor much be completely
free from sanding dust and perfectly clean.
APPly:
I coat P & L Varmour Filler- sealer
1 coat P & L Tonetic Wood Stain
1 coat P & L Varmour Clear Finish Gloss
1 coat P & L Varmour Clear Finish Satin(ee)
16. Hardwood Closed Grain Wood Floors (Code 122):
Sanding
0. Floor shall be sanded after all other trades are
finished. All wood floor shall be sanded with e
heavy power-dnven sander. The Okoor shall be
traversed In both directions, going with the grain
of the flooring, using No. 2 -1/2 sandpaper.
Follow with No. 1 -1/2 sandpaper and then with
No.1/2, finishing with No. 00 sandpaper. All cub
Finishing
Section 09900 - Painting and Finishing - Page 4 of 4
shall be made with the grain. Finish sanding across
the strip will not be permitted.
b. After sanding the floor. this contractor shall sweep
all wood floor surfaces.
a Floor shall be finished with Hillyard's Trophy Seal
Finish in compliance with the manufacturer's
specifications. Procedure shall be as follows.
After proper sanding, floor must be completely free
from sanding dust and perfectly clean. Apply one
liberal coact Trophy under power machine. Clean
Boor. Mark game fines with Miliyard Gym Marling
Paint (if his a gym floor). Let dry ovemight, or at
least 12 hours.
17. Interior Drywall or Plaster, Latex Finish (Code 123):
1st Coat: P & L Vapex Flat Wall Finish
2nd Coat: P & L Vapex Flat Wall Finish
3rd Coat Same as Second
18. Interior Plaster Wallboard, etc., Enamel Finish (Code
124 :
1st Coat: P & L Lyt - All Double Duty Primer
2nd Coat P & L Stippling Eggshell
3rd Coat Same as Second
19. Interior Metal, Plaster, Wallboard, etc., (Code 125):
1st Coat P & L All Alkyd Base Flowing Flat Finish
2nd Coat Same as First
3rd Coat Same as First
20 Masonry Surfaces (Code 126):
Dan -Tex Flex -Kota, as manufactured by Dan -Tex Products,
1720 John West Road, P.O. Box 18045, Dallas, Texas;
Telephone: (214) 327 -4511.
Apply and strictly comply with the
manufacturer's specifications for whatever surface the
material Is being applied on.
ENO OF SECTION
SECTION 09955 - VINYL COATED FABRIC WALL COVERINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Surface preparation and prime painting.
B. Wall covering.
102 RELATED WORK
A. Section 09900 - Painting. Priming of substrate surfaces.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ANSI /ASTM E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning
Characteristics of Building Materials.
B. FS CCC-W -408 - Wall Covering, Vinyl Coated
C FS L -P -1040 - Plastic Sheets and Strips, Polyvinylfonde.
0. NFPA 255 - Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials.
E. UL723- Tests for Surface Burning Charactens0oo of Budding
Materials.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A Manufacturer. Company specializing in manufactunng
commercial wall fabrics with 3 years experience.
B Applicato: Company specializing in installing wall fabrics
with 3 years experience.
1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable code for flame/fuel /smoke ratings.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of
Section 01340.
B. Indicate on shop drawings, wall elevations with seaming
layout
C. Provide product data on wallcovering and adhesive.
D. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01340.
0. Submit two samples of wall covering illustrating color, finish,
and texture.
F. Submit manufacturer's Installation instructions under
provisions of Section 01340.
G. Submit manufacturer's certificate under provisoes of Section
01340 that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
H. Submit lest reports verifying flame/fuel /smoke rulings, when
tested by UL
1 0 FIELD SAMPLES
Section 09955 - Vinyl Coated Fabric Wall Coverings - Page 1 of 2
A. Provide samples under provisions of Section 01340.
B. Provide athree panel field sample panel, full height Illustrating
installed wall covering, joint seaming technique.
C. Locate where directed.
D. Accepted sample may remain as pmt of the Work
1.08 DELNERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site one week priop to scheduled installation
B Store and protect products In a safe manner.
C. Inspect roll materials on site to verity acceptance.
D. Protect packaged adhesive from temperature cycling and cold
temperatures.
0. Do not store roll goods on end.
1.09 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide continuous ventilation and heating facilities to maintain
substrate surface and ambient temperatures above 60 degrees
F 15 degrees C, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's
instructions.
B. Do not apply adhesive when substrate surface temperature or
ambient temperature is below 60 degrees F 15 degrees C or
relative humidity Is above 40 percent
C. Maintain these conditions 24 hours before, during, and after
installation of adhesive wall covering.
D. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid - height at
substrate surfaces.
1.10 EXTRA STOCK
A Provide 25 lineal feet of each color of wall covenng.
8. Package and label each roll by destination room number, store
where directed.
PART PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Genon by GF Goodrich
B. Guard by Borden
D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01640.
2.02 MATERIALS
B Wall Covering: FS 000- W-408; Type II - medium; Class 2 -
mddew resistant; color selected from manufacturer's standard
color range by Architect
C. Adhesive: Type recommended by wall covering manufacturer
1
1
a application to substrate.
I e bs a Flier. M recommended by adhesive and wall
vmanufacturers; compatible with substrate.
tbs a Primer and Sealer. Alkyd enamel type.
Irm Tnm: Extruded plastic color as selected by
ehiteet
(EcI lON
TION
irlfylat substrate surfaces are prime painted and ready to
calve work and conform to requirements of the wall
vering manufacturer.
illneillne tolerance of surfaces does not vary more than
ss
in l0 feet nor vary at a rate greater than 1 /16lnchRt
ref g of installation means acceptance of existing
de and substrate.
IATION
I cis and smooth irregularities with filter, sand smooth.
ash with Visadium phosphate, rinse and
otmllre; wipe dry.
ndlssy surfaces. Shellac made which may bleed.
move electrical, telephone, and all other wall plates and
vers.
cui clean surfaces free of loose particles.
1ply two coats of primer sealer to substrate surfaces. Allow
dry ghtly sand smooth and Vacuum clean.
11
iply adhesive and wall covenng in accordance with
m1turer's instructions.
• covering in roll number sequence and in pattern
quanta.
zoom edges on flat work table. Do not razor cut on
ps board surfaces.
ply wall covering smooth, without wrinkles, gaps or
eri Eliminate air pockets and ensure full bond to
bs surface. Butt edges tight
trizontal seams are not acceptable.
t le n rn ea within 2 Inches of internal comers or within 6
h extemel comers.
,tall wall covering before installation of bases, cabinets, it a rd or Items attached to or spaced slightly from wall
d Do not install wall covering more than 1/4 inch
to of resilient base.
ocri aces above and below windows, above doors, in
1
Section 09955 - Vinyl Coated Fabnc Wall Coverings - Page 2 of 2
pattem sequence from roll.
J. Where wall covedng tucks into door frama reveals, or metal
wallboard or plaster stops, apply covering with contactadhesive
within 6 inches of wall covering termination. Ensure full contact
bond.
K Insuill termination trim.
L Remove excess wet adhesive from seam before proceeding to
next wall covenng sheet Wipe clean with dry cloth.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Clean wall coverings of excess adhesive, dust, dirt, and other
contaminants.
B Replace wall plates and accessories removed prior to work of
this Section.
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Protect finished Installation.
3.06 SCHEDULE
A. Refer to Drawings of details.
END OF SECTION
PART 1
GENERAL
1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
Altemates - Section 01100
Carpentry - Section 06100
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Section 10100 - Chalkboards, Tackboards, & Projection - Page 1 of 2
SECTION 10100 - CHALKBOARDS, TACLBOARDS, & PROJECTION
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
A. Provide aluminum - framed liquid chalkboards and tackboerds
and loose tackboerde.
B Provide electric projection screens.
1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
Applicable requirements of the General Conditions.
Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements apply
to the work specified in this section.
A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01340
Indicate materials, construction, sizes, locations and
installation details.
B. Samples: Submit samples of liquid chalkboard and
tackbcard for Architect's approval and selection of colors.
C. Manufacturer's Literature. Submit printed technical
specifications, catalog data , product details, recommended
Installation and maintenance instruction in accordance with
Section 01340.
D. Certificates: Submit manufacturer's certificate that matenals
comply with specification requirements.
A. Manufacturers:
1. Products listed are items manufactured by Claridge
Products and Equipment, Inc., and are listed as a
standard of quality.
2. Products listed are Items manufactured by Da -Lite
Screen Company, and are listed as a standard of
quality.
3. Equivalent products of the following manufacturers are
acceptable:
Chalkboards:
Best Gilt, Inc.
Gamco, Inc.
American Desk
Projection Screens:
Bretford Manufactunng, Inc.
Draper Screen Company, Inc.
4. Use single source for liquid chalkboards and
accessories.
1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. Store sheet materials flat on blocking or supports to retain
original shape.
B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature of 55 deg. F.
continuously from 24 hours before installation to 24 hours
after Installation.
1.07 JOB CONDITIONS:
A. Assure adequate ventilation when using adhesives.
1.08 GUARANTEE:
A. Provide written guarantee against material failure for 50 years.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 UGUID CHALKBOARDS:
A. Type: Factory-built, aluminum - framed chalkboard units, LCS
Deluxe Senes.
B. Aluminum Frames: Slip-on trim, extruded, anodized
satin - finished aluminum trim. Trim #502A, #500, and #371.
C. Troughs: Continuous extruded aluminum, manufacturer's
standard boxed -type, with end closures.
D. Map Rads: Map rail with cork Inserts, continuous at head of
liquid chalkboard assembly where scheduled.
E. Liquid Chalkboards: 24 gauge, 24 LCS with 2 -ply
temper - treated hardboard panel construction with 0.005"
aluminum foil backing. Color as selected. Use this liquid
chalkboard unless otherwise shown an the Drawings.
F. Tuckboards: 1/2" thick, aluminum framed, #1550 -EW Fabricork
Vinyl Bulletin Boards, 1/4" vinyl Impregnated washable cork
bonded to 1/4" tempered hardboard. Color as selected.
G. Adhesive: As recommended by manufacturer.
H. Accessones: Provide each framed map rail unit with the
following accessories:
1. One hook clip per foot of map rail length.
2. Two map - winder brackets.
2.02 LOOSE TACKBOARD:
A. Unmounted cork #20 -618 I- 1/4" colored cork - burlap back
Color as selected.
2.03 PROJECTION SCREEN
A. Type: Cosmopolitan projection screens, 60" X 60", electrically
operated 120 volt, 1.13 amp, key operated switch, and glass
beaded.
2.04 FABRICATION:
A. Camelotely fabricate and assemble at factory.
B. Miler comers, trim and grind free of bum and sharp edges.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION:
A Examine the substrates and conditions under which
chalkboards and tackboards are to be Installed. Notify
Contractor in writing of any detnmental conditions. Do not
proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected.
3.02 FACTORY BUILT CHALKBOARD INSTALLATION:
A Install continuous mounting angle at top and bottom of
frames. Fasten angle through drywall surfaces to metal
studs.
B. Hang board on continuous top and bottom mounting angles
and fasten to boards with machlne screws Bond boards to
wall with adhesive as recommended by the manufacturer.
C. Leave boards secure, level and plumb.
3.03 CLEANING:
A. Clean surfaces free of foreign matter and stains.
S. 'Chalk' board surfaces to protect surfaces.
3.04 PROJECT SCREEN INSTALLATION:
A. Install projection screens above lay -in ceiling as detailed on
the drawings. Anchor as per manufacturer's Instructions
END OF SECTION
Section 10100 - Chalkboards, Tackboards, & Projection - Page 2 of 2
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 Reference:
A. Requirements established within the portions of this Project
Manual titled, "Division 1, General Requirements ", are
collectively applicable to Work required of this Section.
1.02 Submittals:
A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating each type
of compartment door specified and all construction and
attachment details of each different type of substrate
material.
B. Samples Required: Submit color chip samples of the
manufacturer's full published range of colors for seloclon by
the Owner.
103 Coordination:
A. Coordinate with mechanical section of the specifications for
location of all plumbing items and other sections of the
specifications for all necessary back -up plates and special
attachment requirements needed for proper installation of
compartments.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 Metal Toilet Pamtions:
A. Toilet Pamhons: Provide ceiling - mounted, overhead braced
poly -mar hd solid plastic toilet enclosures with anti-chin top
bars. Furnish partitions with all aluminum toilet partition
harware & accessories, tissue dispensers and reinforcing for
grab bars and other Items Installed on the partitions.
B. Hardware and Fittings: Doors shall be outfitted with the
manufacturer's standard concealed self-closing gravity door
hinges. All screws and bolts shall be vandalproof.
C Size: See drawings for door sizes required.
0. Accessories: Each compartment door shall be provided with
a concealed latch. stop and keeper, hook and door bumper.
E. Finish: Color shall be selected by the Owner. Maximum of
three colors shall be selected. Only one color will be used
in each toilet room.
F. Panel Type and Manufacturer. Deluca 1000 Series as
manufactured by Santana, P.O. Box 2021, Scranton, Pa.
10501, (717) 343-7921. Provide a 10 year guarantee.
PART 2 EXECUTION
2.01 TOILET PARTITIONS DOORS
A. Installation: Doors shall be erected in a rigid and substantial
manner, straight and plumb, with al horizontal fines level as
detailed on the drawings. Clearance at vertical edges of
doors shall be uniform from top to bottom and shall not
exceed 3/18 inch. Doors shall be out of wind and hardware
SECTION 10160 - TOILET PARTITIONS
Section 10160 - Toilet Partitions Page 1 of 1
shall be carefully adjusted and left in perfect working order.
Finished surfaces shall be cleaned and left free from
Imperfections.
END OF SECTION
PART ONE GENERAL 4. Size: 1.1/2• x 8•
1.10 WORK INCLUDED
- A. Furnish labor and materials to complete miscellaneous spe-
cialties work Indicated, as specified herein.
1.20 SAMPLES
A. Submit samples of work specified herein.
1.30 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submit shop drawings of work specded herein.
1.40 VERIFYING CONDFT1ONS
A. Verify measurements in field as required for work fabricated A. Install name plates attar doors am painted and finished, in
to ht building conditions locations directed by Architect
B. Before starting work examine adjoining work on which work B. Install centered and level, In line, in accordance with the
is an any way dependent for perfect workmanship and fit manufacturer's recommendations.
Do such corrective work to adjoining work as may be
necessary to make perfect in all respects. C Clean and polish
1.50 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Work specified herein: type, quality equal in all respects to
best recognized practice of trade.
B. Materials and fabrication as specified herein are indicative of
construction desired for particular metal specialty. Other
matenals and fabrication methods which, in Architect's
opinion are comparable to those desired will be acceptable,
subject to Inspection and approval of full size sample.
C. Only properly equipped manufacturers who have
manufactured and installed work of same size and character
as that indicated in Specifications for each item will be
considered for this work
1.60 WORKMANSHIP
SECTION 10400 - MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES
A. Insofar as possible, execute fitting, construction, and
fabrication of work at shop, ready for delivery and erection
at building. Give work that cannot be completely fabricated
trail fit; assemble at shop to insure proper, expeditious
assembly at building.
PART TWO PRODUCTS
2.10 ROOM NUMBERS AND NAMEPLATES
A. Type: Signs to be as manufactured by !Croy Signage
Systems, Saint Paul, Minnesota
B. Components
1. Frame: molded from medlum- impact polystyrene,
each frame colored and textured. Color and texture
as selected by Architect
2. Insert Color coordinated polystyrene Inserts
with urethane composition and acrylic -based adhesive
for stability and long hie.
3. Lens: Non glare acrylic lens.
Section 10400 - Miscellaneous Specialties - Page 1 of 1
C. Leaenng
1. Size and Style: 1/2 inch high upper Eurosble E type.
2. Colors as selected by Architect
D. Handicapped Signs: Same as door signage. Content Inter -
nabonal symbol for the handicapped. Size 4• x at
E. Provide a Door Sign at each door. Verify names and numbers
with architect.
PART THREE EXECUTION
3.10 DOOR SIGNAGE INSTALLATION
END OF SECTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
A. Provide metal lockers and benches.
1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
Applicable requirements of the General Conditions,
Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements apply
to the work specified in this section.
1.03 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
Alternates - Section 01100
1.04 SUBMfTALS:
A Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01340.
Indicate matenals, construction, sizes, layout finishes and
installation details.
B. Samples: Submit color chart of manufacturer's standard
finishes for Architect's selection and approval.
1.05 DUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Acceptable Ventilated Locker Manufacturers:
1. Superior, List Industries, Inc.
2. De Brough Manufacturing Company.
1.06 DELIVERY AND STORAGE:
Deliver lockers in factory containers in a manner to prevent
damage. Store in dry , protected area. o6 ground.
1.07 COORDINATION:
PART 2 PRODUCTS
SECTION 10500 - METAL LOCKERS AND BENCHES
Coordinate with other trades for proper spaces and sizes to
prevent cutting and patching.
A. Superior Marquis 'Protector 18924'X60• with flat top.
2.02 BASIC LOCKER MATERIALS:
A. Doors and Frames: Cold -rolled and leveled sheet steel.
B. Other Part: Mild, cold rolled sheet steel.
2.03 STANDARD LOCKER CONSTRUCTION:
A. General: Individual unit construction, each locker having
individual doors, frame, top and bottom with interchangeable
parts.
B. Doors: 16 - gage steel with glanged botdtom and top edges
and vertical side edges formed to channel shape. Provide 3
hinges per single tier door and 2 hinges per double tier door.
Provide standard door louver arrangements.
Section 10500 - Metal Lockers and Benches - Page 1 of 2
C. Handles: Lift-type with polished, plated finish, concealed
padlock eye and integral padlock strike.
D. Locking Device: Quiet, positive automatic spring-actuated
galvanized steel locking channel enclosed by a box formation
on door, engaging with door stoke jamb. Device shall be
pretocking, permitting self- latching without manipulation of door
handle. Provide rubber silencers on door frame.
5. Frame: Formed channel shape sheet steel, 16 -gage. Upnghts
and cross members electrically projection - welded.
F. Body: Fabricate backs, aides. shelves, tops and bottoms from
16- gage sheet metal.
G. Hmgee: 14 -gage steel, five pin knuckle type, projection - welded
to doorframe and fastened to side flange of door, three hinges.
H. Trim and Filler Panels: Provide 18 -gage steel trim at perimeter
of recessed lockers. Provide adjustable front filler angles and
panels and adjustable comer filler required to complete
installation.
' 1 Flat Tops: 16 -gage sheet steel, install In all tickers.
2.04 LOCKER ACCESSORIES:
A. Number Plates: Provide each locker door with satln- finished
aluminum number plate with 3/6P etched black numerals.
Secure with oval slotless head bolts and nut.
B. Hooks: Provide each single -tler and double -tier locker
compartment with 2 wall hooka and one double -prong ceiling
hook, chrome - plated.
C. Shelf: Single -ter lockers shall have one 16 -gage shelf with
rolled front, approximately 12 below top of locker.
D. Recess Trim: 16 gage steel formed 3 ' wide, on recessed
lockets.
2.05 FINISH:
A. Bonderize steel part and finish with a heavy coat of baked
2.01 TYPES: enamel, thoroughly hardened in a baking oven at proper
temperature.
B. Finish intenor body parts of regular and quiet type lockers with
manufacturer's standard interior color.
C. Finish exposed surfaces with manufacturer's standard colors as
selected by the Architect
2.06 BENCHES:
0. Benches shall be made of selected hardwood in 1.5/16"z 9-1/2'
)(length shown on drawings. Benches shall be factory finished.
Provide heavy steel pedestals 6'-0' o 0. maximum.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLTION
1
1
A. Install metal lockers at the locations shown in accordance
I veth approved Shop Drawings and the manufacturer's
Instrucaons for a plumb, level, rigid, and flush installation.
B. Space fastening about 4S' o.c. and apply through suitable
I reinforcing plates where necessary to prevent metal
distortion. Conceal all fasteners wherever possible. Use
suitable anchors to provide secure anchorage Where
lockers are installed against a wall, install 2 continuous 4'
wide strips of 1' thick rigid insulated getween back of locker
1 and face of wall.
C. Install trim pieces to provide a flush, hairline joint against
adjacent sudaoes. Install with concealed bolts.
D., Touch -up any marred finishes, or replace as directed by the
Architect Use only materials and finishes as recommended
or furnished by the locker manufacturer.
E' Adjust doors and latches to operate easily without bind.
Verify satisfactory operation of Integral lolong devices
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
END OF SECTION
Section 10500 - Metal Lockers and Benches - Page 2 of 2
PART ONE - GENERAL
1.10 WORK INCLUDED
A. Toilet and bath accessories listed herein.
B. Rough -in frames supplied to other sections.
C. Attachment Hardware.
1.20 PRODUCT DATA
A. Submit manufacturer's product data
Section 10810 - Toilet and Bath Accessories - Page 1 of 2
SECTION 10810 - TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
C. Shop primed ferrous metals: pretreat and clean, spray apply
one coat primer and bake.
D. Enamel: pretreat to clean condition, apply one coat primer end
minimum two coats epoxy baked enamel.
2.40 FABRICATION
A. Weld and grind joints of fabricated components.
B. Form exposed surfaces from one sheet of stock Tree of joints.
8. Data to illustrate each accessory at large scale and show
installation method.
1.30 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not deliver accessories to site until rooms in which they
are to be installed are ready to receive them.
B. Pack accessories Individually in a manner to protect acces-
sory and its finish.
1.40 PROTECTION
A. Protect adjacent or adjoining finished surfaces and work from
damage during Installation of work of thls Section.
PART TWO - PRODUCTS
2.10 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Bradley Corporation
B. Bobrick Washroom Equipment Inc.
C. The Charles Parker Company.
D American Dispenser
E. Substitutions: Items of same function and performance are
acceptable in conformance with Section 01600.
2.20 MATERIALS
A. Sheet Steel: ASTM A366, cold rolled stretcher leveled; 1.25
or/so/ft/ galvanized coating
B. Stainless Steel Sheet ASTM A167, commercial grade, 22
gauge.
C. Stainless Steel Tubing: ASTM A269, commercial grade,
seamless welded.
D. Fasteners, Screws. and Bolts: hot dipped galvanized.
Expansion Shields: fiber, lead, or rubber as recommended
by accessory manufacturer for component and substrate.
2.30 FINISHES
A. Chrome /nickel plating: satin finish.
B. Stainless Steel: No. 4 satin luster finish.
C. Provide steel anchor plates and anchor components for In-
stallation on building finishes.
D. Form surfaces flat without distortion. Maintain Bat surfaces
without scratches or dents.
E. Back paint components where contact Is made with building
finishes to prevent electrolysis.
F. Hot dipped galvanize ferrous metal anchors and fastening
devices.
G. Shop assemble components and package complete with
anchors and fittings.
2.50 PREPARATION
A Deliver Insert and rough -in frames to jobafte at appropriate
time for building -in. Provide templates and rough -in
measurements as required.
B. Before starting work nolly Architect in writing of any conflicts
detrimental to installation or operation of units.
C Verily with Architect exact location of accessories.
2.60 SCHEDULE OF ACCESSORIES
A. Grab Bars: Bradley Model No. 817. 001 -023 42, with mounting
tat. Provide one set per designated toilet stall.
B Surface Mounted Soap Dispenser. Bradley Model No. 6561.
Provide one per lavatory or base cabinet sink
C. Surface Mounted Towel Dispenser. Bradley Model No. 250.
Provide as shown on the Drawings, minimum one per toilet
room or adjacent to base cabinet sink.
D. Toilet Tissue Holder: Bradley Model No. 540. Provide one per
toilet compartment or toilet room.
E. Stainless Steel Framed Mirror: Bradley Model No. 700.1824.
Provide as shown on drawings.
F. Stainless Steel Framed Mirror. Bradley Model No. 700 -2436.
Provide above each lavatory.
G Stainless Steel Framed Mirror: Bradley Model No. 700 -2424.
Provide as shown an drawings.
H. Unframed Mirror: Install on stainless steel clips, size as shown
on drawings. Provide as shown on the Drawings.
I Coat Hook: Bradley Model 140. 931. Provide at each toilet stall
or toilet room.
J. Broom and Mop Holder. Bradley Model No. 995-4. Provide
two in each Janitor's Closet as shown on drawings.
PART THREE - EXECUTION
3.10 INSTALLATION
A. Install foaures, accessories and Items In accordance with
manufacturer's printed instruction.
B Install true, plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored
to substrate.
C. Use tamper -proof fasteners.
END OF SECTION
Sec tion 10810 - Toilet and Bath Accessories - Page 2 of 2
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
This project involves construction of the project as titled above with
associated site work as shown on the plans and described herein.
1.02 DRAWINGS
Contract drawings are diagrammatic only and do not give fully
dimensioned locations of various elements. Determine exact
locations from field measurements. Refer also to all architectural,
structural. etc., drawings.The lack of specific detail of all offsets,
transitions. etc., shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility to
provide such necessary elements to coordinate his work with
building construction and with other trades.
1.03 BIDDING
All bids must be based only on the equipment and materials as
scheduled on the drawings and as speafied or 011 equivalent
equipment and materials from a preapproved alternative
manufacturer. No bids may be based on a substitute or other
alternative withoutspecitc written prior approval from the Architect
Any Contractor who assumes equivalence of products and who
bases his bid on that assumption, does so at his own dsk.A listing
of approved altemabve manufacturers does not mean that all
products of a particular attemative manufactuere are acceptable
alternatives to the scheduled items; It merely means that for
bidding pnor approval is not required. All futures and devices must
still be submitted according to the prescnbed procedures. In
addition, some Items that have an important visual affect, e.g.
electric water coolers, may be required to receive Architect's or
Owner's approval also.
1.04 INTENT
All equipment materials and labor that may be necessary to
complete work In accordance with the Intent of these plans and
specifications shall be fumished by the Contractor without
additional cost All systems represented In the documents shall,
unless specifically noted to the contrary, be provided and Installed
complete with all necessary components to form a complete and
functioning system. Submission of bids will be considered
confirmation that complete and functional systems have been
Included In the bids. If any discrepancies or confusion Is perceived
in the documents, the Contractor shall call such to the attention of
the Engineer for clanfcation of the documents poor to bidding or
construction. If any Inconsistencies or contradictions within the
constriction documents are discovered after the construction
contracts are awarded, the Architect and /or Engineer shall
determine the intent and correct Interpretation of the construction
documents. Contractor shall supervise and direct the work
competently and efficiently and in accordance with the drawings
and specifications. Contractor shall be responsible for using
construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and
procedures as are compatible with the project's requirements and
writ result in a project completed In accordance with the
requirements of the drawings and specifications.
1.05 CODES, PERMITS AND FEES
This Contractor shall comply with all local, state and national
codes and shall pay for all applicable costs, fees and permits.
Section 15010 - General Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical - Page 1 of 4
SECTION 15010 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL
1.00 EXAMINATION OF SITE
All Contractors submitting proposals for this work shall examine the
site and take into consideration conditions that may affect the work.
No information given on the plans shall relieve the Contractor of this
responsibility. Submission of a bid shall be considered as compliance
with the site examination requirements.
1.07 CONNECTION TO UTILMES
Contractor shall vent' location, size, elevation. pressure, end any
other pertinent data of existing utilities. Additional costs incurred due
to failure to vent' such data and to coordinate associated work with
respective utihy providers shall not be the Owner's responsibility but
shall be borne by Contractor. Alt costs associated with providing
utilities including, but not limited to, connection fees, boring under
roads, etc., shall be Included in the Contractor's bid price whether
such costs are incurred by Contractor or charged by a utility
company. Submission of a bid by a Contractor shall be considered
an acknowledgment by the Contractor of his compliance with this
section. Connect water and waste piping and gas service to existing
services in accordance with utility company regulations and pay all
applicable fees and costs. NOTE: Excavate by hand and with caution
to locate all utilities prior to machine excavation. Should any service
be interrupted, Contractor shall repair it immediately and at no cost
to the Owner.
1.08 VIBRATION AND NOISE
Each of the venous pieces of equipment shall operate without
objectionable vibration or noise. All rotating equipment shall be
statically and dynamically balanced and shall be mounted, supported,
and fastened so that vibration shall not exceed levels specified for the
equipment item. The specific type of vibration isolation to be installed
shall be submitted to the Engineer for his approval. If, in the opinion
of the Architect, Engineer, or Owner, objectionable vibration or
transmission thereof to the building occurs, the Contractor shall
execute remedial measures as may be necessary to eliminate such
unsatisfactory operating conditions. and the work and material
thereby required shall be furnished and performed at the Contractor's
expense.
1.09 GUARANTEE
Each Contractor shell guarantee all labor and matenats fumtshed by
him for a period of one year unless otherwise noted. Guarantee
penod shall extend from the time of final wntten acceptance of the
installation or upon usage by a written directive from the Owner,
whichever occurs firstThe guarantee shall cover the repair or
replacement without additional cost to the Owner, of any detective
material or faulty workmanship.
1.10 SERVICE
All necessary service of each system, such as adjustment of controls,
air distribution, and water balancing valves, mechanical repair of
equipment and other work requiring specialized training, shall be
furnished by the Contractor, at no cost to the Owner, for a period of
one year. concurrent with the warranty period specified above.
1.11 SUBMflTALS
A. Within 10 days after award of the contract, end before orders
are placed, submit specific Information on list of equipment and
principal materiels specified. Give names of manufacturers,
catalog and model numbers, cut sheets. and such other
supplementary Information as necessary for evaluation. Slit
(6) copies, or as directed by the Architect of each shall be
submitted and shall Include all Items mentioned by model
number and/or manufacturer's name in the specifications or
on the drawings, including but not limited to the following:
HVAC - All equipment alr devices, insulation, piping, valves,
controls and other principal materials. Plumbing - Fixtures,
piping systems, valves, insulation, equipment and other
principal materials. Electrical - Fixtures. panels, protective
devices, wiring devices, switches, motor starters,
transformers, conduit, and any other equipment or principal
materials.
8. Requirements
Each submittal shall:
1. bear a stamp or specific written indication that
Contractor has reviewed and approved all submittals
prior to submission to Engineer,
2. have all information deleted by Contractor that pertains
to the means and methods of construction or to the
fabrication, assembly, Installation, or erection process
(approval by Engineer shall not extend to these areas
unless specifically noted by Engineer),
3. be clearly marked as to which specific piece of
equipment Is being submitted, by use of a permanent
marker, stamp, eta, so as to distinguish It from other
pieces of equipment that may occur on the same page,
4. be clearly marked as to which available options are
being submitted that are associated with a piece of
equipment and
5. be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions,
specific performance, materials, and similar data to
enable Engineer to review the proposed equipment
Omission by Contractor of any of the above requirements for
submittals will allow automatic rejection of submittal(s)
without review.
Any submittals received by Engineer that were not requested
shall be retumed without review of any lend.
C. Substitutions
No substitution Is allowable withoutwntten pnor approval per
Architect's procedure, unless the manufacturer is listed on
the Drawings or in the specifications as being a preapproved
alternative manufacturer. Any submittal receivedwithoutsuch
wnaen approval or prior approval is subject to unqualified
rejection. If shall be the Contractor's responsibility to verify
that substituted equipment will fit In space available. The
Contractor's submittal for acceptance of the substitute shall
include a written statement of whether or not such
acceptance would require any subsequent or associated
changes to the drawings or specifications. Any such changes
shall be described in witting, briefly but completely. The
Contractor shall also Include the cost of any such
modifications due to substitution of materials or equipment
for that specified. The cost shall be complete that is, as it
shall include the costs affect on any and all other trades. The
Architect may request shop drawings of mechanical rooms
or systems of the eubsbtuted equipment
D. Installation Instructions
Section 15010 - General Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical - Page 2 of 4
1.13 SAFETY
For certain products or systems as Identified In subsequent
specification sections, the Contractor shall be required to
provide copies of manufacturer's installation instructions with
the submittal. When required as such, the installation
Instructions are considered part of the submittal and their
omission may result in automatic rejection of the submittal.
Where more than one identical devices are scheduled, only one
set of installation instructions needs to be submitted, e.g. if
seven five -ton split system air conditioners are scheduled, only
one five -ton unit installation instructions needs to be submitted.
Similarly, if one set of Installation instructions is identified by the
manufacturer and on the instructions to be applicable to more
than one type or size of devices, e.g. If one set of air
conditioner instructions Is good for three, four, and Five -ton
units, then only one instruction set is required for those devices.
1.12 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
A. Brochures
Prepare four copies, or as directed by the Architect of operating
and maintenance instructions, service manuals, and parts lists
applicable to each Item of equipment furnished. Deliver these
(our bound sets to the Architect for approval. Delivery of
required documents is a condition of Mal acceptance.
Operation and maintenance instructions should include all
nameplate data and design parameters. Clearly distinguish
between information that pertains to the particular equipment
and information which does not,
B. Instructions For Owner
Instruct the Owner's operating personnel in the operation and
maintenance of all mechanical equipment Furnish any special
servicing tools required for maintenance
C. Demonstration
A. demonstration of the installation shall be conducted upon
completion of the work. Prior to this, all work shall have been
completed, tested, balanced, and placed In operation. Qualified
persons must be present at demonstration to operate all
systems and prove the performance of the equipment The
schedule for this demonstration shall be coordinated with the
ArchnectEngineer.
Contractor shall be responsible for Initiating, maintaining, and
supervising all safety precautions and programs In connection with
the work and Contractor shall comply with all laws goveming safety,
specifically the "Occupational Safety and Health Standards "and
the "Saety and Health Regulations for Construction ", state and federal.
1.14 RESPONSIBILITY OF CONTRACTORS
Each Contractor's bid shall include the necessary detail and
interconnection work to coordinate his work with the work of other
trades. Failure on the pan of the Contractor to coordinate with all
other trades resulting in interferences shall be sufficient reason to
require the Contractor to replace or rebuild the work involved at no
extra charge.
1.15 STORAGE OF MATERIALS
Each Contractor shall provide temporary storage facilities suitable for
equipment stored at the job site. Storage facilities shall be min -proof
and lockable as required. Materials or equipment stored on site but
not in a lockable, rain -proof storage facility shall be stored above
ground or above slab. Contractor shall take necessary precautions
to prevent entry of and/or damage from dirt, trash, water, or
vermin. Equipment not property stored and protected shall be, at
the discretion of the Architect/Engineer. replaced ai no cost to
Owner. Roofs are not acceptable storage areas unless specifically
allowed In writing by the Architect
1.16 LABELING
All devices for which Underwriters Laboratory has established a
standard shall have affixed a label Indicating compliance and
listing with Undemmters Laboratory.
1.17 SITE VISIT REPORTS
During the course of the job, the Engineer will make site visits to
observe work in progress and will subsequently prepare a written
site visit report which will be sent to the Architect for distribution to
the General Contractor and whomever else the Architect desires
The General Contractor shall prepare a written and typed response
within seven calendar days of his receiving the site visit report The
General Contractor shall include In his response the following
Information:
A.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
date of site visit by the Engineer
date of receipt of the site visit report
name and title of the preparer of the response,
an item number referenced to the site visit report,
a brief three or lour word descnption of the item,
the Contractor or Subcontractor affected,
the proposed course of action, and
an expected time of completion of the action.
1.18 CUTTING AND PATCHING
No joists, beams, girders, columns, slabs, or other structural
elements shall be cut drilled, or altered in any way by the
Contractor without first obtaining written permission and
Instructions from the Architect
Where it becomes necessary to cut through any non - structural
elements of walls, floors or ceilings to permit the installation of any
work under this contract or to repair any defects that may appear
up to the expiration of the guarantee. such cutting shall be done
by Contractor with as lithe damage as reasonably possible to the
element being cut or to adjacent elements.
After the necessary work has been completed, the damage shall
be repaired by the respective Contractor, who shall pay all costs
of such cutting and patching. All patching or sealing of cuts,
penetration, etc., Including final appearance of same, shall be
done to the approval of the Architect.
1.19 PROTECTION OF TREES OR OTHER SITE VEGETATION
Contractor shall not dig or trench anywhere on site without first
reviewing, and complying with, drawings or written instructions
from Architect as to which sae vegetation is to be protected and
means and methods thereof.
Contractor shall additionally not dig or trench by any means within
the root zone of a protected tree without receiving, and complying
Section 15010 - General Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical - Page 3 of 4
with, drawings or written instructions from the Architect as to
approved methods of digging or other items pertaining to the
protection of trees.
1.20 OPERATING TESTS
A. General
8. Notification
C. Reports
1.
After all mechanical and electrical systems have been
completed and put into operation, Contractor shall subject each
system to an operating test under design conditions to insure
proper sequence and operation throughout the range of
operation. All associated costs of such tests, Including labor,
fuel, apparatuses, piping, etc., shall be borne by the Contractor.
Contractor shall make adjustments as required to ensure proper
functioning of all systems. Special tests on individual systems
are specified under Individual sections. The Contractor shall
return to the project during the first year and in the opposite
season from which the system was Initially operated and shall
check the proper operation of the mechanical and electrical
systems. Contractor shall perform any adjustments or corrective
procedures required for the proper operation of all systems.
Contractor shall give the Architect seven days prior notification
of any test so that the Architect and/or Engineer will have time
to be present if he so desires.
After each test is performed, the Contractor who
performed the test shall prepare and Issue a report to
include the following information:
a. Project name and location, date of the report
b. Contractor's name, address, and telephone
number; if the Contractor performing the test is a
Subcontractor, indicate also for whom the test Is
being performed, their name. address, telephone
number, and a contact person's name,
c the date, or range of dates, of the test,
d. the name of the Contractor's employee who was
responsible for performing or for overseeing the
performing of the test,
e. a brief description of the system being tested,
f. a brief description of the testing procedure,
9.
a summary of the test result(s),
h. a brief assertion that the system was tested as
stated and that the system complied with the
requirements of the contract documents or those of
the Authority Having Jurisdiction, whichever Is the
most amngent and
I. a hand-written date and signature of someone who
has authority or responsibility from the company
that performed test(s), and a hand - written brief note
stating that the above Information is true and
accurate.
2. ti the tested system Ls tested in parts. than one report
may be made after the last part is tested.
3. The report shall be Issued to the Architect within five
working days after the test is completed.
PART 2 PRODUCTS AND WORKMANSHIP
2.01 MATERIALS
4. Such reports shall be required of all mechanical or
electrical systems which require tests for pressure,
water tightness, flow, resistance, or conductivity.
All materials shall be new and of the quality specified. Materials
shall be free from defects. Where manufacturers' names are
mentioned In these specifications or on the plans, t has been
done in order to establish a standard of quality and construction.
Contractor will be responsible for transportation of his materials to
and on the job, and will be responsible for the storage end
protection of his materials and work until the fine) acceptance of
the job. At the end of each work day, each Contractor is
responsible for covering or protecting his work or materials that
may be susceptible to damage even If such damage Is the result
of unforeseen causes, e.g. an overnight thunderstorm. Failure to
do so will be sufficient cause for rejection of any item in question,
and any such item shall be replaced by Contractor at no cost to
Architect Engineer, or Owner.
Contractor shall verify that all pieces of equipment will fit through
avertable openings in building and that all equipment can be
Installed without modification of budding structure.
2.02 WORKMANSHIP
The workmanship shall, in all respects, be of the highest grade,
and all construction shall be done according to the best practices
of the trade. Piping, ducting and conduit shall be concealed unless
otherwise noted, and installed square to the building lines. Any
work not meeting this requirement shall be replaced or rebuilt
without extra expense to the Owner.
2.03 ACCESSIBILITY
A. Access Panels
Access panels shall be provided wherever necessary for
possible future replacement adjustment or maintenance of
operating devices such as machinery, valves, dampers,
switches, relays, etc., or to other critical nomoperating
devices such as pull boxes, inspection pans, gauges, etc.
Such access panels shall be provided and installed by
Contractor, whether or not shown on drawings, and shall be
brought to the attention of Architect for his approval of type,
color, etc. Where access Is provided in fire rated members,
the access panels shall be of a type that maintains the
Integrity of the member penetrated.
B. Access to Equipment
All pipes, tubing, conduit etc, including, but not limited to,
domestic cold water and hot water piping, waste and vent
piping. drain piping of any type, electrical conduit wiring not
in conduit and refrigerant tubing shall be installed in such a
way so as not to prevent and/or not to make unreasonably
difficult the removal operation, use, or maintenance of
equipment access panels or doom, pathways (especially in
attics or crawl spaces), observation ports, measurement or
balancing devices, junction boxes, etc..
If access for these purposes Is prevented or made
unreasonably difficult In the opinion of the Architect or
Section 15010 - General Requirements for Mechanical and Electrical - Page 4 of 4
Engineer, then the Contractor shall make modifications or
repairs at no cost to anyone except the Contractor. Such
modifications or repairs shall be considered neither complete
noradequsteuntl theArchdectand Engineeraresatisfedthat
access for the above Purposes is achieved.
PART 3 RECORDS FOR THE OWNER
Deliver to the Architect three approved bound volumes containing the
following Information and drawings:
A. Certificates of acceptance from inspecting authorities.
B. Waiver of all liens.
C. Warranties, guarantees, and manufacturer's directions of
equipment and materials covered by the contract
D. Cerbfixtion letter from each Contractor certifying that all
systems furnished and Installed by that Contractor and/or
Subcontractors is started -up, balanced, adjusted and checked
for proper operation In accordance with the intent or the
contract documents.
E. Acceptance Letter from each Contractor with blanks for date of
acceptance and date of expiration of warranties and guarantees.
F. Approved submittal data
G. Other data and drawings required during construction.
H. Repair pans list on major equipment
"As built' drawings showing routing of duct. pipe, conduits, etc.
Approval of the "as -built. drawings by the Engineer shall be for
content only, and responsibility for the accuracy of these
drawings shall remain solely with the Contractor.
This data is a requirement for final acceptance and payment of
the project
END OF SECTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
Provide and install all labor and materials necessary for basic
materials and methods as shown on the plan and specified herein.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A.
6.
0
E.
2.02
A.
Piping materials shall be in conformance with details shown
on the Drawings or as specified in the Pipe Specifications in
this Section. Valves shall be as specified or approved
equivalents. Unless otherwise specified, valve packing shall
be the manufacturers standard for the intended service.
Carbon steel piping to be exposed to earth backlit!, shall
have a factory applied exterior protective coating of coal tar
enamel, fait wrap and cover wrap of kraft paper in
accordance with AWWA 0203. Protection for bare extenor
surfaces of field joints. fittings, specials and short lengths of
pipe shall be as follows: clean rust, paint, chalk, or foreign
material from surfaces to be coated by sandblasting or wire
brushing. Heat surface with torch to remove moisture, prime
with 'TO Prime coat' by the Tapecoat Company by brush or
spray, and apply Tapecoat's Tapecoat 20 in accordance
with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Close but nipples and bushings are not permed.
Pipe size changes shall be made with bell reducers.
Bullhead or sphter tees are not permitted.
PIPING MATERIALS
Piping materials for the following services shall be:
Domestic Water
1. Type 'L' hard drawn copper pipe with solder type
wrought copper joined with 95/5 solder. Solder shall
contain no lead
2. Where shown, lines below slab shall be Type K soft
copper ran without fittings below slab.
3. Install all domestic water lines outside the building a
minimum of 8 inches below the frost line, or 18 inches,
whichever is greater.
B. Sanitary Wate and Vent
SECTION 15050 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
1. Within five feet of the building line
a. Above ground
O no-hub cast iron pipe, fittings, and
coupling assemblies designed and
manufactured in accordance with 301
Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute Standard
n sizes 1 -1/4 inches and smaller may
be Type L hard drawn copper with
DWV fittings
Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods - Page 1 of 5
b. Below ground
9) hub and spigot cast Iron pipe and
fittings designed and manufactured in
accordance with ASTM A74-62 with
compression gaskets per ASTM 564-70
size 1 -1/2 Inches and smaller may be
Type L hard copper joined with lead -free
solder with 0W/ fittings.
2. Beyond five feet of building line below grade sanitary
waste may be PVC, Schedule 40. ASTM 01785.82. It is
the Contractor's responsibility to verity with the local
authonty having jurisdiction that plastic pipe is permissible
locally and to ascertain whether the authonty has any
special requirements or standards for installing the plastic
pipe.
3. Install all sanitary lines outside the building a minimum of
6 inches below the frost line or 18 inches, whichever is
greater.
C Condensate Drain - Type M copper with solder type wrought
copper fittings.
D Natural Gas
Q)
1. Within 5 feet of building line:
a. Steel or wrought-iron pipe complying with Amencan
National Standard for Wrought -Steel and
Wrought -Iron Pipe, 636.10, with steel or malleable
iron fittings. Underground piping outside of building
shall be same as above with PVC or tape coating
with coated joints.
b. In sizes 1/2 -Inch and less, and when approved by
the Administrative Authority, yellow brass
(containing not more than 75% copper) with yellow
brass fittings, may be used.
2. Beyond five feet of building line and underground:
a. plastic pipe or tubing and fittings manufactured In
compliance with ASTM 02513 -70 and the following:
O PVC 1120, 1220, 2110 -ASTM D- 1784 -69
Q) PE 2306, 3306 - ASTM D1248-70a
b. At Contractor's option, ASTM 2513D -2306
polyethelene pipe with tracer wire similar and equal
to NIPAC may be substituted.
c. The use of plastic pipe as mentioned above Is
permissible only if its use is approved by the Meal
authority having jurisdiction and also by the local
gas utility company. It Is the Contractor's
responsibility to verify the approval of these two
entities before he orders. purchases, receives, or
installs any of the plastic pipe.
E. Refrigerant Piping
1. Hard Copper
a. Piping shall be Type K or L, in conformance with
ASTM B-88, except that copper tubing with outside
diameter of one - fourth (1/4) and three eights (3/8)
inch shall have a minimum nominal wall thickness
of not less than thirty thousandths (0.030) inch and
thirty -four thousandths (0.34) inch, respectively.
b. Refrigerant piping shall be routed in as straight a
line as passible, minimizing both length and
changes in direction. Changes in direction shall be
made with one or more 45 degree elbows. Where 90
B. Provision for Insulation
degree toms cannot be avoided, such toms shall
be made with long radius elbows.
2. Soft Copper
Soft annealed copper tubing In confoim`anbe with
ASTM 0-280 may be used In sizes three - fourths (3/4)
Inch and smaller 0 such tubing is protected from
damage from exterior sources by encasement In iron
or steel conduit or by other approved methods.
Protection is not required for tubing entirely within a
machine cabinet casing such as a condensing unit or
air handler or for connections between condensing
units and the nearest riser box provided such
connections do not exceed six (6) feet in length.
2.03 VALVES
Unless otherwise approved, valves shall be as follows:
A. Plumbing Valves
2.05 UNIONS
1. All valves in copper water lines shall conform to the
following schedule, unless noted otherwise. Valves 2
1/2 inches and larger shall have sweat- to-thread
adapters where specified sweat connection. Type 2"
and smaller 2 1/2 and larger Shut-off Valve Ball,
Bronze, Gate, Bronze, Jenkins 902 -A 150 psi, Jenkins
47 -U, Check Valve NIBCO 5.480 Non -Slam, Iron
Spring- Loaded, Body,Aluminum In -Una Bronze Plates,
Bona -N Seal, 125 psi, MISSION DUO -CHECK 11
2. All valves In metallic pipelines shall be as follows,
unless noted otherwise:
Type 2 and smaller 2 1/2" and larger
Shut-Off Valve Ball, Bronze, Butterfly, Iron,
Jenkins 901 -A Bronze Oisc,Buna -N Liner, Lug Type,
200 psi, Up to 8'- Lever Operation, 8' and Up -Wheel
Oper., Jenkins 642BL or 6428G.
Check Valve NIBCO T'480 Non -Slam, Iron
Spnng - Loaded, Body, Aluminum
In - Une Bronze Plates,
Bona -N Seal,
125 psi, MISSION
DUO -CHECK 11
Gas Valve Ball, Bronze, Lubricated Plug,
WOG„ 175 lb. WOG.,C.I. Jenkins 90t -A Wrench
Operated, Walworth 1796
3. All valves installed underground shall be Installed In a
concrete valve box with a cast iron cover unless noted
otherwise. Box cover shall have the word 'WATER' cast
Into metal.
All valves installed in pipes that are to receive Insulation shall
have provisions to accommodate the insulation, such as
extended length bonnets or handles, without compromising
the Insulation in anyway (such as reducing its thickness,
compressing It, eta).
2.04 ESCUTCHEON PLATES AND EXPOSED DRAIN NIPPLES
Contractor shall provide and Install escutcheons around all pipes
passing through walls, ceilings, cabinets, and floors In finished
areas. Escutcheon shall be chrome -plated cast brass with set
screw.
Contractor shall provide and install unions for piping connections
on each side of all equipment control valves and at other points
Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods - Page 2 of 5
where shown on the Drawings. Unions shall be flanged or 150pound
malleable' iron with ground bronze seat. Dielectric unions shall isolate
dissimilar metals (e.g., copper and ferrous piping) and shall be equal
or equivalent to WATTS Series 3000. Ali valves with threaded
connections, regardless of size, shall have as aminimum one union
near to one size of the valve.
2.06 FLUES AND VENTS (METAL -FAB, METALBESTOS, OR
APPROVED EQUIVALENT)
Flues and vents for conveying products of combustion from fuel
burning apphancea shall be U.L fisted and of a material and type as
required by the appliance manufaoturer. Single walled flues and vents
shell not be used without the written permission of the Architect
Engineer, and Owner. Vent connectors and all fittings shall be of the
same material and type as the flue or vent pipe. U.L listed
pressure -rated systems such as Metal -Fab Model PIC or Metalbestos
Model PS shall be provided and installed when required by appliance
manufacturer.
Flues and vents shall terminate with a U L fisted cap (birdprof where
available In smaller sizes) by the same manufacturer as the flue or
vent pipe. Contractor shall also provide and install a conical roof
flashing and storm collar by the same manufacturer at each flue or
vent termination.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION OF PIPING
A. Piping systems shall be fabricated and Installed in accordance
with ANSI 631.1. The sizes, locations and slopes shall be as
shown on the Drawings or as required by this Specification.
B. Burrs shall be removed from meting threads In threaded piping
before assembly. Pipe shall be reamed to the nominal Inside
diameter after cutting. Inner surfaces of all pipes, valves, and
fittings shall be smooth, clean and free from metal chips, sand,
debns and dirt when erected.
C. All joints in threaded piping systems shall be made with Teflon
Tape or Joint sealant of the non -toxic type. Tape or sealant shall
be applied to male threads only.
D. All piping systems shall be kept clean during all phases of the
work Once fabrication has started on any length of pipe, the
open ends of piping shall be kept plugged or capped when
erection is not in progress to prevent the entry of dirt and other
foreign material. The ends of spare lines shall be left capped or
blind flanged when erection has been completed.
E. All underground piping shall be installed in conformance with
the excavation and backfill portion of this section.
F. Reports for operating tests, as described herein, shall be
prepared and issued in conformance with the requirements of
Section 15010. Similar reports shall additionally be prepared
and issued for procedures of cleaning, flushing, chemical
treatment, and disinfection, on any system Including, but not
limited to, domestic water lines, gas lines, and circulating water
systems.
3.02 VALVES
A. Valves, accessories and equipment shall be installed as shown
on the Drawings. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal,
not inverted.
B. Valve shall be Installed so that adjacent piping will not
interfere with:
1. access to and operation of the valve operating
mechanism, or
2. access to and use of atodllary devices such as
pressure and /or temperature ports.
3.03 FLUES AND VENTS
A. General
8. Routing
C. Pitch
Listed nue and vent systems shall be installed in compliance
with the manufacturer's instructions regardless of general
requirements listed herein or shown on the Drawings.
The Drawings are schematic only and cannot foresee all
possible constraints to the nue or vent installation Actual
installation of a flue or vent shall be such that short turns or
other constructional features, which would create excessive
resistance to the now of combustion gases, are avoided.
Unless absolutely required and approved by Architect, offsets
shall not be made except with manufactured fittings of 45
degrees or less. Each onset shall be supported for Its weight
and shall be Installed to malntaln proper clearance, to
prevent physical damage, and to prevent separation of the
joints.
Each flue or vent shall be installed with a continuous rise of
1/4 inch per foot from the appliance being vented and with
no dips or sags.
D. Termination
1 Flues and vents shall extend through a roof surface,
through a conical flashing with storm collar, and
terminate in a listed cap. A type 8 or BW vent 12 inch
and smaller shall terminate at a distance above the
roof where It passes according to the following
schedule provided that the vent termination is not less
than eight feet from any vertical wall:
Min. Hgt from Roof
to Lowest Discharge
Roof Slope Opening, Feet - Inches
Flat to 7/12 1-0
Over 7/12 to 8/12 1-6
Over 8/12 to 9/12 2-0
Over 9/12 to 10/12 2-6
Over 10/12 to 11/12 3 -3
Over 11/12 to 12/12 4-0
Over 12/12 to 14/12 5-0
Over 14/12 to 16/12 6-0
Over 16/12 to 18/12 7-0
Over 18/12 to 20/12 7-6
Over 20/12 to 21/12 8-0
A Type B or BW vent 14 inch and larger or one that
terminates less than eight feet from a vertical wall shall
terminate not less than two feetabove the highest point
where the vent pe•ean through the roof and at least
two feet higher than any portion of a budding within ten
feet
Any gas vent that extends above a roof more than five
feet shall be securely guyed or braced in at least three
locations per Instructions from Architect
Each forced -draft or Induced -draft system exit terminal
E. Support
F. Testing
Section 15050 - Basin Materials and Methods - Page 3 of 5
shall be located as follows:
a. not less than twelve inches from any opening
through which combustion products could enter the
building,
b. not less than two feet from an adjoining building,
and
c. not less than seven feet above grade when located
adjacent to public walkways.
Flues and vents shall be securely supported. Lateral runs shall
be supported at not more than five -foot intervals. Vertical runs
shall be supported at the bottom and at every eight to ten feet
Vents may not be supported by the flashing collar. Tees shall be
used for horizontal to vertical fittings and the teas shall be
supported on sheet metal plates or brackets.
The draft pressure In the flue or vent shall be measured and
reported as part of the start -up procedure for the appliance
being served. If the draft pressure is outside the range as
required by the appliance manufacturer, Contractor shall take
measures at no costs to anyone else to Increase or decrease
the draft pressure.
3.04 ACCESSIBILITY
Contractor shall provide and install access panels where required by
Codes or for easy access to any above floor service such as valves
which may normally require maintenance. Access panel shall be
submitted to Architect for approval, but in general, the panel shall be
square, either stainless steel, chrome - plated bronze, or prime coated
as preferred by Architect, large enough to permit service of the
device, either flush or face-of-wall mounting as preferred by Architect
with anchonng method appropriate for the well into which it is to be
Installed, and secured with vandal -proof screws. Product shall be Jay
R. Smith 4730 or 4735, Karp Type DSC, or approved equivalent
3.05 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Hanger: and supports for non-copper or for Insulated
copper pipes and lines shall be of iron or steel consisting of
rods, rings or clamps, attached to the building structure utilizing
metal clamps and inserts manufactured for that purpose. See
Drawings for special details. No wire or perforated tape shall be
used In the hanger system.
Uninsulated copper pipes and lines shall be supported per
Section 15400, 'Water Piping
8. Hanger Steel: The Contractor shall furnish and install all
necessary steel framing required to support hangers.
C. Hanger Rod Diameter & Spacing:
Maximum
Hanger Spacing
Pipe Rod Steel Copper
Size Dia Pipe
Up to 3/43/876
13/877
1 -1/4 3/8 8 8
1- 123/899
2 3/8 10 10
2-1/2 1/2 10 10
3121212
3-1/2 12 12 12
4 to63/41412
D. Vertical piping shall be supported and braced to keep the
pipe in alignment and cany the weight of the pipe and
contents. Support risers at each Boor with strap pipe clamps
having adequate bearing on the Boor slab or bane.
E. Horizontal Piping:
1. Cast Iron soil pipe shall be supported at oath section.
2. Where piping runs In multiple and at the same level,
trapeze hangers shall be installed.
F. Insulated piping shall be supported as described under
Insulation Secuon 15250.
3.06 SLEEVES
4. Location: The Contractor shall furnish and Install sleeves at
all pipe penetrations of walls, partitions, floors or roofs except
for penetrations for individual plumbing fixtures.
B Sleeves through masonry walls and floors shall be Schedule
40 galvanized Iron.
C. Where pipes pass through exterior walls the annular space
between the pipe and sleeves shall be thoroughly caulked or
sealed to provide water tight or air tight closure Caulk
and/or sealant material shall be as specified by Architect
Contractor shall submit proposed product to Architect for
approval per regular submittal instructions.
D. Sleeves shall be sized to provide a minimum of 1/2 Inch
space between the pipe and sleeve. Where Insulated piping
Is indicated, a minimum clearance of 1/2 inch shall be
provided between the insulation jacket and the sleeve.
E. Pipe sleeves through floors shall extend two Inches above
the finished floor.
3.07 UNDERGROUND PIPING
A. Excavation
1. Where drawings require concrete or other materials to
be placed against undisturbed earth surfaces, any
loosened or disturbed materials abed be removed from
such surfaces.
2. Excavahon within 4 feet of underground gas, telephone
and power lines, etc., shall be done by hand digging
only.
B. Trenching
1. Trenches shall be of sufficient size to permit handling
of pipe and accessories and making connections. For
cast iron pipe installation, sheeted or unheated trench
bottom width shall exceed bell or coupling diameters
by 01 10as1 12 Inches.
2. Trenches in rock soil containing rocks larger than 2
inches in any dimension, and other non - uniform
materials, shell be excavated to adepth of 4' minimum
and 12 inches mawmum, below the bottom of the pipe
to provide for a bedding course.
C. Preparation of Trench Bottom
1. Trenches shall be dry when the trench bottom Is
prepared. A continuous trough shall be pared,
D. Laying Pipe
E. Backfilling
Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods - Page 4 of 5
excavated or compacted to receive the bottom quadrant
of the pipe bane. A bedding course is not required In sot
containing rocks not larger than 2 inches In any
dimension Where the bedding course is not required, the
trench bottom shall be undisturbed earth; loose or
disturbed material shall be removed and the trench
bottom shall be brought up to grade with sand or 1/2
inches minus select material compacted. In addition, for
bell joint pipe, the bell or coupling shall be so exeavated
that the pipe will bear on the trench bottom along the
entire length of the barrel.
2. Preparation of the trench bottom shall be carefully made
SO that when placed in its final position, the pipe will be
true to line and grade and uniformly supported.
3. If the excavation is carded below the finished grade of the
pipe In order to remove unsuitable material or for any
other reason, the trench shall be bacIdilled to within 4
inches of the finished grade of the pipe bottom with
load - bearing backfill. A bedding course shall be placed
over the load- bearing backfill. It shall consist of coarse
sand or 1/2 Inches minus select material placed and
compacted and shaped to receive the pipe as specified
above.
1. All pipe shall be clean at the time it is placed in the line.
During the times when pipe laying is not in progress, the
open ends of pipe sections already in place shall be
tightly plugged to prevent the entrance of trench water,
mud, dirt or other foreign substances.
2. The trench bottom shall be kept free of frost, frozen earth
or standing water at the time of pipe laying and jointing.
1. Trenches shall be partially backfilled immediately after the
pipe is laid therein (unless other methods for anchoring
pipe are provided), with joints left exposed for hydrostatic
testing. Water shall not be permitted to rise in unbackfilled
trenches after pipe has been placed.
2. Trenches shall be cleaned of organic material, roots,
trash, lumber, other debris and frozen material prior to
backfilling.
3. Material for backfill shall contain no organic material,
roots, trash, lumber, other debris or frozen material.
4. Backfilling by means of sluicing or flooding with water Is
not permitted.
F. Backfill Material
1. Non - load - bearing
a. Non - load- beanng backfill material shall contain no
rocks larger than 8 Inch In any dimension.
b. Placement of non - load - bearing backfill in trenches
shall be as follows:
In trenches within 25 feet of buildings and in
trenches which traverse areas designated on the
drawings to be reshaped or Inches thick (loose
measurement), each layer shall be compacted full
width, by at least one pass of a vibratory or rammer
type compactor. The material shall he left mounded
approximately 1' for each foot of backfill depth, to a
maximum of 3' higher than the surrounding terrain.
2. Load - bearing
a. Materials for load - bearing backfill shall consist of
select material containing no rocks larger than 4
Inches in any dimension.
B. System Testing
3.09 HVAC BALANCING
b. All load - besting ball matenais and procedures
shall be approved by or through the Architect
G. Ba tdillitg Around Pipe
1. Backfill material under the bottom quadrant of the pipe,
around sides, and up to a point one foot above the top
of the pipe shall be:
a. For cast Iron. wrought Iron and steel pipe: sand
or select material containing rocks no larger than
2 inches in greatest dimension
b. For alt other pipe: sand or select material
containing rocks no larger than 1 Inch in greatest
dimension.
2. Sand or select bacll material under the bottom
quadrant, around sides and up to a point one foot
above the top of the pipe shall be placed and
compacted.
3. Backlit' shall be brought up evenly on both sides of the
pipe simultaneously to avoid damage or displacement
from unbalanced loading.
4. Joints in pipe lines shall not be covered with bacll
until pressure and leak testing is completed.
3 00 HVAC TESTING, AND ADJUSTING
A. Testing HVAC Piping. General
1. Perform tests and adjustments for all mechanical
systems as required by code and as required to Insure
proper and safe operation of all equipment in
preparation of balancing by others.
2. Contractor shall give the Architect not less than 3 days
notice prior to scheduling of tests.
3. Contractor shall test all piping, valves. fittings,
specialties, and equipment furnished under this
contract to assure their tightness, capacity, quiet
satisfactory operation and freedom from defects. Pipe
testing shall be performed after flushing, except for
buried tines.
4. Tabulated results of all tests shall be submitted to
Architect per 'OPERATING TESTS' requirements in
Section 15010.
1. After systems have been completed, In addition to all
tests and balancing required, Contractor shall test and
operate each of systems for not less than 3 working
days. Contractor shall assume all responsibility for
safety during this operatlnn.
2. Motors, fans and other appliances shall be tested and
adjusted during this period. Should systems require
additional work after this test period, the Contractor
shall continue to run systems continuously for such a
period as may be necessary to complete the
adjustment of all parts of plant and until all parts of
plant are properly adjusted. Instructions to Owner, as
required in these specifications, may be made at this
time.
A. Preparation for Balancing of Systems
1. Final balancing of the HVAC systems shall be
performed by a certified technician as outlined
elsewhere in the specifications.
2. The Mechanical Contractor shall complete the
Section 15050 - Basic Materials and Methods - Page 5 of 5
Installation, operate and test all HVAC systems to ensure
they are operating properly and shall perform all other
itemsas described to assist the technician in performing
the balancing, testing, and adjusting of the tWAC systems.
END OF SECTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
A Furnish all labor and matenais necessary for the complete
Installation of thermal Insulation on all hot and cold surfaces
which require insulation for heat or cold conservation,
comfort and safety of occupants, efficiency or ease or
operation, or to prevent condensation or ddpping.The
insulation shall be complete and effective through out the
building.
B. All work shall be performed In a neat and professional
manner by a Contractor or Subcontractor regularly engaged
in the Insulation geld. The Mechanical Contractor shall be
responsible for the bidding and execution of this work
1.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A All insulation inside the building shall have composite
(Insulation, jacket or lacing, and adhesive or cement used to
adhere the jacket to the Insulation) game -spread rating of 25
or less and smoke-developed rating of 50 or less as tested
under procedure ASTM E-84 and NFPA 255.
B.
C.
D.
Insulation with a less stringent flame and smoke rating may
be used only with the written permission of the Architect
Insulation products that meet the 25/50 rating requirement
but that melt and dnp flammable products are not
acceptable.
Accessones such as adhesive, mastic, cements, and cloth for
fittings shall be permanently fire and smoke resistant
Chemicals used for treating paper in jacket laminates shall
be unaffected by water or humidity.
All adhesives, sealers. vapor barrier coatings, eta., shall be
compatible with materials to which they are applied and shall
not corrode, soften, or attack such materials in either the wet
or dry state. Unless otherwtse approved, all adhesives,
sealers, coatings, mastic, etc., shall be water based.
Thermal insulation shall be applied where needed, Including
but not limited to the following systems:
1. Domestic Cold Water
2. Domestic Hot Water Supply and Return
3. Condensate Drainage
4. Refrigerant Suction
5. Ductwork
6. Equipment As described herein
E. Any equipment or devices mentioned specifically in this
section or any equipment or devices Installed by the
Mechanical Contractor that can have or cause temperatures
Mw enough to cause condensation shall be adequately
insulated and vapor sealed. If equipment devices, or
required Insulation product is not specifically mentioned in
this section or shown on drawings. the Contractor Is required
to request and obtain wntten instructions from the Engineer.
If condensation should occur due to Inadequate or missing
insulation and/or vapor sealing, such damage. including
damage to other affected property or building elements, shall
be repaired by Contractor at no cost to the Owner.
SECTION 15250 - THERMAL INSULATION
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPING INSULATION
A General
1. Insulation shall be one place molded fiberglass with a
factory applied all service vapor bamer jacket composed
of kraf-teinforced foil. Insulation, with or without jacket
shall meet the requirements of ASTM C547, Class 1 and
2. Composite shall be rated by the manufacturer for use
on hot or cold surfaces, either exposed or concealed,
from -20 to +450 degrees F. Jacket shall conform to
ASTM 596 with a permeability not exceeding 0.02 perms.
Insulation shrinkage shall be less than 0.5% per ASTM
C356. The Insulation shall be sized by the manufacturer
and correctly provided and Installed by the Contractor to
fit both the nominal pipe size and also the pipe matenal,
I.e. ferrous versus non - ferrous. Thermal conductivity shall
be no greater than 0.27 BTU in./hr/sq. ft/deg. F at a
mean temperature of 75 degrees F. Jacket sealing
system shall be a double self - sealing lap type with
pressure - sensitive adhesive on both surfaces that come
in contact, which shall provide positive closure and vapor
sealing of longitudinal joints. Product shall be SSL -II by
Owens /Coming or approved equivalent
2. Fittings, Including but not limited to, short and long
radius ells, toes, reducers, traps, valves, (except HVAC
control valve) shall be insulated with factory made,
one - piece, pre - molded high impact PVC covers with
precut fiberglass insulation inserts. Acceptable products
are Snap•Form by Certainteed, Knauf Fitting Cover
System, Zeston 2000 by Manville, or approved
equivalent
3. Piping Exposed to Weather- Provide jacket 010.016 thick
aluminum with longitudinal z -jant similar to J -
"metal -lok". Secure with out holding band. On pipe sizes
6 inches and above, aluminum Jacket may be secured in
place with screws 4 inches on center. Apply aluminum
jacket continuously at all fittings including ells, tees,
reducers, etc..
B. Thickness
1. Piping Indoors
Service Pipe Size Min. Thickness
Domestic Cold 1" and smaller 1/2 Inch
or Hot Water
1 -1/4' and larger 1 inch
Cold All sizes 1/2 inch
Condensate
Refrigerant 1" and smaller 1/2 inch
Suction 1 and larger 1 inch
2. Piping exposed to ambient and conveying water shall
have minimum 2 inch thick insulation.
2.02 DUCT WORK INSULATION
A. External Insulation
Section 15250 - Thermal Insulation - Page 1 of 2
Insulation shall be foil faced 2 inch thick duct wrap, 1.0 Ib /cu.ft
density, k•factor 0 35 or less and a fail•skrim •kmft composite
vapor bamer. Insulation shall be CertainTeed Standard Duct
Insulation, Manville R -Sens Microlite, or approved equivalent
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PIPING INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. General
C. Pipe
1. Insulation shall be applied after the surfaces have
been thoroughly cleaned and dry and all piping has
been tested and proven 51910.
2 All insulation shall be continuous through wall and
ceiling openings and sleeves (except at openings for
tire, smoke, or fire /smoke dampers). Insulation on all
cold surfaces, where vapor bamer jackets are used
must be applied with a continuous unbroken vapor
seat Hangers, supports, anchors, etc., that are
secured directly to cold surfaces must be adequately
Insulated and vapor sealed to prevent condensation.
Where insulation is discontinued, special care shall be
taken to taper the insulation to the pipe to allow for
vapor barrier to completely seal off end of the
insulation.
B. Supports
1. Metal shields shall be applied between hangers or
supports and the pipe insulation. Shields shall be
formed to fit the insulation and shall extend minimum
up to the center line of the pipe. A full coat of
Insulating sealer shall be applied to the surface of the
insulation in contact with the metal shield. The metal
shields shall conform to the lollowing chart
Pipe Size Metal Gauge Length of Shield
1/2' to 3 20 90.12
4' and up 16 ga16"
2. At each support, on pipes sizes 3 inches and larger,
Contractor shall provide and install a high density
Insulation Insert to carry the weight of the pipe. Insert
shall be premolded to fit the pipe size, shall cover the
bottom half of the pipe, and shall be one Inch longer
at each end than the sheet metal shield. For pipes that
are not susceptible to condensation such as heating
water pipes, domestic hot water pipes, etc., the high
density insulation insert material shall be calcium
silicate, periite, urethane, or cellular glass. On pipes
that are susceptible to condensation such as chilled
water pipes. domestic cold water pipes. etc., the high
density insulation material shall be urethane or cellular
glass.
1. Circumferential self - sealing strips shall be applied to
all butt joints to form a positive closure.
2. On all premolded fiberglass insulation with self - sealing
adhesive strips, Contractor shall apply outward
clenching staples along the longitudinal strip, on 12
inch centers.
3. For Insulation on pipes carrying cold fluids where a
vapor barrier is required, Contractor shall additionally
apply a mastic along the entire longitudinal strip,
taking care to completely cover and seal the staples,
and along the circumferential strip at butt joints,
completely covering the adhesive strip and at least 3/4
inch on each side of the strip. Mastic shall be
HARDCAST "FLEX -GRIP, RECTORSEAL "AIR LOCK",
or approved equivalent
D. Fittings
Section 15250 - Thermal Insulation - Page 2 of 2
On pipes carrying warm or hot liquids, the fitting covers may be
secured with tacks or snaps with the butt joints taped at the
pipe insulation. On pipes carrying cold liquids, the fitting covers
shall receive a vapor beater sealant similar to that in 'Pipes'
above.
E. Domestic Cold and Hot Water Piping
Domestic cold and hot water mains and runouts shall be
insulated as outlined above. Water lines Inside interior partitions
to single fixtures are not required to be Insulated, provided such
HMS are not subject to freezing temperatures and provided
such runouts are not on extenor walls.
F. Cold Condensate Drain Lines
Insulate and continuously vapor seal each cold condensate
drain and drain lino from the point where it attaches to a fan-coil
unit, air handier, or other device until it discharges Into a floor
drain, hub dram, or other device. The insulation and vapor seal
shall run continuously around any P -trap.
G. Refrigerant Lines
Insulate and vapor seal continuously from outdoor unit to
indoor unit.
3 02 DUCTWORK INSULATION
A. External Duct Insulation
1. Before applying duct wrap, sheet meta duct shall be
clean, dry and tightly sealed at all joints and seams.
2. Prepare overlap by removing approximately 2 Inches of
insulation from facing. Wrap insulation around duct with
facing to the outside no the 2 -inch flap completely
overlaps facing and insulation at the other end of stretch
out Insulation shall be snugly butted. Seams shall be
stapled approximately 6 inches on center' with outward
clinching staples, then sealed with 4-Inch wide
pressure - sensitive tape matching the facing and designed
for use with duct insulation. Tape shall be HARDCAST
FOIL -GRIP 1402 or approved equivalent Adjacent
sections of duct wrap insulation shall be snugly butted
with the circumferential 24nch tape gap ovedapping and
secured as recommended for longitudinal seam. In lieu
of pressure - sensitive tape. two coats of vapor retarder
mastic reinforced with one layer of 4-inch wide open
weave glass fabric may be used.
END OF SECTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
The work Included under this section of the specifications
comprises the furnishing Ball labor, materials, tools,transportabon,
service, etc., necessary for the instillation of a complete plumbing
system In accordance with the Intent of these specifications and
the accompanying drawings.
1.02 PLUMBING PIPING ROUTING
The plumbing drawings are by nature schematic as to locations
and roubng of pipes and Imes. Contractor shall coordinate his
work with the building structure and with other trades so as to
avoid or minimize conflicts. As a general rule, larger systems such
as ductwork, air handlers or fan-coil units, etc., are much more
constrained as to where they can be located; therefore, their
locations and installation requirements shall take precedence over
the plumbing pipes and lines. Any conflicts that may arise over
routing or use of available space shall be resolved by the Engineer
and /or Architect
1.03 WATER PRESSURE
At or near the start of the work on the water distribution system,
Contractor shall field venty the maximum and minimum water
pressures experienced over a continuous 96 -hour minimum time
period. Such tests should be made as near the building line as
reasonable. Contractor shall provide moans and methods of
determining the readings.Oewces may be used such as a pressure
gauge with minimum and maximum pointers, recording pressure
gauges, etc..Conlractor shall prepare and provide to the Architect
and Engineer a report which shall Include at least the following:
A. Project name and location. date of the report,
B. Contractor's name, address, and telephone number, if the
Contractor performing the test Is a Subcontractor. Indicate
also for whom the test is being performed, their name,
address, telephone number, and a contact person's name,
C. The date, or range of dates, of the test,
D. The name of the Contractor's employee who was responsible
for performing or for overseeing the performing of the test.
E. A brief description of the system being tested, including a
description of the approximate location where the test
readings were taken,
F. A brief description of the testing procedure, and
G. A summary of the test result(s).
PART 2 PRODUCTS AND INSTALLATION
2.01 GENERAL
For each pipe passing through the roof. the Plumbing Contractor
shall provide to the General Contractor a roof flashing constructed
of sheet lead weighing not less than 4 pounds per square foot with
a base extending not less than 10 inches on each side of the pipe.
SECTION 15400 - PLUMBING SYSTEM
2.02 FIXTURES
A. Products
Plumbing fixtures and Wm shall be similar and equivalent to
those scheduled on the plans. The following manufacturers am
acceptable ahemaWes (Refer to Section 15010 for Intent of
"Alternatives "):
1. Water Closets, Urinals, lavatories, etc. • American
Standard. Kohler, Eller
Unless scheduled otherwise. each water closet shall
be an elongated bowl type, made of vitreous china.
shall have a siphon let action, and shall be a water
saver type.
2. Stainles Steel Sinks - Elkay, Just
3. Drinking Fountains, Electric Water Coolers- Haws, Halsey
Taylor, Elkay
4 Roof Drains, Floor Drains, etc. - Jay R. Smith, Wade,
Josam
The Information listed on the schedule Is generic as
to style. size, etc.. The Plumbing Contractor shall
coordinate with the General Contractor as to the
specific construction features of each floor or roof
that is to receive a drain. Contractor shall provide
and install each drain with components and
accessories that are required and /or appropriate for
a complete, secure, operational, and neat
installation. The submittal shall be clearly marked
with the components and accessories so that the
General Contractor may review them.
5. Water Closet Seats • Beneke, Centoco, Church, Kohler,
Olsonite
Unless scheduled otherwise, each water closet seat
shall be extra heavy duty. elongated, white, open
front, less cover, with check hinge and stainless
steel bolts, such as Church No. 95000, Kohler No.
K- 4666 -0 etc..
6. Camera, Supports - Wade, Jay R. Smith, Josam
Each carrier or support shall be specifically listed
by Its manufacturer for use with the fixture being
supported. With the submittal for each plumbing
fixture requiring a carrier, Contractor shall include
a submittal of the carrier that is proposed for use.
Each carrier shall be appropriate for the wall
construction type and shall be complete with all
required components. accessories, etc., to provide
a complete, operational, and neat installation. In
addition, the following optional devices shall be
provided and Installed:
Device Smith Josam Wade
a. water closets
() flush valve supply support -M12 -6•AM1
1))
Section 15400 - Plumbing System - Page 1 of 6
tiling frame for tiled walls -M13 -1
-AM21
anchor foot for single fixture
carrier- M51 -26 Std.
extra support for wide chaseper (as
req'd) -M40 mfr. -M4
flush valve supply support -M12 -69
-AM1
rectangular steel legs -M31 -63 -M36
B. Installation
(ii) bottom bearing per platemfr. mfr. -AM11
c. lavatories, sinks, water coolers
rectangular steel logs -M31 -03 -M36
1. Each fixture shall be Installed tight and level. Where
more than one fixture of the same type is Installed,
each fixture shall be level with each other fcoure of the
same type except where stated or shown otherwise or
for handicapped requirements.
2. Unless otherwise scheduled, each wall mounted fixture
including, but not limited to, lavatories, sinks, water
closets, urinals, and drinking fixtures shall be provided
and Installed with a steel, floor mounted Carder or
support.
3. Each fixture shall be provided and Installed with
appropnate grout, putty, sealer, etc.. according to
good practice. to manufacturer's Instructions, or to
Engineer's or Architect's Instructions, either before or
after installation of the fixture. Final appearance of the
installation of each fixture shall require the approval of
the Architect
4. Any fixture or any part of any fixture which is
scratched, dented, chipped or otherwise damaged
before, during or after installation, shall be replaced by
the Contractor.
All additional work, time, or costs of clean -up or
reinstalling of a messy Instillation, or replacement or
repair of a damaged part or fodure, as required by the
Architect or Engineer shall be provided at no cost to
the Owner, Architect or Engineer.
2.03 VALVES
A. Piping valves shall be as specified In Section 15050.
B. Isolation Valves and Unions
Contractor shall provide and install isolation valves and
unions for all plumbing devices that handle or treat water,
e.g. pumps, water heaters, etc..
Such valves and unions are required so that such plumbing
devices can be repaired, replaced, or removed with no or
minimal disruption of plumbing service to the rest of the
building or project Exception: Unions are not required for
devices that have threaded and flared fittings. Certain
ancillary devices that can be associated with another device,
e.g. a stminer and check valve associated with a pump, shall
not require individual valves and unions but shall instead be
considered as components of an assembly and the assembly
shall have Isolation valves and unions. Such unions and /or
valves are required wherever necessary regardless of
whether or not they are shown on the drawings. It the
Contractor is uncertain about whether or not a particular
device requires unions and /or isolation valves, it Is his
responsibility to ask the Engineer and to receive a reply In
wn0ng if not required.
C. Stops and Supplies (McGuire, Kohler, Chicago Faucet or
Approved Equivalent)
1. Lavatories and Sinks
a polished chrome-plated, cast brass angle slop
with loose key handles, 1/2 -Inch I.P.S. female
inlets, and 3/8-inch flexible tubing outlets
b. minimum 12 -inch long, 1/2-Inch O.D., one -piece
chrome-plated flexible copper risers,
Section 15400 - Plumbing System - Page 2 of 6
c. 1/2 -inch chrome - plated nipples, minimum 3- inches
long, and
d. chrome - plated, cast brass escutcheons with set
screws.
2. Tank Type Water Closets
Provide and install with the same type trim pieces as for
lavatories and sinks
3. Drinking Fountains and Electric Water Coolers
Where a stop is not integral with a drinking unit provide
and install polished chrome-plated, cast brass straight
stop with either loose key handle or scrawdnver slot with
threaded or sweat 1/2 -inch inlet with threaded or
compression 1/2 -Inch or 3/8-Inch outlet as required by
the fixture.
4. Other Fixtures
a Other plumbing fixtures, not specifically mentioned
here, may require a stop or supply. In such cases,
Contractor shall provide and Install supplies and /or
stops as needed, and such supplies and/or stops
shall be entirely equivalent In quality to those
specified above.
b. Stop valve outlets shall be of a size and type as
recommended by the fixture manufacturer, but,
unless shown or scheduled otherwise, the Inlet
shall be threaded or sweat connection no smaller
than 1/2 -inch.
5. Installation
a Installation shdl conform to that for Fixtures as
above and where appropriate.
b. Flexible risers shall be bent using a tubing bender
to prevent crimping.
D Trap Primer Valves (Jay R. Smith, Wade, Zum, Josarn, Watts, or
Approved Equivalent)
1. Valve body shall be all bronze with removable operating
parts and integral vacuum breaker.
2. Each trap primer valve shall be provided and installed
with an access panel of sufficient size to repair or replace
the valve. Unless otherwise required by Architect, access
panel shall have chrome plated bronze square frame with
secured stainless steel cover with vandal-proof screws,
such as Jay R. Smith Fig. 4730. Contractor shall verify
preferred style and mounting method with Architect
before ordering or Installing access covers.
0. Pressure Relief Valve (Watts No. 530)
1. Pressure relief valves shall have calibrated adjustment
feature with an adjustable range from 50 to 175 psi. Size
shall be 3/4 inch Contractor shall set pressure relief
valve at 25 psi lower than the water heater
temperature /pressure relief valve.
2. Install the pressure relief valve near the water heater and
downstream of any check valve, backflow preventer, or
pressure reducing valve. Pipe discharge with Type L hard
copper to nearest floor dram.
2.04 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS
Water Hammer Arrestors (Wade "Shokstop", Jay R. Smith"Hydratror,
Zum "Shoktrol", or Approved Equivalent)
A. Install water hammer arrestors as shown on the plans or as
necessary to prevent water hammer from oceumng. Unless
shown otherwise on plans, a minimum of one arrestor shall be
installed for each fixture group.
B. Water hammer arrestor shall be nested bellows type and shall
C. Arrestors shall be sized per manufacturer's written
Instructions based on the number of future units served.
Water lines larger than 20 feet shall have more than one
arrestor regardless of the number of fixture units being
served. Exception: tong lines serving only one fixture shall
use special manufacturer's sizing tables.
D. Installation
2.05 TRAPS (McGuire, Kohler, Eller, or Approved Equivalent)
A. Lavatories, Sinks, Dnnking Fixtures, Etc.
B. Fadures That Have Traps Inside Walls, Under Floors, Etc.
1. Traps that are generally not accessible to the public
such as floor drams, hub drains, etc., shall be cast
kin or other material equal to the waste and vent
system to which they are attached.
2. All such P-traps shall be a deep seal type such as
Tyler Pipe No. 7560 series.
C. Installation
2.06 INSULATION
As specified in Section 15250.
2.07 SANITARY DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING
A
be all stainless steel. Arrestor shall be certified In accordance
with Plumbing Drainage Institute Standard P.D I. WH-201
and /or American Society of Sanitary Engineering Standard
ASSE -1010.
1. Between the water hammer arrestor and the piping
system, provide and install a quarter -turn ball valve.
2. Where water piping is routed above a ceiling, the
water hammer arrestors shall also be installed above
the ceiling.
3. Where water piping is installed belowa slab-on- grade,
water hammer arrestors shall be installed in a wall.
Contractor shall provide and install an access cover of
sufficient size to repair or replace both the Isolation
valve and the water hammer arrestor. Unless
otherwise required by Architect, access cover shall
have square chrome-plated bronze frame and
stainless steel cover with tamper -proof screws such as
Jay R. Smith Fig. 4730. Contractor shall vent
preferred style and m undng method with Architect
before ordering or Installing access covers.
Plumbing fixtures that have pubgeally accessible taps - trap
assembly shall consist of the following•
a. chrome - plated, 17 ga. tubing outlet
b. chrome -plated cast brass adjustable P-trap with
cleanout plug,
c. cast brass escutcheon with set screw.
Installation shall conform to that for Fixtures as above and
where appropriate.
General
1. Install a complete soil waste and vent system for all
fixtures and equipment as shown an the drawings
and /or hereinafter specified, and also the complete
rough -In for all equipment items famished and set by
others.
Section 15400 - Plumbing System - Page 3 of 6
2. Piping shall be as specified In Section 15050.
3. All materials and installation shall be In compliance with
the local applicable plumbing code. Some general Items
are listed below.
B. Installation
1. All horizontal drain and waste piping shall be installed
without drops or sags and shall be sufficiently supported
to prevent drops or sags after installation.
2. Hanging and support shall be per Section 15050.
3. Vents
a. Locations shown for vents through the roof (VTR's)
are approximate and not intended to be exact
Contractor shall adjust actual VTR locations so as
to avoid conflicts with and equipment or devices
located on or in the roof. In particular. each vent
shall terminate not less than ten feet from any
window. door opening, air intake, or vent shaft
unless d terminates at least three feet above such
opening.
b. All vent pipes shall be sloped so as to drain toward
the drainage pipe being served.
4. Drainage
a. Waste, soil, and drain piping shall be assembled
per manufacturer's instructions. Hub and spigot
assembly tools shall be by same manufacturer as
piping and fittings or as approved by manufacturer.
b. Horizontal drainage piping less than 44nches in
nominal size shall be installed at a uniform slope of
not less than one-fourth of an inch per foot Piping
4-inch nominal or larger shall be similarly installed
although, if necessary, it may be installed at a
slope of not less than one.elghth of an inch per
foot, provided the local administrative authority
does not disapprove.
2.00 WATER PIPING
A. General
All domestic water piping shall be as specified in Section 15050.
B. Installation
1. Wherever copper lines connect with ferrous lines, the
connection shall be made using a dielectric fitting; Watts
3000 Series or approved equivalent
2. All connections on hot water Tines shall be made so that
adequate provision for expansion will result.
3. Piping shall be graded for drainage towards main supply
risers or to facture connections to allow complete
drainage of the system.
4. Support and Isolation of Uninsulated Copper Pipe
A General - Uninsulated copper piping shall be held
securely in place by an ABS plastic product that
shall prevent vibration, shall support and control
the piping so that no excessive forces or loads are
transmitted to the connecting point of each support
Of hanger, and shall electrolytically Isolate the
copper from any other metal. Contractor shall
provide and install products manufactured by
Sumner Mfg. Co.. or approved equivalent
b. Uninsulated vertical copper piping in a wall or
chase shall be supported by a product such as
Sumner's Plpefa, Stakfut, and/or other as
recommended by the manufacturer. Such piping
shall always be supported near the top if it M
coming down, new the bottom if it Is coming up,
or both if it is passing through (except no bottom
support Is required If the pipe Is passing to or
from a slab on grade). Pipe that enters a wall or
chase but changes direction to honzontal shall
be supported again at or near the point of
change in direction.
c. Uninsulated honzontal copper piping shall be
supported by a product such as Sumner's
Staldbc Plpefix, Channel, or other as
recommended by the manufacturer. Support
spacing shall be the same as for pipe in Section
15050. Horizontal pipe shall be supported again
at the point where 1 exits a wall to serve a
plumbing fixture. If the pipe M serving a facture
such as a lavatory, sink etc., a product such as
Sumner's Posifix shall be installed both to
support the pipe and also to assure proper
spacing.
5. Insulated copper pipes and lines shall be hung and
supported per Section 15050. Insulated pipe In a wall
or chase may be supported with products and
methods as specified for uninsulated pipes with the
addition of metal shields at the points of attachment to
protect the insulation.
2.09 ESCUTCHEONS
As specified In Section 15050.
2.10 NATURAL GAS PIPING
A. Matenals
Gas piping shall be as specified in Section 15050.
8 Installation
1. Gas piping Installation shall conform in detail to the
applicable code being enforced by the Administrative
Authority. In general, gas piping shall conform to the
following mien.
2. Contractor shall have all proposed gas meter locations
approved by the local Administrative Authority and the
gas supplier before any digging or installing is begun.
Contractor shall conform to all requirements of the
Administrative Authority or gas supplier for installation
of gas meters, including providing and installing all
required associated devices or materials.
3. Intenor gas piping shall be installed In open or
ventilated spaces and shall be sloped to condensation
points which shall be accessible for draining.
4. Horizontal gas piping, except for brass or copper, if
allowable, shall be adequately supported at rho greater
Intervals than the following:
Size, Inches Spacing, FL
1/2 6
3/4 or 1 8
1-114 or larger 10
Vertical gas piping shall be supported at each floor
level.
5. Contractor shall provide and Install an approved gas
shutoff valve outside each building receiving gas. If a
shutoff valve is located underground, Contractor shall
provide and install a concrete valve box with a oast
iron lid with the word 'GAS' (or other approved
wording) cast onto it
6. Contractor shall provide and install a0 approved gas
shutoff valve at each appliance ahead of the union
connection and within three feet of the appliance.
Contractor shall make final connection to each appliance
unless instructed otherwise by Architect, as is typically
done, for example, when a kitchen equipment
supplier /contractor is responsible for making the final
connections to each kitchen cooking appllanca
Contractor shall closely coordinate these requirements
through the General Contractor. Where contractor is
responsible for final connection, he shall provide any
devices and /or materials not shown on the drawings but
called for by appliance manufacturer and shall Install
same per manufacturer's instructions.
7. Contractor shall provide and Install a pressure regulator
where shown on the Drawings to reduce the pressure
from medium (2 to 5 psig) to low (12 Inches w.c.)
pressure.
2.11 DOMESTIC WATER HEATER(S) (A.O. SMITH, RHEEM
COMMERCIAL. OR APPROVED EOUNALEN1)
A. General
All domestic water heaters shell meet or exceed the
requirements of ASHRAE 90A -1980 and shell have affixed a
permanent label or tag indicating such compliance. Each
gas -tired water heater Of any) shall have an A.G.A. rated
temperature and pressure relief valve provided by the water
heater manufacturer and of the correct size for both the Input
rating and the tank pressure rating.
B. Provide other features and options as scheduled on the
Drawings.
PART 3 TESTING AND ADJUSTING
3.01 GENERAL
A. No plumbing or drainage system or building sewer shall be
covered or put into use until it has been tested, inspected, and
accepted as prescribed by Code or herein.
B Administrative Authority
Section 15400 - Plumbing System - Page 4 of 8
The Contractor doing the work and he alone is responsible for
determining who the Administrative Authority is for hiswork and
for obtaining all permits and for arranging required tests and
Inspections. Before requesting observation of a test by anyone,
Contractor shall verify to himself that the system will pass the
prescnbed test(s). Contractor shall nobly the General Contractor
and the Architect that he has performed preliminary tests, that
system passed the tests, and that Contractor Is ready to notify
Administrative Authonly. Architect shall have the authority to
require that the test(s) be replicated in the presence of himself
and/or the Engineer. Contractor shall receive Architect's
approval before notifying Administrative Authority of readiness
for testing.
Contractor shall notify Administrative Authority that work Is
ready for inspection. Contractor shall notify Architect as to date
and time of test(s) so that he and /or Engineer may be present
if needed.
Contractor shall conduct test(s) as required by Administrative
Authority in the presence of a duly appointed representative of
the Administrative Authority end, at the discretion of the
Architect, the Architect and/or Engineer. Contractor shall
C. Costs
1. My equipment material, and /or labor necessary for
tests or Inspections shall be furnished by the
Contractor as part of this Contract at no cost to
anyone else but the Contractor.
2. My required repairs, corrections, or modifications,
Including equipment materials, and /or labor therefor,
shall be provided or performed by the Contractor at
no cost to anyone else but the Contractor.
provide or perform any resulting repairs, corrections, or
modifications required for the system(s) to pass the required
test(s).
The above process shall be continued until the system is
approved by the Administrative Authonty.
D. Contractor shall prepare and provide reports per
"OPERATING TESTS' In Specifications Section 15010.
302 VALVES
0. General
3.04 SANITARY
All valves, flow controls, and other controls shall be adjusted
and shall function property.
3.03 DOMESTIC WATER
A. Testing
Domestic water system, Including cold water, hot water
supply and realm piping shall be tested as follows:
1. Cap all piping at final connections to all fixtures and
equipment
2. Test hydrostahealty at a pressure of 150 psig
maintained for 6 hours.
3. It after test duration penod, a drop of more than 3
psig Is observed. make required corrections to
defective portions of the system and repeat test
procedure until system is proved tight
4. Remove ell caps from piping and make final
connections to all fixtures and equipment
5. Visually Inspect all connections to fixtures and
equipment for a period of 12 hours when entire
system Is put Into operation at line pressure and make
any necessary repairs.
B. Adjusting
1. Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for adjusting
and balancing now rates of plumbing systems.
2. Pumps
a Plumbing Contractor shall adjust and balance
flows at plumbing pumps to those flows as
scheduled on the drawings.
b. Contractor shall prepare and provide a balance
report for each plumbing pump per "OPERATING
TESTS" In Section 15010.
Sanitary soil, waste and vent piping shall be tested by one of
the following methods. Contractor shall consult local
Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) as to their preferred
method and he shall use that preferred method unless
conditions prohibit; if so, he shall notify Archnect In wnting
A. Water Test
1. Plug all openings below the highest vent stack
2. Fill system with water to top of vents or to a minimum of
ten feet
3. Water shall stand in piping fora minimum of 15 minutes.
4. The system shall be leak free at all points; if not repair
leaks encountered.
5. Repeat test until system is proved tight
B Air Test
as to reasons wiry, which method is proposed, and whether the
AHJ will accept the proposed alternative.
1. Tightly plug all Inlets and outlets to the system except
one.
2. In the remaining opening, attach an air compressor
discharge into a suitable charging valve and force air Into
the system until a uniform gauge pressure of 5 psi is
achieved.
3. This pressure shall be maintained, without Introduction of
additional air, fora minimum 0115 minutes; If not locate
and repair leaks.
4. Repeat test until the system is proved tight
3.05 NATURAL GAS
A. Gas system shall be tested as follows:
1. Cap all piping at final connections to all equipment
2. Test with compressed air eta pressure of 50 psig maintained
for 24 hours.
3. If, after test duration period, a drop of mare than 5 psig is
observed, make required repairs to defective portions of the
systems and repeat test and repair operation until system is
proved tight
4 Remove all caps from piping and make final connections to
equipment
5. Test connected systems to a pressure of 15 inches of mercury
pressure for 2 hours or as prescribed by code.
6. Using a soap and water solution, inspect piping connections to
equipment ater system is put in operation at working pressure
and make any repairs necessary.
3.06 HOT WATER RETURN
A. Balance domestic hot water return system so that hot water is
readily available at all fbmtres arid equipment and that flow is
assured and demonstratable at the end of each circulating line.
3.07 WATER HEATERS
Section 15400 - Plumbing System - Page 5 of 6
Contractor shall perform tests and adjustments
permanufacturer's written instructions and shall prepare are port
per "OPERATING TESTS" of Section 15010 to Include the
following:
1. gas pressure,
2. inlet water temperature, water temperature rise at a
specified now rate,
3. flue gas temperature,
4. flue draft pressure,
5. carbon motro,dde and carbon dioxide content In
percentage, before dilution, and
6. aquastat temperature setting and measured tank
temperature.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
PART 4 CLEANING
4.01 WATER LINES
A. Cold and hot domestic water piping shall be thoroughly
gushed with water to remove all foreign particles.
R. The lines shall then be sterilized by filling the systems with
solution of chlorine containing 50 PPM of chlorine. This
solution shall stay In the line for a minimum pedod of 24
hours during which time all valves shall be opened and
closed several times In order that all pans of the valve shall
be in contact with the solution.
C. After the stenl'ization period, the system shall be drained and
gushed with clean potable water unal the residual chlorine
content is not greater than 0.2 PPM
4.02 NATURAL GAS
Lines shall be "blown our with air prior to connection.
END OF SECTION
Section 15400 - Plumbing System - Page 6 of 6
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
Provide and Install gas -fired and heaters as described herein and
where shown on Drawings. Drawings are schematie:eoordlnate
exact installation location with General Contractor in compliance
with these specifications and with local codes.
PART2 PRODUCTS
201 GENERAL
SECTION 15640 - GAS -FIRED INDIRECT UNIT HEATERS
0. Each unit shall have been design- cemfied by the American
Gas Association and shall bear an AG.A label.
B. Unless scheduled otherwise on the Drawings, each unit's
standard features shall include the following:
1. Aluminized steel heat exchanger,
2. Fan and limit safety controls,
3. 24 -volt control transformer and terminal strip,
4. Single stage combination gas valve,
5. Horizontal directional louvers,
6. Spark - ignited intermittent safety pilot with electronic
flame supervision,
7. Threaded hanger connections,
8. Energy cut-o0 device, and
9. baked enamel finish.
C. Optional features, whether factory Installed or field Installed,
shall be as scheduled.
2.02 Gravity Vented (Hasbngs, Modine, Reznor, Sterling, or Approved
Equivalent)
A. Each unit shall have the features previously listed
B. Each unit shall have a minimum steady state thermal
efficiency of 80%.
2.03 Power Vented (Hastings, Modine, Reznor, Steding, or Approved
Equivalent)
A. In addition to the features previously listed each and shall
have the following:
1.
2.
Factory- installed power venter, and
Combustion air pressure switch to venfy proper vent
flaw before allowing operation of the gas valve.
B. Each unit shall be designed to provide 80% thermal
efficiency and to provide an annual fuel use improvement of
up to 25% as compared with gravity- vented units.
2 04 Pourer Vented with Ducted Combustion Air (Reznor or Approved
Equivalent)
A In addition to the features previously listed each unit shall
have the following.
1. Factory- installed power venter,
2. Combustion air pressure switch to verily proper vent
flow before allowing operation of the gas valve,
Section 15640 - Gas - Fired Indirect Unit Heaters - Page 1 of 2
3. Pre -purge and post -purge control sequence, and
4. Vent terminal assembly designed to provide preheating of
the combustion supply air and to allow a single wall (or
roof, as scheduled) penetration.
B. Each unit shall be designed to provide 80% thermal efficiency
and to provide an annual fuel use improvement of up to 25% as
compared with gravity- vented units.
2.05 Air Side
A. Propeller Fan Models
Each unit shall be provided with the following:
1. Propeller fan,
2. Open drip -proof motor with internal overload, and
3. Full -size safety fan guard.
B. Blower Models
Each unit shall be provided with the following:
1. Centrifugal blower capable of overcoming up to 0.20
inches W.G. of external static pressure.
2. Open, drip -proof motor with internal overload, and
3. Belt guard.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. installation shall be made in accordance with local codes, ANSI
Standard Z223.1-1980, or N.F.P.A. No. 54.
B. No alteration or modification of the equipment is allowed.
3 02 Installation
A Install with clearances to combustible materials greater than the
manufacturer's recommended minimum.
B. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for suspending
unit Install the unit level front - to-back and side - aide. Install
with rubber - In - shear Isolators. -
C. Make gas connection In compliance with manufacturer's
instructions. In addition make the final connection with an
A.G.A approved flexible connector with a stainless outer
coveting and malleable iron unions at either end. Minimum
length shall be 12 inches. Product shall be'SAFE - T - UNIC by T
& S Brass and Bronze Works, or approved equivalent
D. Provide and install flue system per manufacturer's written
instruction. On power vented systems, Contractor shall seal vent
pipe joints with aluminum or Teflon tape suitable for 550 deg.
F.
E. Electrical connections, including control wiring shell be
provided and installed by Electrical Contractor.
F. Clean each unit lubricate motor bearings, adjust belts, adjust
controls, etc.
G. Operate controls; change setpoint up and down and verify that
controls are working properly.
3.03 Start-Up
A. Follow manufacturer's mitten instructions for correct and
safe start-Up.
B. Contractor shall prepare and provide a start-up report which
shall Include but not be limited to the following:
1. Gas
a. Inlet gas pressure,
b. gas pressure supplied by pressure regulating
valve,
c. flue gas temperature,
d. flue draft pressure, and
e. statement that burner was adjusted to
manufacturer's recommendation.
2 Electric
a. running load amps on motor.
3. Controls
a. statement that controls have been exercised and
are operating properly.
END OF SECTION
Section 15640 - Gas - Fred Indirect Unit Heaters - Page 2 of 2
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
Provide and Install air conditioning systems as described on the
drawings and as specified herein.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (LENNOX, TRANE, CARRIER)
201 GENERAL
A. All major components, i.e. fumace, evaporator coil, and
condensing unit shall be from the same manufacturer
B. Cooling components shall have been tested as a system
and shall have approved combinsuon ratings.
C. System(s) shall be provided with all normal components,
whether specifically mentioned or scheduled, to provide a
safe and fully operational system.
2.02 FURNACE
A General
B. Cabinet
C Blower and Drive
D. Heating Section
Section 15652 - Unitary Split Air Conditioner System - Page 1 of 2
SECTION 15652 - UNITARY SPLIT AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
Unit shall be design certified by the American Gas
Association and shall have been rated and tested according
to U.S. Department of Energy test procedures. Unit shall
have been test operated at the factory and shipped
assembled.
Cabinet shall be constructed of heavy gauge steel with
baked-on enamel finish. Cabinet shall be internally lined
with foil faced Insulation. Supply and return openings shall
have flanges for connection of ducts. Removable access
panel with safely interlock shall be provided for the blower
compartment Cabinet shall be provided with filter rack to
house throwaway type filters Filters shall have either a
Class 1 or Class 2 rating in accordance with U.L 900,
- Standard for Test Performance of Air Filter Unite. Filters
shall be a minimum of one inch thick and of appropriate
size.
Blower shall be centntugal type statically and dynamically
balanced at the factory. Blower motor shall be
multiple - speed, direct drive type and shall be resiliently
mounted. Unit shall be provided with blower relay.
tine shall be Induced draft forced draft, or power vented,
and shall be capable of common venting with other gas
appliances. Heat exchange shall be heavy gauge aluminized
steel. Bumer assembly shall be removable for service or
replacement Burner shall be designed for quiet ignition and
operation and for even heat distnbution. Electronic igniter
shall provide positive Ignition of pilot burner. Main burner
and plot burner shall be extinguished during the "off* cycle
E Controls and Safety
Unit shall have factory installed and wired fan and limit control.
Unit shall have 24 control transformer, low voltage terminal
ship, and power supply winng junction box. Gas controls shall
provide 100% safety shutoff. Pilot burner shall prove ^on^
before main gag valve is allowed to open. Upon loss of flame
of either main or pilot burner, the main valve shall close. Unit
shall have a manual shutoff gas valve.
F. Options
2.03 EVAPORATOR COIL
A. Cabinet
B. Coil
Provide and install options and accessories as scheduled on the
Drawings.
Cal shall be provided and installed with factory made cabinet
or casing with flanges or standing seams for duct connection
Cabinet panels shall be heavy gauge steel with baked enamel
finish and with thick fiberglass insulation.
1. Coil shall have aluminum fins fitted to copper tubes.
Joints shall be brazed or silver soldered to be Leakproof.
2 Coil shall be factory tested under pressure to ensure
leakproof construction. Coll shall have galvanized
3. drain pan with threaded drain fitting.
4. Coil shall have refrigerant connections that allow quick
and easy mechanical attachments.
2.04 OUTDOOR UNIT
A. Units shall come from factory complete with compressors, fan
and motor, outdoorcoil, refrigerant circuits, and control panel,
all enclosed in a casing with a grille or louver for condenser
coil protection.
B. Casing shall be galvanized steel (min. 20 go.) with a baked
enamel finish. Access panels shall be provided for power,
refrigerant circuits, and outdoor fans and coils. Refrigerant
circuit stubs shall extend through cabinet for easy connection.
C. Compressor shall be hermetically sealed, Internally isolated,
with crankcase heater and motor overload protection.
1. As scheduled, the compressor on the system with high
outside air quantity shag be a two -speed type with indoor
blower speed relay kit As an alternative, a variable speed
unit may be substituted if all proper controls and
components are provided and Installed.
2. Compressor on other condensing and shall be a
scroll - type with a ten - year limited warranty.
D. Coils shall be seamless copper or aluminum tubes with
mechanically bonded aluminum fins. All coils shall be factory
tested at 450 psig under water and thoroughly dehydrated prior
to assembling Into unit.
E. Refrigerant circuit shall include suction accumulator, valve, filter
3.02 START -UP
drier, high pressure protection and service valves. Units with
scroll compressors can be provided without accumulator,
crankcase heater and hard start kit
F. Accessones shall Include an and -cycle timer to prevent
compressor short cycling, a hard start kit on each single
phase unit. and any options or other accessories scheduled
on the drawings.
2.05 CONTROLS
For each air conditioning system, provide and Install a thermostat
with one or two stages of cooling and one stage of heating.
Thermostat shall be provided by equipment manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install outdoor units on reinforced concrete pads where
installed an grade.
6. Install air handlers per manufacturer's instructions and /or as
shown on drawings. Horizontal units shall be suspended
from structure per instructions Irom Architect and with
vibration isolators installed.
A. Supply initial charge of refrigerant and oil.
8. Supply service of factory- trained representative to supervise
testing, dehydration, charging of units, and startup. Provide
operating and maintenance Instructions to Owner per
Section 15010.
C. Provide start-up services per manufacturer's instructions.
Provide a start-up report for each heating/cooling unit
Including refrigerant system, heating system, and cur system.
At a minimum, the start-up report shall include the following
information.
1. An Moving System
Refer to section on system test and balance.
2. Heating System
a Inlet gas pressure,
b. entenng and leaving air temperatures,
0. flue gas temperature,
d. flue draft pressure, and
e. statement that bumer was adjusted to
manufacturer's recommendations,
3. Cooling System
s refrigerant charge, in pounds,
b. ambient dry bulb temperature.
c. evaporator air temperatures.
m entering air dry bulb and wet bulb,
99 leaving cur dry bulb and wet bulb,
d. refrigerant suction line temperature at the
evaporator toll.
a. ratngerant suction line temperature at the
condensing unit,
f. suction and liquid refrigerant pressure at
condensing unit.
g. applied voltage and running load amps (per
phase) at condensing umt
END OF SECTION
Section 15652 - Unitary Split Air Conditioner System - Page 2 of 2
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
The work of this Section includes all labor, material, equipment
end appurtenances indicated on the Drawings and herein specified
for the installation of air distnbution systems, including supply,
exhaust, retum and outside air.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FILTERS
A. Air filters shall have either a Class 1 or Class 2 rating in
accordance with UL 000, Standard for Test Performance of
Air Filter Units.
B. Air handling unit filters shall be 1 -Inch thick fiberglass filter
(unless scheduled otherwise) similar to Airguard Sanas AFS
202 AIR DEVICES
A. Grilles, Registers and Diffusers: (Titus, Metal•Aire, or
Approved Equivalent)
Furnish and install as shown and scheduled on the Drawings
or as otherwise approved, to deliver the indicated volume 01
alr without objectionable noise or draft All grilles, registers,
and diffusers shall have two coats of factory applied baked
on white primer, unless otherwise scheduled on the
Drawings. _
B. Manual Volume Dampers: (Ruskin M035, Alr Balance
AC -116, or Approved Equivalent)
1. Furnish and install factory made, opposed blade
manual volume dampers where shaven on the
Drawings or where otherwise required for balancing the
air flows of the system. Damper blades shall be
constructed of 16 gauge minimum galvanized steel
securely fastened to square operating rod of
adequatecross. section to prevent dlstortion, of length
as required and of 12 -inch maximum width.
2. Where penetration of a duct is made for an operating
rod, the non-operator end penetration shall be made
with a gasketed and capped end bearing such as
DuroDyne S6 -338. On the operator end, the
penetration shall be made as follows:
a. Gasketed and bearing such as Duro Dyne
No.SB -138 and a locking quadrant such as Duro
DyneNo. K-4.
C. Spotters and Branch Take -Offs:
1. Furnish and install splitters at all tee fittings and where
otherwise shown on the Drawings.Sphaers shall be
constructed of 16 gauge minimum galvanized steel
with a minimum size of four inches secured to a square
operating rod of adequatecros- section to prevent
distortion and of length as necessary. Splltter length
shall be a minimum of 1 -1/2 times width of narrow -split
2. Provide and install with adjustment kit including a1y4'
operating rod, a damper bracket such as OuroDyne
SECTION 15840 - AIR DISTRIBUTION
No. SRP -40, and a gasketed ball joint bracket such as
Duro Dyne No. 009 -14.
D. Air Extractors: (Titus AG -225, Metalaire 101 -2, or Approved
Equivalent)
1. Factory made adjustable, multi-blade air extractors shall
be provided and installed where shown on the Drawings.
Extractors shall consist of aseries of curved metal blades,
adjustable from full open to full closed positions.
Extractors shall have a roller type end support when
installed In internally lined duct
2. Extractors shall have square rod operators with end
bearings and operators similar to those specified for
manual volume dampers.
E Flexible Connections:
Provide and install where shown on the Drawings and at all
connections between ductwork and equipment subject to
vibration or movement. Flexible connectors shall be installed
upstream of any supply side fittings and take -offs and
downstream of any retum side fittings. Connections shall have
suitable metal collar frames at each end. Allow at least one -Inch
slack in each connection to assure no vibration Is transmitted
from fan to ductwork. Connections shall be not less than
four - inches long nor longer than ten - Inches. Connection
material shall be an approved flame retardant fabric or shall
consist of sleeve joints with packing of approved material
having a flame spread rating not in excess of 25 and a smoke
developed rating not in excess of 50.
2 03 SHEETMETAL DUCTWORK
A. HVAC Ducts
Section 15840 - Air Dismbuuon - Page 1 of 4
1. Ducts shall be constructed of galvanized steel sheets in
accordance with the recommended construction for the
appropriate pressure class in so far as gauges of metal to
be used, bracing of joints and joint construction, hangers
and hanging methods, sealing, etc., as established in
HVAC DUCTCONSTRUCTION STANDARDS, First Edition
1905,published by the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning
Contractors National Association, Inc.,
(SMACNA).Ductworkassociated with air handlers shall be
constructed for a + or - 2 -inch pressure ciass.0uct
associated with fan-coil units or located on the secondary
side of VAV boxes shall be constructed for a + or -1 -Inch
pressure class.
2. Sealing
a. Sealing shall be SMACNA Class W. that is,
•Alltransverse joints, longitudinal seams, and
ductwalt penetrations" shall be sealed.
b. Sealant shall be water based product solvent based
products are expressly prohibited.Product shall be
recommended by manufacturer for HVAC duct
application and It shall cure to a flexible film with a
strong adhesive bond to common duct materials.
Product shall be rated by manufacturer for operating
temperature limits from zero degrees F to 200
degrees F. Product shall have been tested per
ASTM E04 procedures and shall have a maximum
game spread rating of 25, a maximum fuel
contributed rating of 5, and a maximum smoke
developed rating of 20. Product shall be I-IAROCAST
IRON GRIP' IG-601 orFLEX -GRIP' FG.550,
RECTORSEAL 'AIR- LOCI", or FOSTER 32.50.
2.04 FIBERGLASS DUCT BOARD
A. Duct
8. Closure System
2.05 FLEXIBLE DUCT
PART 3
3.01 GENERAL
Low pressure (less than + or - 2-inch water column
supply and return HVAC ducts shall be fabncated from
a fiberglass ductboard product which shell meet or
exceed the requirements of NFPA 90A and with
U.LStandard 181 for class 1 air duct The product shall
be faced with a foil - scrim -krolt Ieminate.Product shall
have a thermal conductivity no greater than 0.25 BTU
in./hr. /sq.ft /deg. F. at amean temperature difference of
75 degrees F. Product shall be 1 -Inch thick of nominal
4.75 pct density except where It is Installed below an
unlnsulated root end then it shall be 1.1/2' thick of
nominal 8.0 pct density or with a minimum R -value of
5.0hr. /sq.ft /deg. F./BTU.
2. Outside air duct and exhaust duct from wet areas such
as bathrooms with shower(s) shall be sheet metal duct
as previously described.
All joints and seams shall be sealed using one of three
systems:
1. a pressure sensitive tape complying with U.L -181 and
of minimum 2 -1/2' in width,
2. e heat - sealable tape of minimum 3' in width, or
3. a mastic and tape system approved by the
manufacturer.
The third closure system shall always be used whenever the
static pressure exceeds + or - 1 -inch of water column.
A. Flexible duct shall qualify as Class 1 by UL - 181 test
standards with a U -value not more than 0 .22
BTUH /sq.ft /deg. F. for 6 -Inch nominal duct size.
8. All supply air taps for flexible ducts shall be done with
factory-made sheetmerel spin -In taps with Integral balancing
dampers such as Flexmaster model FLD. All return air taps
for flexible ducts shall be done with factory-made spin -in taps
such as Flexmaster model FL
EXECUTION
During construction, all air - moving equipment and ducts shall be
protected from entrance of water, dust, trash, vermin, etc., per
Section 15010. Fans of all types not yet connected to ductwork
shall have Inlets and outlets covered with plastic sheet secured
temporarily with tape, wire, eta. Such covers shall be maintained
throughout the construction phase until the ductwork Is connected.
302 CLEANING
Ducts, plenums, and casings shall be thoroughly cleaned of all
debris and blown free of all small particles of rubbish and dust
before installing outlet faces. Equipment shall be wiped clean. with
all traces of oil, dust, dirt or paint spots removed. Temporary filters
shall be provided for all fans that are operated during construction.
New filters shell be installed after all construction dirt has been
removed. Bearings shall be properly lubricated with oil or grease as
recommended by the manufacturer. Belts shall be lightened to
produce tension. All control valves and other miscellaneous
equipment requiring adjusbnent shall be adjusted to settings tndssted
or as directed. Fans shall be adjusted to the speed indicated by the
manufacturer to meet specified conditions.
3.03 FILTERS
A. Filters shall be installed prior to start up of air moving
equipment
B. New filter media shall be provided and changed by this
Contractor upon acceptance of the system by the Owner.
3.04 AIR DEVICE INSTALLATION
A. Before installing any air device, Contractor shall verify that the
air device is rated by the manufacturer for the type of ceiling.
An air device listed by the manufacturer for a lay -in ceiling shall
not be Installed in a surface mount application; neither Is a
surface mount device allowed in a lay -in ceiling grid except
when installed in a ceiling the and not touching the gnd.
B Lay -In Devices
1. In a lay-in ceiling installation, if the Contractor's opinion
is that the grid and /or support system Is inadequate to
support the air devices,then the Contractor shall obtain
documented verification from the General Contractor
before any air devices are Installed in the grid.
2 If the air device is being installed In a fire -rated ceiling, the
Contractor shall support the air device with materials and
methods that comply with the rating and /or U.L Listing of
the ceiling.
3 If any air device has visible straight lines. such air device
shall be finally installed with straight lines parallel to the
ceding grid lines.
C. Surface- Mounted Devices
1. When gaskets are supplied or recommended by the
manufacturer, Contractor shall install the air device with
the gasket Intact and neatly and effectively in place. Air
device shall be Installed snug to the surface around the
enure perimeter.
2. Unless shown otherwise, air devices with straight lines
shall be installed with the straight lines parallel (or
perpendicular) to the building lines or to ceiling grid lines
if the device is being installed In a ceiling tile of a lay -in
ceiling.
3. If screws are used to secure the air device, screw heads
shall be either concealed or the same color as the air
device.
D. For each supply air device whose back Is exposed to an
unconditioned space such as an attic, Contractor shall provide
and Install 1 -1/2 Inch fiberglass duct wrap Insulation with
reinforced foil vapor barrier to the back of the device. The
Insulation shall overlap the back of each alr device at least
2-inches on all sides. Both the Insulation and the vapor barrier
shall be sealed at the juncture with the sheetmetal or insulated
flexible duct to form as nearly continuous thermal and vapor
barrier as possible.
3.05 SHEETMETAL DUC1WORK
Section 15840 - Air Oistnbution - Page 2 of 4
A. Duct sealing material shall not be used to fill gaps caused
either by careless or unprofessional work dunng fabrication
or erection or by damage after erection. Surfaces on which
sealant is to be applied shall be cleaned and dry before
application. 1f any oil or grease Is present, surface shall
additionally have a degreaser applied.
B. Make square elbows where shown or required, with double
thickness machine fabricated turning vanes. All elbows with
double thickness turning wanes shall be equal elbows, I e.
equal dimensions on inlet and outlet or elbows with no more
than a 1096 difference in one dimension only. It for some
reason, unequal elbows must be used, they shall be
constructed with single thickness tuming vanes with trailing
edge extensions parallel to the sides of the duct per
SMACNA HVAC Duct System Design recommendabons.
An acceptable substitute for square elbows are smooth
radius elbows with splitter vans If required and as
recommended by SMACNA. Such a substitution shall require
written notification to the Engineer along with shop drawings
for approval by Engineer of all elbows with solider vanes
C. Ducts shall be routed in conjunction with pipes. etectncal,
conduits, light, ceiling hangers, etc., so as to avoid
Interference insofar as possible.
3.06 FIBERGLASS DUCT
A. General
Fabrication and Installation of fiberglass ductboard shall
comply with S.M A.C.N.A. Fibrous Glass Duct Construction
Standards (Fifth Edition, 1979) and the manufacturer's written
mstnictions, whichever is stricter.
B. Closure
1. All transverse and longitudinal seams shall be stapled
with minimum 1/2" outward clinching staples on 2'
enters.
2. Regardless of the closure system used surfaces to
receive closure materials (tapes, mastic, etc.)shall be
cleaned of all din, grease, oil, etc.befare closure
system is applied.
C. Reinforcement
Unless stated otherwise, duct shall be fabricated for a
pressure class of over 12 thru 1" W.G.
D. Hanging and Support
1. Ala minimum, duct shall be supported at each fitting
and at no more than 8 feet for duct up to 35" wide and
at no more than 6 feet for duct 36" up to 59" wide and
at no more than 4 feet for ducts over 60" wide.
2. Hangers shell be trapeze type using channel (min.1" x
2' x 1' supported by 1" wide x22 9a steel strop or
1/4" threaded rods. No perforated strap or wires are
allowed. Transverse reinforcing members may also be
used in lieu of channel when they occur within the
hanger spacings given previously.
F. After duct La hung, contractor shall inspect the installation
and repair all cuts. punctures, or other damage to the vapor
homer.
3.07 Testing of Ductwork
A. General
Section 15840 - Air Distribution - Page 3 of 4
1. Perform tests and adjustments as required herein and as
required to insure proper and safe operation of all
equipment in preparation of balancing by others.Notify
Architect in advance of all tests.
2. Contractor shall give the Engineer not less than 3 days
notice odor to scheduling of tests.
3. Contractor shall test all ducts and equipment furnished
under this contract to assure their tightness, capacity,
quiet satisfactory operation and freedom from defects.
4. Tabulated results of all tests shall be submitted to
Engineer. All equipment shall be properly adjusted and
lubricated.
8. Supply Air Systems Leakage Tests
All supply ductwork shall be tested and shall meet air tightness
and strength requirements established and determined as
follows:
1. Equipment
a A source of high pressure air - a portable rotary
blower
b. Flow measuring device: orifice assembly consisting
of straightening vanes and or if ice plate mounted in
a straight tube with properly located pressure
taps. Each orifice assembly accurately calibrated with
its own calibration curve Pressure and flow
readings taken with U -tube manometers. Connect
test apparatus to duct by means of flexible duct
2. Procedure and Results
a. Test pressure shall be 2- inches w.g.greater than
system external static pressure but not in excess of
ductwork design pressure. Pressure across or if ice
on manometer No. 2 shall indicate no greater
leakage in system then one percent of total system
design an flow.
b. Audible leaks (noisy) will not be permitted
regardless of indicated percentage.
c. Tests shall be made on air supply ductwork before
cutting of openings for diffusers, registers, and
grilles.
d. Branches of ductwork systems may be tested as
installed, or sections of any branch may be tested
successively as installed.
e. Pressure shall not be applied to ductwork until
sealants used in seams and joint shave cured for
minimum period of time specified by sealant
manufacturers.
3. Remedial Actions
a. On small leaks at seams and )olnts,sealant material
may be applied as previously specified.
b. On larger gaps up to 124nch wlde,sealant by itself
is not adequate.Contractor may embed a fiberglass
scrim such as HARDCAST FS-150 in the
sealantSuch a patch may not be used to go around
a comer.
0. On gaps 12.inch wide or more, the duct secuon
shall be removed and repaired or replaced.
308 FLEXIBLE DUCT
A. Installation and support shall be in accordance with Section III
of HVAC DUCT CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS, First Edition
1985 by SMACNA.
B. Maximum Flexible duct length shall be 8 ft and toad duct
bends shell not exceed 135 degrees.
C. Flexible duct shall be installed away from hot equipment and
surfaces, both mechanical and electrical Including, but not
limited to, transformers, lighting ballasts, lIghts, etc..
D. The ends of ducts shall be trimmed squarely prior to
installation.
E. Connections
1. Duct - to-duct connections or "splicing" is prohibited.
2. At sheetmelal taps and at air devices, insulation and
outer jacket shall be slit and carefully peeled back
approximately 4- inches.
3. Inner duct shall be secured tightly to the collar,without
defomtation of the collar, using a drawb and system
such as PANDUr1.
4. Insulation shall be pulled back over duct and collar
and snugly butted against the sheetrnetal or air device.
Insulation shall be snugly secured with another drawb
and without significant compression of the insulation.
5. A mastic type sealer shall be applied to the longitudinal
out In the duct outer jacket and all along the
circumference of the butt joint between the Flex duct
and the sheetmetal duct In addition to sealing the
joints, the mastic material shall form a Flexible, effective
vapor seal.
END OF SECTION
Section 15840 - AIr Distribution - Page 4 of 4
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A.
C. Air balance and testing shall not begin until system has been
completed and is in full working order. The Contractor shall
put all heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems and
equipment Into full operation during each working day of
testing and balancing
PART 2 EXECUTION
201 GENERAL
All test and balance work shall be performed by a technician
certified by the National Environmental Balancing
Bureau(NEBB), or by the Associated Air Balance Council
(AABC).
Balance, adjust and test air moving equipment, air
distribution and exhausting systems as herein specified. All
instruments used shall be accurately calibrated and
maintained In good working order.
A Upon the completion of the air conditioning system, perform
the tests, complete the test data, and submit the complete
test data to Engineer for evaluation and approval.
Test data shall be reported using standard NEBB or AABC
forms and procedures. Reports shall be typed for legibility.
B. Wherever penetrations in the duct are required tor making
traverses, etc., provide and install an instrument test hole
fitting such as Duro Dyne No. TH -1. Fitting shall be gasketed,
leakproof when capped, and with removable cap. Use of
tape to cover test holes is prohibited.
2.02 TESTING PROCEDURES
A. Perform the following tests, and balance system In
aeeordanee with the following requirements:
SECTION 15990 - HVAC TEST- ADJUST - BALANCE
1. Test and adjust each fan RPMs to design requirements.
2. Test and record motor full load amperes.
3. Test and record system static pressures, intake and
discharge.
4. Test and adjust system for design CFM outside air.
5. Test and record entering and leaving rat temperatures
(D.B. and W.B.)
6. Adjust each main supply and retum air duct to proper
design CFM.
7. Adjust each zone to proper design CFM.
8. Test and adjust each diffuser, grille and register to
within 1096 of design requirements.
9. Each grille, diffuser, and register shall be identified as
to location and area
10. Size, type and manufacture of diffusers, grilles,
registers, and all tested equipment shall be identified
and listed. Manufacturer's ratings an all equipment
shall be used to make required calculations.
11. Readings and tests of diffusers, gnllea, and registers
shall include required FPM velocity and test resultant
velocity, required CFM and test resultant CFM after
adjustments.
12. In cooperation with the control manufacturer's
representative, make setting adjustments of automatically
operated dampers to operate as specified, indicated,
and/or noted. Check all controls for proper calibrations
and list all controls requinng adjustment by control
installers.
13. All diffusers, grilles and registers shall be adjusted to
minimize drafts in all areas.
14. M a part of the work of this contract, the air conditioning
Contractor shall make any changes in the pulleys, belts,
and dampers or the addition of dampers required for
correct balance as required at no additional cost to
Owner.
203 RESULTS
Section 15990 - HVAC Test - Adjust - Balance - Page 1 of 1
When test results are unsattslactory, repairs and /or corrections to
system shall be made and tests shall be repeated until the results are
satisfactory.
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
GENERAL
PEI WORN
All test and balance work shall be performed by a technician
c o e ed by the National Environmental Balancing
B u(NEBB), or by the Associated Air Balance Council
( C ).
Balance, adjust and test air moving equipment, air
dilu and exhausting systems as herein specified. All
in manta used shall be accurately calibrated and
m ned In good working order.
Air ante and testing shall not begin until system has been
feted and is In full working order. The Contractor shall
p I heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems and
equipment into full operation during each working day of
testing and balancing
U the completion of the air conditioning system, perform
the eats, complete the test data, and submit the complete
test data to Engineer for evaluation and approval.
T ate shall be reported using standard NEBB or AABC
fo and procedures. Reports shall be typed for legibility.
W ever penetrations in the duct are required for making
tr 5, etc., provide and install an instrument lest hole
Ott such as Duro Dyne No. TH -1. Fitting shall be gasketed,
le proof when capped, and with removable cap Use of
tape to cover test holes is prohibited.
IN•ROCEDURES
Perform the following tests, and balance system in
an dance with the following requirements:
1. Test and adjust each fan RPMs to design requirements.
2. Test and record motor lull load amperes.
3. Test and record system static pressures, intake and
discharge.
4. lest and adjust system for design CFM outside air.
5. Test and record entering and leaving air temperatures
(D.& and W.B.)
0. Adjust each main supply and return err duct to proper
design CFM.
7. .Adjust each zone to proper design CFM.
8. Test and adjust each diffuser, gdlle and register to
within 10% of design requirements.
9. Each grille, diffuser, and register shall be identified as
o location and area.
10 ire, type and manufacture of diffusers, grilles,
registers, and all tested equipment shall be Identified
and listed. Manufacturer's ratings on all equipment
hall be used to make required calculations.
11 Readings and tests of diffusers, grilles, and registers
shall include required FPM velocity and test resultant
velocity, required CFM and test resultant CFM after
justmente.
1
JUTION
SECTION 15990 - HVAC TEST - ADJUST- BALANCE
Section 15990 - HVAC Test - Adjust - Balance - Page 1 of 1
12. In cooperation with the control manufacturer's
representative, make setting adjustments of automatically
operated dampers to operate as specified, indicated,
and/or noted. Check all controls for proper calibrations
and list all controls requiring adjustment by control
installers.
13. All diffusers, grilles and registers shall be adjusted to
minimize drafts in all areas.
14. As a part of the work of this contract, the air conditioning
Contractor shall make any changes In the pulleys, belts,
and dampers or the addition of dampen required for
correct balance as required at no additional cost to
Owner.
2.03 RESULTS
When test results are unsatisfactory, repairs and/or corrections to
system shall be made and tests shall be repeated until the results are
satisfactory.
END OF SECTION
•
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
A. This Work includes the furnishing of all labor, materials,
tools, equipment, rigging, etc., necessary or reasonably
required, for complete installation and operation of electrical
work as shown on the drawings and as herein specified.
B. Unless otherwise noted, all work in this division shall be the
responsibility of the Electrical Contractor.
1.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: RELATED SECTIONS
A. Secban 15010, 'General Requirements for Mechanical end
Electrcal Work' shall apply also to this Section. Special
reference is given to the Examination of Site Requirements.
END OF SECTION
Section 16010 - General Requirements for Electrical Work - Page 1 of 1
SECTION 16010 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
PART 2 PRODUCTS AND INSTALLATION
201 RACEWAYS
SECTION 16050 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
A. Provide labor and materials necessary for complete and
working systems, including:
_ Raceways_
Outlet boxes
_Junction or pull boxes
_ Conductors _
_Grounding_ system
_ All_ associated wiring devices, supporting devices, sleeves.
escutcheons, etc.
8. Unless otherwise noted, work of this section shall be the
responsibility of the Electrical Contractor.
A Run wire of every description, unless noted otherwise in
specifications, in conduit Rigid galvanized steel shall be
used where exposed to weather. Electric metallic tubing
shall be used indoors. Schedule 40 PVC conduit may be
used underground provided adequately -sized ground wire
Is installed in a approved manner. Where underground
conduit rises above ground use rigid galvanized steel 90
degree elbow and extend to enclosure with RGS conduit.
B. Underground conduit shall be installed in accordance with
Section 15050 Basic Materials and Methods - Safety,
Excavation, Bacldill. Underground conduits from service
transformer shall be a minimum of 30" below finish grade,
and have a 7 thick red concrete cap, 12" above conduits
and the full width of trench; unless elecmc utilities company
requirements dictate otherwise. Branch circuit conduits shall
have a minimum of 24" of cover; no concrete casing or cap
is required unless Indicated otherwise.
C. Conduit joints shall be cut square, threaded (when
required), reamed smooth and drawn tight Make field -bends
and offsets with approved benders or hickey, or use
threaded type conduit bodies.
D. Run concealed conduits in direct line with long sweep
bends and offsets. Run exposed conduits parallel with or at
right angles to building lines. Install conduit runs to avoid
proximity of other services or systems which may prove
injurious to conduit or wires. Conduits passing through roof
shall be flashed. Conduit shall be supported with hangers
from structure. Exposed conduit is permitted in apparatus
bay, all other conduit shall be concealed.
E. Conduits shall be continuous In all respects. Secure to
boxes with lockouts and bushings so each system Is
electrically continuous throughout
Where conduits are installed In damp locations, make -up all
joints with teflon tape and completely seal around joint with
GE silicon caulk or equal. Where run In wet location, use
approved watertight connectors. Avoid creating moisture
traps. Join conduits which cross building expansion joints
Section 16050 - Basic Materials and Methods - Page 1 of 3
with expansion fitting and bonding jumper. Cap conduitends
to prevent entrance of foreign materials during construction.
F. Install conduit complete before conductors are pulled.
G. Provide gland nog compression threaded fittings with Insulated
throats for electric metallic tubing. Conduit bodies shall be
threaded type. Concrete tight double Set screw fittings are
acceptable for 2.1 diameter conduit and larger.
H. Flexible metal conduit, UL approved, shall be used for final 24"
of connection to motors, transformers, and any equipment
subject to vibration. Connection between ngid conduit or EMT
and flexible conduit shall be made through conduit couplings.
Connections to exterior equipment shall be with Ilquld -fight,
PVC covered, flexible metal conduit with waterproof connectors.
A grounding conductor, of adequate size, with green insulation
shall be installed in all flexible conduit.
I Minimum conduit size shall be 3/4 ".
J. All conduit installed below ground shall have installed in the
same trench, a detectable plastic tape that conforms to the
APWA color coding.
Such tape shall consist of one layer of aluminum foil laminated
between two layers of inert plastic film. Tape shall be at least
three inches wide and shall be Imprinted with a continuous
warning message repealed every 16" to 36". Tape shall be
inductively locatable and conductively traceable fora minimum
of eight years after direct burial. Product shall be Terra Tape
Detectable or approved equal. Tape shall be installed per
manufacturer's instructions.
K Where raceways pass through fire rated wells or floors, fire
stopping devices shall be provided.
L When conduit is installed concealed in CMU block walls, the
CMU block shall be saw cut and patched using methods
approved by the Architect
M. Raceways shall comply with applicable portions of NEMA
Standards and N.E.C..
2.02 OUTLET BOXES
A. At device locations provide metal outlet box size and type as
required to house the device. Boxes shall be galvanized coated
flat rolled steel and UL listed and labeled, and shall comply
with N.E.C. as applicable to construction and installation.
B. Recessed boxes for lighting fixtures shall be 4" octagonal
boxes, 2- 1/8" deep.
C. Recessed boxes for single gang wall switches or receptacles
shag be 4" square, 2 -1/8" deep In standard walls, and 1- 1/2
deep in thin walls. When gang arrangements are employed,
use 4- 11/16" square boxes. Mount outlet boxes for switches at
standard height of 54" from floor, and receptacle boxes 17
from floor, unless directed or required otherwise. Where outlets
occur back- to-back In a common wall, boxes shall be offset
with minimum 6" separation.
D. Location of outlets shown on drawings is approximate ony. h
is Contractor's responsibility to study building drawings with
relation to spaces surrounding outlets so his work will fit
with work of others.
E Boxes to have threaded screw holes, with corrosion-resistant
covers and grounding screws for fastening covers and
equipment grounding.
F. Contractor shall verify the exact location of all outlets with
the Architect, poor to rough -in.
G. Provide outlet box accessones as required for installation,
such as mounting brackets.
2.03 JUNCTION OR PULL BOXES
A. Conduit runs of more than 100 feet or with more than three
dght angle bends, shall have pull boxes Instilled at readily
accessible intermediate locations.
B. Boxes shall be galvanized coated gat rolled steel. Furnish
with removable screw covers for either gush or surface
installation, as required.
C. Securely mount boxes to building structure with suppomng
facilities independent of conduits entedng or leaving boxes.
D. Boxes shall be sized per N.EC..
2.04 CONDUCTORS
A. Use soft drawn, annealed copper wire, conductivity no less
than 98% of pure copper, and 800 volt Insulation. Wire shall
be UL listed and labeled and shall comply with NEMA and
IEEE Standards. Wire size, Insulation type and
manufacturer's identification to be permanently marked on
conductors jacket at regular intervals.
B. Factory color coding up to and Including No. 8 AWG shall
be used. Connect circuit conductors of same color to same
ungrounded feeders throughout installation. large wires
shall be color coded by one inch wide band of colored
adhesive plastic tape on ends of each conductor.
Conductors shall be color coded as follows:
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.
120/240V single phase
a Phase A • Red
b. Phase B - Black
c. Neutral - White
d. Ground - Green
No. 8 AWG conductors and larger shall be stranded, No. 10
AWG and smaller shall be solid. Do not use wire smaller
than No. 12 AWG, except for signal or control circuits, which
may be No. 14 AWG.
Circuits may be combined in one conduit provided the
circuit is derated according to National Electric Code.
Install conductors with following lypes of insulation: Branch
circuit conductors: Type THW, THWN, THHN or XHHW.
Feeder conductors: Type THW, THWN, THHN or XHHW.
Use UL listed pulling compound or lubricant where
necessary. Run mains and feeders In continuous lengths
without 101nb or splices. Make joints or splices in branch
circuits with approved solderless connectors.
205 GROUNDING
C.
D.
E.
F.
2.06
A.
8
C.
D.
E.
F
G.
H.
Section 16050 - Basic Materials and Methods - Page 2 of 3
A. Provide adequate permanent servlee neutral and equipment
grounding in accordance with N.E.C. requirements, and
additional requirements as follows:
B. Service neutral and grounding electrode conductor shall have
common point of connection within metallic enclosure
containing main service dlsconnectlng means. Grounding
electrode conductor shall be connected to building steel,
in-earth ground rods. or main metal water pipe system.
Thoroughly clean contact surfaces before connections are
made to assure good metal- to-metal contact. Equipment
grounding conductors shall be as prescribed in N.EC..
Assure electrical continuity of metallic raceway system. Provide
bonding jumpers across expansion joints.
Provide insulated green grounding conductor In _all_ conduit
Conduit may not serve as ground.
Provide electrical bonding plates, connectors, terminals, lugs
and clamps as required for installation of grounding system.
Provide connection accessones (tape, welding materials,
bonding straps) as required for type Services indicated.
Test grounding system continuity throughout power distnbution
system.
SUPPORTING DEVICES
Supports and anchors famished as part of factory- fabricated
equipment are specified as part of equipment assembly. Refer
to other specification sections.
Conduit ( honzontal and vertical) throughout building shall be
adequately supported from structure. No conduit shall be
self- supported. Support large vertical conduits with steel riser
clamps sized to 1t lines and adequately support weight Where
required for proper support provide anchor base fittings or
other approved supports.
Provide U.L listed and labeled supports and hangers with
corrosion-resistant and rust-resistant finish. Galvanize or
electro-plate hanger rods after threading.
Provide Universal concrete inserts on concrete work and beam
clamps on structural work Supports shall be as required for
loads involved.
Support horizontal conduit from overhead structural members
by steel rods. Hanger spacing for electrical metallic tubing,
ngid metal conduit and intermediate metal conduit shall be in
compliance with N.E.0 requirements. Conduits shall be
supported and fastened within 3'.O of each outlet box.
Hangers shall be similar and equal to:
Individual - tendert C -149
Multiple - lendorf 8 -905 channel with C -105 straps.
Arrange for grouping of parallel runs to be supported together
on trapeze type hangers. Properly size trapeze type members
including suspension rods, for number, size and weight of lines
to be supported.
Perforated strap or wire is _not acceptable_ as hanger material.
I. Where more than one type of supporting device meets
Indicated requirements, selection shall be at Installer's
option.
207 WIRING DEVICES
Wiring devices shall conform to schedule or notes on drawings,
shall be UL listed for application Indicated, and shall comply with
applicable NEMA Standards.
2.00 COVER PLATES
Cover plates shall conform to schedule listed on drawings and
shell mate with wiring devices to which attached. Use metal
screws with heads colored to match finish of plates.
2.09 SLEEVES, PLATES AND SEALS
A. Provide and locate sleeves and inserts required before
floors, roofs and walls are constructed. or be responsible for
cost of cutting and patching required to insert conduits
where sleeves and inserts were not installed or Incorrectly
located.
B. Pipe sleeves above grade and in dry locations shall be
constructed from 16 gauge galvanized steel sheetmetal and
flush on both sides of surfaces. Sleeves on or below grade
shall be constructed of Schedule 40 galvanized steel,
Schedule 40 PVC, or of cast Iron. Sleeves through concrete
beams shall be Schedule 40 black steel.
C. Provide sleeves for conduits passing thru concrete floor
stabs and concrete, masonry, tile and gypsum wall
construction.
D. Where sleeves am placed in exterior walls below grade, seal
conduit and sleeve using factory-assembled mechanical
type system providing water -tight and insulated seal, as
manufactured by CDS or approved equivalent
E. Where conduits pass through fire or smoke rated walls,
floors or partition, space around the conduit shall be sealed
with fire rated noncombustible material to prevent passage
of flame and smoke.
F. In each finished space, provide a chromium plated, one
piece, test brass escutcheon on conduit penetrating wall,
floor or ceiling. Escutcheons shall be sized to fit snugly to
conduit Plates shall be provided with three chrome plated
ellen head set screws so that plates fit snugly against
finished surface.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 TESTING
A. Test all installations of service and feeder conductors after
wiring is completed and connected. Resistance between
each ungrounded conductor and each ungrounded
conductor to ground shall be equal to minimum value
recommended by the Institute of Electrical and Electronic
Engineers. Neutral conductor shall be isolated from ground
and tested as an ungrounded conductor. Tests shell be
non-destructive, using 500 volt DC megohm meter.
B. Where tests show resistance to ground Is over allowed, take
appropriate action to reduce resistance to minimum by
driving additional ground rods and/or by chemically treating
3.02
A.
3.03
A.
Section 16050 - Basin Materials and Methods - Page 3 of 3
soil encircling ground rod; then retest system to demonstrate
compliance.
C. Test wiring devices by operating each operable device at least
six times to demonstrate compliance Test ground fault
interrupter devices with both local and remote fault simulations
in accordance with manufacturer recommendations.
ROUGH -IN
Verify final locations for rough -ins with field measurements and
with requirements of actual equipment to be connected.
B. Refer to equipment specifications In Divisions 2 through 15 for
roughen requirements.
INSTALLATION
Coordinate electrical materials installation with other building
components, and arrange for necessary chases, slots, and
openings to allow for electrical installations.
B. Coordinate cutting and patching of budding components to
accommodate installation of electrical matenals.
END OF SECTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
A. Furnish and install all labor and material necessary for
complete and working systems, Including:
_Panelboards
_Safety_ and Disconnect Switches
_Fuses_
Motor Slavers
_
Ftectrieal Connections
_Temperature_ Control Wiring
B. Unless otherwise noted, work of this section shall be the
responsibility of the Electrical Contractor.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.01 CIRCUIT BREAKER PANELBOARDS
Provide U.L listed, dead -front safety type panelboards
mounted in baked gray enamel finished cabinets of code
gauge steel with trim and door, and with quantity, type,
ratings, and size of circuit breakers as scheduled on
drawings.
Provide bolt-On type, thermal magnetic branch circuit
breakers with inverse time delay thermal trip on overloads
and instantaneous magnetic trip on short circuits. Breakers
shall employ quick -make, quick -break toggle mechanism for
manual operation as well as automatic operation. Automatic
trippng shall be indicated by breaker handle assuming a
clearly distinctive position from manual ON and OFF.
Provide multi -pole breakers with common trip which operate
all poles simultaneously and with single operating handle
for all poles. Handle ties between breakers are not
acceptable.
Panelboard bussing shall be 'sequence' type so that
multi -pole breakers can be substituted for single -pole
breakers without bus assembly rearrangements.
Bus ban shall be copper. Provide full -sized neutral bars and
uninsulated ground bus bars.
Equip with interior circuit - directory frame and typed directory
on card with clear plastic covenng.
Acceptable Manufacturers: CUTLER HAMMER, GENERAL
ELECTRIC, ITE, SQUARE D, WESTINGHOUSE
2.02 SAFETY AND DISCONNECT SWITCHES
A. Provide UL listed safety switches which meet
NEMA- KSI.1975 for heavy -duty type with single Interlock
quick -make, quick -break and high pressure fuse holders
where required.
B. Switches exposed to weather shall be in NEMA 3-R rain -tight
enclosures with raintlght hubs. In interior locations, they
shall be In NEMA 1 General Purposes enclosures, unless
indicated otherwise.
SECTION 16400 - ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
C Provide switches In types, sizes, features, ratings, and
enclosures as Indicated on drawings for equipment
disconnects. Provide units with ratings suitable to bads, per
N E.C.
D. Acceptable Manufacturers: GENERAL ELECTRIC, ITE, SQUARE
0, WESTINGHOUSE.
2.03 FUSES
Section 16400 - Electrical Equipment - Page 1 of 2
A. Provide U.L listed and labeled fuses for overcurrent protection
and to leave system in complete working order. Feeder circuit
fuses shall correspond with ampacity of the protected feeder.
Size motor circuit fuses from standard fuse tables. Determine
exact motor size and rating of motor from motor nameplate and
furnish properly sized fuses.
B. Fuses shall have ampere ratings as indicated on drawings, and
voltage rating equal to, or greater than, voltage at their point or
application: All fuse contact surfaces shall be plated.
C. Fuses to 600 amperes shall be Sussman Low Peak Dual
Element type LPN -RK (250 volts) or Gould Shawmut A2D and
Bussman LSP -RK (600 volts) or Gould Shawmut A6D, unless
otherwise noted. Fuses above 600 amperes shall be Bussman
KRP -C or Gould Shawmut A4BT time delay fuses unless
otherwise noted.
D. Provide spare fuses in quantities of 10% of each size and type
Installed, but in no case less than three spares of each size.
Deliver spare fuses to Owner, neatly enclosed In suitable
cabinet.
2.04 MOTOR STARTERS
A. Magnetic motor starters shall be U.L listed and labeled, full
voltage, non - reversing type. Each starter shall be fumished,
completely wired, with accessories as follows: One
HAND-OFF- AUTOMATIC switch, one red 'ON" pilot light, and
24 volt control transformer. Starter shell be mounted in NEMA
1 enclosure. unless noted otherwise or as otihenvise required
by equipment location. Provide combination starter and
disconnect switch where Indicated on drawings.
8. Unless noted otherwise, motor starters shall be furnished by
Electrical Contractor. Mechanical Contractor shall provide to
Electrical Contractor a complete list of motors requiring starters
and shall include the following information for each such motor.
C.
D
1. tag reference to piece of equipment for which motor
starter is needed.
2. voltage and number 01 phases,
3. motor requirements in terms of horsepower, running load
ernes, full bad amps, etc.,
4. other Information required or requested by Electrical
Contractor.
Electrical Contractor shall receive and review above
intormabon and advise Mechanical Contractor of any
discrepancies or required modifications. Electrical Contractor
shall provide correct starter per electrical drawings and
specifications.
Acceptable Manufacturers: ALLEN - BRADLEY. CUTLER
HAMMER. CROUSE- HINDS, GENERAL ELECTRIC, SQUARE
0, WESTINGHOUSE.
2.05 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
A. Provide electrical connections for equipment as Indicated by
drawings and schedules. Electncal connections are defined
to be connections used for providing electrical power to
equipment including heating equipment, motors,
communication system master units, and grounding points.
8. For each electrical connection, provide complete assembly
of matedals including, but not limited to, pressure
connections, terminals (lugs), electrical insulating tape,
electrical solder, electrical soldering Flux, heat- shnnkable
Insulating tubing, cable ties, soldertess wuenuts, and other
Items as needed to complete splices and terminations.
C. Refer to other sections of specifications for conduit, wire,
motor starters, and control winng.
D. Install connections as Indicated to accordance with
connector's manufacturer's Instructions and recognized
Industry practices, and complying with applicable UL and
N.E.C. requirements.
8. Upon completion of installation of electrical connections,
and after circuitry has been energized with rated power
source, test connections to demonstrate capability and
compliance with requirements.
2 06 TEMPERATURE CONTROL WIRING
Temperature controls to be Installed by Temperature Control
Contractor where nature of job or specifications call for a
Temperature Control contractor. Refer to Section 15900.
Otherwise, all wiring, conduit, and terminations shall be provided
by the Electrical Contractor, coordinated with Mechanical
Contractor. All wiring shall be In conduit Plenum approved cable
In areas using return air plenums, may be used in lieu of conduit
and winng.
2.07 NAMEPLATES
A. Provide permanent operational data nameplate an each Item
of electrical equipment indicating manufacturer, product
name, model number, serial number, capacity, operating
and power characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and
similar essential data
B. Locate nameplates in accessible location on equipment
C. Plates shall be engraved melamine black plastic laminate
with white core getter color) and punched for mechanical
fastening to equipment, except where adhesive mounting is
necessary.
D. Thickness of plates shall be 1/16' for units up to 20 sq. In.
or 8' in length, and 1/8' for larger units.
8. Fasten nameplates with stainless steel screws or
contact -type permanent adhesive where screws cannot or
should not penetrate equipment
PART 3 - IXECUTION
3.01 TESTING
Section 16400 - Electrical Equipment - Page 2 of 2
A. Take amperage and voltage readings at each panelboard with
circuits in operation and submit typewntten tabulation of
readings to Engineer to demonstrate that load Is balanced at
each board.
B. Do not test disconnect switches by operating them under bad.
However, demonstrate switch operation through six
opening /closings. Remove and replace detective units with now
units and retest to demonstrate compliance.
3 02 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate electrical equipment Installation with other building
components.
B. Sequence, coordinate, and Integrate Installation of electrical
equipment for efficient Flow of work Give particular attention to
large equipment requiring installation prior to closing -in rooms.
C. Install electrical equipment to facilitate maintenance and repair
or replacement of equipment components.
END OF SECTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
A. Furnish and install all labor and matenais as required for
complete and working lighting system including:
2.02 BALLASTS
203 LAMPS
_Light Fixtures_
_Ballasts
_Lamps_
B. Unless otherwise noted, work of this section shall be the
responsibility of the Electrical Contractor.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 LIGHTING FIXTURES
Provide lighting fixtures and components of sizes, types, and
ratings as indicated on drawings and listed in facture
schedule, complete with ballasts, lamps, starters, suspension
accessories, canopies, hickey. casings, sockets, Tamp
holders, frames, housings, and wiring. Verify actual ceiling
system to be installed by Ceiling Contractor prior to ordenng
fixtures. tF future type designation a omitted, facture shall be
same type as scheduled for rooms of similar usage.
A. Provide energy- saving fluorescent•lamp ballasts of
rapid•start, high power factor type. Design and construction
shall conform to C8M and UL standards. Ballasts rated at
430 MA shall be UL Class P and sound rated A. Ballasts
rated at 600 MA shall be UL approved and sound rated B
Fixture manufacturer shall furnish certified test data showing
ballast case temperature will not exceed 90 degrees C when
tested on standard NEMA ceding.
B. Provide HID lamp ballasts capable of operating lamp types
of ratings Indicated. Ballasts shall be high power factor type
with capacitor installed outside ballast enclosure for easy
field replacement
C. Acceptable manufacturers: ADVANCE. VALMONT,
JEFFERSON, UNIVERSAL Ballasts shall be warranted for
one year including labor.
A. Fluorescent and H I D lamps shall be as Indicated in facture
schedule.
8. Incandescent fixtures shall be furnished complete with
extended service, inside frosted lamps or shall be furnished
with lamps of size, beam, and wattage exactly as indicated
In schedule.
•
C. Acceptable Manufacturers: GENERAL ELECTRIC, SYLVANIA,
WESTINGHOUSE, PHILLIPS.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
SECTION 16500 - IJGHIING
B.
C.
0.
E.
Section 16500 - Lighting - Page 1 of 1
A. Lighting fixtures shall be installed in symmetrical pattems with
partitions, air devices, and speakers, etc. Locations shown on
electrical drawings are of a general nature and shall not be
scaled for location. Contractor shall refer to Architectural
reflected ceiling plans (where these are provided) for specific
locations of light fixture locations.
Futures shall be installed in neat, workmanlike appearance.
Recessed futures shall have face plates Installed 'snug' to
ceilings; surface mounted futures shall have fixture bodies
Installed ^snug" to ceilings and plumb.
Clean fixtures of dm and debris upon completion of installation.
Protect futures already Installed, from damage during
remainder of construction.
Recessed fluorescent lighting fixtures shall have four (4) he
wires on each fixture, one at each comer, connected to
structure. Connection to other systems is not acceptable.
Fluorescent and HID lamps may be used in finishing out of
building. tamps that have been used for more than 1!3 of their
rated life (as determined by the Owner's construction inspector
records) or that have blacken ends, shall be replaced by new
lamps just before final inspection. Incandescent lamps shall be
new at erne of final Inspection.
F. Upon completion of Installation of lighting fixtures, and after
building circuitry I3 energized, apply energy to demonstrate
compliance with requirements. Correct malfunctioning units
and replace defective lamps, then retest
END OF SECTION
PART 1 GENERAL B. Provide bell ends on all conduits stubbed Into attic space for
installation of cabling by communications company.
1.01 SCOPE
A. Furnish and install 43 materials and labor necessary for
complete installation of working systems as Indicated by
drawings, Including:
Telephone Conduit System_
Television Conduit System_
_Intercom Conduit System_
B. It shall be the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor to
provide this work as described in the drawings and herein
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 TELEPHONE CONDUIT SYSTEM
A. Provide system of empty conduits with pull string, sleeves,
boxes, and telephone terminal boards as necessary for
Installation of telephone conductors, as Indicated on
drawings. Installation shall conform to Owner's telephone
company requirements.
B. Requirements for system shall be verified and costs
chargeable to Owner for telephone company's work shall be
obtained by Contractor poor to bidding and shall be
Included in bid.
C. Terminal boards shall be 314" plywood. 3k3' unless
Indicated otherwise on drawings or directed otherwise by
Owner's telephone company.
D. Provide empty conduit from each telephone outlet to 6"
above ceiling, In attic space.
2 02 TELEVISION CONDUIT SYSTEM
A. Provide system of empty conduits with pull wires, sleeves.
boxes, and connections as necessary for installation of
television conductors. as Indicated on drawings. Installation
shell conform to Owner's cable television company
requirements.
B. Provide empty conduit from each T.V. outlet to 6" above
ceiling, in attic space.
2.03 INTERCOM CONDUIT SYSTEM
A. Provide system of empty conduits with pull wires, sleeves,
boxes, and connections as necessary for installation of
intercom system wing and devices, as indicated on
drawings. Installabon shall conform to Owner's intercom
system requirements.
B. Provide empty conduit from each box/device to 6" above
ceding, In attic space.
PART 3 EXECUTION
A. Refer to Section 16010 and 16050.
SECTION 16700 - COMMUNICATIONS
Section 16700 - Communications - Page 1 of 1
END OF SECTION
AcoI l).
CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE ISSUE DATE (MM /DD/YY)
n 6/21 /91
PRODUCER
WARD INSURANCE AGENCY INC
P O BOX 179
GATESVILLE TX 76528
THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND
CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE
DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE
POLICIES BELOW.
COMPANIES AFFORDING COVERAGE
COMPANY
LETTER A PROVIDENCE WASHINGTON INS GRP
COMPANY
LETTER B PROVIDENCE
WASHINGTON INS
WASHINGTON INS
GRP
INSURED
GREATER TEXAS CONST CORP
P 0 BOX 395
BELTON TX 76513
.
COMPANY
LETTER C PROVIDENCE
GRP
COMPHNY
COMPANY
LETTER E UNITED STATES FIDELITY & GTY
COVERAGES ... .. - _,
THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD
INDICATED, NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS
CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS,
EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS.
CO TYPE OF INSURANCE
LTR
POLICY NUMBER
POLICY EFFECTIVE
DATE (MM /DD)
M'
POLICY EXPIRATION LIMITS
DATE (MM /DD /YY)
AGENERAL LIABILITY
X COMMERCIAL
GENERAL LIABILITY
MADE, OCCUR.
PROT
TCX314525
6/18/91
6/18/ 92$ENERAL
AGGREGATE
$ 1,000 , 00
PRODUCTS - COMP /OP A$G.
$ 1,000, 000
CLAIMS
PERSONAL & ADV INJURY
$500,000
$500,000
$50,000
-OWNER'S &CONTRACTOR'S
EACH OCCURRENCE
FIRE DAMAGE (Any ORR lire)
MED EXPENSE (Any one person)
$5,000
B
AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY
X ANY AUTO
—1 ALL OWNED AUTOS
( SCHEDULED AUTOS
X HIRED AUTOS
X NON-OWNED AUTOS
1
GARAGE LIABILITY
TAX384240
6/1 8/91 6/1 8/92
COMBINED SINGLE
LIMIT
$1,000,000
BODILY INJURY
(Per perean)
BODILY INJURY
(Per accident)
$
PROPERTY DAMAGE
$
CEXCESSLIABILITY
FR UMBRELLA FORM
OTHER THAN UMBRELLA FORM
CU346333
6/18/91 6/18/ 92EACH
OCCURRENCE
$2,000,000
AGGREGATE
$2,000,000
WORKER'S COMPENSATION
AND
EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY
( STATUTORY LIMITS
EACH ACCIDENT $ —.
DISEASE — POLICY LIMIT I $
I
DISEASE —EACH EMPLOYEE $
EOTHER
BUILDERS RISK
CIM132218779
3/30/91 3/30/92
DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION$ILOCATIONS /VEHICLES /SPECIAL ITEMS
STATION NUMBER 3 — ROUND ROCK FIRE DEPT — CERT OF INS FOR WORKERS COMP IS ON
FILE IN YOUR OFFICE — CERT WILL BE RENEWED BY TRAVELERS INS ON RENEWAL AUGUST
25 1991
CERTIFICATE HOLDER _.. CANCELLATION _... _ ... ....
CITY OF ROUND ROCK
ATTN JIM NUSE
221 E MAIN ST
ROUND ROCK TX 78664
SHOULD
EXPIRATION
MAIL
LEFT
ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED
nn DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING COMPANY WILL
3' 9AYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER
BEFORE THE
NAMED TO THE
B�]ED pE qE FTA [�Y �
AUTHD JUY1 PI WHH w
9,e. 1,,_J R. �cd
ACORD 25 - (7/90) ll CACORD CORPORATION 1990
154 L2
Ch » e
Please insert :h
your copy of the
Conti-ac r; (Pi re
SACC 1'10 /I 44. 3)
i
TRANSMITTAL LETTER
PROJECT: City of Round Rock PROJECT #: 03 -9320
trFire Stations #3 a nd #4 DATE: November 19, 1996
TO: City of Round Rock FROM: Keith A. Hickman
Legal Department
ATTN: Steve Sheets
FOR YOUR:
[ ] approval [ ] distribution to parties
[ ] information [ X ] record
If enclosures are not as noted, please inform us immediately.
REMARKS:
Per your request, please find copies of the Specifications and Addendums
for Fire Stations #3 and #4.
For your information - Also attached, you will find a transmittal which
reflects our delivery to you on 06 October 1994 of the plans and
specifications for Fire Station #4. Our fax tranmittal log also reflects that
all addendums were faxed to your office around that time period.
If there is anything more we can provide for you, please let us know.
Thank you.
If checked below, please:
[ 1 Acknowledge receipt
[ ] Return enclosures
OPUS
ARCHTrE.(S & ENGINEERS
1 1 review & comment
[ ] analysis
WHEREAS, the City of Round Rock has duly advertised for bids for
the construction of the Chisholm Valley Fire Substation #3, and
WHEREAS, Greater Texas Construction Company has submitted the
lowest and best bid, and
WHEREAS, the City Council wishes to accept the bid of Greater
Texas Construction Company, Now Therefore,
BE IT RESOLVED BY THE COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF ROUND ROCK, TEXAS,
That the bid of Greater Texas Construction Company is hereby
accepted as the lowest and best bid, and the Mayor is hereby
authorized and directed to execute on behalf of the City a contract
with Greater Texas Construction Company for the construction of the
Chisholm Valley Fire Substation #3, said contract being attached
hereto and incorporated herein for all purposes.
RESOLVED this 10th day of January, 1991.
ATTEST:
RSO1101B
LAND, City Secretary
RESOLUTION NO. I5 r
MIKE ROBINSON, Mayor
City of Round Rock, Texas
THIS AGREEMENT is entered into on this the 10TH day of January 1991, between the City of Round
Rock, and Greater Texas Construction Corporation, for the following PROJECT:
Mo3- 8803 kontr tCon
Round Rock Fire Station Number Three, Round Rock, Texas
THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
The Contract Documents consist of this Agreement and any Exhibits attached hereto, Conditions of the
Contract (General, Supplementary, and other Conditions), Bidding Documents, Drawings, Specifications,
all Addenda issued prior to execution of this Agreement and all Modifications issued subsequent thereto.
These form the Contract, and all are as fully a part of the Contract as if attached to this agreement or
repeated herein. Unless otherwise specified, definitions set forth in the General Conditions apply to all
other Contract Documents.
II.
THE WORK
The Contractor shall perform all the Work required by the Contract Documents, for: Round Rock Fire
Station Number Three, Round Rock, Texas.
$ 250.00 per day
COMMENCEMENT AND COMPLETION
The Work to be performed under this Contract shall be commenced upon issuance of notice to proceed,
and, subject to authorized adjustments. Substantial Completion for all bid items shall be achieved not
later than 180 consecutive calendar days after the receipt of the notice to proceed.
Should the CONTRACTOR fail to substantially complete the Work an or before the date stipulated for
Substantial Completion (or such latter date as may result from extension of time granted by the OWNER),
he shall pay the OWNER, as liquidated damages, the sum of:
for each consecutive calendar day that terms of the Contract remain unfulfilled beyond the date allowed
by the Contract, which sums are agreed upon, not as a penalty, but as reasonable and proper measures
of damages which the OWNER will sustain per day by failure of the CONTRACTOR to complete all Work
within the time as stipulated; it being recognized by the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR that the injury
to the OWNER, including the lost use of the facilities, attendant disruption to the educational system, and
the extended administrative resources, which could result from a failure of the CONTRACTOR to complete
on schedule, is uncertain and cannot be computed exactly.
Base Bid:
ADDENDA:
OWNER NAME
City of Round Rock
221 East Main Ave.
Round Rock, Texas 78664
(512) 255-3612
$ 358,000.00
Addendum No. 1 of November 5, 1990
Addendum No. 2 of November 12, 1990
Addendum No. 3 of November 26, 1990
By: 011K6 KE f'05I JsON
m 4yoR
8803kcantCon
IV.
CONTRACT SUM
The OWNER shall pay the CONTRACTOR for the performance of the Work, subject to additions and
deductions by Change Order as provided in the Conditions of the Contract, in current funds, the Contract
Sum of:
V.
PAYMENTS
Based upon applications of payment submitted to the Consultant by the CONTRACTOR and Certificates
for Payment issued by the Consultant, the OWNER shall make progress payments on account of the
Contract Sum to the Contract as provided in the Conditions of the Contract as follows:
On or about the first of each month, ninety -five (95 %) percent of the portion of the Contract Sum properly
allocable to labor, materials, and equipment incorporated in the Work, and ninety -five (95 %) percent of
the portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to materials and equipment suitably stored at the site
or at some other location agreed upon in writing by the parties up to ten (10) days prior to the date on
which the application for payment is submitted, less the aggregate of previous payments in each case;
and upon Substantial Completion of the entire Work, a sum sufficient to increase the total payments to
ninety -five (95 %) percent of the Contract Sum, less such retainage as the Consultant shall determine for
all incomplete Work and unsettled claims.
Final payment, constituting the entire unpaid balance of the Contract Sum, shall be paid by the OWNER
to the CONTRACTOR thirty (30) days after Substantial Completion of the Work unless otherwise stipulated
in the Certificate of Substantial Completion, provided the Work has been completed, the Contract fully
performed, and a final Certificate of Payment has been issued by the Consultant.
Any monies not paid when due to either party under the Contract shall bear interest at the legal rate in
force at the place of the PROJECT.
CONTRACTORS NAME
Greater Texas Construction Corporation
Post Office Box 395
Belton, Texas 76513
(817) 939 -5050
PROJECT: Round Rock Fire Station No. 3
Round Rock, Texas
TO: City of Round Rock
221 East Main
Round Rock, Texas 78664
You are directed to make the following changes in this Contract:
Not valid unless signed by both the Owner and Architect. Signature of the Contractor indicates his
agreement herewith, including any adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time.
The original Contract Sum was $ 358,000.00
Net change by previously authorized Change Orders $ 0.00
The Contract Sum prior to this Change Order was $ 358,000.00
The Contract Sum will be decreased by this
Change Order $ 20,000.00
The new Contract including this Change Order will be $ 338,000.00
The Contract Time will be unchanged @ (- 0 -)Days
The Date of Substantial Completion as of the date of this
Change'Order therefore is: unchanged
OPUS 3, Architects
ARCHITECT
106 East Fannin
Address
See Attachment A
Round Rock, Texas 78664
By:
Date: AV,- /
CHANGE ORDER
Opus 3, Architects
Greater Texas Construction City of Round Rock
CONTRACTOR
P.O. Box 395
Address
Belton, Texas 76513
CHANGE ORDER NUMBER: 001
INITIATION DATE: 10 January, 1991
ARCHITECT'S PROJECT NO.: 03 -8903
CONTRACT FOR: General Construction
CONTRACT DATE: Unchanged
OWNER
221 E. Main
Address
Round Rock, Rock, TTeexxas 78664
,
Date: — / 1 � 7 I
CONTRACTOR
BID BOND
ADDENDA
No. 1
ADDENDA
No. 2
ADDENDA
No. 3
BASE BID
ALT. # 1
ALT. # 2
ALT. # 3
Greater Texas Const.
$358,000.00
($7,000.00;
$11,400.00
$4,000.00
Emerson Construction
$369,000.00
($6,200.00)
$11,500.00
$6,600.00
Royce Construction
$397,000.00
$6,325.00
$12,200.00
$2,000.00
Brath Construction
$406,000.00
$8,900.00
$13,300.00
$3,600.00
Jack Sussarrey Const
$423,000.00
$8,100.00
$14,400.00
$6,000.00
W.W. Construction
$428,900.00
$0.00
$14,700.00
$5,000.00
Greenway Constructors
$443,449.00
($6,535.00)
$11,716.00
$4,200.00
Architectural Habitat
$454,657.45
($1,528.00)
$20,860.00
$10,600.00
MAILS aaill •• Ili a
BID TABULATION FOR CITY OF ROUND ROCK
FIRE STATION NUMBER THREE
29 NOVEMBER, 1990
OPUS 3, Architects
03.8903
126 utifit(pvi.
l/ ry05 r v, .. _4. Y 4.,DO
00 00
(� 0�
l e paeio e
- ate
DATE: January 8, 1991
SUBJECT: City Council Meeting, January 10, 1991
ITEM: 13.B. Consider a resolution authorizing the Mayor
to enter into a contract for the construction
of Fire Station #3.
STAFF RESOURCE PERSON: Lynn Bizzell
STAFF RECOMMENDATION:
On Thursday, November 29, 1990 at 2:00 p.m.
the City of Round Rock received bids for
the construction of Fire Station #3. This
station is proposed to be constructed at the
intersection of Old West and Rawhide Drive,
in the Chisholm Valley subdivision. The
station location was established to serve the
southern section of our city, including the
IH35 corridor and many industrial tracts in
this area. Response times to this area will
be improved.
The City received a total of eight (8) bids
on this project. The Greater Texas Construction
Company, from Belton, Texas submitted the
lowest bid of $358,000. Upon reviewing the
bids, the staff proposed to recommend the low
bid of $358,000 to Greater Texas Construction
Company.
The bid proposal should reflect changecorder
#1 for the amount of $342,000. This total was
established through negotiations with the
contractor. This figure includes deductions
that the architect negotiated. Attached you
will find a copy of the deductions.
The following will be the staff's recommendation
for awarding of change order #1.
Original low bid:
Change order #1:
Alternate bid on generator:
Total:
$358,000
$338,000
$ 4,000
$342,000
Total low bid including generator $342,000
Excluding generator $338,000
The architect, general contractor and staff
will be available for questions. The architect
has also checked references on the contractor.